Sale of Goods Act, 1930 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Sale of Goods Act, 1930 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Sale of Goods Act, 1930 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Introduction:

  1. It is one of the special types of contract.
  2. Initially, it was the part of the Indian Contract Act, 1872
  3. Later it was deleted and a separate sale of Goods Act was passed in 1930.
  4. Basic provisions and requirements of contract equally apply to Sales of Goods Act.
  5. It contains and deals with law relating to sale of goods and not with mortgage or pledge.
  6. It received its-assent on 15th March, 1930.
  7. It came into force on 1st July, 1930.
  8. It extends to whole of India except the State of Jammu & Kashmir.

Definition of Various Terms:

  1. Buyer: Person who buys or agrees to buy the goods.
  2. Seller: Person who sells or agrees to sell the goods.
  3. Goods: As per Sec 2(7), it means every kind of movable property Other than actionable claims and money; and includes stock and shares, growing crops, grass and things attached to or forming part of the land which are agreed to be severed before sale or under the contact of sale.
  4. Money means current money and it includes rare and old coins.
  5. Actionable claim means what a person cannot make a present use of or enjoy, but can recover it by means of a suit or an action.

Relevant Case Law:
Rash Behari V. Emperor
M.B. Electric Supply Co. Ltd. V. State of Rajasthan
Sale of Goods Act, 1930 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes IMG 1

  • Existing Goods: It means such goods which are in existence at the time of the contract of sale i.e. owned or possessed by the seller.
  • Specific Goods: It means goods identified and agreed upon at the time the contract of sale has been made.
  • Ascertained Goods: It means that the goods are identified in accordance with the agreement after the contract of sale has been made.
  • Generic / Unascertained Goods: It means the goods which are not specifically identified but are indicated by description.
  • Future Goods: As per Sec. 2(6), it means goods to be manufactured or produced or acquired by the seller after making the contract of sale.
  • Contingent Goods: It means the goods the acquisition of which by the seller depends upon a contingency which may or may not happen.
  • Agreement to sell can only be there in respect of future or contingent goods.
  • Actual sale can take place only in respect of specific goods.
  • Goods are said to be in a deliverable state, when they are in such a condition that the buyer would, under contract, be bound to take delivery of them.
  • Delivery: It means voluntary transfer of possession by one person to another.
  • Document of Title of Goods: It includes bill of lading, dock-warrant, warehouse keeper’s certificate, what finger’s certificate or any other document used in the ordinary course of business as proof of the possession or control of goods or authorising or purporting to authorise either by endorsement or delivery, the possessor of the document to transfer or receive goods thereby represented.
  • Property: It means the general property and not merely a special property.
  • Insolvent: Person is said to be insolvent when he ceases to pay his debts in the ordinary course of business.

Differences between Existing Goods and Contingent Goods:

Existing Goods Contingent Goods
Goods which are physically in existence and at the time of entering into contract, are owned by the seller. Goods, the acquisition of which depends upon the happening of an uncertain contingency.
They can be a subject matter of sale as well as agreement to sell. They are always a subject matter of an agreement to sell.
They can be classified as specific, ascertained or unascertained. They cannot be classified as such.

Differences between Future Goods and Contingent Goods:

Future Goods Contingent Goods
Goods which are yet to be manufactured or produced or acquired by the seller after making the contract. Goods, the acquisition of which by the seller depends upon a contingency which may or may not happen.
Their procurement does not depends upon any such uncertainty. Their procurement is dependent upon uncertain event.
It is always an agreement to sale. It is a contract of sale, the performance of which depends upon the contingency which may or may not happen.
It does not includes contingent goods. It includes future goods.

Contract of Sale:

  • In this ownership is transferred immediately to buyer even though possession of goods is with seller.
    As per Section 4(1) of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930,
  • “Contract of sale of Goods is a contract whereby the seller transfers or agrees to transfer the property in goods to the buyer for a price”.

Essential Elements:

  • There must be atleast two parties. (Bilateral Contracts)
  • The subject matter of the contract must be goods.
  • A price in money should be paid or promised.
  • A transfer of property in goods from seller to the buyer must take place.
  • It must be absolute or conditional.
  • All other essentials of a valid contract must be present.

Sale:
As per Section 4(3) of the Act, “Where under a contract of sale the property in the goods is transferred from the seller to the buyer, the contract is called a sale”.

Agreement to Sell:
As per Section 4 (3) of the Act, “Where under a contract of sale the transfer of the property in the goods is to take place at a future time or subject to some condition thereafter to be fulfilled, the contract is called an agreement to sell”.

Differences between Sale and Agreement of Sell:

Sale Agreement of Sell
It is an executed contract. It is an executory contract.
Property in goods are transferred from seller to buyer when the contract is made. Transfer of property in goods takes place at some future date.
Seller cannot resell the goods as the property is with the buyer. Seller can further resell the goods as the property in good remains with him.
Risks passes to the buyer, as he becomes the owner. Risks is with the seller as he remains the owner.
Performance is absolute without any condition. Performance is conditional and is made in future.
Breach on part of buyer, seller can sue for the price and damages both. Breach on part of buyer, seller can sue for damages only and not for the price.
Breach on part of seller, buyer can compel him to deliver the goods or pay the damages. Breach on part of seller, buyer can sue for damages only and cannot compel him to deliver the goods.
Gives the buyer ‘Just-in-Rem’ i.e. right against the whole world. Gives the buyer “Just-in-Personam” i.e. right against a particular person.
Sale is contract plus conveyance. It is pure and simple agreement.
In this, if goods are destroyed then loss will be of Buyer. In this, if goods are destroyed by accident, loss will fall on seller.

‘Agreement’ to sell becomes sale when the time expires, or the condition, subject to the property in goods is to be transferred, is fulfilled.

Differences between Sale and Bailment:

Sale Bailment
Property in goods is transferred from seller to buyer. There is only transfer of possession of goods from bailor to bailee.
Return of goods is not possible. Bailee must return the goods to bailor on accomplishment of the purpose of bailment.
Consideration is the price in terms of money. Consideration may be gratuitous or non-gratuitous.
Buyer may use the goods in any way he likes. Bailee can use the goods only according to the bailor’s direction.
Any profit accrued in goods sold is the buyer’s property. Any profit accrued on goods bailed is the bailor’s property. This applies only if Goods are Existing Goods.

Differences Between Sale and Contract for Work and Labour:

Sale Contract for Work and Labour
Property in goods is transferred from the seller to the buyer. It is a contract for performing some work and not for transferring the property in goods.
It involves the delivery of goods. It involves exercise of skill and labour in rendering some work. It involves “the uses by means of money consideration”.

Differences Between Sale and Hire Purchase Agreement:

Sale Hire Purchase Agreement
Property in goods is transferred to the buyer immediately at the time of contract. The goods passes to the hirer upon payment of the last installment.
Position of buyer is that of owner of goods. Position of hirer is that of a bailee till he pays the last installment.
Buyer cannot terminate the contract and is bound to pay the price of the goods. Hirer may terminate the contract by returning the goods to owner without any liability to pay the remaining installments.
Seller takes the risk of any loss resulting from the buyer’s insolvency. Owner takes no such risk for if hirer fails to pay the installment, he has the right to take back the goods.
Buyer can pass the goods title to a bonafide purchaser from him. Hirer cannot pass any title even to a bonafide purchaser.
Tax is levied at the time of contract. Tax is not leviable until it eventually turns into sale.

Formalities of Contract of Sale:

  • There may be immediate delivery of goods
  • There may be immediate payment of price, but it may be agreed that the delivery is to be made at some future date.
  • There nay be immediate delivery of the goods and an immediate payment of price.
  • It may be agreed that the delivery or payment or both are to be made in installments.
  • it may be agreed that the delivery or payment or both are to be made at some future date.

Subject Matter of Sale:
As per Sec. 6:

  • Subject matter must always be goods which may be existing or future goods.
  • Contract can also be made with regard to the goods, the acquisition of which by seller depends upon a contingency, which may or may not happen. Such contracts are contingent contracts.
  • When the seller purports by his contract to effect a sale of future goods, the contract will operate only as an agreement to sell the goods and not as sale.

Destruction of Subject Matter of Sale [without the knowledge of seller]
Goods Perishing before Making a Contract (Sec 7):

  • The contract is void ab initio.
  • If seller enters into the contract even on being aware of the destruction, he is estopped from disputing the contract.
  • It also includes the goods that have lost their commercial value.
  • Mutual mistake of the fact essential to the contract renders the contract void.

Goods Perishing after Agreement to Sell (Sec. 8): Without any of the parties fault.

  • Agreement becomes void.
  • Provided the risk has not passed to the buyer.
  • It applies only to sale of specific goods.
  • For Uncertain good sale, the perishing of the whole quantity of such goods in the possession of seller won’t relieve him of his obligation to deliver.

Price:

  • Price means monetary consideration for the sale of goods.
  • It may be money actually paid or promised to be paid.
  • No sale can take place without a price.
  • Only money transactions are valid, no dealing in kind.

Ascertainment of Price
As per Sec. 9 –
1. Price may be:

  • Fixed by a contract.
  • Agreed to be fixed in a manner provided by the contract, or
  • Determined by the course of dealings between the parties.

2. When it cannot be fixed in any of above ways, the buyer is bound to pay a reasonable price to the seller.

3. Generally Market Price would be the Reasonable Price:

As per Sec. 10:

  • Price is to be determined by third party.
  • Where there is an agreement to sell goods on the terms that the price is to be fixed by third party, and he either does not or cannot make such valuation, the agreement will be void.
  • If the third party is prevented by the default of either party from fixing the price, the party at fault will be liable to the damages to the other party who is not at fault.

Stipulation:

  • Before concluding a contract of sale, certain statements are made by the contracting parties.
  • Statement may be stipulation – one by seller on the reliance of which the buyer makes the contract.
  • Statement may not be a stipulation – if it is a mere recommendation by the seller thus, does not give rise to any action.
  • “A stipulation or a representation in a contract of sale with reference to goods which are the subject thereof, may be a condition or a warranty.”

Condition:
“A condition is a stipulation essential to the main purpose of the contract, the breach of which gives rise to a right to treat the contract as repudiated and claim damages.”

Warranty:
“A warranty is a stipulation collateral to the main purpose of the contract, i.e. a subsidiary promise the breach of which give rise to a claim for damages but not a right to reject the goods and treat the contract as repudiated.”

As per Sec. 11:
Stipulation as to time of payment are not the condition unless such an intention appears from the contract.

Differences between Condition and Warranty:

Condition Warranty
It is essential to the main purpose of the contract. It is collateral to the main purpose of the contract.
The aggrieved party can repudiate the contract or claim damages or both in case of breach. The aggrieved party can claim only damages in case of breach.
A breach of condition may be treated as breach of warranty. A breach of warranty cannot be treated as a breach of condition.

Circumstances when Condition may be Deemed as Warranty:

  • Where the buyer himself opts to treat the breach of condition as a warranty.
  • Where the contact is indivisible and the buyer has accepted either the whole goods or any part thereof.
  • Where the fulfillment of any condition or warranty is excused by law by reason of impossibility or otherwise.
    Sale of Goods Act, 1930 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes IMG 2

Express Condition:

  • Condition is expressed when the terms of contract expressly states them.
  • They are agreed upon between the parties at the time of contract and are expressly provided in the contract.
  • It does not negative an implied condition.

Implied Condition:

  • Condition is implied, when the terms are not expressly provided for.
  • They are presumed by law to be present in the contract.
  • They may be neglected or waived by an express agreement.

It Includes:

  • Condition as to title.
  • Condition as to sale by description.
  • Condition as to sale by sample as well as description.
  • Condition as to quality and fitness.
  • Condition as to merchantability.
  • Condition as to sale by sample.
  • Condition as to wholesomeness.

Condition as to title [Sec. 14(a)]:

  • It presumes that the seller has a valid title to the goods.
  • Seller has a right to sell the goods in case of sale.
  • In case of agreement to sell, he will have the right to sell the goods at the time when the property is to pass, unless there is a contract to the contrary.
  • If seller’s title turns out to be defective, the buyer may return the goods to the true owner and recover the price from the seller.

Relevant Case Law:
Rowland V. Divall

Condition as to Sale by Description (Sec. 15):

  • Here, the implied condition is that the goods must correspond with the description.
  • The buyer is not bound to accept and pay for the goods which are not in accordance with the description of goods.
  • The buyer relies for his information on the description of the goods given, by the seller.

Relevant Case Law:
Beale V. Taylor

Condition as to Sale by Sample as well as Description (Sec. 15):
Here, the implied condition is that the bulk of goods supplied must correspond both with the samples as well as with the description.

Relevant Case Law:
Nichol V. Godis

Facts:

  • N agreed to sell oil described as “Foreign refined Rape Oil, warranted only equal to sample”.
  • The goods were equal to sample, but contained a mixture of Hemp Oil.

Decision: The buyer could reject the goods

Condition as to Quality and Fitness [Sec. 16(1)]:
1. Here the implied’condition operates on the fulfillment of following conditions:

  • The buyer requires the goods for a particular purpose which he has made known to the seller.
  • The buyer relies on the skill and judgement of the seller.
  • The seller sells such type of goods.

2. If the goods are bought under a patent or trade name, there is no such condition.

Relevant Case Law:
Priest V. Last

Facts:

  • A purchased a hot water bottle from a chemist.
  • The bottle burst and injufed his wife.

Decision:

  • There was a breach of condition as to fitness.
  • Chemist was liable for refund of price and damages.

Grant V. Australian Knitting Mills.

Condition as to Merchantability [Sec. 16 (2)]:

  • It means that when the goods are bought by description from a seller who deals in such goods, it is implied that goods will be of merchantable quality.
  • It is immaterial, whether the seller is manufacturer or producer or not.
  • It does not operates where the buyer examines the goods prior to the sale and examination ought to have revealed the defects.

Condition as to Wholesomeness:
In case of eatables and other provisions, there is an implied condition of wholesomeness i.e. fit for consumption, other than merchantability.

Condition as to Sale by Sample (Sec. 17):
There is an implied condition that:

  • The bulk shall correspond with the sample in quality,
  • The buyer shall have a reasonable opportunity of comparing the bulk with the sample.
  • The goods shall be free from any defect rendering them unmerchantable, which would not be apparent on reasonable examination of the sample.
    Sale of Goods Act, 1930 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes IMG 3

Express Warranty – It is a warranty which has been expressly agreed on by the parties at the time of contract of sale.

Implied Warranty:
1. It is a warranty which the law presumes that the parties have incorporated it into their contract.

2. It may be excluded by the course of dealings between the parties.

3. It Includes:

  • Warranty as to undisturbed possession.
  • Warranty as to non-existence of encumbrances.
  • Warranty as to dangerous nature of goods.
  • Warranty as to quality or fitness by usage of trade.

Warranty as to Undisturbed Possession [Sec. 14 (b)]:

  • An implied warranty is that the buyer shall have and enjoy the quiet possession of the goods.
  • If buyer is later on disturbed in his possession, he is entitled to sue the seller.

Warranty as to Non-Existence of Encumbrances [Sec. 14 (c)]:

  • An implied warranty is that the goods shall be free from any charge or encumbrance in favour of any third party not declared or known to the buyer before or at the time of entering into contract.
  • If defects are known to the buyer at the time of entering into contract, he is not entitled to ask for any compensation from the seller for discharging f the encumbrance.

Warranty Implied by the Custom or Usage of Trade: [Sec. 16(3)]:
An implied warranty or condition as to quality of fitness for a particular purpose maybe annexed by the usage of trade.

Warranty as to Dangerous Nature of goods:
If goods are dangerous, and the buyer is not aware of such danger, it is implied warranty that the seller should warn the buyer about it else he will be liable for damages caused to the buyer.

Doctrine of “Caveat Emptor”:

  • It means ‘let the buyer beware’ i.e. buyer purchases the goods at his own risks.
  • When the seller display the goods in open market, it is for the buyers to make a proper selection of goods.
  • If the goods turn out to be defective, he cannot hold the seller liable.
  • As per Sec. 16,
  • “Subject to the provisions of this Act, or any other law for the time being in force, there is no implied warranty or condition as to the quality or fitness for any particular purpose of goods supplied under a contract of sale.”

Relevant Case Law:
Ward V. Hobbs.

Facts:

  • Pigs were sold ‘subject to all faults’.
  • These pigs, being infected, caused typhoid to other healthy pigs of the buyer.

Decision: Seller was not bound to disclose that the pigs were unhealthy.

Exceptions to the Doctrine of Caveat Emptor:

  1. Where the buyer makes known to the seller the particular purpose for which goods are required, it is the duty of the seller to supply goods reasonably fit for the purpose.
  2. Where the goods are purchased under its patent name or brand name, there is no implied condition that the goods will be fit for the purpose.
  3. Where the goods are sold by description, there is an implied condition that the goods shall correspond with the description.
  4. Where the goods are bought by description from the seller who deals in those goods, there is an implied condition that the goods shall be of merchantable quality.
  5. Where the goods are bought by same this rule does not apply if the bulk does not correspond with the sample.
  6. Where the goods are bought by sample as well as description, this rule does not apply in case the goods does not corresponds with both.
  7. An implied warranty or condition as to the quality or fitness for a particular purpose may be annexed from trade and if seller deviates from that, this rule doesn’t applies.
  8. Where the seller has made a false representation relating to the goods and the buyer has relied upon it, this rule doesn’t applies.

Passing of Property: [Sec. (18-20)]:
It means passing/transferring of ownership.
If the property has passed to the buyer, the risk in the goods sold is that of buyer and not-of seller, though the goods may still be in the seller’s possession.

Significance of Transfer of Ownership:

  • Risks passes with the ownership.
  • Only owner have proprietary right over the goods. Owner can take action in case of goods being damaged by third party. When there is danger of good by the actions of third party.
  • Seller’s right for price.
  • If buyer/seller is declared insolvent it is necessary to know the party with whom the property in goods is there to know if it can be taken over by official assignee or not.
  • Ownership and possession are two different concepts.

Passing of Property in Specific Goods:
1. It happens as and when the parties intend to pass. The intention must be gathered from the terms of contract of parties and circumstances of the case.
Sale of Goods Act, 1930 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes IMG 4
(i) Where there is a contract for the sale of specific goods not in a deliverable state, i.e. the seller has to do something to the goods to put them in a deliverable state, the property does not pass until that thing is done by seller and buyer has notice of it. (Sec. 21)

(ii) When there is a sale of specific goods in a deliverable state, but seller is bound to weigh, measure, test or do something with reference to the goods for the purpose of ascertaining the price, the property to the goods for the purpose of ascertaining the price does not pass until such act or thing is done and the buyer has notice of it.'(Sec. 22)

Relevant Case Law:
Rugg V. Minett

3. Deliverable state refers to that state in which the buyer would be bound to take the delivery of goods.

4. Fact that the time of delivery or the time of the payment is postponed does not present property from passing at once. (Section 20)

5. If goods are delivered to the buyer “on approval” or “on sale of return” basis:

The property passes to the buyer when:

  • He signifies his approval or acceptance to the seller,
  • He does any other act adopting the transaction,
  • He does not signify his approval or acceptance to the sellen but retains goods beyond a reasonable time.

Rules Relating to Passing of Property in Case of Sale of Unascertained Goods:(Future Goods)

  • The property does not pass until the goods are ascertained.
  • The ascertainment of goods and their unconditional appropriation to the contract are the two pre -conditions for the transfer of property from seller to buyer.
  • Ascertainment of goods is the process by which the goods to be delivered under the contract are identified and set apart.

Sec. 23 : Following conditions must be satisfied –

  • Goods of description mentioned must be produced or obtained.
  • They must be in deliverable state.
  • They must be unconditionally appropriated.

Note: Unconditional Appropriation of Goods is when the seller delivers the goods to the buyer or to a carrier or other bailee for the purpose of transmission to the buyer.

  • The assent of parties may be given either before or after the appropriation.
  • In case of sale of quantity of goods out of a large quantity, property will pass on the appropriation of the specified quantity by one party with assent of the other.
  • The property in goods does not passes if the seller reserves the right of disposal of goods.

The above rule has following two exceptions:

  • If the goods are delivered to a railway administration for carriage by railway, the goods are deliverable to the order of the seller or his agent.
  • If the seller sends bill of exchange along with bill of lading to the buyer for his acceptance, the property in goods does not passes unless he accepts the bill.

Passing of Risks (Sec. 26)
1. The general rule is that “unless otherwise agreed the goods remain at the seller’s risk until the property therein is transferred to the buyer, but when the property therein is transferred to the buyer, the goods are at the buyer’s risk whether delivery has been made or not”.

2. Rule is known as Resperit Demino i.e. the loss falls on the owner.

3. But the parties may agree that risk will pass at the time different from the time when ownership is passed. example – the seller may agree to be responsible for the goods even after the ownership is passed to the buyer or vice versa.

4. Exceptions to the above general rule:

  • If there is agreement between the parties.
  • If the delivery of goods are delayed either due to buyer’s or seller’s default, goods are at risk of party in default.
  • Trade customs.

Relevant Case Laws:
Consolidated Coffee Ltd. V. Coffee Board
Multanmal Champalal V. Shah & Co.

Transfer of Title by Non – Owner
Sec. 27:
The general rule is where goods are sold by a person who is not the owner thereof and who does not sell them under the authority or with the consent of the owner, the buyer acquires no better title to the goods than that the seller had.”

This rule is expressed in the Latin maxim “Nemo dat quod non habet” which means that no one can give what he has not got. i.e. no one can pass a better title than he himself has-

Example : A finds ring of B sell it to C, who purchase it in good faith. So true owner B can have it from C.
Even a bonafide buyer gets no valid title.

Exceptions to the above rule:

  • Effect of estoppel.
  • Sale by a mercantile agent.
  • Sale by joint owner.
  • Sale by person in possession under a voidable contract.
  • Sale by seller in possession after sale.
  • Sale by buyer in possession after sale.
  • Sale by an unpaid seller.
  • Sale by person under other laws.

Sec. 27: Effect of Estoppel – Where the owner is estopped by the conduct from denying the seller’s authority to sell, the transferee will get a good title as against the true owner.

Sec. 27: Sale by a Mercantile Agent – Buyer will get a good title in following cases:

  • If he was in possession of goods or documents with the owner’s consent.
  • If the sale was made by him when acting in the ordinary course of business.
  • If buyer had acted in good faith.
  • At the time of contract, buyer had no notice of the fact that seller has no authority to sell,

Sec. 28: Sale by a Joint Owner (Co-owner) –

  • If one of the several joint owners,
  • Who is in the sole possession of the goods by the permission of other co-owners,
  • Sell the goods,
  • Buyer gets a good title to the goods,
  • If done in good faith.

Sec. 29: Sale by a Person in Possession Under a Voidable Contract –
A buyer acquires a good title if goods are sold to him by seller having possession under a voidable contract, provided it has not been rescinded until the time of sale.

Sec. 30: Sale by seller in possession after sale –

  • If the seller continues to be in possession of goods or document of title,
  • he pay sell it to a third person,
  • If such person obtains the delivery in good faith and without notice of previous sale,
  • He would have good title to them.

Sec. 30: Sale by Buyer in Possession after Sale –

  • Where the buyer with the seller’s consent,
  • Obtains possession of goods before property in them has passed to him,
  • he may sell it to the third party,
  • third party obtains goods in good faith, and without notice of the lien,
  • he would get a good title to them.

Sec. 54(3): Sale by an Unpaid Seller –

  • When an unpaid seller,
  • Who has exercised his right of lien or stoppage in transit,
  • Resells the goods,
  • Buyer acquires a good title as against the original buyer.

Sale by person under other laws:
1. A finder of goods has the power to sell the goods under certain circumstances also called “Quasi Contract”.

2. Sale of goods pledged by pawnee conveys goods title to buyer if:

  • Pawner or pledger makes default
  • Pawnee has given reasonable notice to pawnor.

3. Sale by official receiver, official assignee, receiver or liquidator coveys goods title to buyer.

Delivery: (Section 33-39)

  • It means voluntary transfer of possession from one person to another.
  • It is the duty of seller to deliver the goods.
  • Buyer’s duty is to accept the goods and pay for them in accordance with the contract.
    Sale of Goods Act, 1930 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes IMG 5

Rules Regarding Delivery:
1. It should have the effect of putting the buyer in possession.

2. Effect of Part Delivery: Part Delivery of goods, taking place in the course of whole delivery, has the same effect for the purpose of passing the property in such goods as whole delivery.

3. Buyer to Apply for Delivery: Seller is not bound to deliver the goods until the buyer has applied for it, unless otherwise agreed.

4. Place for Delivery: If there is no contract to the contrary –
(a) Goods must be delivered at place where they are at the time of sale.

(b) Goods agreed to be sold are required to be delivered at the spot at which they were lying at the time of entering into agreement to sell.

(c) If at the time of agreement to sell, goods are not in existence, goods are to be delivered at a place while they would be manufactured or produced.

5. Time of Delivery: When the time of delivery of goods has not been fixed by the parties, the seller must send them within a reasonable time.

6. Goods in Possession of a Third Party: When at the time of sale, the goods are in the possession of third person, the effective delivery takes place when such person acknowledges to the buyer that he has held the goods on buyer’s behalf.

7. Time for.Tender of Delivery: Demand or tender of delivery may be treated as ineffective unless made at a reasonable hour.

8. Expenses for Delivery: Expenses of putting the goods in deliverable state must be borne by seller and expenses of receiving the goods are borne by buyer.

9. Seller must deliver the goods according to contract.

10. If goods are to be delivered at a place other than they are, the risk of deterioration in transit will be borne by buyer.

Delivery of Wrong Quantity:

  • Short Delivery: Buyer may either accept the goods and pay for it at a contract rate or reject it.
  • Excess Delivery: Buyer may accept or reject the delivery. If he accepts the whole of it, he shall pay for them at the contract rate.
  • Mixed Delivery: Buyer may accept the relevant goods and reject the rest or reject the whole.

11. Installment Deliveries: Unless otherwise agreed, buyer is not bound to accept delivery in installments.

12. Suits for Breach of Contract: Where the property in the goods has passed to the buyer, the seller may sue him for the price.

  • Where the price is payable on certain day regardless of delivery. The seller may sue him for price.
  • Where the seller wrongfully neglects or refuses to deliver the goods to the buyer, the buyer, may sue him for damages for non-delivery.

Acceptance of Delivery:
Acceptance is “deemed” to take place when the buyer –

  1. Intimates to the seller that he had accepted the goods.
  2. Does any act to the goods, which is inconsistent with the ownership of seller.
  3. Retains the goods after the lapse of reasonable time, without intimating to seller that he has rejected them.

Breach and Repudiation Anticipatory Breach:
Where either party to a contract of sale repudiates the contract before the date of delivery, the other party may either treat the contract as still subsisting and wait till the date of delivery, or he may treat the contract as rescinded and sue for damages for the breach.

The party who had originally repudiated will not be deprived of:

  • his right of performance on the due date (in spite of his prior repudiation); or
  • his right to set up any defense for non-performance which might have actually arisen after the date of the prior repudiation.

Measure for damages:
The act does not specifically provide for rules as regards the measure of damages except by stating that nothing in the Act shall affect the right of the seller or the buyer to recover interest or special damages in any case were by law, they are entitled to the same [Section 73 of Indian Contract Act will apply].

  • The contract is for delivery of goods in stated installments, which are to be separately paid for.
  • Breach of contract may be committed by either buyer or seller.
  • It depends upon terms of contract and circumstances of each case, whether:
    (i) Breach is a repudiation of the whole contract, or
    (ii) A severable breach only giving rise to a claim for damages.

Unpaid Seller:
As per Sec. 45,
Seller is deemed to be an unpaid seller, when:
(i) Whole of the price has not been paid or tendered and seller had an immediate right of action for the price.

(ii) A bill of exchange or other negotiable instrument was given as payment, but the same has been dishonoured, unless this payment was an absolute and not a conditional payment.

Rights of Unpaid Seller Against Goods:

  • Right of lien or retention.
  • Right of stoppage in transit.
  • Right of resale.
  • Right to withhold delivery.

Right of Lien or Retention (Sec. 47 – 49 & 54)
Sec. 47:
1. It can be exercised on the goods for the price while he is in possession until the payment of price of such goods. It can be exercised in following cases:

  • Where goods have been sold without any stipulation as to credit.
  • Where goods have been sold on credit but the term of credit has expired.
  • Where buyer becomes insolvent.

2. This right depends upon physical possession,

3. It can only be exercised for the non-payment of price.

Sec. 49:
This right is terminated under following circumstances:

  • Where he delivers goods to carrier or bailee for the purpose of transmission to buyer without reserving the disposal right.
  • Where buyer or his agent lawfully obtains possession of goods.
  • Where seller has waived the right of lien.
  • By estoppel.

Right of Stoppage in Transit (Sec. 50 – 52)
1. Sec. 50:

2. It means right to stop the further transit of goods, to resume possession and to hold the same till the price is paid.

3. It can be exercised in following cases:

  • Seller must be unpaid.
  • He must have parted with the possession of goods.
  • Goods are in transit.
  • Buyer has become insolvent.
  • Right is subject to provisions of the Act.

4. Insolvent here means that a person has ceased to pay his debts in the ordinary course of business or cannot pay his debts as they become due.

Sec. 51:
Goods are deemed to be in transit from the time they are delivered to carrier or other bailee for transmission, until buyer or his agent takes delivery of them.

Sec. 51:
This right is lost under following cases:

  • Buyer taking delivery
  • Acknowledgment by carrier
  • Delivery to ship
  • Wrong denial to deliver by carrier
  • Sub sale
  • Goods in possession of ship’s master acting as buyer’s agent.

If buyer rejects he goods and carrier or bailee continues to be in its possession, the transit does not ends, even if seller refuses to receive them back.

Sec. 52(1): It may be exercised by:

  • Taking actual possession of goods, or
  • Giving notice of his claim to carrier/bailee who hold the goods.

Sec. 53: It is not effected by any sale or other disposition of goods made by buyer, unless the seller has assented to it.

Right of Resale (Sec. 54)
1. It can be exercised in following cases:

  • Where the goods are of perishable nature, buyer need not be informed of the intention of resale.
  • Where he gives notice to the buyer of his intention to resell the goods, the buyer does not within a reasonable time pay or tender the price.
  • Where the right is expressly reserved in the contract.

2. If no notice has been given to the buyer of intention to re-sell, unpaid seller cannot claim any damages and buyer will be entitled for all profits.

3. Unpaid seller can recover from buyer the balance amount (if any) on re¬sale.

4. If notice has been given to buyer, then profits origin out of sale of goods won’t be shared with buyer. Only seller will hold the samples.

Rights to Withhold Delivery:

  • It is exercised if the property in goods has not passed to the buyer.
  • It is in additions to above 3 rights.
  • However if the property has not been passed the unpaid seller has a right of with holding delivery similar to and co-extensive with his rights of lien and stoppage in transit.

Rights of Unpaid Seller Against Buyer:

  • Suit for price.
  • Suit for damages for non-acceptance.

Suit for Price (Sec. 55):
Seller may sue –

  • Where the property has passed to the buyer and he wrongfully neglects or refuses to pay for goods.
  • Where the property has not passed and price is payable on a certain day irrespective of delivery and buyer wrongfully neglects or refuses to pay such price.

Suit for Damages for Non-Acceptance (Sec. 56):
The seller may sue the buyer for non-acceptance, where he wrongfully neglects or refuses to accept and pay for the goods.

Auction Sales (Sec. 64):

  • It is a mode of selling property by inviting bids publically and the property is sold to the highest bidder.
  • It is a public sale where goods are offered to be taken by bidders.
  • Auctioneer is only an agent of seller.

Following rules apply –

  1. When goods are put up for sale in lots, each lot is treated to be the subject of a separate contract of sale.
    Sale is complete when the auctioneer announces its completion by fall of hammer or in another customary manner.
  2. Right to bid may be reserved expressly by or on behalf of seller.
  3. If such right is not reserved, it is not lawful for the auctioneer knowingly to take any bid from seller.
  4. Sale may be notified to be subject to a reserve or upset price.
  5. If seller makes use of pretended bidding to raise the price, sale is voidable at the buyer’s option.

Trading Contracts Involving Rail or Sea Transit:

  • These contracts are made when goods are to be shipped by sea.
  • Under this various conditions are attached to the contract by parties, or by custom and practice of merchants.

It includes:

  1. Free On Board (F. O. B.)
  2. Free On Rail (F. O. R.)
  3. Cost Insurance & Freight (C. I. F. or C. F. I.)
  4. Ex-Ship.

Free On Board (F. O. B.):

  • Under this contract, it is the seller’s duty to put the goods on board at his own expense.
  • As soon as they are put on board, the ownership along with the risk, passes to the buyer.
  • Seller must notify the buyer immediately when the goods are put on board.
  • If seller fails to do so, goods will be at seller’s risks. Buyer must get them insured on receipt of notification.

Free on Rail (F. O. R.):
Similar to F. O. B.

Cost Insurance and Freight (C. F. I. or C. I. F.):

  • It refers to a contract of insured goods.
  • Seller bears both the expenses of putting the goods on board as well as the freight and insurance charges.
  • Proper documents have to be transferred.
  • On receiving the documents, buyer has to first pay and then, take delivery.
  • Buyer can reject the goods, if they are not according to the contract.

Ex-Ship:

  • Seller is required to arrange for shipment of goods till such inland destination as the buyer indicates.
    Goods travel at seller’s risks.
  • Seller is not bound to insure them.
  • Buyer is not bound to pay for them unless they are ready for unloading from the ship and all freight charges are paid.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
The objective of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930 is to define and amend the law relating to ________.
(a) Sale of Immovable Properties
(b) Sale of Goods
(c) Agreements to Sell
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(b) Sale of Goods

Question 2.
The Sale of Goods Act, 1930 extends to the whole of India, except the state of ________.
(a) Maharashtra
(b) Jammu and Kashmir
(c) Tamilnadu
(d) Uttar Pradesh.
Answer:
(b) Jammu and Kashmir

Question 3.
The Sale of Goods Act, 1930 came into force in ________.
(a) 1st day of July, 1930
(b) 1st day of September, 1930
(c) 1st day of January, 1930
(d) 31st day of December, 1930.
Answer:
(a) 1st day of July, 1930

Question 4.
The unrevealed provisions of the Act shall continue to apply to contracts for the sale of goods, save insofar as they are inconsistent with the express provisions of the Sale of Goods Act.
(a) Transfer of Property Act
(b) Indian Evidence Act
(c) Indian Contract Act
(d) Partnership Act.
Answer:
(c) Indian Contract Act

Question 5.
The term “Goods” is defined in section of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930.
(a) 2(5)
(b) 2(6)
(c) 2(7)
(d) 2(8).
Answer:
(c) 2(7)

Question 6.
Which of the following are not included in the term “Goods” under the Sale of Goods Act ________.
(a) Stock and Shares
(b) Actionable Claims
(c) Growing Crops, Gross etc.
(d) Personal Use of Property.
Answer:
(b) Actionable Claims

Question 7.
Transfer of Actionable claim(s) is governed by the provisions of the Sale of Goods Act ___________.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(c) False

Question 8.
“Jubilee Coins” are goods within the meaning of Section 7 of the Sale of Goods Act ___________.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) True

Question 9.
Under the Sale of Goods Act, “Goods” means goods which are not in existence at the time of making the contract of Sale.
(a) Ascertained Goods
(b) Future Goods
(c) Specific Goods
(d) Perishable Goods
Answer:
(b) Future Goods

Question 10.
To constitute a valid sale, there must be atleast ___________.
(a) One Party
(b) Two Parties
(c) Three Parties
(d) Four Parties.
Answer:
(b) Two Parties

Question 11.
When goods are given by the buyer as consideration for the goods received from the seller it is called ________.
(a) Sale
(b) Agreement to sell
(c) Barter
(d) Bailment.
Answer:
(c) Barter

Question 12.
In an Agreement to sell, the property in goods is transferred in ___________.
(a) Past
(b) Present
(c) Future
(d) There is no transfer to property at all.
Answer:
(c) Future

Question 13.
“Contract of Sale” under section 4 of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930 comprises of ___________.
(a) Both executory and executed contracts of sale
(b) Executory contract of sale
(c) Executed contract of sale
(d) Concluded contract of sale.
Answer:
(a) Both executory and executed contracts of sale

Question 14.
In an agreement to sell, where goods lie with the Seller, the risk of loss of goods remains with ___________.
(a) Either Buyer or Seller
(b) Buyer only
(c) Seller only
(d) Buyer and Seller to the extent of their shares.
Answer:
(c) Seller only

Question 15.
Where goods are not specific and ascertainable at the time of the making of the contract, it shall ___________.
(a) become void
(b) become voidable at the option of the buyer
(c) operate as an agreement to sell
(d) become a valid contract of sale.
Answer:
(a) become void

Question 16.
Section 8 of the Sale of Goods Act, dealing with goods perishing before sale, in its application is ___________.
(a) Confined to contact of sale
(b) Confined to agreement to sell
(c) Either (a) or (b)
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(a) Confined to contact of sale

Question 17.
Under Sec. 8 of the sale of Goods Act, 1930 a contract of sale of goods can be avoided where the goods have perished / damaged ___________.
(a) Due to the fault neither of the Buyer nor the Seller
(b) Due to the fault of the Buyer
(c) Due to the fault of the Seller
(d) Due to the fault of either the Buyer or the Seiler.
Answer:
(c) Due to the fault of the Seller

Question 18.
In a contract of sale, the price may be ___________.
(a) Fixed by the contract
(b) Agreed to be fixed in a manner thereby agreed
(c) Determined by course of dealings between the parties
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) All of the above.

Question 19.
The prima facie evidence of a “Reasonable Price” u/s 9 of the Sale of Goods Act, is ………………..
(a) Market Price
(b) Current price
(c) Price as determined by the court
(d) Reuse Price.
Answer:
(a) Market Price

Question 20.
Under Section 11 of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930 the time of payment can be of the essence of the contract ___________.
(a) by agreement between the parties
(b) by operation of law
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) either (a) or (b).
Answer:
(a) by agreement between the parties

Question 21.
Condition or warranty in a contract of sale, constitutes stipulation with reference to ___________.
(a) Time
(b) Price
(c) Goods
(d) Delivery.
Answer:
(c) Goods

Question 22.
A “Warranty” under the Sale of Goods Act, has been defined as a stipulation ___________.
(a) Collateral to the main purpose of the contract
(b) With regard to time
(c) Essential to the main purpose of the contract
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(a) Collateral to the main purpose of the contract

Question 23.
The breach of a “Condition” in a contract of sale of goods give the right to ___________.
(a) Repudiate the contract
(b) Claim for damages only
(c) Either (a) or (b)
(d) Both (a) and (b).
Answer:
(d) Both (a) and (b).

Question 24.
In cases where there is a breach of condition by the seller, the buyer ___________.
(a) May retain the goods though he has the right to reject them
(b) Has no right to retain the goods but only to reject the goods
(c) Has no right to reject the goods
(d) Has no remedy at all.
Answer:
(a) May retain the goods though he has the right to reject them

Question 25.
The Buyer shall have and enjoy quiet possession of the goods. This is an : u/s 14 of the Act.
(a) Implied Warranty as to Title
(b) Implied Condition as to Title
(c) Implied Warranty as to Possession
(d) Implied Condition as to Possession.
Answer:
(c) Implied Warranty as to Possession

Question 26.
In case of sale by description, there is an implied ………………. that the goods shall correspond to description.
(a) Warranty
(b) Condition
(c) Stipulation
(d) Description
Answer:
(b) Condition

Question 27.
In a sale of goods by description, it is sufficient that the goods are ___________.
(a) Fit for the purpose for which they were wanted though not in accordance to description.
(b) Merchantable though not in accordance to description
(c) Wholesome, even if they do not correspond to description
(d) The same as that of their description
Answer:
(d) The same as that of their description

Question 28.
Implied condition as to quality or fitness does not apply if ___________.
(a) Buyer discloses to the seller, the exact purpose for which goods are required.
(b) Buyer indicates to the seller that he relies on the seller’s skill or judgement
(c) Seller’s business is to sell goods of such description
(d) Buyer reserves the right to examine the goods and check its quality
Answer:
(d) Buyer reserves the right to examine the goods and check its quality

Question 29.
Implied condition as to merchantable quality applies to sale of goods ___________.
(a) Under a patent or other trade name
(b) By description only
(c) Either (a) or (b)
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(a) Under a patent or other trade name

Question 30.
The principle of “Caveat Emptor” as found in Sec 16 of the Sale of Goods Act, means that the ___________.
(a) Let the Buyer be aware
(b) Buyer must take a chance
(c) Seller must take care
(d) Seller must take a chance
Answer:
(a) Let the Buyer be aware

Question 31.
In case of goods, property passes to the buyer, only when the goods are ascertained.
(a) Future
(b) Specific
(c) Contingent
(d) Unascertained
Answer:
(d) Unascertained

Question 32.
The process of identifying the goods and setting apart as per the intended quality or description is called ___________.
(a) Identification
(b) Procurement
(c) Ascertainment
(d) Allocation
Answer:
(c) Ascertainment

Question 33.
In a sale of specific or ascertained goods the property there in is transferred to the buyer ___________.
(a) Upon delivery of goods
(b) Upon payment of price
(c) At such time as the parties intend it to be transferred
(d) At such time as decided by the court
Answer:
(c) At such time as the parties intend it to be transferred

Question 34.
For passing of property in respect of specific or ascertained goods, the interaction of the parties can be ascertained from ___________.
(a) Terms of the contract
(b) Conduct of the parties
(c) Circumstances of the case
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 35.
For passing of property in goods, the goods should be in a ___________.
(a) Deliverable state
(b) Non-deliverable state
(c) Consumable state
(d) Ready state
Answer:
(a) Deliverable state

Question 36.
Where the goods are to be delivered in future and the seller becomes insolvent before any appropriation is made, the property in goods passes to the buyer and the buyer acquires interest in the goods.
(a) True
(b) Partly true
(c) False
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) False

Question 37.
Delivery of goods to the carrier for the purpose of transmission to the buyer automatically means that the property in goods vest in the buyer,
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) True

Question 38.
In cases of goods sent on approval basis, the goods are at the if they perish in an inevitable accident.
(a) Buyer’s Risk
(b) Seller’s Risk
(c) Combined Risk of Buyer and Seller
(d) Carrier’s Risk
Answer:
(b) Seller’s Risk

Question 39.
Risk prime facie passes with-
(a) Property or ownership
(b) Completed agreement
(c) Verification and delivery
(d) Payment of price
Answer:
(a) Property or ownership

Question 40.
The Latin Maxim “Nemo Dat Quod non Habet” means ___________.
(a) No man can pass a better title than he has
(b) Let the Buyer beware
(c) No consideration – No contract
(d) Ignorance of law is no excuse
Answer:
(a) No man can pass a better title than he has

Question 41.
A finder of goods has the power to sell the goods to give good title to the buyer, if the owner of goods cannot be found with-
(a) Ordinary diligence
(b) Reasonable diligence
(c) Due diligence
(d) Lack of diligence
Answer:
(b) Reasonable diligence

Question 42.
In case of a company under liquidation, and sale is made by the Receiver or Liquidator of the company ___________.
(a) Company retains title in goods
(b) Buyer gets a good title to goods
(c) Receiver/ Liquidator gets a goods title to goods
(d) There is no sale at all
Answer:
(b) Buyer gets a good title to goods

Question 43.
When the seller causes a change in the possession of goods without any change in their actual and visible custody, it is a case of ___________.
(a) Actual Delivery
(b) Constructive Delivery
(c) Symbolical Delivery
(d) Forward Delivery
Answer:
(b) Constructive Delivery

Question 44.
Where the seller is bound to send the goods to the buyer as per the agreement, and there is no specific time limit goods shall be delivered within ___________.
(a) A suitable time
(b) A minimum time
(c) Adequate time
(d) A reasonable time
Answer:
(d) A reasonable time

Question 45.
In case of excess delivery, i.e. more than the contracted quantity, the Buyer can ___________.
(a) Reject in full
(b) Accept the contract quantity and reject the excess
(c) Accept the whole
(d) Either (a) or (b) or (c)
Answer:
(d) Either (a) or (b) or (c)

Question 46.
Where the seller fails to give notice to the buyer u/s 39(3), the risk during sea-transit lies with the ___________.
(a) Buyer
(b) Seller
(c) Carries
(d) Insurer
Answer:
(b) Seller

Question 47.
Unless otherwise agreed, where goods are delivered to buyer and he refuses to accept them (having the right to do so), the buyer is not bound to return them to the seller.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) True

Question 48.
Even if a substantial portion of the price is paid and only a small balance is pending, the seller is still regarded as an unpaid seller.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) True

Question 49.
The right of lien is available to the unpaid seller only when ___________.
(a) he is not in possession of the goods
(b) he is in possession of the goods
(c) he has delivered the goods to the carrier/transport
(d) he has delivered the goods to the buyer
Answer:
(b) he is in possession of the goods

Question 50.
Once possession is lost, right of lien of the unpaid seller is also lost. This statement is ___________.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) True

Question 51.
Right of stoppage in transit can be exercised by the unpaid seller, where the buyer ___________.
(a) Is solvent
(b) Becomes insolvent
(c) Either (a) or (b)
(d) Neither (a) nor (b)
Answer:
(b) Becomes insolvent

Question 52.
Goods – in – transit can be stopped for ___________.
(a) Price
(b) Any other expenses, e.g. Godown charges, Interest, etc.
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Either (a) or (b)
Answer:
(a) Price

Question 53.
If no notice is given to the original buyer of the intention to re-sell, the unpaid seller ___________.
(a) Cannot claim any damages
(b) Has to pay to the original buyer, the profits, if any, on re-sale
(c) Either (a) or (b)
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(a) Cannot claim any damages

Question 54.
Generally, where the buyer has paid the price and seller refuses to deliver the goods, buyer can sue the seller for ___________.
(a) Specific performance of the contract
(b) Delayed delivery of goods
(c) Refund of price already paid
(d) Non – acceptance of goods
Answer:
(c) Refund of price already paid

Question 55.
In the case of ……………… the sale may be notified to be subject to a reserve or upset price.
(a) Sale by description
(b) Sale by auction
(c) Sale by sample
(d) Sale by estoppel
Answer:
(b) Sale by auction

Question 56.
The main object of a contract of sale is-
(a) Transfer of possession at goods
(b) Transfer of property in goods from seller to buyer
(c) Delivery of goods
(d) Payment of price Answer:
Answer:
(b) Transfer of property in goods from seller to buyer

Question 57.
Following is not the right of an unpaid seller against the goods:
(a) Lien
(b) Right of resale
(c) Right of stoppage
(d) Claim damages
Answer:
(d) Claim damages

Question 58.
Sales of Goods Act is a to contract act.
(a) Competent
(b) Substitute
(c) Complimentary
(d) All of these
Answer:
(c) Complimentary

Question 59.
Which of the following is/are an essential elements of a valid contract that must be present in a Contract of Sale.
(a) Bilateral Contract
(b) Transfer of Property
(c) Money Consideration
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 60.
An agreement to sale is a/an contract while a sale is a/an ………………… contract
(a) Valid; legal
(b) Executory; valid
(c) Executory; executed
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Executory; executed

Question 61.
Delivery is the ………………. transfer of possession from one person to another
(a) Property
(b) Voluntary
(c) Goods
(d) Involuntary
Answer:
(b) Voluntary

Question 62.
If the Goods are to be delivered at a place other than where they are, the risk of deterioration in transit will unless otherwise agreed be borne by the ……………….
(a) Buyer
(b) Seller
(c) Transporter
(d) (a) & (b) both
Answer:
(a) Buyer

Question 63.
In the right of lien, the possession is retained by …………………
(a) Paid seller
(b) Unpaid buyer
(c) Unpaid seller
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Unpaid seller

Question 64.
Unenforceable agreements and illegal agreements means one and the same thing.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) False

Question 65.
The relation between a doctor and a patient is fiduciary in nature.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(a) True

Question 66.
In sale by auction, goods are offered to be taken by ___________.
(a) Buyer
(b) Bidders
(c) Public
(d) Sellers
Answer:
(b) Bidders

Question 67.
Acceptance of the goods by the buyer takes place when the buyer ___________.
(a) Intimates to the seller that he has accepted the goods.
(b) Retains the goods
(c) Does any act on the goods which is inconsistent
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 68.
A document signed by a carrier and issued to consignor that provides evidence for the receipt of goods for shipment to a specified designation and purpose is known as _____________.
(a) Transporter’s receipt
(b) Bill of loading
(c) Carrier document
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Bill of loading

Question 69.
…………….. takes place when the person takes possession of the goods on behalf of and at the disposal of the buyer.
(a) Physical delivery
(b) Simple delivery
(c) Encumbrance delivery
(d) Constructive delivery
Answer:
(d) Constructive delivery

Question 70.
………….. precludes a person from ascertaining something contrary to what is implied by his or her previous actions or statement or by a previous judicial determination concerning that person.
(a) Voluntary
(b) Estoppel
(c) Both (a) & (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Estoppel

Question 71.
If the stipulation forms the very basis of the contract or is essential to the main purpose of contract, it is ___________.
(a) Guarantee
(b) Warrantee
(c) Encumbrance
(d) Condition
Answer:
(d) Condition

Question 72.
Goods which are either owned or possessed by the seller at the time of contract—
(a) Specific Goods
(b) Contingent Goods
(c) Generic Goods
(d) Existing Goods
Answer:
(d) Existing Goods

Question 73.
Goods to be manufactured or acquired by the seller after making the contract of sale ___________.
(a) Contingent Goods
(b) Future Goods
(c) Existing Goods
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Future Goods

Question 74.
Which of the following is not an implied condition in a contract of sale ___________.
(a) Condition as to title
(b) Condition as to description
(c) Condition as to freedom from encumbrance
(d) Condition as to sample
Answer:
(c) Condition as to freedom from encumbrance

Question 75.
The condition and warranties may be in the form of ___________.
(a) Express
(b) Implied
(c) Either (a) or (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Either (a) or (b)

Question 76.
An unpaid seller is having rights against ___________.
(a) Goods only
(b) The buyer only
(c) Both Goods & buyer
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Both Goods & buyer

Question 77.
The doctrine of Caveat Emptor does not apply when ___________.
(a) The goods are bought by sample
(b) The goods are bought by sample as well as description
(c) The goods are purchased under its brand name
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 78.
The essence of a right of lien is to ___________.
(a) Deliver the goods
(b) Retain the goods
(c) Regain the possession
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Retain the goods

Question 79.
Seller has right of resale where ___________.
(a) Goods are perishable
(b) Seller has reserved such right
(c) Seller gives notice
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 80.
The Goods are at risk of a party who has the ___________.
(a) Ownership of goods
(b) Possession of goods
(c) Custody of goods
(d) Both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(a) Ownership of goods

Question 81.
The position of the hirer is that of a ___________.
(a) Bailor
(b) Bailee
(c) Seller
(d) Buyer
Answer:
(b) Bailee

Question 82.
Under this contract, it is the seller’s duty to put the goods on board at his own expenses ___________.
(a) Free on board
(b) Sales of Goods Act, 1930
(c) Contract Act 1872
(d) Free on ship
Answer:
(a) Free on board

Question 83.
A finder of goods has the power to sell the goods to give good title to the buyer, if the owner of the goods cannot be found with ___________.
(a) Ordinary diligence
(b) Reasonable diligence
(c) Due diligence
(d) Lack of diligence
Answer:
(b) Reasonable diligence

Question 84.
The main object of contract of sale is ___________.
(a) Payment of price
(b) Delivery of goods
(c) Transfer of possession of goods
(d) Transfer of property
Answer:
(c) Transfer of possession of goods

Question 85.
A breach of warranty can be treated as a breach of condition.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Either True or False
Answer:
(b) False

Question 86.
Goods perishing after agreement to sell ___________.
(a) Agreement becomes invoidable
(b) Agreement becomes void
(c) Agreement becomes contract
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Agreement becomes void

Question 87.
In sale, consideration is the price in terms of ___________.
(a) Money
(b) Non-gratuitous
(c) Gratuitous
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Money

Question 88.
When goods are exchanged for goods, it is a ___________.
(a) Sale
(b) Agreement to sale
(c) Barter
(d) Bailment
Answer:
(c) Barter

Question 89.
An agreement to sell is ___________.
(a) Executory contract
(b) Executed contract
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Executory contract

Question 90.
When the contract of sale is executed, the loss of goods destroyed by fire is to be borne by ___________.
(a) The buyer only when he has the goods in his custody
(b) Seller
(c) Both by the buyer and the seller
(d) The buyer even if he does not have the custody of the goods
Answer:
(d) The buyer even if he does not have the custody of the goods

Question 91.
Which one of the following statement is not true in context to a hire purchase agreement?
(a) The hirer is merely a bailee until the final payment
(b) There is an agreement to buy the goods at the end of the period
(c) The owner can take back the goods if the buyer becomes insolvent
(d) The ownership remains vested with the bailer
Answer:
(b) There is an agreement to buy the goods at the end of the period

Question 92.
Where a contract states that the price is to be fixed by a third party and such party fails to do so, then ___________.
(a) The contract becomes void
(b) The price is determined by both the parties
(c) The contract is voidable at the option of the parties
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) The contract becomes void

Question 93.
Mr. A purchased a certain pigs from Mr. B without any warranty. After sometime the pigs died due to fever, then ___________.
(a) Mr. A can claim back his money from Mr. B
(b) Mr. A can ask Mr. B to supply new pigs
(c) Mr. A can sue Mr. B on account of fraud
(d) Mr. B is not liable to Mr. A as per the principle of Caveat Emptor
Answer:
(d) Mr. B is not liable to Mr. A as per the principle of Caveat Emptor

Question 94.
Mr. A finds a ring which belongs to Mr. C and sells it to Mr. B. Later on Mr. C demands the ring from B, then ___________.
(a) B is not liable to return the ring
(b) C can only sue Mr. A for damages and cannot demand the ring from Mr. B
(c) Mr. B shall return the ring to Mr. C even though he is a bona-fide purchaser
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Mr. B shall return the ring to Mr. C even though he is a bona-fide purchaser

Question 95.
Where the seller after selling the goods holds the goods as a bailee, then it is called as ___________.
(a) Symbolic delivery
(b) Bailed delivery
(c) Nominal delivery
(c) Constructive delivery
Answer:
(c) Nominal delivery

Question 96.
Where the seller gives the buyer the bills of lading then, it is called as ___________.
(a) Symbolic delivery
(b) Constructive delivery
(c) Actual delivery
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Symbolic delivery

Question 97.
Which of the following rights is not a right of an unpaid seller?
(a) Right of retention
(b) Right of stoppage
(c) Right of resale
(d) Right to sell the property of the buyer
Answer:
(d) Right to sell the property of the buyer

Question 98.
The term C.I.F. stands for ___________.
(a) Cartage Inwards and Freight
(b) Corporate Identity Form
(c) Cartage Insurance and Freight
(d) Cost Insurance and Freight
Answer:
(d) Cost Insurance and Freight

Question 99.
The contract in which the seller is bound to arrange the shipment of goods is called as ___________.
(a) Ex-ship contract
(b) Cum-ship contract
(c) Pre-shipment contract
(d) Post shipment contract
Answer:
(a) Ex-ship contract

Question 100.
In an auction sale, if the seller makes use of pretended bidding to raise the price, then the ___________.
(a) Sale is voidable at the option of the seller
(b) Sale is void
(c) Sale is voidable at the option of the buyer
(d) The buyer is not required to pay the excess amount charged by the seller
Answer:
(c) Sale is voidable at the option of the buyer

Question 101.
Which of the following is an implied condition under a sale by description?
(a) Goods must correspond with the description
(b) Goods must be of merchantable quality
(c) Condition as to wholesomeness
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 102.
Which of the following is an implied condition under a sale by sample?
(a) The bulk shall correspond with the sample
(b) Implied condition of merchantability
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Neither (a) nor (b)
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 103.
Subject to the contract to the contrary, which of the following is NOT an implied warranty as per the Sale of Goods Act, 1930?
(a) Warranty as to resale of the goods
(b) Warranty implied by the custom as usage of trade
(c) Warranty to disclose dangerous nature of goods
(d) Warranty as to freedom from encumbrances
Answer:
(a) Warranty as to resale of the goods

Question 104.
As per Sec. 45 of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930 an unpaid seller is a person, who ___________.
(a) Who has not been paid the whole price
(b) A person who received a bill of exchange which was dishonoured
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Neither (a) nor (b)
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 105.
The right of an unpaid seller to keep the possession of the goods and refuse to deliver the goods to the buyer is called ___________.
(a) Right of refusal
(b) Right to resale
(c) Right of lien
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Right of lien

Question 106.
The right of lien will not be lost in which of the following cases ___________.
(a) By waiver of lien by the unpaid seller
(b) When the goods are delivered to the carrier and the seller reserves the right of disposal of goods
(c) When the buyer lav/fully obtains the possession of the goods
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) When the goods are delivered to the carrier and the seller reserves the right of disposal of goods

Question 107.
In which of the following case, the transit will not come to an end?
(a) When the buyer obtains the delivery before they arrive at the destination
(b) Where the carrier acknowledges that he holds the goods on the behalf of buyer
(c) When the carrier wrongfully refuses to deliver the goods
(d) When the goods are rejected by the buyer and the carrier holds them
Answer:
(d) When the goods are rejected by the buyer and the carrier holds them

Question 108.
The right to stop the goods in transit can be exercised by the unpaid seller by ___________.
(a) Taking actual possession of the goods
(b) Giving notice of the sellers claim to the carrier
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Neither (a) nor (b)
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 109.
Right to lien can be exercised by the seller ___________.
(a) On non-payment of the sale price
(b) On breach of warranty
(c) On anticipatory breach
(d) All of the above Answer:
Answer:
(a) On non-payment of the sale price

Question 110.
The doctrine of ‘Caveat Emptor’ does not apply when :
(a) The goods are bought by sample
(b) The goods are bought by description from a seller who deals in goods of that description
(c) The goods are purchased under its brand name
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) The doctrine of ‘Caveat Emptor’ means ‘let the buyer beware’.
Following are the cases when doctrine of ‘Caveat Emptor’ does not apply:

  • When the seller makes a false representation.
  • When the goods are purchased under its patent name or brand name.
  • When the goods are bought by description from a seller who deals in goods of that description there is an implied condition that the goods shall be of merchantable quality.
  • When the goods are bought by sample.
  • When the goods are sold by description.

Thus, the answer is all of the above.

Question 111.
The actual sale of future goods is:
(a) Never possible
(b) Possible
(c) Illegal
(d) Only a myth.
Answer:
(b) Future goods means goods to be manufactured or produced or acquired by the seller after making the contract of sale. Thus, under the sale of goods Act, a contract of sale of future goods is possible.

Question 112.
Finder of lost goods is in a position of:
(a) Bailor
(b) Owner
(c) Pawner
(d) Bailee.
Answer:
(d) In contract of bailment the bailee must return the goods to the owner or bailor.

Question 113.
The goods which are either owned or possessed by the seller at the time of the contract are known as:
(a) Generic goods
(b) Future goods
(c) Existing goods
(d) Contingent goods.
Answer:
(c) Such goods as are in existence at the time of the contract of sale i.e. those owned or possessed by the seller is known as Existing goods.

Question 114.
A stipulation which is collateral to the main purpose of the contract and provides the buyer only right to claim the damages is known as:
(a) Condition
(b) Guarantee
(c) Warrantee
(d) Agreement to sell.
Answer:
(c) A condition is a stipulation essential to the main purpose of the contract, the breach of which gives right to repudiate the contract and claim damages is known as warrantee.

Question 115.
In case of an agreement to sell, ownership to goods remains with:
(a) The buyer
(b) The seller
(c) Both the buyer and the seller
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(b) In the sale of goods, the property is transferred from seller to the buyer immediately. But in an agreement to sell the ownership of the goods is not transferred immediately. Thus, an agreement to sell, ownership to goods remains with the seller.

Question 116.
In case of sale of goods, the title of goods remains with:
(a) Seller
(b) Buyer
(c) Hirer
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(b) In Case of sale of goods, the property is transferred from seller to the buyer. Therefore in case of sale of goods the title of goods remains with buyer.

Question 117.
A contract of sale of goods under Section 4 of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930 comprises of:
(a) Executory contract of sale
(b) Executed contract of sale
(c) Both executory and executed contracts of sale
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(c) According to Section 4, a contract of sale of goods is a contract whereby the seller:

  • transfers or agrees to transfer the property in goods.
  • to the buyer.
  • for a money consideration called the price.

It shows from the above that “contract of sale” includes both a sale (Executed contract of sale) and an agreement to sell (Executory contract of sale).

Question 118.
An unpaid seller of goods has a right:
(a) Against the buyer only
(b) Against both the buyer and the goods
(c) Against the goods only
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(b) An unpaid seller of goods has a right against the buyer personally (rights in personam) as well as against the goods (rights in rem).

Question 119.
Which of the following gives a right to claim damages for its breach?
(a) Conditions
(b) Warranties
(c) Both (A) and (B) above
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(c) “A condition is a stipulation essential to the main purpose of the contract, the breach of which gives a right to treat the contract as repudiated and claim damages.” “A warranty is a stipulation collateral to the-main purpose of the contract, the breach of which gives rise to a claim for damages but not a right to reject the goods and treat the contract as repudiated.” Thus, both condition and warranty gives a right to claim damages for breach.

Question 120.
As per the Sale of Goods Act, 1930, ‘goods include,
I Existing goods
II. Future goods
III. Contingent goods
IV. Actionable claims
Correct option is –
(a) I, II and III
(b) II, III and IV
(c) I, II and IV
(d) I, II, III and IV
Answer:
(a) As per Sec. 2(7) of Sales of Goods Act, goods mean every kind of movable property other than actionable claims and money, and includes stock and shares, growing crops, grass and things attached to contract of sale.

Moreover, goods are of following types –

  • Existing Goods
  • Specific Goods
  • Ascertained Goods
  • Unascertained Goods
  • Future Goods
  • Contingent Goods.

Thus, goods include I, II and III point except actionable claim. So, the answer is I, II and III.

Question 121.
Which of the following maxim means ‘No one can pass a better title than he himself has’?
(a) Caveat emptor
(b) Nemo dat quod non habet
(c) Res integra
(d) Sine die.
Answer:
(b) As per Section 27 of Sales of Goods Act, “ where goods are sold by a person who is not the owner thereof and who does not sell them under the authority or with the consent of the owner, the buyer acquires no better title to the goods than that of the seller.”

This rule is expressed is Latin maxim, “Nemo dat quod non habet” which means that no one can give what he has not got.

Question 122.
The doctrine of “Caveat Emptor” implies ________.
(a) Let the buyer beware
(b) Let the seller beware
(c) Let the buyer be brave
(d) Let the seller be brave
Answer:
(a) The doctrine of “caveat emptor” means ‘let the buyer beware’ i.e. buyer purchases the goods at his own risks.

Hence, the doctrine of “caveat emptor” means let the buyer beware.

Question 123.
When does a seller becomes an unpaid seller?
(a) When half of the price has not been paid.
(b) When the full amount has not been paid.
(c) When 25% amount has not been paid.
(d) When 75% amount has not been paid.
Answer:
(b) As per Section 45 of Sale of Goods Act, seller is deemed to be an unpaid seller when:

  • Whole of the price has not been paid or tendered and seller had an immediate right of action for the price.
  • A bill of exchange or any other negotiable instrument was given as payment but the same has been dishonoured, unless this payment was absolute and not a conditional payment.

Hence, option (b) is correct.

Question 124.
Which of the following is conducted under Sales of Goods Act?
(a) Goods
(b) Contract
(c) Sales
(d) Partnership
Answer:
(c) The Sale of Goods Act, 1930 deals with the ‘sale’ but not with ‘mortgage’ or ‘pledge’ Thus, it can be sold that only sales is conducted under Sales of Goods Act.

Question 125.
Which is not an implied condition?
(a) Condition as to title
(b) Condition as to wholesomeness
(c) Condition as to Encumbrances
(d) Condition as to sale by sample
Answer:
(c) Implied Conditions are as follows:

  • Condition as to title
  • Sale by description
  • Sale by sample
  • Sale by sample as well as by description
  • Condition as to quality or fitness
  • Condition as to wholesomeness

Thus, Condition as to Encumbrance is not an implied condition.

Question 126.
Seller means a person who:
(a) Sells or agrees to sell goods
(b) Has sold goods
(c) Sells goods
(d) Agrees to sell goods.
Answer:
(a) According to Sec. 4, a contract of sale of goods is a contract whereby the seller;

  • transfers or agrees to transfer the property in goods.
  • to the buyer
  • for a money consideration called the price.

Question 127.
The unpaid seller may exercise his right of stoppage of goods in transit:
(a) By taking actual possession of the goods .
(b) By giving notice of his claim to the carrier
(c) By giving notice of his claim to the bailee in whose possession the goods are
(d) All applicable.
Answer:
(d) The right to stop in transit may be exercised by the unpaid seller by taking actual possession of the goods or by giving notice of the seller’s claim to the carrier or other person having control of the goods. So, option d is the correct answer, i.e. All applicable.

Question 128.
Right of stoppage can be exercised when:
(a) When seller has not been paid the amount of goods and service
(b) When the buyer has becomes insolvent.
(c) Both of the above
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) The right of stoppage in transit is exercisable by the seller only if the following conditions are fulfilled –

  • seller must be unpaid
  • must have parted with the possession of goods
  • The goods must be in transit
  • The Buyer must have become insolvent
  • The right is subject to provision of the Act.

Thus, it contain both (a) & (b) condition. Hence, option c is Correct.

Question 129.
Right of lien is exercised for:
(a) Retaining the possession
(b) Regaining the possession
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Stoppage in transit
Answer:
(a) The word ‘lien’ means a right to retain possession. An unpaid seller, who is in the possession of the goods, is entitled to retain them until payment or tender of the price.

Question 130.
A seller transfers possession of the goods already being sold in good faith:
(a) Valid
(b) Voidable
(c) Void
(d) Invalid
Answer:
(a) Where a seller, after having sold the goods, continues or is in possession of the goods or of the documents of title of goods again sells them to a person who buys in good faith gets good title and makes the sale valid.

Question 131.
Which of the following is not a mercantile agent?
(a) Factor
(b) Salesman
(c) Auctioneer
(d) Brokers
Answer:
(b) Salesman is not a mercantile agent as in the customary course of business as such agent authority either to sell goods or consign goods for the purpose of sale, or to buy goods, or to raise money on the security of goods.

Question 132.
Under what circumstances the unpaid seller can exercise right of resale:
(a) When the goods are very expensive
(b) When the buyer has not paid in terms of the contract does not specify about resale
(c) When he gives notice to the buyer of his intention to resale and the buyer does not within reasonable time pay the price
(d) When the buyer does not pay on demand.
Answer:
(c) The unpaid seller can exercise right of resale when he gives notice to the buyer of his intension to resale and the buyer does not within reasonable time pay the price. It is in case of exercise of right of lien or stoppage in transit.

Question 133.
In a hire purchase contract the hirer:
(a) Is not given the possession of goods
(b) Must buy the goods
(c) Has an option to buy the goods
(d) Must return the goods
Answer:
(c) In a hire purchase contract, it gives the hirer an option to purchase the goods at the end of the hiring period. Consequently, until the final payment, the hirer is merely a bailee of goods and ownership t remain vested in the bailor.

Question 134.
Actual sale of future good is:
(a) Illegal
(b) A myth
(c) Impossible
(d) Possible through an agreement to sell
Answer:
(d) Future goods means goods to be manufactured or produced or acquired by the seller after making the contract of sale, as contract of sale covers saie and agreement to sell both, hence option (d) is correct.

Question 135.
The Sale of Goods Act, 1930 deals with:
(a) Pledge
(b) Guarantee
(c) Mortgage
(d) Sale
Answer:
(d) The Sale of Goods Act, 1930 deals with Sale and Agreement to sell.

Question 136.
In an agreement to sell, the seller in case of damages to good ________.
(a) Can sue the buyer for injunction
(b) Has no recourse
(c) Can sue for price
(d) Can sue for damages
Answer:
(b) In an agreement to sell, the seller in case of damage to goods has no recourse as, he is the owner who have to bear the loss and who cannot sue for damages and in this case the goods are in possession of seller and the ownership also lies with the seller.

Question 137.
Which of the following is not a mercantile agent?
(a) Brokers
(b) Salesman
(c) Auctioneers
(d) Factor
Answer:
(d) The term Mercantile agent includes any person who is authorised to sell on behalf or seller. Eg: Broker, Salesman, Auctioneers.

Question 138.
Contract of sale means:
(a) A contract between one person to another for exchange of property in goods
(b) Contract between two persons only
(c) A contract between buyer and seller for exchange of property in goods
(d) A contract between buyer and seller intending to transfer property in goods for price
Answer:
(d) A contract of sale of Goods means contract between buyer and seller who agree to transfer the property in goods to the buyer for a price. In this the ownership is immediately transferred to buyer even though possession of goods is with seller. Hence, option (d) is correct.

Question 139.
An auction sale is complete on the ________.
(a) Fall of hammer
(b) Delivery of goods .
(c) On the bid being made
(d) Payment of price
Answer:
(a) It is a mode of selling property by inviting bids publically and the property is sold to the highest bidder. Under this sale is complete when the auctioneer announces its completion by the fall of hammer or in another customary manner.

Question 140.
Which is not true in case of a finder of goods?
(a) He can sell the goods if the goods are of perishable nature
(b) He cannot sell the goods in any condition
(c) He can retain the goods till the owner is found
(d) If the owner is found, but the owner refuses to pay lawful charges, then he can retain the goods until payment is received.
Answer:
(b) The statement (b) is incorrect because the finder of cost good can sell the goods if they are of perishable nature.

Question 141.
The difference between sales and cost of goods sold is:
(a) Gross margin
(b) Principal
(c) Revenue
(d) Income
Answer:
(a) Gross Margin = Sales – Cost of Goods Sold

Question 142.
Actual sale of future goods is:
(a) Possible through an agreement to sell
(b) Illegal
(c) Impossible
(d) A myth
Answer:
(a) Agreement to sell a commodity in future. Thus, we can conclude that actual sale of future goods is possible through agreement to sell.

Question 143.
The unpaid seller may exercise his right to stoppage of goods in transit:
(a) By taking actual possession of the goods
(b) By giving notice of his claim to the carrier
(c) By giving notice of his claim to the bailee in whose possession the goods are
(d) All are applicable
Answer:
(d) The unpaid seller may exercise right of lien on goods in transit by:

  • taking Actual Possession
  • giving notice of his claim to carrier
  • giving notice to Bailee who is in possession of goods.

Question 144.
The Phrase Quantum meruit literally means:
(a) As much as earned or reasonable remuneration
(b) The fact in itself
(c) A contract for sale
(d) As much as is gained.
Answer:
(a) Breach of Contract done in many ways and their remedies can claim also in many ways like:

  • Injunction
  • Quantum Meruit
  • Damages
  • Specific Performance

‘Quantum Meruit’ is a latin Phrase which means-‘as much as merited/ earned’ or ‘reasonable remuneration;

Question 145.
A Contract of sale of goods under Section 4 of the Sale of Goods Act, 1930. Comprises of ________.
(a) Executory contract of sale
(b) Executed contract of sale
(c) Both executory and executed contracts of sale
(d) None of the Above.
Answer:
(c) A contract of Sale of Goods Act, 1930 comprise of both ‘Executed and Executory Contracts of Sale’.
Executed Contract of Sale means when both parties performed their obligations at the same time. Example. Cash Sales. Executory Contract means when one party performed and other party not or it can be possible that both parties do not perform their . obligations in present but at future date.

Question 146.
An unpaid seller of goods has a right ________.
(a) Against the buyer only
(b) Against both the buyer and the goods
(c) Against the goods only
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(b) Unpaid Seller of Goods has right against the both the Goods and the Seller.

Question 147.
Selling follow which rule?
(a) Caveat Emptor
(b) Caveat Vendor
(c) Both (i) & (ii)
(d) None
Answer:
(a) Selling follow the rule of Caveat Emptor which suggest let the buyer be ware.

Question 148.
Caveat Vendor is related to:
(a) Selling
(b) Marketing
(c) Both
(d) None.
Answer:
(b) Caveat Vendor is related to Market, suggest let the seller be ware.

Question 149.
Which of these never treated as money?
(a) Gold Rare coins
(b) Currency coins
(c) Negotiable notes and bills
(d) Tender money
Answer:
(a) Gold rare coins are never be treated as money.

Question 150.
Agreement to sell; ownership is of:
(a) Buyer
(b) Seller
(c) Buyer if agreed by both the parties
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) In agreement to sell ownership is always possessed by seller, if no agreement in contrary is made.

Question 151.
In case of agreement to sell, liability of seller in case of breach of agreement:
(a) Seller has to pay damage, if found guilty
(b) If breached by buyer, Nominal sum of goods deposited would be seize, also claim damages accordingly
(c) (a) and (b) both
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) In case of agreement to sell, breach of contract:

  • breach by seller: buyer can claim damages
  • breach by buyer: seize the money received for goods and claim damages (if any)

Question 152.
As per the sales of Goods Act, 1930, ‘goods’ include:
I. Existing goods
II. Future goods
III. Contingent goods
IV. Actionable claims Correct option is:
(a) I, II and III
(b) II, III and IV
(c) I, II and IV
(d) I, II, III and IV
Answer:
(a) As per Section 2(7) of Sales of Goods Act, goods means every kind of movable property other than actionable claims and money and includes stock and shares, growing crops, grass and things attached to contract of sale. Moreover, goods are of following types:

  • Existing goods
  • Specific goods
  • Ascertained goods
  • Unascertained goods
  • Future goods
  • Contingent goods.

Thus, goods include I, II and III point except actionable claims. So the answer is option (a).

Question 153.
Which of the following maxim means “No One can pass a better title than . he himself has”?
(a) Caveat emptor
(b) Nemo dat quod non habet
(c) Res integra
(d) Sine die.
Answer:
(b) “Nemo det Quod non Habet” means no one can pass a better title than he himself have.

Question 154.
Which of the following gives a right to claim damages for its breach?
(a) Conditions
(b) Warranties
(c) Both (a) and (b) above
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) “A condition is a stipulation essential to the main purpose of contract, the breach of which given right to treat the contract as repudiated and claim damages”. “A warranty is a stipulation collateral to the main purpose of the contract, the breach of which gives rise to claim for damages but not a right to reject the goods and treat the contract as repudiated”.

Thus, option (c) is correct.

Question 155.
As per Sales of Goods Act, 1930, a sale means:
(a) Sale and Agreement to Sale
(b) Only Cash Sale
(c) Only Credit Sale
(d) (b) and (c) both
Answer:
(a) As per Section 4(1) of the Sales of Goods Act, 1930,” contract of sales of goods is a contract whereby the seller transfers or agrees 2. to transfer the property in goods to the buyer for a price”. Thus sale means sale and agreement to sell.

Question 156.
In Sales of Goods Act, what is involved?
(a) Sales
(b) Mortgage
(c) Pledge
(d) Indemnity
Answer:
(a) The law relating to sale of goods is contained in Sale of Goods Act, 1930. According to section 4, a contract of sale of goods is a contract whereby, the seller transfers or agrees to transfer the property in goods to the buyer, for the money consideration called the price.

Question 157.
Unpaid a seller can exercise ________.
(a) Stop page in transit
(b) Lien
(c) Right of resale
(d) All of above.
Answer:
(d) The Sales of Goods Act, 1930 provides, the unpaid seller the following rights against the goods:

  • A lien or right of retention
  • The right of stoppage in transit
  • The right of resale.
  • The right to with old delivery.

Question 158.
Type of Lien:
(a) General and Particular
(b) Particular and Specific
(c) Specific or Particular
(d) General of Specific
Answer:
(a) The right of lien is exercised by the unpaid seller by keeping the goods in possession and refuse to deliver them to the buyer until the fulfillment of or tender of price. The right of lien is of two types:

  • General lien
  • Particular lien

Question 159.
The Sale of Goods Act, 1930 contains:
(a) Services only
(b) Manufacturing goods only
(c) All movable goods
(d) None of Above
Answer:
(a) The Sales of Goods Act, 1930 provides in Section 4, a contract of sale of goods is a contract whereby the seller transfers or agrees to transfer the property in form of goods.to the buyer for money consideration called price. There, the goods include all kind of movable property other than actionable claims and money.

CS Foundation Business Environment and Law Notes

Elements of Company Law – II – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Elements of Company Law – II – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Elements of Company Law – II – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Authorities under the Companies Act, 2013:

  1. Registrar of Company (RoC)
  2. Official Liquidator
  3. Regional Director
  4. National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT)
  5. National Company. Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT)

Number of Directors:

Company Minimum Maximum
Private 2 15
Public 3 15
One Person Company 1 1

Women Director – Conditions for Women Director:
Women director is described under Section 149(1) of Companies Act, 2013.
Elements of Company Law – II – CS Foundation Business Law Notes IMG 1

Introduction:

  1. Activities of companies are carried out by persons known as directors.
  2. Meetings are the set pattern of process according to which the company’s work.
  3. Company Secretary is one of the officers responsible for the legal compliance of the company.
  4. Company Secretary is the bridge between Board and shareholders.

Meaning of Directors:

  1. Company is an artificial legal person, thus cannot act on its own.
  2. Directors are the persons who are entrusted with the charge of management of company’s affairs.
  3. The Directors are the brain of the company.
  4. They occupy the pivotal position in the structure of the company.
  5. They are collectively known as Board of Directors or Board.
  6. The position of BOD is that of trust as the board is entrusted with the responsibility to act in the best interests of the company.
  7. The actions and deeds of directors individually functioning cannot bind the company, unless a particular director has been specifically authorised by a Board resolution to discharge certain responsibilities on behalf of the company.
  8. As per Section 2(10), “BOD” or “Board” in relation to a company, means the collective body of the directors of the company.
  9. These decisions are taken by directors at the meetings known as Board Meetings.
  10. Decisions at meetings are taken by majority votes.
  11. In case of equal number of votes, chairman has the casting votes.

As per Companies Act, 2013:

  • Every company shall hold first Board Meeting within 30 days of the date of Incorporation.
  • Every company to hold a minimum number of 4 Board Meetings every year in such a way that not more than 120 days shall intervene between 2 consecutive Board meetings.

Definition of Director:

  • As ppr Section 2(34) of Companies Act, 2013, states ‘director’ means a director appointed to a Board of a company.
  • He is appointed to perform the duties and functions of director of a company in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013.

Number of Directorship: (Section 165):

  • Maximum no. of directorships, including any alternate directorship a person can hold is 20.
  • It has come with a rider that number of directorships in public companies/ private companies that are either holding or subsidiary company of a public Company shall be limited to 10.

Residence of Director in India (Section 149 (3)) – Every company has atleast one director, who has stayed in India for a total period of not less than 182 days in the previous calendar year.

Independent Directors:

  • Section 2 (47) of the Companies Act, 2013, prescribed that “Independent Director” means an independent director referred to in sub – section (5) of Section 149 of the Act.
  • It means a director other than a MD or whole-time director or nominee director who does not have any material or pecuniary relationship with the company/directors.

Under Section 149(6), following criteria have been laid down:
(i) Who in the opinion of the Board, is a person of integrity and possesses relevant industrial expertise and experience.

(ii) He must not have any material or pecuniary relationship during two immediately preceding financial years or during the current financial year either with company or its promoters/directors/holding/ subsidiary/associate company.

(iii) He must possess such other qualifications prescribed in Rule 5 of Companies (Appointment and Qualification of Directors) Rules, 2014.

(iv) He should not be a promoter or related to promoter of company or its holding, subsidiary or associate company.

(v) Relatives of such person should not have had any pecuniary relationship with company or its subsidiaries, amounting to:

  • 2% or more of its gross turnover or total income, or
  • ₹ 50 Lakh or such higher amount as prescribed whichever is less, during immediately two preceding financial years or in current financial year.

(vi) He must not either directly or any of his relatives
1. hold or has held the position of a key managerial personnel or is or has been employee of the company or its holding, subsidiary or associate company in any of the three financial years, immediately preceding financial year in which he is proposed to be appointed.

2. is or has been an employee or proprietor or a partner in any of the three financial years immediately preceing the financial year in which he is proposed to be appointed, of:

  • a firm of auditors or company secretaries in practice or cost auditors of the company or its holding, subsidiary or associate company; or
  • any legal or a consulting firm that has or had any transaction with the company, its holding, subsidiary or associate company amounting to 10% or more of the gross turnover of such firm.

3. is a Chief Executive or Director by whatever name called of any non-profit organisation that receives 25% or more of its receipts from the company, any of its promoters, directors or its holding, subsidiary or associate company or that holds 2% or more of the . total voting power of the company, then also he is not eligible for office of independent director.

4. holds together with his relatives two percent or more of the total voting power of the company.

5. Every listed public company shall have at least 1/3rd of total number of directors as independent directors. (Fraction is to be rounded off to one)

6. CG has prescribed that public companies with:

  • paid up capital of ₹ 10 crore or more, or
  • turnover of ₹ 100 crore or more or
  • In aggregate outstanding loans/borrowings/debentures/deposits exceeding ? 50 crore or as on the last date at latest audited financial statements shall have at least 2 independent directors.

Any investment vacancy in the office of the independent director shall be filled by BOD

  • within 3 months from date of such vacancy, or
  • not later than immediate next Board meeting, whichever is later.

Independent Directors:
Conditions:
Elements of Company Law – II – CS Foundation Business Law Notes IMG 2

Directors Elected by Small Shareholders:

  • As per Section 151, Every listed company may have one director elected by such Small Shareholders.
  • “Small Shareholder” means a shareholder holding shares of nominal value of not more than ₹ 20,000 or such other sum as may be prescribed.

Amendment of Section 164 – In Section 164 of the Principal Act,:
(i) in sub-section (2), the following proviso shall be inserted, namely : Provided that where a person is appointed a director of a company which is in default of clause (a) or clause (b), he shall not incur the disqualification for a period of six months from the date of his appointment;

(ii) in sub-section (3), for the proviso, the following proviso shall be inserted, namely : Provided that the disqualifications referred to in clause (d), (e) & (g) of sub-section (1) shall continue to apply even if the appeal or petition has been filed against the order of conviction or disqualification.

Who can be Appointed as a Director:

  • Only individual can be appointed as a director.
  • Companies Act has not prescribed any academic or professional qualifications for directors.
  • Unless company’s Articles contain a provision regarding share qualification, a director need not be a member of company even.

Who Cannot be Appointed as a Director/Disqualifications:
1. As per Section 164 of Companies Act, 2013, a person cannot be appointed as a director of a company, if:

  • he has been found by a competent Tribunal to be of unsound mind.
  • he is an undischarged insolvent,
  • he has applied to be adjudicated as an insolvent and his application is pending.
  • he has been convicted by a Tribunal of any offence involving moral turpitude and sentenced in respect
  • there of to imprisonment for not less than 6 months, and a period of 5 years has not elapsed from the date of expiry of the sentence.
  • he has failed to pay any call on his shares in the company for 6 months from the date fixed for the payment.
  • he has been disqualified by a court which empowers the court to restrain fraudulent persons from managing companies.
  • he has not got the DIN
  • he is already a director of a public company, which:
  • has not filed the annual accounts and annual returns for any continuous 3 financial years, commencing on and after the first day of April 1999 or
  • has failed to repay its deposits or interests thereon on due date or redeem its debentures on due date or pay dividend and such failure continues for 1 year or more.
  • he has been convicted of the offence dealing with related party transaction under Section 188 of Companies Act, 2013 at any time during the last five years.

2. Such director shall be disqualified to be appointed or re-appointed as director of any other public company for 5 years from the date on which such public company in which he is a director above (a) and (b) have done.

3. CG may remove the disqualification incurred by any person by virtue of (iv) or (v) above.

4. A private company, may, by its Articles provide for additional disqualifications.

5. No body corporate, association or firm can be appointed as a director.

6. Thus, only individual can be appointed as a director.

7. No company can appoint or re-appoint any individual as a director unless he has been allotted a DIN-Director’s Identification Number under section 154.

Amendment of Section 153: “Provided that CG may prescribe any identification number which shall be treated as DIN for the purpose of this Act and in case any individual hold or acquire such identification number, the requirement of this section shall not apply or apply in such as may be prescribed”.

Number of Directors: [Section 149(1)]:

  • Every public company shall have at least 3 directors.
  • Private company should have at least 2 directors and one director in case of one person company.
    Articles may prescribe the maximum and minimum number of directors.
  • Increase in number of directors beyond the maximum permitted by articles has to be approved by passing SR, in general meeting provided the number exceeds 15.
  • Approval of CG is not required even if number of directors exceed 15.
  • Every listed company and every other public company having paid up capital of 100 crores or more or turnover of 300 crores or more as on the last date of latest audited financial statements, shall appoint at least one woman director.
  • Every company shall have atleast one director who is resident of India, i.e. who has stayed in India for a total period of not less than . 82 days in previous calendar year.

Amendment of Section 149 : “Provided that in case of newly incorporated as the requirement under this sub-section shall apply proportionally at the end of the financial year in which it is incorporated”.
Elements of Company Law – II – CS Foundation Business Law Notes IMG 3

Rotational Directors Non-Rotational
1. Rule : Atleast (2/3) directors should be rotational directors.

2. They are also known as temporary directors.

3. All (2/3) directors are not retire all at once. They are retire in proportion of (1/3).

4. Those directors are retired first who are admitted first.

1. Atleast (1/3) directors should be non-rotational directors.

2. They are also known as fixed directors.
example: Mukesh Ambani

Note: When the directors are retiring from the post, their retirement can be cancelled by voting of members.

Appointment of Directors:

  1. Every director shall be appointed by the company in general meeting.
  2. Director Identification Number is compulsory for appointment of director, of a company.
  3. Every person proposed to be appointed as a director shall furnish his DIN and a declaration that he is not disqualified to become a director under the Act.
  4. A person appointed as a director shall on or before the appointment give his consent to hold the office
  5. of director.

Their appointment can be dealt under following points:

  1. Appointment of first directors
  2. Appointment at general meeting
  3. Appointment by Board of Directors

Appointment of first Directors:
(i) First directors of most of companies are named in their articles.

(ii) If articles do not provide, the subscribers to memorandum, who are individuals, shali be deemed to be first directors until the directors are duly appointed.

(iii) in case of one person company, an individual being a member shall be deemed to be its first director until the director(s) are duly appointed by the member in accordance with the provisions of Section 152 of the Companies Act, 2013.

Appointment at general meeting:
(i) As per Section 152, in case of public company or a private company which is a subsidiary of a public company:

  • Unless the Articles provide for the retirement of all directors at every AGM, at least 2/3rd of the total number of directors must be persons whose period of office is liable to be determined by rotation and eligible to be reappointed at AGM.
  • Out of rotational directors, 1/3 of such rotational directors shall retire at each Annual General Meeting (fraction nearest to 1).

(ii) Retiring directors shall be those who have been longest in office since their last appointment.

(iii) Vacancies caused are filled by the shareholders by appointment in same AGM by means of majority vote (Section 152)

(iv) The director appointed can either be the retiring director or some other person.

(v) If any person, other than retiring director, wishes to stand for directorship, he must signify his intention to dd so by giving 14 days notice to the company before the general meeting (Section 160)

(vi) If vacancy is not filled up and meeting has not expressly resolved not to fill the vacancy, meeting shall stand adjourned till the same day in next week, at the same time and place, or if that day is a national holiday till the next succeeding day, which is not a holiday, at the same time and place.

(vii) If at the adjourned meeting also, vacancy of the retiring director is not filled up and that meeting also has not expressly resolved not to fill the vacancy, the retiring director shall be deemed to have been re appointed, unless:

  • a resolution for the re-appointment of such director has been put and lost,
  • he is not qualified or is disqualified for appointment,
  • retiring director has expressed his unwillingness to be re-appointed,
  • appointment of directors is to be voted individually, or –
  • a resolution, ordinary or special, is required for his appointment or re-appointment.
    Elements of Company Law – II – CS Foundation Business Law Notes IMG 4

Circular Resolution:
It is a letter in which the ‘consent’ of all the members are taken. Only ‘Yes’ and ‘No’ decisions are taken through ‘Circular Resolution’.

Note : Important decisions are hot taken through circular Resolution.

Appointment by Board of Directors:
(i) They have a power to appoint directors in 3 cases:

  • Additional Directors
  • Filling up the Casual Vacancy
  • Alternate Directors

(ii) Additional Director [Section 161 (i)]:

  • Board has such power only if authorised by its Articles
  • Total Number of Director including these additional shall not exceed the Maximum Number fixed by the Articles
  • They hold office-only upto the date of next AGM or the last date on which AGM should have been held, whichever is earlier.

(iii) Filling up the Casual Vacancy [Section 161(4)]:

  • it means vacancy caused in the office of director appointed by shareholders in the genera! meeting and caused by death, resignation, insolvency or disqualification.
  • The person appointed holds office for the entire period for which the person in whose place he was appointed would have held office.

(iv) Alternate Director [Section 161(2)]:

  • Board has such power if authorised by Articles or a resolution has been passed by company in general meeting.
  • He is appointed to act for a director during his absence for a period of not less than 3 months form the state in which meetings of the board are ordinary held.
  • He shall vacate the office when the original director returns. Amendment of Section 161

In Section 161 of the Principal Act:
(i) in sub-section (2), after the words “alternate director ship for any other director in the company”, the words “or holding directorship in the same company” shall be inserted;

(ii) in sub-section (4):

  • the words “in the case of public company”, shall be omitted.
  • after the words “Meeting of the Board”, the words “which shall be subsequently approved by members in the immediate next general meeting” shall be inserted.

Duties of Director (Section 166):

  • Exercise his duties with due and reasonable care, skill and diligence and exercise independent judgement.
  • Not to assign his office and any assignment so made shall be void.
  • Act in good faith in order to promote company’s objects for benefit of its members, and best interest of company, its employees, shareholders, community and environment protection.
  • Not to involve in any situation in which he has a direct or indirect interest which conflict with company’s interests.
  • Act in accordance with AOA of company.
  • Not to achieve or attempt to achieve any undue gain or advantage, either to himself or his relatives, partners or associate. He will be liable to pay an amount equal to that gain to the company, if he is found guilty.
  • If any director contravenes any of the above provision, he shall be punishable with fine from ₹ 1,00,000 to ₹ 5,00,000.

Power of Board of Directors (Section 179):
1. The BOD of a company shall be entitled to exercise all such powers and to do all such acts and things, as the company is authorised to exercise and do.

2. Exercise of power is subjected to various provisions of Companies Act, 2013, MOA, AOA and any regulations that are not inconsistent with them, made by the company at the general meeting.

3. Shareholders cannot interfere in the exercise of board’s power.

4. However, shareholders may restrict the powers of BOD by amending the Articles that too not retrospectively.

5. Relationship of BOD with the general meeting is more of federation than of subordinate and superior.

6. There are 2 limitations on powers of BOD:

  • Being agents of the company, directors cannot act ultra virus the memorandum. Such acts will be void and ineffective.
  • Articles limits the powers of BOD even when acting within the power of company. Such acts needs to be ratified by shareholders at general meeting, also directors will be liable to third parties for breach of warranty of authority.

7. In following cases, in the general meeting, the shareholders is competent to intervene and act in respect of matters delegated to BOD:

  • Directors acting mala fide : Directors act for their own personal interests completely disregarding the company’s interests or their personal interests clashes with their duty.
  • Directors themselves wrong doers : They are the only person to conduct litigation in name of the company, and are themselves the wrong doers.
  • Incompetency of the Board : Board has become incompetent to’ act as none of the directors were validly appointed.
  • Deadlock in management : When the members of the Board are equally divided.

Powers to be Exercised only at Board Meetings (Section 179):
1. Following powers shall be exercised by the Board only by passing a resolution at the Board Meeting:

  • to make calls on shareholders in respect of money unpaid on their shares.
  • to buyback its shares U/S 68.
  • to issue securities, including debentures, whether in or outside India.
  • to borrow money.
  • to invest funds of the company.
  • to grant loans or give guarantee or provide security in respect of loans.
  • to diversify company’s business;
  • to make political contributions;
  • to approve financial statements and Board’s report;
  • to appoint internal auditors and secretarial auditor;
  • to appoint or remove KMP;
  • to approve amalgamation, merger or reconstruction;
  • to review or change the terms and conditions of public deposits;
  • to take note of disclosure of director’s interest and shareholding;
  • to take over a company or acquire a controlling or substantial stake in another company;
  • to invite or accept or renew public deposits and related matter;
  • to approve quarterly, half yearly and annual financial statements or financial results;
  • to take note of appointment or removal of one level below KMP;

Quorum for Board Meeting – Meaning: Minimum strength required to conduct a meeting.

  • One – third of total strength or two directors, which is higher, shall be the quorum for a meeting.
  • Quorum shall be present not only at the time of commencement of the meeting but also while transacting a business.
  • If at any time the number of interested directors exceeds or is equal to two – third of the total strength of the Board of Director, the number of directors who are not interested and presented at the meeting, being not less than two shall be the quorum during that time.
  • If the quorum is not achieved during a specified time then it will be happened as written in the articles.
  • The meeting shall be adjourned due to want of quorum, unless the articles provide shall be held to the same day at the same time and place in the next week or if the day is National Holiday, the next working day at the same time and place.

Appointment of KMP:

Listed Co. Public Co. Private Co.
Always 10 crore No need

Key Managerial Personnel:
1. KMP are the point of first contact between company and its stakeholders.

2. They are responsible for laying down strategies and its implementation.

3. As Per Section 2(51) “key managerial personnel” in relation to a company, means:

  • the Chief Executive Officer or the Managing Director or the Manager.
  • the Company Secretary.
  • the Whole-Time Director.
  • the Chief Financial Officer and.
  • such Other Officer as may be prescribed.

As per the Amendment made by Companies (Amendment) Act, 2017 Revised Section 2(51)-
1. ‘Key Managerial Personnel” in relation to a company, means –

  • the Chief Executive Officer or the Managing Director or the Manager;
  • the Company Secretary;
  • the Whole-time Director;
  • the Chief Financial Officer;
  • such other officer, not more than one level below the directors who is in whole-time employment, designated as key managerial personnel by the Board; and
  • such other officer as may be prescribed;”

2. Section 203 of the Companies Act, 2013 read with Rule 8 of the companies (Appointment and Remuneration of managerial personnel) Rules, 2014 mandates the appointment for –
(i) listed Company, and

(ii) every other public company having a paid up capital of ? 10 crore or more, to appoint following whole time key managerial personnel:

  • Managing directors CEO or Manager, and in their absence, a whole time director.
  • Company Secretary
  • CFO.

3. Every whole time KMP shall be appointed by means of a Board resolution. Containing terms and conditions for the appointment including remuneration.

4. An individual cannot be appointed or re-appointed as the Chairperson of the company as well as MD or CEO of the company at the same time unless AOA so provide, or company does not carry multiple businesses.

5. Certain class of companies engaged in multiple businesses notified by CG have been exempted.

6. Whole time KMP shall not hold office in more than one company except in its subsidiary company.

7. However, he can hold such other directorship in more than one company with BOD’s permission.

8. A whole-time KMP holding office in more than one company at same time shall within a period of six months from such commencement, choose one company in which he wishes to continue to hold the office of KMP.

9. If the office of any whole – time KMP is vacated, the resulting vacancy shall be filled-up by the board at a meeting of the Board within a period of six months from the date of such vacancy.

Whole time Directors: [Section 2(94)]:

  • Whole time Director is a director who is in whole time employment of the company.
  • Company can have one or more whole time directors.
  • Company can have either a Manager or a MD.

Managing Director:

  • As per Section 2(54), of the Companies Act,2013 MD means a director who by the virtue of the articles of a company or an agreement with the company or a resolution passed in general meeting or by its BOD is entrusted with substantial powers of management of the affairs of the company and includes a director occupying the position of managing director, by whatever name called”.
  • Performs functions as assigned by BOD
  • He must be an individual.

Disqualifications of MD [Section 196(3)]:
1. No company shall appoint or employ, any person as its MD or whole time director who:

  • is below the age of twenty one year or has attained the age of 70 years,
  • is an undischarged insolvent or has at any time adjudged an insolvent,
  • suspends or has at any time suspended payment to his creditors, or makes or has at any time made a composition with them.
  • is or has been convicted by a court of an offence involving moral turpitude.

2. Moral turpitude refers to anything done contrary to justice, honesty, principles or good morals.

Manager:
1. Section 2(53) defines manager as “an individual who, subject to the superintendence, control and directions of the BOD, has the management of the whole or substantially the whole of the affairs of the company, and includes a director or any other person occupying the position of a manager, by whatever name called and whether under a contract of service or not”.

2. Only individual can be appointed as a manager.

3. A departmental manager or a branch manager is not deemed to be manager.

Disqualifications of Manager [Section 196(3)]: No. company shall appoint or continue the appointment or employment of any person as its manager, who:

  • is an undischarged insolvent
  • has at any time within the preceding 5 years been adjudged as an insolvent.
  • suspends or has suspended within the previous 5 years, payment to its creditors.
  • maxes, or has at any time, within the preceding 5 years made a composition with his creditors.
  • is, or has at any time within the preceding 5 years been convicted of an offence involving moral turpitude.

Tenure of MD or Manager:

  • Term of office cannot exceed 5 years at a time.
  • He may be re-appointed for a further period of 5 years.
  • Re-appointment, however, shall not be sanctioned earlier than 1 year before the expiry of his term.

Chief Executive Officer [Section 2(18)]:
CEO means an office of a company, who has been designated as such by it.

Chief Financial Officer [Section 2(19)]:

  • CFO means a person appointed as a CFO of a company.
  • Company Secretary [Section 2 (24)] → Clause (c) of sub – section (1) of the Section 2 of the Company Secretaries Act, 1980 defines company secretary as one who is appointed by a company to perform the function of company secretary under this act.

Meaning of Meeting:

  • Meeting means gathering or assembly of number of persons for transacting any lawful business.
    A meeting to be valid must be convened and held as per the provisions of Companies Act, 2013 and the rules framed there under.
  • Members and directors exercise their decision making powers through resolutions passed by them.
  • One such meeting should be compulsorily convened every year.

Kinds of Meetings:
They are:
(i) Members/Shareholders:

  • Annual General Meeting (AGM)
  • Extra ordinary General Meeting (EGM)
  • Class Meeting

(ii) BOD:

  • Meeting of BOD
  • Meeting of Board Committees

(iii) Creditors:

  • For winding up
  • For purpose other than winding up

(iv) Meeting of debenture holders

(v) Meeting of contributories in winding up

Annual General Meeting (Section 96 to 99):
1. It is required to be held by every company once in every year.(Other than OPC)

2. First AGM

  • It is to be held within nine months from the date of closing of first F.Y. of company after its incorporation.
  • There is no need of holding AGM in the year of its incorporation.
  • ROC cannot allow extension.

3. Subsequent AGM:

  • It is to be held in each calender year
  • It is to be held within 15 months from the date of last AGM
  • It is to be held within 6 months from the close of F.Y.
  • ROC can grant extension upto 3 months

Amendment of Section 96: In Section 96 of Principal Act in sub-section (2), in the proviso for the words provided that “the following shall be substituted, namely:
the AGM of an unlisted company may be held at any place in India, if consent is given in writing or by electronic mode by all members in advance.

  • It shall be held during the business hours
  • It shall not be held in a national holiday.

It shall be held at:

  • The registered office of the company, or
  • Some other place within the city, town or village in which the registered office is situated.

AGM can be held on public holiday:

  1. If the day is declared by CG as national holiday after the issue of notice.
  2. If it is a Section 8 company.
  3. If public or private company which is a subsidiary of a public company has fixed time by passing a resolution in GM for its subsequent AGM.
  4. If it is an adjourned AGM to be held accidently.
  5. If public company by its articles, fix the time for its AGM.
  6. If private company by its articles and by a resolution agreed to by all the members thereof, fix the time and place for its AGM.

At least 21 days clear notice either in writing or through electronic mode should be given for calling a meeting Shorter notice is valid if consent is given in writing or by electronic mode by not less than 95% of the members entitled to vote at such meeting.

Following business are transacted at AGM.

  • the consideration of the accounts, balance sneet and the reports of the BOD and auditors.
  • the declaration of dividend.
  • the appointment of directors in the place of those retiring and
  • the appointment of and the fixing of remuneration of the auditors.

The company and every officer of the company who is in default shall be punishable with fine upto ? 1,00,000.
If default is a continuing one, an additional fine of ? 5,000 per day may be imposed

NCLT may on application of any member:

  • Call a GM which shall be deemed to be the AGM of the company.
  • Giving such direction as it thinks fit, like 1 member present in person or proxy shall be the quorum (Section 97)

Content of Notice:

  • Place of Meeting
  • Day of Meeting
  • Time of Meeting
  • Agenda
  • Proxy clause with reasonable prominence.

Extra Ordinary General Meeting:
Provided that an EGM of the company, other than of the wholly owned subsidiary of a company iricorporated outside India, shall be held at a place within India.

  • It refers to all the general meetings of a company, with the exception of the AGM
  • If any matter is urgent and cannot be postponed till the next AGM, an EGM is called to discuss such  matters and to obtain the consent of members.
  • All business transacted at EGM is a special business.
  • An explanatory statement must be given in respect of each proposed resolution.
  • It can be held anywhere in India.
  • It can be even held on a public holiday and even after the business hours.

EGM may be called:

  • By Board on its own
  • By board on requisition of share holders.
  • by requisitionists.
  • by Tribunal

Calling EGM on Requisition:
(i) Members have been empowered that if any business requiring consent of members is beneficial to the company but has not been proposed by the Board, members can propose such resolution.

(ii) Company having share capital: One or more members can call an EGM only if they hold 1/10th or more of the paid up share capital of the company as on the date of the requisition.

(iii) Company not having share capital: Requisition is valid if on the date of requisition it has been made by member (s) holding 1/10 or more voting power of all the members.

(iv) Requisition must specify matters for the consideration for which EGM is called.

(v) It must be signed by requisitionists.

(vi) It shall be deposited at the registered office of the company.

(vii) On receipt of requisition Board may within 21 days, proceed to call an EGM to be held not later than 45 days from the date- of requisition.

(viii) If the Board fails to call an EGM, it may be called by the requisitionists themselves.

(ix) Meeting should be held within 3 months from date of requisition.

(x) Reasonable expenses incurred will be reimbursed by company to the requisitionists.

(xi) Company can recover such expenses from the directors in default. If the Quorum is not present with in half- an hour, the meeting shall stand cancelled.

Calling EGM by Tribunal:
(i) If it is impracticable to call a meeting of a company or to hold or conduct the meeting of the company. The tribunal may

  • either suo moto or
  • on the application of any director or
  • member of the company who would to entitled to vote at the meeting
  • order a meeting of the company to be called, held and conducted in such manner as it may thinks fit.

(ii) It may give such ancillary or consequential directions as it thinks fit.

(iii) It may give direction that one member of the company present in person or by proxy shall be deemed to constitute a meeting.

  • Class Meetings (Section 48) : Class Meeting of holders of particular classes of shares debenture holders, creditors are to be held if the right attaching to these classes are to be varied.

Meetings of Debenture holders:

  • All matters in connection with the holding, conducting and proceeding of the meetings of Debenture holders are,given in Debenture Trust Deed.
  • These are held either to vary the terms of security or to alter their rights in certain circumstances.
  • Decision taken at these meetings with requisite majority, are valid and binding upon the minority.

Meeting of Creditors:

  • It can be held either during the lifetime of the company or at the time of winding up of company to make certain arrangements with the creditors.
  • NCLT may order holding of creditor’s meeting on application.
  • NCLT may sanction the scheme if it is agreed by majority in number holding debts to the value of 3/4,h of the total value of the debts.
  • Its copy has to be filed with ROC.
  • It becomes binding on all the creditors.
  • At the time of winding up, it has to be held to ascertain the total amount due by the company to its creditors and also appoint a liquidator to wind up the affairs of the company.
  • These are not the company meetings.

Meetings of BOD – BOD have to meet in order to discuss various matters regarding the management and administration of company’s affairs in the best interests of shareholders and public interest.

It functions as an advisory board:
1. Its most important function is to provide direction to the company and set the “tone at the top”.

2. As per Section 173,

  • It provides that the first Board Meeting should be held within thirty days of the date of incorporation.
  • There shall be minimum of four Board meetings every year and not more than one hundred and twenty days shall intervene between two consecutive Board Meeting.

3. In case of OPC, small company and dormant company, at least one BM should be conducted in each half of calender year and the gap between two meetings should not be less than 90 days.

4. If OPC has only one director, No BM is required.

5. Not less than 7 days notice in writing shall be given to every director at the registered address available with the company.

6. Notice can be given by hand delivery or by post or by electronic means.

7. If BM is called at a shorter notice, at least one independent director shall be present at the meeting.

8. If he is not present, then decision of meeting shall be circulated to all the directors and it shall be final only if it have to be ratified by at least one independent director.

Amendment of Section 173 : In Section 173 of the Principal Act, in sub¬section (2), after the first proviso, the following proviso shall be inserted namely:

“Provided that where there is quorum in a meeting through physical presence of director, any other director may participate through video conferencing or other audio, visual means in such meeting on any matter specified under first proviso”.
1. As per Section 173,

  • Notice of every BOD Meeting must be given in writing to every director for the time being in India, and at the usual address in India to every other director.
  • In case of default, every officer who is at fault shall be punishable with fine upto ₹ 1,000.

2. If Articles provide that it will be held on fixed days of every month or directors are duly informed that all future meetings will be held on a fixed day of every month, it is a sufficient compliance with Section 173.

3. All proceedings of the meeting will be considered void^f the notice is not properly given.

4. Notice has to be given even to a director who has stated that he wHI be unable to attend the meeting.

5. It may be held at any time, on any day, including a public holiday, and at any place.

6. No business should be transacted at a meeting.if notice in accordance with the section has not been given.
Company Secretary (CS):
As per Section 203,

  • every company having paid up share capital of ? 5 crore or more must have a whole time secretary.
  • where Board comprises of only 2 directors, neither of them can act as a secretary of the company.

Definition of Company Secretary:

  • As per Section 2(24) of the Companies Act, 2013 defines “Company Secretary” or “Secretary” means a company secretary as defined in clause (c) of sub-section(1) of section 2 of the Company Secretaries Act, 1980 who is appointed by a company to perform the functions of a Company Secretory under this Act.
  • As per company Secretaries Act, 1980, “He is a person who is a member of the Institute of Company Secretaries of India”.
  • Word ‘secretary’ is derived from word ‘secret’ meaning something confidential about the job.

Qualifications of Secretary:
CS must possess the qualification prescribed by CG. For this purpose, the Companies (Appointment and Qualification of Secretary) Rules, 1988 have been divided into 2 categories:
1. Companies having a paid-up capital of ? 5 crores or more : whole-time secretary must be a member of ICSI.

2. In case of any other company: Secretary must possess the following qualifications:

  • Membership of the ICSI;
  • Pass in the Intermediate Examination conducted by the ICSI;
  • Degree in law granted by any university;
  • Membership of the ICAI;
  • Membership of the ICWAI;
  • Post-graduate degree or diploma in management sciences granted by Universities or Institutes of Management, Ahmedabad, Calcutta, Bangalore and Lucknow.
  • Diploma in corporate laws and management granted by Indian Law Institute, New Delhi;
  • Post-graduate diploma in Company Secretaryship granted by the Institute of Commercial Practice under
  • Delhi; Administration or Diploma in Corporate Laws and Management granted by Indian Law Institute, New Delhi.
  • Membership of the association of See retaries and Managers, Calcutta;
  • Post-graduate diploma in Company Law and Secretarial Practice granted by the University of Udaipur.

Other Qualifications that a CS should Process are:

  • Sound General Education
  • Proficiency in Language
  • Wide Knowledge
  • Knowledge of Company Law
  • Knowledge of Other Laws
  • Knowledge of Office Organisation and. Method
  • Knowledge of Economics, Banking and Finance
  • Good personality.

If paid-up capital increases to ₹ 5 crores or more, Company must appoint a whole time secretary.

Appointment of Secretary:
1. For every company not being required to employ a whole time secretary and having a paid-up capital of 10 lakh rupees or more but less than 5 crore, it is mandatory to file with ROC a certificate from a secretary in whole time practice in such form, and in such time and subject to such conditions as may be prescribed.

2. This certificate should be attached to the Board’s report made u/s 134.

3. He is generally appointed by a formal resolution of the Board.

4. If any director is interested in such appointment, he must disclose such interest and should not participate in the discussion or voting.

Powers of Secretary – He should perform:

  • All acts which he is required to perform under various enactments.
  • All acts which BOD specifically direct him to perform.
  • All acts which enable him to discharge his duties smoothly.

Any act performed without being authorised by the company, does not bounds the company.

Duties of a Companies Secretary:
Contractual Duties:

  • Has a duty to act within the scope of his authority if appointed by an agreement of service.
  • Perform his duties with reasonable care and skill.
  • Abstain from disclosing any confidential information relating to the company’s affairs.
  • Should not make any secret profits by virtue of his position.

Statutory Duties:
(i) Under Companies Act:

  • report to BOD about compliance with provisions of this Act, rules and other laws applicable.
  • to ensure that the company complies with the applicable secretarial standards.
  • to discharge such other duties as may be prescribed.

The Central Government has prescribed such duties of CS as follows:

  • to facilitate convening of meetings and attend BM, GM committee meetings and maintain their minutes.
  • to assist, the Board in the conduct of company’s affairs.
  • to obtain approval from BOD, GM, government and other authorities.
  • to provide guidance to directors as required, with regard to their duties, responsibilities and powers.
  • to represent before various regulators, tribunals and other authorities.
  • to assist and advice BOD in ensuring good corporate governance and complying with its requirements and best practices.
  • to discharge such other duties as may be assigned by the Board from time to time.
  • such other duties as have been prescribed under the Act and Rules.

(ii) Under IT Act: He is a principal officer of the company.

  • Ensure proper tax is deducted at source.
  • Ensure that tax deducted is deposited with government.
  • Ensure that TDS certificate is furnished to every debenture holder/ depositor.
  • Verify and submit various forms and returns.

(iii) Under Indian Stamp Act: He has to ensure that ail legal documents are affixed with stamps of requisite amount as required under the Act.

(iv) Under other Acts: He is required to perform several other duties under various other Acts.

Role of a Secretary:
1. His role is not limited only to its company but also to its shareholders, depositors, creditors, employees, consumer, society and Government

2. He has the following roles to play:

  • Statutory officer/Key Managerial Personnel.
  • Co-ordinator
  • Administrative officer

Statutory Officer:
1. ‘Officer’ includes any director, manager, secretary or any person in accordance with whose directions or instructions the BOD is or are accustomed to act.

2. He can be assigned managerial duties in addition to his statutory duties.

3. He is responsible for strict compliance of following provisions of Companies Act:

  • to sign the Annual Return filed with ROC.
  • authenticate the financial statement.
  • to make declaration before incorporation of a company confirming all the requirements of the Act and rules have been compiled with.
  • to make declarations regarding commencement of business.
  • to see share certificates, debentures, letter of allotment, mortgages are issued duly stamped.
  • comply with the provisions of various statutes.

4. He is also responsible to comply with provisions of various other Acts.

Co-ordinator:

  • He has to ensure that the policies managerial of BOD are effectively implemented and executed.
  • He co-ordinates the work of executives at different levels.
  • He acts as an important link between top management (Board) and other levels.
  • He is known as ‘Mouthpiece of Board.’
  • Even plays the role of a coordinator with outsiders like shareholders, society and the Government.
  • This role has two aspects – Internal and External.

Internal Role:
(i) Relating to Board, Chairman and MD:

  • Responsible for conveying the Boards decision to persons in charge of such functions.
  • responsible to ensure that the returns and reports received from various operational executives are submitted in time complete in all respects.
  • Communicates with outside agencies like government and semi-government bodies to ensure that the information given to various agencies do not conflict with each other, and are in accordance with statutory requirements and objectives of the organisation.

(ii) Relating to Trade Unions:

  • on sure whether trade union officials are recognized or not.
  • Ensure that good labour relations are maintained.
  • During any agreement with trade union, he should make proper note of it so as to avoid any misunderstanding or deputes later on.
  • Ensure strict compliance with provisions of different labour welfare laws.
  • Whenever long term settlement is finalised, ensure that it is in accordance with relevant statues.
  • Wherever possible, grants and subsidies should be given.
  • Before employees guilty of misconduct are charge-sheeted and ‘ punished, all formalities must be completed.

External Role:
(i) Relating to Shareholders:

  • Ensure that their rights are honoured in time
  • Extracts of registers asked by them are supplied to them within stipulated time
  • Ensure that all letters and complaints from them are promptly dealt with and their queries are answered without violating the statutory, provisions.
  • Maintain proper relationship with shareholders of the company.
  • He should attend the shareholders who personally come for information, to furnish documents or details as image of company depends upon relationship of CS with shareholders.

(ii) Relating to Government:

  • Ensure strict compliance with provisions of Companies Act, and other laws.
  • Must see that government policies are being implemented by company in true spirit.
  • Advise Board about changing government’s policy.
  • Ensure that information send to the government is factually correct.
  • Helps in uniform reporting.

(iii) Relating to Community:

  • Advise Board regarding areas where company can make useful contribution.
  • Ensure that company should provide quality goods and services at reasonable policies.
  • Ensure that requirement of keeping pollution within legally and socially acceptable limits are complied with.
  • Ensure promotion of employment-opportunities.
  • Undertake rural development.

Administrative Officer:

  • Ensure that company’s activities are in conformity with companies policy
  • Supervise, control and coordinate the functions of different departments.
  • Advise BOD on the need to develop good structure.
  • Has an opportunity of knowing the strengths and weaknesses of the functional executives.
  • Analytically study various financial statements.
  • Devise suitable system of accounting procedure, internal control and internal audit in order to safeguard company’s funds.
  • Responsible for various office services including their cost.
  • Can render valuable advice to BOD regarding the recruitment, training, remuneration, etc. of staff.
  • Ensure safety and proper maintenance of assets and properties of the company.
  • Ensure that property and other records are properly insured.
  • All records are maintained properly.
  • Ensure that statutory time limits relating to meetings, dividend and interest filing of payment returns etc. are complied with.
  • Has to negotiate with banks and financial institutions, the terms of finance both for working capital requirement and capital expenditure.
  • Different office departments are properly staffed, organised, co-ordinated and supervised.
  • Timely renewal of contracts and leases.
  • Ensure that adequate system of security of personnel are available.

E-Governance:

  • It refers to a highly complex process that requires provision of hardware, software, networking and re-engineering of procedures for better service delivery
  • It involves application of IT to bring about SMART i.e. (Simple, Moral, Accountable, Responsive and Transparent) governance.
  • MCA – 21 is an e-governance initiative of Indian Government that builds Government’s vision of National e-governance in India.
  • It is executed by MCA i.e. Ministry of Corporate Affairs in partnership with TCS.
  • MCA – 21 is a fine example of public/private partnership and is built on BOOT i.e. (Built, Operate, Own and Transfer) model.
  • MCA-21 is an ambitious e-governance initiative of Government that builds on the Government’s vision of national e-governance in the country.
  • The project was named MCA-21 as it aimed at re-positioning MCA as an organisation capable of fulfilling the aspiration of its stakeholder in the 21st Century.

Scope of MCA-21 includes services provided by:

  • Regional Director (RDs)
  • Offices of Registrar of Companies (ROCs)
  • Ministry Headquarter, etc.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Which of the following statement is correct?
(a) The joint shareholders are counted as one member for the membership of a private company.
(b) The joint shareholders are counted as one member for the quorum of a meeting.
(c) The joint shareholders are always counted as different member for all the provision of the Companies Act.
(d) Both (a) and (b) are correct as there are specific provisions to that effect.
Answer:
(d) Both (a) and (b) are correct as there are specific provisions to that effect.

Question 2.
The subscribers to the Memorandum of Association _________.
(a) May become members only if there is a specific provision to that effect in company’s Articles of Association.
(b) Become a member as soon as the company is registered.
(c) Are members irrespective of any formality as to registration etc.
(d) Can never be the members as their only job is to get the company registered.
Answer:
(b) Become a member as soon as the company is registered.

Question 3.
A person ceases to be a member when the share warrant is issued to him in exchange of fully paid up shares.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly true
(d) Partly false
Answer:
(a) True

Question 4.
Every company (whether public or private) is required to hold an annual general meeting.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly true
(d) Partly false
Answer:
(a) True

Question 5.
Kinds of meetings are _________.
(a) Class Meeting
(b) Annual General Meeting
(c) Extraordinary General Meeting
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 6.
Can the Annual General meeting (A.G.M.) be held on a day which has been declared as a public holiday by the Central Government.
(a) Yes, but only if the notice of convening the A.G.M. has been issued prior to the declaration of the holiday.
(b) No, as the A.G.M. cannot be held on a public holiday.
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Yes, but only if the notice of convening the A.G.M. has been issued prior to the declaration of the holiday.

Question 7.
_________ is a bridge between BOD and shareholders.
(a) Directors
(b) Company Secretary
(c) Chartered Accountant
(d) Employees
Answer:
(b) Company Secretary

Question 8.
DIN Stands for:
(a) Direct Identification Number
(b) Director’s Identity Number
(c) Direct Identity Name
(d) Director’s Identification Number
Answer:
(d) Director’s Identification Number

Question 9.
_________ of the total number of directors shall be non-rotational.
(a) 1/3rd
(b) 2/3rd
(c) 1/2nd
(d) 1/5th
Answer:
(a) 1/3rd

Question 10.
The managing director must be:
(a) Difector
(b) Employee
(c) Officer
(d) Debenture Holder
Answer:
(a) Difector

Question 11.
EGM can be called by:
(a) BOD
(b) Requisition’s
(c) Tribunal
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 12.
When a valid requisition is given by member for holding EGM, the BOD should call EGM:
(a) Within 14 Days
(b) Within 15 Days
(c) Within 21 Days
(d) Within 1 month
Answer:
(c) Within 21 Days

Question 13.
Resolution requiring special notice is required:
(a) For appointment of a person as an auditor other than the retiring auditor at the AGM
(b) For removing a Director before the Expiry of the period of his office
(c) For both (a) and (b)
(d) For none of the above
Answer:
(c) For both (a) and (b)

Question 14.
Alternate director shall hold office only upto the date of next AGM.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly true
(d) Partly false
Answer:
(b) False

Question 15.
Additional director is studied u/s _________.
(a) 163
(b) 160
(c) 164
(d) 161
Answer:
(d) 161

Question 16.
Director can be removed before the expiry of his term by passing a _________.
(a) Special resolution
(b) Ordinary resolution
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Ordinary resolution

Question 17.
Company can have both a manager and a Managing Director.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(b) False

Question 18.
A departmental manager or a branch manager can also be deemed as a director.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(b) False

Question 19.
Term of office of MD cannot exceed _________ years at a time.
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(d) 5

Question 20.
If a resolution is to be decided by the way of show of hands _________.
(a) Every shareholder has one vote
(b) Every shareholder has as many votes as the shares held by him.
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Every shareholder has one vote

Question 21.
All business transacted at EGM is _________ business.
(a) Special
(b) Ordinary
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None
Answer:
(a) Special

Question 22.
The length of the notice of GM is stated under which section of the Companies Act, 2013
(a) Sec. 101
(b) Sec. 102
(c) Sec. 108
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Sec. 101

Question 23.
All the proceeding of Board meetings shall be _________ if proper notice has not been served.
(a) Valid
(b) Void
(c) Partly valid
(d) Partly void
Answer:
(b) Void

Question 24.
Secretary must be a member of:
(a) ICAI
(b) ICWA
(c) ICSI
(d) None
Answer:
(c) ICSI

Question 25.
A whole time secretary has to be appointed by companies having paid up capital of _________ or more.
(a) 1cr
(b) 2cr
(c) 4cr
(d) 5cr
Answer:
(d) 5cr

Question 26.
_________ is known as a mouthpiece of Board.
(a) Managing director
(b) Chartered Accountant
(c) Company Secretary
(d) Manager
Answer:
(c) Company Secretary

Question 27.
MCA Stands for.
(a) Ministry of Corporate Affairs
(b) Minister of Corporate Affairs
(c) Minister of Corporate Accounts
(d) Ministry of Corporate Accounts
Answer:
(a) Ministry of Corporate Affairs

Question 28.
Preference shareholders do not possess the following rights:
(a) Payment of dividend
(b) Rights to attend meeting .
(c) Claim on assets of the company
(d) Repayment of capital
Answer:
(c) Claim on assets of the company

Question 29.
A secretary in a company, does not perform the role of:
(a) A coordinator
(b) A legal officer
(c) An administrative officer
(d) A director
Answer:
(d) A director

Question 30.
Directors are of a company.
(a) Head
(b) Member
(c) Management Incharge
(d) Brain
Answer:
(d) Brain

Question 31.
A meeting of the Board of Directors must be held _________ in every 3 months and at least _________ meetings must be held every year.
(a) Once, 4
(b) Twice, 8
(c) Not req, 4
(d) Not req, 8
Answer:
(a) Once, 4

Question 32.
_________ has the power to exercise his casting vote for deciding the matter.
(a) CEO
(b) G.M.
(c) Directors
(d) Chairman
Answer:
(d) Chairman

Question 33.
Who can be the director of the company
(a) Undischarged insolvent
(b) Unsound mind
(c) Person disqualified by the Tribunal
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 34.
If a director has failed to file financial statement & annual returns for continuous _________ years, then he-will not be eligible to be appointed as a director of any other public company for a period of _________ years.
(a) 3,8
(b) 3,6
(c) 3, 5
(d) 4,5
Answer:
(c) 3, 5

Question 35.
Who cannot be the director under Sec. 149(1) of the Companies Act, 2013
(a) Body corporate
(b) Associations
(c) Firm
(d) All of these
Answer:
(a) Body corporate

Question 36.
The removal of director’s rests with the following authorities.
(a) Central Government
(b) NCLT
(c) The Company in G.M.
(d) Both (b) & (c)
Answer:
(d) Both (b) & (c)

Question 37.
A person compulsorily needs to obtain _________ to become a director in pursuance of Sec. 154 of the Companies Act, 2013.
(a) SST
(b) PAN
(c) DIN
(d) DAN
Answer:
(c) DIN

Question 38.
No. of directors need a special resolution in GM, if they are beyond _________.
(a) 6
(b) 15
(c) 18
(d) 24
Answer:
(b) 15

Question 39.
A legal representative of a deceased share holder is a share holder even if his name is not entered in the register of members.
(a) False
(b) True
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(b) True

Question 40.
The term member and director of a company are synonymous.
(a) False
(b) True
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(a) False

Question 41.
Sec. 96(i) of the Companies Act, 2013 states that every company must, in each calender year hold an AGM, so specified in the notice calling it, provided that not more than _________ months shall elapse between two AGM’s.
(a) 12
(b) 14
(c) 18
(d) 15
Answer:
(d) 15

Question 42.
A company can hold its first AGM within _________ months from date of its incorporation.
(a) 12
(b) 15
(c) 9
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) 9

Question 43.
Registrar can grant for some special reasons extension of time for holding the AGM by a period not more than _________ months.
(a) 5
(b) 3
(c) 12
(d) 18
Answer:
(b) 3

Question 44.
If a company makes default in holding AGM, then fine imposed on the company & every officer of the company who is in default is upto _________.
(a) 25,000
(b) 50,000
(c) 5,000
(d) 1,00,000
Answer:
(d) 1,00,000

Question 45.
A board meeting can be held anywhere _________.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(a) True

Question 46.
A business can be transacted at a board meeting even if it is not mentioned in the agenda _________.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(b) False

Question 47.
Companies having paid up capital of not less than 5 crore must have _________ secretary.
(a) Whole time
(b) Part time
(c) Not required
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Whole time

Question 48.
The disqualification for being appointed as a director are contained in which section of Companies Act, 2013?
(a) Sec. 164
(b) Sec. 166
(c) Sec. 170
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Sec. 164

Question 49.
Who amongst the following cannot appoint a director in a company?
(a) Shareholders
(b) Board of Directors
(c) Articles
(d) Tribunal
Answer:
(d) Tribunal

Question 50.
The directors appointed in a company on an application made under Sec. 241 are appointed by _________.
(a) Auditor
(b) Tribunal
(c) Central Government
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Tribunal

Question 51.
Which of the following statement is NOT true?
(a) The power to make calls can only be exercised at the Board Meeting
(b) The company can have both managing director and manager
(c) A director cannot be removed by the State Government
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) The company can have both managing director and manager

Question 52.
A person is disqualified from being appointed as a managing director if –
(a) He is insolvent
(b) He is convicted by Tribunal
(c) Suspends payment to his creditors
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 53.
Which of the following statement is true?
(a) A person having share warrant is a member of the company
(b) A person having share warrant is only a shareholder of the company and not a member
(c) A legal representative of a deceased shareholder is not a shareholder of a company
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(b) A person having share warrant is only a shareholder of the company and not a member

Question 54.
Which of the following statement is false?
(a) Equity shares have a right to vote on every resolution of the company
(b) Preference shares cannot vote on all the resolutions of the company
(c) All the equity shareholders have equal voting rights
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(c) All the equity shareholders have equal voting rights

Question 55.
Which one of the following statements is not true in respect of holding the Annual General Meeting?
(a) AGM should be held in every calender year
(b) AGM should be held within six months from the end of financial year
(c) The gap between two AGM’s should not exceed fifteen months
(d) Private company is not required to hold an AGM
Answer:
(d) Private company is not required to hold an AGM

Question 56.
Which of the following business is NOT transacted at the AGM?
(a) Appointment of directors
(b) Declaration of dividend
(c) Appointment of auditors
(d) Making calls on shares
Answer:
(d) Making calls on shares

Question 57.
The proportion of directors which shall retire by rotation in a public company is _________.
(a) One – Third
(b) One – Fifth
(c) Half
(d) Two – Third
Answer:
(d) Two – Third

Question 58.
The meeting which is held by a particular category of shareholders is called as _________.
(a) Class Meeting
(b) Specific Meeting
(c) Sporadic Meeting
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Class Meeting

Question 59.
Which of the following task Company Secretary?
(a) Communicating results to the interested parties
(b) Signing the annual return
(c) Sending notice of meetings to the Directors
(d) Assisting the liquidator in the winding up of the company
Answer:
(a) Communicating results to the interested parties

Question 60.
It is compulsory for a company to appoint a Company Secretary if _________.
(a) The paid up share capital is 5 crore or more
(b) The paid up share capital is 10 crore or more
(c) The annual turnover of the company exceeds 100 crore
(d) If the net profit of the company is more than 2 crore
Answer:
(a) The paid up share capital is 5 crore or more

Question 61.
Which one of the following is not a power of a Secretary?
(a) The acts directed to him by the Board
(b) The acts required to perform in order to discharge his duties
(c) The acts required to be performed under an Act
(d) Calling up the Board Meeting
Answer:
(d) Calling up the Board Meeting

Question 62.
As per Sec. 2(35) of the Income Tax Act, 1961, a Company Secretary is _________.
(a) Manager
(b) Principle officer
(c) Coordinator
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Principle officer

Question 63.
MCA stands for _________.
(a) Ministry of Corporate affairs
(b) Manager of Company Accounts
(c) Ministry of Corporate
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Ministry of Corporate affairs

Question 64.
BOOT stands for _________.
(a) Building Optimum Operational Tools
(b) Budgetary Online Operational Technology
(c) Build, Organise, Operate and Transfer
(d) Build, Operate, Own and Transfer
Answer:
(d) Build, Operate, Own and Transfer

Question 65.
Which amongst the following is NOT a role of a Company Secretary?
(a) As a statutory officer
(b) As an administrative officer
(c) As a coordinator
(d) As a manager
Answer:
(d) As a manager

Question 66.
The persons who are in charge of the management of the affairs of a company are termed as directors. They are collectively known as _________.
(a) Shareholders
(b) Employees
(c) Board of directors
(d) Either (a) or (b)
Answer:
(c) Company is an artificial legal person, thus cannot act on its own. Directors are the persons who are entrusted with the charge of management of company’s affairs. In other words, Director means an appointed or elected member of a company who, with other directors, has the responsibility for determining and implementing the company’s policy. They are collectively known as Board of Directors or Board.

Question 67.
Every company having a paid-up share capital of must have a whole-time secretary.
(a) ₹ 2 Crore or more
(b) ₹ 5 Crore or more
(c) ₹ 50 Lakh
(d) ₹ 10 Lakh
Answer:
(b) In term of Section 203 of the Companies Act, it is necessary to appoint a secretary in a company having a paid-up capital of ₹ 5 crores or more who is an individual possessing the prescribed qualification i.e., he should be member of the Institute of Company Secretaries of India. Normally, the appointment is done by means of a resolution of the Board as the position of company secretary is slightly different from that of other officers as he is an officer recognised under the Companies Act, 2013.

Question 68.
Dividend of a company is declared in:
(a) Statutory meeting
(b) Extra-ordinary general meeting
(c) Annual general meeting
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(c) Sec. 102 of the Companies Act lays down that all business to be transacted at an annual general meeting shall be deemed Special Business with the exception of the business, relating to:

  • The consideration of the accounts, balance sheet and the reports of the board of directors and auditors,
  • The declaration of dividend
  • The appointment of directors in the place of those retiring; and
  • The appointment of, and the fixing of remuneration of, the auditors.

Question 69.
In a company maximum time difference between two consecutive board meetings is:
(a) 120 days
(b) 180 days
(c) 140 days
(d) 90 days
Answer:
(a) Section 173 of the Act deals with Meetings of the Board and Section 174 deals with quorum. The Act provides that the first Board meeting should be held within thirty days of the date of incorporation. In addition to the first meeting to be held within thirty days of the date of incorporation, there shall be minimum of four Board meetings every year and not more one hundred and twenty days shall intervene between two consecutive Board meetings.

Question 70.
If Which of the following type of business are ordinarily carried out at annual general meeting of a company?
X. To declare dividend
Y. To recommend dividend .
Z. To appoint the auditors W.
To make calls on shares Correct option is –
(a) X and Y
(b) X and Z
(c) X, Z and W
(d) X, Y, Z and W
Answer:
(b) Following businesses are transacted at AGM –

  • Financial Statement are presented for consideration.
  • Appointment or re-appointment of auditors.
  • Declaration of dividends.
  • Appointment or re-appointment of auditors.

Thus, only businesses given in point X and Z are transacted at AGM of company.

Question 71.
A director of X Ltd. has given a guarantee of ₹ 500 for someone, yet he can become the director of another company _________.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly true
(d) Partly false
Answer:
(a) A director of a company who has given a guarantee for someone can become the director of another company as per the Companies Act, 2013. There’s no such disqualification for such a director. Hence, option (a) is correct.

Question 72.
Preferential shareholders can call meeting in which situation?
(a) Curfew
(b) Emergency
(c) Bomb blast
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(d) As per section 48 of Companies Act, 2013 class meetings are held by preferential shareholders. Need for such meetings arises when it is proposed to vary the rights of a particular class of shares. Thus, none of the above given are the reasons for calling the meeting in case of preferential shareholders.

Question 74.
Who can be a director?
(a) Individual
(b) Partnership firm
(c) Company
(d) HUF
Answer:
(a) Only an Individual can be a director, any corporate body cannot be a director.

Questions 75.
Which amongst the following is the expanded form of ‘DIN’?
(a) Directors Identification Number
(b) Digitalised Identification Number
(c) Director’s Identifying Number
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) No company can appoint or re-appoint any individual as a director unless he has been allotted a DIN i.e. Director’s Identification Number U/s 154 of the Companies Act, 2013.

Question 76.
Under which Section the duties of the directors are given.
(a) 166
(b) 152
(c) 160
(d) 161
Answer:
(a) Duties of director are given under Section 166 of Companies act, 2013.

Question 77.
Who fills casual vacancy in the office of director?
(a) Shareholders in the General Meeting
(b) Directors in the board meeting
(c) Company law board
(d) Central Government
Answer:
(b) Casual vacancy means vacancy caused in the office of director appointed by shareholders in the general meeting and caused by death, resignation, insolvency or disqualification. Any casual vacancy in the office of director is filled by directors in the board meeting.

Question 78.
Sec. 96(i) of the Companies Act, 2013 states that every company must in each calender year hold as AGM, so specified in the notice calling it, provided not more than months shall elapse between two AGM.
(a) 12
(b) 14
(c) 18
(d) 15
Answer:
(d) As per Section 96 (i) of Companies Act, 2013 every subsequent AGM,

(i) It is to be held in each Calendar year
(ii) It is to be held within 15 months from the date of last AGM
(iii) It is to be held within 6 months from close of FY.

Thus, 15 months shall not elapse between two AGMs.

Question 79.
Small shareholder means a shareholder holding shares of nominal value of not more than _________ rupees or such other sum as may be prescribed.
(a) 25,000
(b) 10,000
(c) 50,000
(d) 20,000.
Answer:
(d) According to Sec. 151 of the Companies Act, 2013 every listed company may have one director elected by such small shareholders. For the purpose of this section, “small shareholders means a shareholder holding shares of nominal value of not more than twenty thousand rupees or such other sum as may be prescribed.

Question 80.
_________ is to be held by every company every year.
(a) Annual general meeting
(b) Board meeting
(c) Statutory meeting
(d) Extraordinary meeting.
Answer:
(a) As per Sec. 96 (i) of the Companies Act, 2013, states every company must, in each calender year hold an Annual General Meeting.

Question 81.
As per Companies Act, 2013 who can be appointed as a director.
(a) A company or a firm
(b) Only a natural person
(c) Any person including a company
(d) Managing agency.
Answer:
(b) As per Sec. 149 (i) of the Companies Act, 2013, only individuals shall be appointed as Directors, that means no body corporate, association or firm shall be appointed as a director of the company.

Question 82.
Small shareholders are holders holding shares of nominal value of not more than
(a) ₹ 10,000
(b) ₹ 20,000
(c) ₹ 40,000
(d) ₹ 30,000
Answer:
(b) Snail shareholders are holders holding shares of nominal value of no more than ₹ 20,000.

Question 83.
Which of the following companies should compulsorily appoint a Woman Director?
(a) Listed company
(b) Public company having paid-up share capital of ₹ 100 crores or more
(c) Public company having turnover of ₹ 300 crores or more
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) Every listed company shall appoint at least one women director and every other public company having paid up share capital of ₹ 100 crores as more as turnover of ₹ 300 crores or more as on the last date of latest audited financial statement, shall also appoint at least one women director under Section 149(1) of Companies Act, 2013.

Question 84.
Company Secretary is a _________.
(a) Key managerial personnel
(b) One of the directors’ in the board
(c) Member of a company .
(d) Officer of the Government.
Answer:
(a) As per Section 2(51) of Companies Act, 2013 “key managerial personal” in relations to a company, means –

  • The Chief Executive Officer of MD or Manager.
  • The Company Secretary
  • The Whole time-Director
  • The Chief Financial Officer and other officers as may be prescribed.

Question 85.
If investors are given periodic payments based on the net profit of the company, these payments are known as:
(a) Dividends
(b) Incentive payments
(c) Rewards
(d) Deposits
Answer:
(a) According to the Companies Act, 2013, the periodic payments based on the net profit earned by the company these payments are known as dividends.

Question 86.
A special resolution means a resolution passed by:
(a) 2/3rd majority
(b) Simple majority
(c) 2/5,h majority
(d) 3/4’h majority
Answer:
(d) A special resolution is a resolution of company’s shareholders which requires at least 3/4th of the notes cast by shareholders in famous of it in order to pass the resolution.

Question 87.
Acts of directors which are beyond their powers but within that provided in the memorandum of association of the company _________.
(a) Cannot be ratified and are void
(b) Can be ratified in general meeting
(c) Are illegal
(d) Are voidable at the option
Answer:
(b) The Board of Directors is entitled to exercise all such powers and do all such acts and things as the company is authorised to exercise and do. In the exercise of its powers the board is subjected to the provisions of the Company Act, the memorandum and the articles and any regulations, not inconsistent with them made by the company in General Meeting.

Question 88.
Board Meeting is the meeting of:
(a) Shareholders
(b) Class Meetings
(c) Employees
(d) Board of Directors
Answer:
(d) Meeting of Board of the Directors is known as Board Meetings

Question 89.
should be held every year.
(a) Board Meeting
(b) AGM
(c) EGM
(d) None
Answer:
(b) Annual Genera! Meeting (AGM) should be held every year.

Question 90.
If BoD’s is not appointed within 30 days then it shouid be filled within _________.
(a) 60 days
(b) 45 days
(c) 21 days
(d) 90 days
Answer:
(d) Late filing is allowed upto 90 days if BoD’s are appointed within 30 days of incorporation.

Question 91.
Custodian of the Foreign Exchanqe Reserves is:
(a) SBI
(b) Ministry of Corporate Affairs
(c) RBI
(d) Finance Minister.
Answer:
(c) RBI is act as custodian of the Foreign Exchange Reserves.

Question 92.
Total Managerial Remuneration should not exceed in public company?
(a) 11%
(b) 10%
(c) 12%
(d) 18%
Answer:
(a) Total Managerial Remuneration should not exceed 11% in public company.

Question 93.
Company Secretary is a :
(a) KMP
(b) Auditor of company
(c) MD of company
(d) Chairman of a company
Answer:
(a) Company Secretary is a Key Managerial Personnel (KMP).

Question 94.
Which of the following type of business are ordinarily carried out at annual general meeting of a company?
X. To declare dividend
Y. To recommend dividend
Z. To appoint the auditors
Z. To make calls an shares
(a) X and Y
(b) X and Z
(c) X, Z and W
(d) X,Y, Z and W
Answer:
(b) Following business are transacted are at AGM –

  • Financial Statement are presented for consideration.
  • Appointment or re-appointment of auditors ‘
  • Declaration of dividend
  • Appointment or re-appointment of auditors.

Thus only businesses given in point X and Z are transacted at AGM of the company.

Question 95.
Company Secretary is a _________.
(a) Key Managerial personnel
(b) One of the directors in the board
(c) Officer of the government
(d) All of these
Answer:
(a) As per Section 2(51) of Companies Act, 2013. “Key managerial personnel” in relation to a compa- means –

  • The CEO / MD or Manager
  • The Company Secretary
  • The Whole Time Director
  • The CFO and other officers as may be prescribed.

Question 96.
Small shareholders are holders holding shares of nominal value of not more than _________.
(a) ₹ 10,000
(b) ₹ 20,000
(c) ₹ 50,000
(d) ₹ 1,00,000
Answer:
(b) Small shareholders are holders holding shares of nominal value of not more than ₹ 20,000.

Question 97.
Company may furnish to the Registrar verification of registered office within _________ days.
(a) 45 days
(b) 15 days
(c) 30 days
(d) 60 days
Answer:
(c) Under Section 12, of the Companies Act, 2013, a company shall on the and from 15th days of incorporation and at all times there after, have registered office capable of receiving all communication and notice. The company can furnish to the registrar verification of registered office within 30 days of incorporation in the manner prescribed. The Rule 25(1) of Companies (Incorporation) Rules, 2014, verification of registered office shall be filed in Form no. INC 22.

Question 98.
Quorum for Board Meetings one-third of or two directors whichever is higher:
(a) Present strength
(b) Total strength
(c) Both ‘A’ or ‘B’
(d) None of Above
Answer:
(b) The Quorum of Board should be one-third of total strength or two directors whichever is higher as per Companies Act, 2013.

CS Foundation Business Environment and Law Notes

Indian Partnership Act, 1932 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Indian Partnership Act, 1932 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Indian Partnership Act, 1932 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Introduction:

  1. Law relating to partnership in India was first contained in Chapter XI of the Indian Contract Act, 1872.
  2. Indian Partnership Act, 1932, came into existence (with effect from) 1st October, 1932 except Section 69, which came into force on the 1st October, 1933.
  3. It extends to the whole of India except the State of Jammu and Kashmir.
  4. Later, on 1st October, 1932 Indian Partnership Act, 1932 came into force.
  5. This Act deals partly with the rights and duties of partners between themselves and partly with the legal relations between partners and third persons.
  6. It can be regarded as a branch of law relating to principal and agent.

Indian Partnership Act, 1932 CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Partnership:
As per Sec. 4,
“Partnership is the relation between persons who have agreed to share the profits of a business carried on by all or any of them acting for all.”

Essentials:

  • It must be a result of an agreement between two or more persons to do a business.
  • It is voluntary in nature.
  • Agreement must be to share the profits of business.
  • Business must be carried on by all or any of them acting for all.
  • All the above essentials must co-exists before any partnership comes into existence.
  • Relation of partnership arises from contract and not from status.
  • Agreement may be express or implied.
  • As per Sec. 2 (b),
  • “Business includes every trade, occupation and profession.”
  • Profit means the excess of return over advances.
  • Sharing of profits includes sharing of losses.
  • Sharing of profits is a prima facie evidence of the existence of partnership, this is not the conclusive test of the same.

True Test of Partnership:

  • The Relation of mutual agency is the conclusive test of partnership.
  • Mutual agency is the basic and most essential thing for partnership.
  • Sharing of profit also involves sharing of loss.
  • Sharing of profits is not a conclusive test of existence of partnership.
  • Every partner is a principal and agent for him self and others.
  • Agency relationship is the most important test of partnership.
    Indian Partnership Act, 1932 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 1

Indian Partnership Act, 1932 CS Foundation Business Partnership

Exceptions to Partnership Formation:

  • Minor may be admitted to benefits of partnership with the consent of all partners.
  • No consideration is required to create it.

Partners, Firm and Firm’s Name:

  • Persons who enter into partnership with one another are individually called partners and collectively called firm.
  • Firm cannot use the words “limited” in its name.

Partnership deed:

  • The Firm name and business to be carried on under that name
  • Names and Address of partners
  • Nature and Scope of business and address(s) of business place(s)
  • Commencement and Duration of partnership
  • The Capital and the contribution made by each partner
  • Provision for further capital and loans by partners to the firm.
  • Partner’s drawings
  • Interest on capital, loans, drawings and current account
  • Salaries, commission and remuneration to partners
  • Profit (or loss) sharing ratio of partners’
  • The keeping of proper books of accounts, inspection and audit, Bank accounts and their operation
  • The accounting period and the date on which that accounts are to be prepared
  • Rights, powers and duties of the partners
  • Whether and in what circumstances, notice of retirement or dissolution can be given by a partner
  • Provision that death or retirement of a partner will net
  • Valuation of goodwill on retirement, death, dissolution etc
  • The method of valuation of assets (and liabilities)
  • Provision for expulsion of a partner
  • Provision regarding the allocation of business activities to be performed by individual partners’
    The arbitration clause for the settlement of disputes.
  • It constitutes the mutual rights and obligations of partners in a written form.
  • It is also known as partnership agreement, constitution of partnership or articles of partnership etc.
  • It must be drafted and stamped as per the provisions of the Indian Stamp Act.

Classification of Partnership:
(1) Particular Partnership (Section 8): A person may become a partner with another person in a particular adventure or undertaking on for a particular period, such a partnership is called “Particular Partnership”.

(2) Partnership at Will (Section 7): ‘Where no provision is made by contract between the partners for the duration of their partnership or for the determination of their partnership, the partnership is called Partnership at Will”.

A partnership is deemed to be a partnership at Will when:

  • No fixed period has been agreed upon for the duration of partnership.
  • There is no provision made as to the determination of partnership in any other ways.

Co-ownership: “Co-ownership is a legal concept in a business where, there are only two ‘Co-owners’ share the legal ownership of a property”

  • Co-ownership necessarily not involve community of profit and loss
  • Co-owner can transfer his rights and interests to strangers without the consent of the others
  • Co-owner can ask for division of property in specie
  • Co-owner has no lien on the property.

Hindu Undivided Family / Hindu Joint Family Firm: A joint Hindu family firm is a business concern which operates under the provision of the Hindu Law and Hindu Succession Act, 1956.

  • Head of the family is known as Karta
  • Member of HUF are known as co-parceners
  • Liability of each partner is limited except Karta
  • A minor is also a co-parcener from the every day of his birth by virtue of his status
  • No registration of a family firm is necessary
  • No fixed share in business, it may be enlarged by death or reduce by birth in the family.

Company:
It is governed under Companies Act, 2013 and other previous Acts.
Indian Partnership Act, 1932 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 2

  • Separate legal entity
  • Limited liability
  • Perpetual succession
  • Separate property
  • Separate management.

Active/Actual/Ostensible/Working/Managing Partner:

  • He is not only contributing capital but also takes active part in the conduct of firm’s business.
  • He shares its profits and losses.
  • As per Sec. 12 (a),
  • “Subject to contract between the partners, every partner is entitled to take part in the conduct of business of firm.”
  • He has to give public notice of his retirement if he has to free himself from all liabilities.

Sleeping/Dormant Partner:

  • He only contributes capital and share profit/loss without taking active part in the firm’s business.
  • He has unlimited liability.
  • He can retire from the firm without giving any public notice.
  • He is entitled to access books and accounts of the firm, even though he performs no duty.

Sub Partner:

  • He is third person with whom a partner shares his profit.
  • He has no rights and duties towards the firm.

Nominal/Quasi Partner:

  • He only lends his name and reputation for the firm’s benefit without sharing any profit/loss.
  • He is known to outsiders as partners but actually he is not.
  • He is liable to third party for all his acts.
  • He is required to give public notice on retirement.

From duration point of view partnership may be:

  • Particular Partnership – i.e. for a particular purpose or for particular undertaking or single venture.
  • Partnership at will – No fixed duration or time period of partnership. It is dissolved by partner by giving notice in writing.

Partner in profits only:

  • He gets a share in profits but does not share any losses of the firm.
  • He has to bear all the liabilities to third party.

Partner by estoppel:

  • He is not a partner of the firm but conducts himself in such a way which leads third party to believe that he is a partner.
  • He is liable for all the debts to such third party.

Partner by holding out:

  • He is declared by others as a partner of the firm but does not contradict it immediately and remains silent.
  • He is liable to third party who is entering into contracts with firm on belief of he being the partner.
  • Holding out means ‘to represent’
  • It is based on the doctrine of Estoppel of Indian Evidence Act.

Exceptions:

  • It does not apply to cases of torts committed by partners.
  • It does not extends to bind the estate of a deceased partner.
  • It does not apply if such partner is declared as an insolvent.

Minor’s Position in Partnership:

  • Minor is a person who has not completed 18 years of age, thus cannot become a partner as he is not competent to contract.
  • As per Sec. 30,
  • He can however, be admitted to the benefits of partnership with the mutual consent of all partners.
  • No partnership firm can be formed only with minors.
  • A minor’s agreement is altogether void.
  • If a minor has to be admitted into the benefits of partnership, there must be atleast 2 major partners.

Rights of Minor:

  • Sec. 30(2): share profits of the firm.
  • Sec. 30(2): Inspect and copy the book of accounts of the firm.
  • Sec. 30(4): Can file a suit for accounts and his share in the firm but only when severing his connection with the firm.
  • Sec. 30(5): Admitted to the benefits to during his minority within six months of attaining the age of majority or when he comes to know of his being so admitted.
    Indian Partnership Act, 1932 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 3

Liabilities of Minor:
1. Sec. 30(3): His liability is limited to the extent of his share in the firm.

2. Sec. 30(3): He is liable for all acts of the firm but he is not personally liable.
(i) Within 6 months of his attaining majority or

(ii) On his obtaining the knowledge of he been admitted to the benefits of partnership, whichever is later he may give a public notice of not electing to become a partner.
Indian Partnership Act, 1932 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 4

Relation of Partners to one another:

  • It arises through an agreement which provides for the rights and duties of partners.
  • If articles are silent, rights and duties are governed by the Act.

Rights of Partners:

  • To take part in management. [Section (2) (a)]
  • To Express Opinion.
  • To Inspect and to take out copies of Books of Accounts.
  • To Share Profits equally.
  • To have Interest on capital.
  • To have Interest on Advances.
  • Right to be indemnified.
  • To have a joint share in the partnership property.
  • To enforce the proper use of property.
  • Right of Retirement.
  • To prevent the introduction of new partner.
  • Implied Authority.
  • Right to Dissolve.
  • Profits after retirement or death.

Duties and Liabilities of Partner:

  • To carry on the business of the firm to the Greatest Common Advantage.
  • Being diligent and honest.
  • Being just and faithful.
  • To render accounts and information.
  • To indemnify the firm.
  • Not to make any secret profits.
  • Not to hold and use property of the firm.
  • Not to start business in competition with the firm.
  • Not to receive any remuneration.
  • Not to transfer his interest.
  • To act within the scope of his authority.
  • To share losses.

Partnership Property (Sec. 14):

  • It is also known as “property of the firm”, “partnership assets”, “joint stock”, “common stock”, “joint estate:”
  • It represents the property to which all partners are entitled collectively.
  • Every partner is a joint owner of partnership property.
  • Every partner is entitled to hold and apply the same exclusively for business purpose.

It includes:

  • All property, rights and interests which partners may have brought into the common stock as their contribution.
  • All property, rights and interests which are acquired or purchased by the firm in the course of business.
  • Goodwill of the business.

Relevant Case Law:
Narayanappa V. Bhaskaia Krishnappa

A partner’s property being used for firm’s business, does not automatically makes it a firm’s property.
Relevant Case Law:
Lachhman Dass V. Mrs. Gulab Devi

Goodwill:

  • Goodwill is defined as the value of the reputation of a business house in respect of profits expected in future over and above the normal profits.
  • It is a partnership property.
  • In case of dissolution of firm, every partner has a right according to the deed in the absence of any agreement, to have a share in the goodwill on it being sold.
  • It can be sold separately, or along with other properties of the firm.

Buyers Rights include:

  • Representing himself in business continuation.
  • Maintaining his exclusive rights of business continuation.
  • Soliciting former customers and restraining the seller from it.

Changes in a Firm:

  • Sec. 31: when a new partner comes in i.e. when some partner or partners go out
  • Sec. 32: by retirement
  • Sec. 33: by expulsion
  • Sec. 34: by adjudication as an insolvent
  • Sec. 35: by death
  • Where partnership firm carries on the business other than the business for which it was originally formed.
  • Where partnership business is carried on after the expiry of the term fixed.

Rights and Duties of Partners after change in the Firm’s Constitution (Sec. 17):

  • If change occurs in any of the 3 ways mentioned above-rights and duties remains same.
  • If firm continues its business after the expiry of fixed term – rights and duties remains same so long they are consistent with the incidents of partnership at will.
  • If firm carries out ventures or undertakings other than for which it was formed, rights and duties for partners remain same as those in respect of original ventures.

Relation of Partners to Third Parties – As Agents of the firm (Sec. 18):

  • Every partner is the agent of the firm for the purpose of business of the firm.
  • Every partner is both the principal and agent.
  • The law of partnership is regarded as the branch of law of agency.

Act of Every Partner binds the firm and Other Partners unless:

  • Acting partner has no authority to act for the firm in such matter.
  • Person with whom he is dealing knows that he has no authority.
  • Believes such person to be a partner.

Authority of a Partner:
If refers to the capacity of a partner to bind the firm by his act.
Indian Partnership Act, 1932 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 5

Conditions for Implied Authority:

  • Act must relate to normal business of the firm.
  • Act must be done in the usual way of carrying on the firm’s business.
  • Act must be done in the firm’s name.

Acts within Implied Authority (Expenses authority):

  • To buy, sell and pledge goods on behalf of the firm.
  • To raise loans on Security of such assets.
  • To receive payments of debts due to the firm.
  • To accept, make and issue bill of exchange etc. on firm’s behalf.
  • To engage servants for the firm’s business.
  • To take on lease a premises on firm’s behalf.

Acts Beyond Implied Authority [Sec. 19(2)]:

  • Submission of dispute relating to business of firm to arbitration.
  • Opening a bank account on firm’s behalf in his own name.
  • Comprising or relinquishing any claim or portion of claim against third party by firm.
  • Withdrawing a suit or proceedings filed on behalf of firm.
  • Admitting any liability in a suit or proceedings against the firm
  • Transferring immovable property of the firm.
  • Entering into partnership on firm’s behalf.

Extension and Restriction of Partner’s Implied Authority (Sec. 20):

  • The partners may either extend or restrictive the implied authority of any partner by contract between them.
  • Third party is not effected by a secret limitation of a partner’s implied authority unless he had actual notice of it.
  • All partner’s consent is required for it.

Acts in Emergency (Sec. 21):
Subject to provisions of Sec 20, each partner binds the firm by all acts done in the case of emergency, with a view to protect the firm from any loss provided. As he has acted as a man of ordinary prudence.

Notice to an Acting Partner (Sec. 24):

  • Notice to a partner, who acts in a firm’s business, on matters relating to firm’s affairs, operates as a notice to the firm except in case of a fraud.
  • Notice must be actual and not constructive.

Liabilities to Third Parties (Sec. 25 to 27):

  • Sec. 25: Contractual Liability : Every partner is liable jointly and severally for all acts or omissions binding the firm while he is a partner.
  • Sec. 26: Liability for tort or wrongful act:(generally other partners are not liable for one partners torts but where tort is committed by authority of other partners then partners are liable)

The firm is liable to the same extent as the partner for any loss or injury caused to the third party by wrongful acts of partner, if they are done by partner acting –

  • in ordinary course of business
  • with partner’s authority.

Sec. 27: Liability for misappropriation by a partner:

  • When a partner, acting within his apparent authority, receives money or other property from a third person and misapplies it, or
  • Where a firm, in business course, received money or property from third party and is misapplied by a partner, while it is in firm’s custody is liable to make good the loss.

Liability of Incoming Partner [Sec. 31(2)]:

  • Liability of new partner ordinarily commences from the date of this admission.
  • He can also agree to be liable for obligations incurred prior to that date by the firm.
  • New firm constituted, may agree to assume liability for existing debts of old firm.
  • Creditors may agree to accept the new firm as their debtor and discharge the old partners.
  • Creditors consent is necessary.

Novation refers to a tripartite agreement between:

  1. Firm’s creditor
  2. Partners is existing at the time when debt was incurred.
  3. Incoming partner.

Liabilities of outgoing or Retiring Partner (Sec. 32):

  • Liability of such partner continues until a public notice of his retirement has been given.
  • He remains liable for the firm’s acts done before his retirement, unless there is any agreement made.
  • He may be discharged by novation.

Insolvency of a Partner (Sec. 34):

  • Such a partner ceases to be a partner on the date of the order of adjudication.
  • His estate ceases to be liable for any act of the firm done after that date of order.
  • Firm is also not liable for any act of such a partner after such date.

Death of a Partner (Sec. 35):
1. If the firm is not dissolved, the estate of deceased partner is not liable for act of the firm after his death.

2. Modes of Effecting Registration:

  • By Sending post, or
  • By delivering a statement in prescribed form to the Registrar of the area, in which any place of business of firm is situated or proposed to be situated.

Statement must include:

  • Firm’s name,
  • Principal place of business,
  • Other places of business,
  • Date of joining of each partner,
  • Partner’s full name and addresses
  • Firm’s duration.

3. Statement should be signed by all the partners.

4. Registrar on being satisfied, shall record this entry in his register of firms and shall file the statement.

5. Registrar then issues a certificate of Registration.

6. An unregistered firm is not an illegal association.

Effects of non-registration:
1. Indian Partnership Act does not make registration of partnership compulsory nor does it impose any penalty.

2. However, non-registration give rise to certain disabilities U/S 69:

  • Firm or any person on its behalf cannot bring action against third party for breach of contract, unless firm is registered and persons suing are shown in register of firms.
  • Neither firm nor any partner can claim set off if any suit is brought by the third party against the firm.
  • Partner of unregistered firm cannot bring any action against the firm or any partner of such firm.
  • Unregistered firm however can bring a suit for enforcing the right arising otherwise than out of contract.

Suits allowed by Act:

  1. Dissolution of a firm.
  2. Rendering accounts of a dissolved firm.
  3. Realisation of property of a dissolved firm.
  4. Set off of values not exceeding ? 100.
  5. Proceeding arising incidentally of value not exceeding ? 100.
  6. Firm not having business place in territories to which Indian Partnership Act extends.
  7. Realisation of property of insolvent partner.
  8. Firm having business place in areas exempted from the application of chapter VII of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932.

Relevant Case Laws:

  • Prithvi Singh V. Hasan Ali
  • Kashav Lai V. Chuni Lai

Dissolution of Partnership Firm (Sec. 39):

  • It takes place when the relationship between all the partners of the firm is so broken so as to close the business of the firm.
  • As a result, firm’s assets are sold and its liabilities are paid off.

Dissolution of Partnership:
It takes place when there is an extinction of relationship between same partners only.

Modes of Dissolution of Partnership:

  • Sec. 42 (a): By expiry of fixed term for which the partnership was formed.
  • Sec. 42 (b): By completion of venture.
  • Sec. 42 (c): By death of a partner.
  • Sec. 42 (d): By insolvency of a partner.
  • Sec. 42 (e): By retirement of a partner.

Modes of Dissolution of Firm:

  • Sec. 40: Result of an agreement between all partners.
  • Sec. 41 (a): By adjudication of all partners, or declaration of all partners 5 as insolvent except one.
  • Sec. 41 (b): By firm’s business becoming unlawful. Subject to agreement between parties, on happening of certain , contingent events.
  • Sec. 43: In case of partnership at will, by a partner giving notice of his intention to dissolve the firm. Firm dissolves from the date mentioned in the notice. If no date is mentioned, then from date of communication of notice.

Sec. 44: By court intervention in case of:

  1. A partner becoming unsound mind.
  2. Permanent incapacity of partners to perform his duties.
  3. Misconduct of partners effecting the business.
  4. Willful or persistent breaches of agreement by a partner.
  5. Transfer or sale of whole interest of a partner.
  6. Improbability of business being carried on except at a loss.
  7. Court being satisfied on other just and equitable grounds.

Consequences of Dissolution:
1. Continuing liability until public notice:
Partners continue to be liable for any act done by them, done on behalf of firm until public notice of dissolution is given.

2. Sec. 46: Rights to enforce winding up:
Partner or his representative have a right against others, on dissolution.

  • Apply firm’s property in payment of firm’s debt.
  • Distribute surplus amongst all partners.

3. Sec. 47: Continuing authority of partners:
Authority of partners continue:

  • So for as necessary to wind up the firm,
  • To complete the pending transactions till the dissolution date.

4. Sec. 48: Settlement of partnership accounts:
(i) Losses including capital deficiencies:

  • Are first paid out of profits
  • Then out of capital.
  • Lastly by partners in their profit sharing ratio.

(ii) Assets including partner’s contribution are applied in following order:

  • In paying debts of third parties
  • In paying advances of each partner
  • In paying capital of each partner
  • The residue is distributed among partners in their profit sharing ratio.

If the assets are not sufficient, the partners have to bear the loss in equal shares.

Note: This rule is known as Garner V. Murray

5. Sec. 50: Personal profits earned after dissolution:
If surviving partners along with the representatives of deceased partner carry on firm’s business and earn some personal profits, it must be accounted for by them to other partners.

6. Sec. 51: Return on premium of partnership’s premature dissolution: On dissolution of partnership earlier than fixed period in all cases except:

  • death of a partner.
  • misconduct of partner paying premium.
  • subject to agreement containing no provision for return of premium, the partner paying premium is entitled for the return of a reasonable part of premium.

Specific Performance of Partnership Agreement:
This is not allowed, as the working of a partnership depends upon the personal inclination of the partners.

Relevant Case Law:
Scott V. Raymont

Suit for Libel or Slander:

  • It means a libel or slander of its partners.
  • Such partners themselves file such suit.
  • A firm cannot bring such suit.

Relevant Case Law:
PK Oswal Hosiery Mills V. Tilak Chand

Limited Liability Partnership:
Nature of LLP:

  • Hybrid of Companies & Partnerships: Benefit of limited liability of company and flexibility of partnership.
  • Separate Legal Entity: Continue its existence irrespective of changes in partners.
  • LLP itself can enter into contracts and hold properties.
  • Partner’s liability limited to the agreed contribution.
  • LLP concept exist in UK, US, Australia, Singapore & various Gulf Countries.
  • Based on Indian LLP Act based on UK LLP Act, 2000 and Singapore LLP Act, 2005.
  • Professional & non-professional (Businessman) both can set up LLP.

Advantages of LLP:

  • Separate legal entity
  • Easy to establish
  • Flexibility without imposing detailed legal and procedural requirements.
  • Perpetual existence irrespective of changes in partners.
  • Internationally renowned form of business in comparison to company.
  • No requirement of minimum capital contribution.
  • No restriction as to maximum number of partners.
  • LLP & its partners are distinct from each other.
  • Partner are not liable for Act of other partners.
  • Personal assets of the partners are not expect in case of fraud.
  • Easy to dissolve or wind-up.
  • No requirement to maintain statutory records except Books of Accounts.
  • Less Cost of Formation (Compared to company).

Disadvantages of LLP:

  • LLP cannot raise funds from public.
  • Any act of partner without the knowledge of other partners may bind the up.
  • Under some cases, liability may extend to personal assets of partners.
  • No separation of Management from owners.

Liability of Partners:

  • There shall be personal liability of a partner for his own wrongful act or omission.
  • A partner shall not be personally liable for wrongful act or omission of any other partner of the limited liability partnership.

Partner as Agent:

  • Every partner of LLP is agent of the limited liability partnership for the purpose of the business of the limited liability partnership.
  • A partner is not agent of other partners of LLP.

Contribution:

  • A contribution of a partner may consist of tangible, movable or immovable or intangible property or other benefit to the limited liability partnership.
  • Money, promissory notes, other agreements to contribute cash or property, contracts for services performed, contract of services to be performed are valid contribution.

Designated Partner:

  • Designated partners are the partners who manages day to day affairs of LLP.
  • Every LLP shall have at least two Designated Partners.
  • Designated partners shall be individual.
  • At least one of these designated partners shall be resident of India.

Partner:

  • Any individual or body corporate may be a partner in a limited liability partnership.
  • A person may be admitted as partner in the LLP in accordance with LLP agreement of that LLP.
  • Usually name of partner is mentioned in LLP agreement.

Eligibility to be a Partner:

  • On the incorporation of a limited liability partnership, the person who subscribed their names to the incorporation document shall be its partners.
  • Any other person may become a partner of the limited liability partnership by and in accordance with the limited liability agreement.

Disqualification :

  1. he has been found to be of unsound mind by a court of competent jurisdiction and finding is in force.
  2. he is undischarged insolvent or
  3. he has applied to be adjudicated as an insolvent and his application is pending.

Number of Partners:
Every LLP shall have at least two partners.

Name of LLP:
Every limited liability partnership shall have either the words “Limited liability partnership” or acronym “LLP” as the last words of its name.
Indian Partnership Act, 1932 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 6

Contents of Incorporation Documents:

  • Be in a form as may be prescribed.
  • State the name of LLP.
  • State the proposed business of the LLP.
  • State the address of the registered office of LLP.
  • State the name and address of each partner.
  • State the name and address of the designated partner.
  • Contain such other information concerning the proposed LLP.

Registration of LLP/Incorporation by Registration/ Certificate of Incorporation:

  • An LLP when registered becomes incorporated.
  • The Certificate given by registrar in which the name of the LLP is specified is known as Incorporation Certificate.
  • The Incorporation Certificate shall be conclusive evidence that the limited liability partnership is incorporated by the name specified therein.

Effect of Registration:

  • Suing and being sued
  • acquiring, owning, holding and developing or disposing of property, whether movable or immovable tangible or intangible.
  • having a common seal, if it decides to have one.
  • doing and suffering such other acts and things as bodies corporate may lawfully do and suffer.

Registered Office:
Every LLP shall have a registered office to which all communications and notices may be addressed and where they shall be received.
Indian Partnership Act, 1932 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 7

Holding Out:
Meaning : to represent

  • Any person holding off as partner is liable to any person who has on the faith of any such representation given credit to the limited liability partnership.
  • The liability of LLP shall be without prejudice to the liability of the person so representing himself or represented to be a partner.

Legal Representative of a Partner shall not be Liable:

  • Where after a partners death the business is continued in the same limited liability partnership name.
  • The continued use of that name or of the deceased partner’s name as a part thereof shall not of itself make his legal representative or his estate liable for any act of the LLP done after his death.

Unlimited Liability in case of Fraud:
Liability of LLP and its fraudulent partner shall be unlimited, if any out carried out by a limited liability partnership or any of its partners,

  • with in ent to defraud creditor or any ether person.
  • for any fraudulent purpose.

Partner’s Transferable Interest:
The right of a partner:

  • to a share of the profits and losses is of the LLP.
  • to receive distribution in accordance with the LLP agreement.

In a same manner, a Partner may transfer all or any of these rights wholly or in part.

No transfer of Management or Control:
The transfer of transferable right does not the transferee or assignee :

  • to participate in the management or conduct of the activities of the limited liability partnership.
  • Access information concerning the transactions of the limited liability partnership.

Winding up and Dissolution:

  • The winding up of a limited liability partnership may be either voluntary or by tribunal.
  • The LLP, so wound up may be dissolved.

Winding up by Tribunal:
A limited liability partnership may be wound up by the Tribunal if;

  • Decides that limited liability partnership would wound up by tribunal.
  • For a period of more than six months, the number of partners reduced below two.
  • Unable to pay its debts.
  • Has acted against the interests of the sovereignty & integrity of India.
  • Has made a default in filling with the Register of Statement of Account and solvency or annual return for any five consecutive financial year.
  • If the Tribunal is of that is just and equitable that the LLP be would up.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
The objective of the Partnership Act, 1932 is to define and amend the law relating to:
(a) Partnership
(b) Joint Ventures
(c) Business collaborations
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(a) Partnership

Question 2.
The Partnership Act, 1932 came into force on ___________.
(a) 1st day of April 1932
(b) 1st day of October 1932
(c) 1st day of January 1932
(d) 31st day of December 1932.
Answer:
(b) 1st day of October 1932

Question 3.
According to the Partnership Act, “Business” includes ___________.
(a) Trade
(b) Occupation
(c) Profession
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) All of the above.

Question 4.
The relationship of Partnership arises out of ___________.
(a) Contract
(b) Status
(c) Operation of law
(d) Contract and status.
Answer:
(a) Contract

Question 5.
The name under which the partnership business is carried on, is called ___________.
(a) Trademark
(b) Partnership firm
(c) Firm Name
(d) Registered Name
Answer:
(c) Firm Name

Question 6.
Which of these are not necessary for constituting a partnership ?
(a) Sharing of business profits
(b) Mutual agency
(c) Two or more persons
(d) Written contract.
Answer:
(d) Written contract.

Question 7.
Liability of a partner is ___________.
(a) Limited to the extent of his share of the business profits.
(b) Unlimited
(c) Limited to the extent of capital
(d) Limited to the extent of loan given to the firm.
Answer:
(b) Unlimited

Question 8.
The true test of partnership is ___________.
(a) Mutual agency
(b) Profit sharing
(c) Agreement
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(a) Mutual agency

Question 9.
Partnership agreements may be ___________.
(a) Expressed
(b) Implied
(c) Neither (a) nor (b)
(d) Either (a) or (b)
Answer:
(d) Either (a) or (b)

Question 10.
Sharing of profits implies sharing otherwise.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) True

Question 11.
A partner who has not entered into a partnership agreement and conducts or represents himself as a partner in a firm is called ___________.
(a) Sleeping partner
(b) Partner by estoppel
(c) Working partner
(d) Sub-partner
Answer:
(b) Partner by estoppel

Question 12.
Partners are bound to render true accounts & full information of all things affecting the firm to ___________.
(a) Any partner
(b) Legal Representative of any partner
(c) Either (a) or (b)
(d) To the Government.
Answer:
(c) Either (a) or (b)

Question 13.
Every partner is bound to perform to his duties, in the conduct of the business.
(a) Systematically
(b) Diligently
(c) Sincerely
(d) Effectively.
Answer:
(b) Diligently

Question 14.
If there is a contract that the partner shall not carry on the business other than that of the firm while he is a partner, such contract is ___________.
(a) Valid
(b) Void
(c) Voidable at the option of the partner
(d) Voidable at the option of the firm.
Answer:
(a) Valid

Question 15.
Subject to contract between the partners, the ratio of profits or loss sharing will be ___________.
(a) Equal
(b) In the ratio of capital contribution
(c) In the ratio of loans given, if any
(d) In the ratio given by the Income Tax Act.
Answer:
(a) Equal

Question 16.
Partnership property vests hands of ___________.
(a) In the partner of the firm
(b) In the firm
(c) In the continuing partners of the firm
(d) In the retiring partners of the firm.
Answer:
(b) In the firm

Question 17.
Which of the following conditions is not necessary for the exercise of implied authority ___________.
(a) The act must relate to the business of the firm
(b) The act must be done in the firm’s business name
(c) The act must be done in the usual way of carrying on the firm’s business
(d) The act must be done in an emergency.
Answer:
(d) The act must be done in an emergency.

Question 18.
To bind the firm under-Implied Authority, the act must be done in the of carrying on the firm’s business.
(a) Regular way
(b) Usual way
(c) Routine way
(d) Extraordinary way.
Answer:
(b) Usual way

Question 19.
Which of these acts are within the implied authority of a partner?
(a) Acquire immovable property on behalf of the firm.
(b) Borrowing money on behalf of the firm.
(c) Enter into partnership on behalf of the firm.
(d) Transfer immovable property belonging to the firm.
Answer:
(b) Borrowing money on behalf of the firm.

Question 20.
A third party is not affected by the limitation of implied authority unless he has actual notice of it.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) True

Question 21.
Acts done by a partner in an emergency do not bind the firm if they do not form part of the partner’s implied authority.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(c) False

Question 22.
“Notice to acting partner is notice to firm.” This statement is based on the principle of ___________.
(a) Convenience
(b) Convention
(c) Mutual agency among partners
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(c) Mutual agency among partners

Question 23.
For all acts of the firm done while he is a partner, every partner is ___________.
(a) Jointly liable
(b) Severally liable
(c) Jointly and severally liable
(d) Not liable at all.
Answer:
(c) Jointly and severally liable

Question 24.
Which of the following partners are not liable in relation to the firm?
(a) Partner by holding out
(b) Working partner
(c) Sub – partner
(d) Partner by estoppel.
Answer:
(c) Sub – partner

Question 25.
When a partner retires from a’firm but does not give a public notice to this effect, he shall be liable as a partner by holding out until he issues a public notice.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) True

Question 26.
For the acts of the firm ___________.
(a) Minor is personally liable
(b) Minor’s share is liable
(c) Guardian is personally liable
(d) There is no liability at all for or on behalf of the minor.
Answer:
(b) Minor’s share is liable

Question 27.
When the minor elects not to become a partner he is entitled to sue the partners for his share in the profits and property.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) True

Question 28.
A person can be admitted into an already existing firm. Only with the v consent of all the existing partners.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) True

Question 29.
In case of partnership at will, a retiring partner has to give a written notice.
(a) To the firm
(b) To the working partners
(c) To ail the partners
(d) To all partners other than working partners.
Answer:
(c) To ail the partners

Question 30.
Where a partner in a firm is adjudicated as insolvent ___________.
(a) The firm is automatically dissolved
(b) The firm is not automatically dissolved
(c) The firm is also deemed insolvent
(d) The firm becomes an illegal association.
Answer:
(b) The firm is not automatically dissolved

Question 31.
The firm is generally dissolved on the death of a partner.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) True

Question 32.
No public notice is required on the death of a partner.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None Of the above.
Answer:
(a) True

Question 33.
Dissolution of partnership between all the partners of a firm is called ___________.
(a) Dissolution of partnership
(b) Dissolution of firm
(c) Dissolution of firm name
(d) Reconstitution of firm.
Answer:
(b) Dissolution of firm

Question 34.
Which of the following do not constitute ground for dissolution by court?
(a) Insanity of the partner
(b) Incapacitation of partner
(c) Admission of minor to the benefits of partnership
(d) Heavy losses of the firm.
Answer:
(c) Admission of minor to the benefits of partnership

Question 35.
Upon dissolution of firm, losses, including deficiencies of capital, shall be paid first out of profits and then ___________.
(a) Out of pro its
(b) Out of capital
(c) By the partners individually in their profit sharing ratio.
(d) By the
Answer:
(b) Out of capital

Question 36.
The accounting rule in respect of loss arising due to insolvency of a partner is dealt within ___________.
(a) Derry vs Peek
(b) Carlill vs carbolic Smoke Ball Co.
(c) Garner vs Murray
(d) Chinnaiah vs Ramaiya.
Answer:
(c) Garner vs Murray

Question 37.
A partner is entitled to return of premium even when the dissolution is mainly due to his own misconduct.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(c) False

Question 38.
Upon dissolution, the goodwill of the firm ___________.
(a) Must be sold separately
(b) Must be sold along with the assets to the firm only
(c) May be sold either separately or along with the assets of the firm
(d) Cannot be sold at all.
Answer:
(c) May be sold either separately or along with the assets of the firm

Question 39.
A partnership firm has to be compulsorily registered in order to commerce its business.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(c) False

Question 40.
Application for Registration of firms should be signed by ___________.
(a) All the partners or their agents
(b) Majority of the partners or their agents
(c) All working partners or their agents
(d) All minor partners.
Answer:
(a) All the partners or their agents

Question 41.
An unregistered firm cannot file a suit against to enforce any right arising from a contract.
(a) Partner
(b) Minor admitted to benefits of partnership
(c) Third party
(d) Out going partner.
Answer:
(c) Third party

Question 42.
Non – registration of the firm does not affect the right of the firm to institute a suit or claim of set – off not exceeding ___________.
(a) ₹ 100
(b) ₹ 1,000
(c) ₹ 10,000
(d) ₹ 50,000
Answer:
(a) ₹ 100

Question 43.
Provisions relating to partnership contracts are laid down in ___________.
(a) Indian Partnership Act, 1932
(b) Indian Partnership Act, 1962
(c) Indian Contract Act, 1872
(d) Indian Partnership Act, 1942
Answer:
(a) Indian Partnership Act, 1932

Question 44.
The least number of persons required to form partnership are ___________.
(a) 2
(b) 1
(c) 10
(d) 4
Answer:
(a) 2

Question 45.
Persons who have entered into partnership with one another are called ___________.
(a) Partners
(b) Co-partners
(c) Co-owners
(d) Members
Answer:
(a) Partners

Question 46.
The ‘firm name’ should not be such which ___________.
(a) Violates the rules regarding trade name/goodwill
(b) A name implying the sanction of patronage of Government
(c) Which uses ‘limited’ as part of its name
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 47.
Which of the following association cannot form a partnership ___________.
(a) Two natural persons
(b) A natural and a artificial person
(c) Two corporation
(d) Two minors
Answer:
(d) Two minors

Question 48.
The term ‘business’ includes every ___________.
(a) Trade
(b) Occupation
(c) Profession
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 49.
___________ means the excess of returns over advance
(a) Losses
(b) Profit
(c) Sales
(d) Goodwill
Answer:
(b) Profit

Question 50.
The Prima facie evidence of the existence of partnership is ___________
(a) Existence of an agreement
(b) Association of two or more partners
(c) Carry on business
(d) Sharing of profits
Answer:
(a) Existence of an agreement

Question 51.
The conclusive test for partnership is ___________.
(a) Sharing of Profits
(b) Mutual Agency
(c) Association of Persons
(d) Agreement
Answer:
(b) Mutual Agency

Question 52.
Exceptions to the definition of partnership are
(a) A minor may be admitted to the benefits of partnership
(b) No consideration is required to create partnership
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 53.
A written agreement (properly drafted and stamped) of partnership to avoid future disputes is called:
(a) Partnership deed
(b) Partnership Agreement
(c) Articles of Partnership
(d) All of above
Answer:
(d) All of above

Question 54.
Which of the following must give a public notice of his retirement from the firm in order to absolve (free) himself from liability of the firm
(a) Sleeping partner
(b) Partner in profit only
(c) Active partner
(d) Sub-partner
Answer:
(c) Active partner

Question 55.
Every partner has an implied authority to bind the firm by following acts
(a) Open a bank account on behalf of the firm in his own name
(b) By purchasing goods for the firm
(c) Enter into a partnership on behalf of the firm
(d) Acquire immovable property on behalf of the firm
Answer:
(b) By purchasing goods for the firm

Question 56.
The estate of a partner who dies or became insolvent is not liable for partnership debts contracted after the date of death or insolvency ___________.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Not stated in the Partnership Act
(d) Executors of the deceased partner are liable
Answer:
(a) True

Question 57.
Which of the following statement is not true?
(a) The dissolution of partnership between all the partners of a firm is called the dissolution of the firm
(b) All the partners are jointly and severally liable for the acts of the firm
(c) The dissolution of firm leads to discontinuation of the partnership business
(d) The dissolution of partnership means the dissolution of firm as well.
Answer:
(c) The dissolution of firm leads to discontinuation of the partnership business

Question 58.
A partnership cannot be for the following:
(a) For a fixed period
(b) For a particular venture
(c) Where no provision is made by contract between the partners for duration
(d) For carrying on a business for charity purpose
Answer:
(d) For carrying on a business for charity purpose

Question 59.
A partnership is deemed to be a ‘partnership at will’ ___________.
(a) When no fixed period has been agreed upon
(b) When there is provision made as to the determination of partnership in any other way
(c) When death or retirement does not affect the existence of such partnership
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 60.
The Indian Partnership Act, 1932 contemplates the following changes in constitution of firm ___________.
(a) Change in the duration of a firm
(b) A new partner retires
(c) A partner dies
(d) A new partner is admitted
Answer:
(a) Change in the duration of a firm

Question 61.
A change in constitution of a firm takes place when ___________.
(a) A partner is adjudicated as an insolvent
(b) A partner retires from a firm
(c) A partner dies
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 62.
Property of the firm includes:
(a) Assets acquired in the course of business with money belonging to the firm
(b) Assets jointly owned by partners which are used for purpose of partnership business
(c) Goodwill
(d) Both (a) and (c)
Answer:
(d) Both (a) and (c)

Question 63.
How can a dissolution of the firm come into existence?
(a) By mutual agreement
(b) By insolvency of all partners
(c) By business becoming illegal
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 64.
Following are not the effect of non-registration of firm ___________.
(a) Each partner can sue each other or the firm
(b) No third party can be sued by a non-registered firm
(c) A firm can bring a suit to enforce a right arising otherwise out of contract
(d) A partner filing a suit to compel other partner to join in the registration of firm
Answer:
(c) A firm can bring a suit to enforce a right arising otherwise out of contract

Question 65.
Sharing of profits is a conclusive test of partnership ___________.
(a) True
(b) Partly true
(c) False
(d) Partly false
Answer:
(c) False

Question 66.
There can be no specific performance of a partnership agreement ___________.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Can’t say
(d) Allowed in certain conditions
Answer:
(a) True

Question 67.
By the expiry of the fixed term for which the partnership was joined is known as ___________.
(a) Partnership at will
(b) Particulars partnership
(c) None of the above
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(b) Particulars partnership

Question 68.
From the following which of these are the kinds of a partner:
(a) Working partner
(b) Sleeping or dormant partner
(c) Nominal partner
(d) Both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) Both (b) and (c)

Question 69.
He is only entitled to his agreed share and can inspect books of account of the firm are related with ___________.
(a) Rights of unsound mind person
(b) Rights of nominal partner
(c) Rights of minor
(d) Rights of sleeping partner
Answer:
(c) Rights of minor

Question 70.
From the following what are the contents of partnership deed:
(a) The firm name and business to be carried on under that name
(b) Name and address of partners
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 71.
The partnership deed must be properly drafted and stamped according to the provision of:
(a) Indian Partnership Act
(b) Indian Stamp Act
(c) Income Tax Act
(d) The Companies Act
Answer:
(b) Indian Stamp Act

Question 72.
Minorcan be a partner in a newly formed firm. This statement is ___________.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly true
(d) Partly false
Answer:
(b) False

Question 73.
Partners agree to share ___________ of business.
(a) Liabilities of a firm
(b) Assets of the firm
(c) Profits and losses
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Profits and losses

Question 74.
___________ is the essential feature for formation of partnership.
(a) Agreement
(b) Memorandum
(c) Relation
(d) All of above
Answer:
(a) Agreement

Question 75.
Which of the following partners are not liable in ‘relation to the firm’?
(a) Partner by holding out
(b) Working partner
(c) Sub partner
(d) partner by estoppel
Answer:
(c) Sub partner

Question 76.
A partner of an unregistered firm can sue for ___________ of the firm.
(a) Goodwill
(b) Share in property
(c) Dissolution
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Dissolution

Question 77.
Partnership is classified in ___________ categories.
(a) One
(b) Two
(c) Three
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) Two

Question 78.
At the time of retirement, contentment is important in ___________.
(a) Partnership at will
(b) Hindu Joint Family
(c) Particular Partnership
(d) Both (b) & (c)
Answer:
(b) Hindu Joint Family

Question 79.
A partnership is deemed to be partnership at will when there is ___________.
(a) No fixed period & no provision
(b) Fixed time period & purpose
(c) Fixed purpose & no fixed period
(d) Fixed time period & no provision
Answer:
(a) No fixed period & no provision

Question 80.
‘Holding Out’ means ___________.
(a) Honour of firm
(b) To represent
(c) To sacrifice
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) To represent

Question 81.
The general law of agency is incorporated in ___________.
(a) Law of property
(b) Law of co-ownership
(c) Law of partnership
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Law of partnership

Question 82.
Which type of firm arises as a result of status ___________.
(a) Co-ownership
(b) Articles of partnership
(c) Hindu Joint Family Firm
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Hindu Joint Family Firm

Question 83.
Number of partners in Hindu Joint Family Firm ___________.
(a) 10
(b) 20
(c) No limit
(d) Depends on Karta
Answer:
(c) No limit

Question 84.
A partnership firm cannot be formed if the partners are ___________.
(a) Only major
(b) Oniy minors
(c) Two major one minor
(d) None
Answer:
(b) Oniy minors

Question 85.
Which type of partner is not personally liable..
(a) Active
(b) Dormant
(c) Nominal
(d) Minor
Answer:
(d) Minor

Question 86.
The implied authority of a partner is termed as ___________.
(a) Ostensible Authority
(b) Tangible Authority
(c) Non-apparent Authority
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Ostensible Authority

Question 87.
Which type of partner must give public notice of his retirement ___________.
(a) Active
(b) Sleeping
(c) Nominal
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(a) Active

Question 88.
A change in constitution of a firm takes place when ___________.
(a) A partner is adjudicated as an insolvent
(b) A partner transfer his interest
(c) Both (a) & (b) true
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) A partner is adjudicated as an insolvent

Question 89.
Registration is not required in which type of firm ___________.
(a) Company
(b) Partnership
(c) H J.F.
(d) both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) both (b) and (c)

Question 90.
Which type of partner do not participate in functioning of business ___________.
(a) Ostensible Partner
(b) Active Partner
(c) Sub-Partner
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 91.
Value of reputation of a business is ___________.
(a) Capital
(b) Interest
(c) Goodwill
(d) Debt
Answer:
(c) Goodwill

Question 92.
A partner who only give their name to business is ___________.
(a) Partner by Estoppel
(b) Dormant
(c) Nominal
(d) Ostensible
Answer:
(c) Nominal

Question 93.
When a partner agrees to share his profit in firm with a third person, that person is called ___________.
(a) Dormant
(b) Sub partner
(c) Nominal
(d) Partner in profit only
Answer:
(b) Sub partner

Question 94.
In a firm every partner is a/an ___________ of the rest of partner.
(a) Manager
(b) Friend
(c) Agent
(d) Unknown
Answer:
(c) Agent

Question 95.
Goodwill is a/an ___________.
(a) Tangible Asset
(b) Intangible Asset
(c) Liquid Asset
(d) vesting Asset
Answer:
(b) Intangible Asset

Question 96.
Who is personally liable in HUF firm ___________.
(a) Co-parcener
(b) Karta
(c) Both (a) & (b)
(d) Minor
Answer:
(b) Karta

Question 97.
Valuation of Goodwill in firm may arise ___________.
(a) When a firm is amalgamated
(b) When a partner retires or dies
(c) When the business is sold
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 98.
On dissolution, if the assets are not sufficient the partner have to bear ___________.
(a) Investment of Capital
(b) Outside Creditor
(c) Loss in equal shares
(d) Both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) Both (b) and (c)

Question 99.
When the partner becomes of unsound mind then ___________.
(a) There will be no effect in firm
(b) There can be dissolution of firm
(c) No dissolution of firm
(d) All of these
Answer:
(c) No dissolution of firm

Question 100.
In dissolution of firm, partnership among all partners ___________.
(a) Exists
(b) No Longer exists
(c) Both (a) & (b) true
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) No Longer exists

Question 101.
Court will dismiss the case if ___________.
(a) Registration is not done before the suit
(b) Registration is done before the suit
(c) Partner become insolvent
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Registration is not done before the suit

Question 102.
The implied authority is subject to which condition ___________.
(a) The act must be done in unusual way
(b) The act must be done in name of partner
(c) Third party does not believe him to be a partner
(d) The act must be done in the name of firm
Answer:
(d) The act must be done in the name of firm

Question 103.
According to section 72 of Act, a partner should give express notice before his ___________ to protect himself from liability.
(a) Admission
(b) Retirement
(c) Death
(d) Insolvency
Answer:
(b) Retirement

Question 104.
The right of buyer in Goodwill is ___________
(a) Not to represent himself in continuing the business
(b) To give details of his personal property.
(c) Solicit former customers of the business.
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(c) Solicit former customers of the business.

Question 105.
According to rule, Garner v/s Murray deficiency of ;nsolvent partner will be allocated in ___________.
(a) Profit sharing ratio
(b) Loss sharing ratio
(c) Capital ratio agreed before dissolution
(d) Equal loss sharing ratio
Answer:
(c) Capital ratio agreed before dissolution

Question 106.
Where there is an extinction of relationship between some of partners, it is only ___________.
(a) Dissolution of firm
(b) Dissolution of partnership
(c) Partnership Deed
(d) Dissolution of firm and partnership both
Answer:
(b) Dissolution of partnership

Question 107.
In Hindu Joint Family firm, share of co-parcener is ___________.
(a) Equal to Karta
(b) According to profit sharing ratio
(c) Not fixed
(d) In ratio of capital invested
Answer:
(c) Not fixed

Question 108.
The maximum number of members for a private company is ___________.
(a) 55
(b) 200
(c) 45
(d) 60
Answer:
(b) 200

Question 109.
A Hindu joint family business is governed by which law ___________.
(a) Hindu Law
(b) Indian Partnership Act
(c) Company Law
(d) Family Law
Answer:
(a) Hindu Law

Question 110.
The capacity of a partner to bind the firm by his act is known as ___________.
(a) Duties of Partner’s
(b) Rights of Partner’s
(c) Authority of Partner
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Authority of Partner

Question 111.
A partnership which is entered for a single adventure or undertaking is called a ___________.
(a) Specific partnership
(b) Particular partnership
(c) Partnership at will
(d) Partnership by estoppel
Answer:
(b) Particular partnership

Question 112.
Which one of the following statement is not true regarding a partnership at will ___________.
(a) It is affected by the death o’retirement of the partners
(b) There is no fixed period regarding its duration
(e) It can be dissolved by any of the partners
(d) No provision is made for determination of partnership in any other way
Answer:
(a) It is affected by the death o’retirement of the partners

Question 113.
Which of the following statement is not true regarding a minor?
(a) He can inspect the books of accounts of the firm
(b) He is not personally liable to the third parties
(c) On attaining majority, he has to choose that he wants to become a partner within the period of one year
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) On attaining majority, he has to choose that he wants to become a partner within the period of one year

Question 114.
The law of partnership is also called as the branch of ___________.
(a) Law of agency
(b) Law of contract
(c) Law of Association
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(a) Law of agency

Question 115.
The implied authority of a partner is also called as ___________.
(a) Ostensible Authority
(b) Apparent Authority
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Ostensible Authority

Question 116.
What are the condition, the implied authority of partnership is subject to ___________.
(a) The act must be done in the normal course of business
(b) Consent of all the partners must be obtained before performing the act
(c) Both (a) & (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) The act must be done in the normal course of business

Question 117.
Which one of the following acts of a partner does not come under his implied authority?
(a) Engaging and discharging employees
(b) Selling the fixed assets of the firm
(c) Purchasing goods of the firm
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(b) Selling the fixed assets of the firm

Question 118.
Which of the following statement is NOT true?
(a) The estate of the deceased partner is not liable for debts contracted after his death
(b) An incoming partner is not liable for debts incurred before his joining
(c) The other partners are not liable for fraud committed by a partner in the course of management of the business
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) The other partners are not liable for fraud committed by a partner in the course of management of the business

Question 119.
The partnership will not be dissolved under which of the following circumstances.
(a) By the death of the partner
(b) By retirement of partner
(c) When the business is in heavy loss
(d) By the completion of venture
Answer:
(c) When the business is in heavy loss

Question 120.
Which of the following statement is False?
(a) A partnership can be dissolved by mutual agreement
(b) A partnership firm will be dissolved if only one partner is solvent
(c) A partnership at will can be dissolved by any partner at any time
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(d) None of the above

Question 121.
As per Garner V/s Murray Rule, the deficiency attributable to the insolvency of a partner must be borne by other partner in ___________.
(a) In the ratio of profit
(b) In the ratio of capital
(c) It should be borne equally
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) In the ratio of capital

Question 122.
Which of the following statement is not true in context to an unregistered firm?
(a) The partner of the firm cannot sue each other
(b) The partnership firm cannot sue the third party
(c) The third party cannot sue the firm
(d) The partner of the firm cannot sue the firm
Answer:
(c) The third party cannot sue the firm

Question 123.
Which of the following statement is False?
(a) There can be no specific performance of a partnership agreement
(b) The registration of partnership is compulsory as per the Partnership Act, 1932
(c) The proceeds of sale of goodwill is to be divided in the profit sharing ratio
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(b) The registration of partnership is compulsory as per the Partnership Act, 1932

Question 124.
Which of the following is NOT an essential of a partnership?
(a) Association of two or more persons .
(b) Agreement
(c) Sharing of profits
(d) Registration of partnership
Answer:
(d) Registration of partnership

Question 125.
When a person behaves in a manner that he is a partner of the firm but actually he is not a partner, then it is called as
(a) Nominal partnership
(b) Partnership by estoppel
(c) Dormant partner
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Partnership by estoppel

Question 126.
Where a partner does not participate into the affairs of a company and only shares the profit then, he is called ___________.
(a) Ostensible partner
(b) Dormant partner
(c) Sleeping partner
(d) Both (b) & (c)
Answer:
(d) Both (b) & (c)

Question 127.
If a partner only gives his name to the firm and does not participate in the management of the firm, then he is called as ___________.
(a) Dormant oartner
(b) Holding cut partner
(c) Nominal partner
(d) Sub partner
Answer:
(c) Nominal partner

Question 128.
When a partner agrees to share his profits with a third person, then such person is called as ___________.
(a) Sub partner
(b) Dormant partner
(c) Nominal partner
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Sub partner

Question 129.
Every limited liability partnership shall have at least ___________ partners.
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 5
Answer:
(b) 2

Question 130.
At least ___________ of the designated partners of LLP shall be resident of India.
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 5
Answer:
(a) 1

Question 131.
Foreign limited liability partnership means a limited liability partnership formed, incorporated or registered outside India which establishes a place of business ___________.
(a) within India
(b) outside India
(c) both a & b
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) within India

Question 132.
In which of the following cases a partnership firm is re-constituted:
(a) Admission
(b) Retirement
(c) Death
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) Partners who have entered into partnership with one another are called individually ‘partners’ and collectively a ‘firm’.

Thus, when any partner entered into partnership or retired from partnership or died, in all three cases partnership firm will be re-constituted.

Question 133.
A partner may apply to the court for dissolution of the firm on:
(a) Insanity of a partner
(b) Misconduct of a partner
(c) Perpetual losses in business
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) A partner can apply to the court for dissolution of the firm on:

  • Insanity of a partner.
  • Business of the firm becoming unlawful.
  • Insolvency of all partner except a partner.
  • Misconduct of a partner.
  • Perpetual losses in business.

Thus, correct option is all of the above.

Question 134.
A partner who is entitled to share in the profits of a partnership firm without being liable to the losses, is called:
(a) Partner in Profits only
(b) Sleeping Partner
(c) Active Partner
(d) Dummy Partner.
Answer:
(a) A partner who is entitled to share in the profits of a partnership firm without being liable to share the losses is called a partner in profit only. Thus, a person who has sufficient capital but is not prepared to take risk may be admitted to the partnership by the other partners.

Question 135.
Death of a partner has the effect of:
(a) Dissolution of the firm
(b) Continuance of the business of the firm
(c) His legal heir joining the firm
(d) Shutting down the business for 15 days.
Answer:
(b) After the death of a partner, partnership firm continues to operate business as per provision laid down in partnership deed. In fact, death of a partner dissolves the partnership but it results in reconstitution of the partnership firm.

Question 136.
A person whose behaviour arouses misunderstanding that he is a partner in the firm but actually he is not, is called:
(a) Nominal partner
(b) Dormant partner
(c) Ostensible partner
(d) Partner by estoppel.
Answer:
(d) If the behaviour of a person arouses misunderstanding that he is a partner in a firm (when actually he is not) such a person is estopped from later on denying the liabilities for the acts of the firm. Such a partner is called partner by estoppel and is liable to all third parties.

Question 137.
Which one of the following cannot be claimed as a matter of right by a partner?
(a) To have access to books of account
(b) To take part in the conduct of the business
(c) To share the profits
(d) To receive remuneration.
Answer:
(d) (a) Every partner has a right to take part in the conduct and management of the business.

(b) Every partner has right of free access to books and accounts of business.

(c) Every partner in entitled to share in the profits.
Thus, all the above can be claimed by a partner as a matter of right.

(d) Every partner is bound to attend diligently to the business of the firm and in the absence of any agreement to the contrary, he is not entitled to receive any remuneration.
Thus, it cannot be claimed by a partner as a matter of right.

Question 138.
According to Section 25 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, the liability of a partner is:
(a) Joint
(b) Several
(c) Joint and several
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(c) According to Section 25 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, all partners are liable jointly and severally for all acts omissions binding on the firm including liabilities arising from contracts as well as torts.

Question 139.
The relationship of partnership arises out of:
(a) An agreement
(b) Statute
(c) Operation of law
(d) Both an agreement and statute.
Answer:
(a) According to Section 4 “Partnership is the relation between persons who have agreed to share the profits of a business carried on by all or any of them acting for all.”

Thus, we may say that the relationship of partnership arises from an agreement and not by any statute or operation of law.

Question 140.
Which of the following are the rights of a partner in a partnership firm?
X. To take part in the conduct and management of the business
Y. To receive remuneration for active working in the firm
Z. To receive interest on the capital invested in the firm
W. To receive share in the profit
Correct option is:
(A) X and Y
(b) X and Z
(c) X and W
(d) X, Z and W.
Answer:
(d) A partner has the following rights –

  • to take part in the conduct and management of business.
  • to access all records, books and accounts of business.
  • to share in the profits of the firm.
  • to receive interest on capital at a rate agreed upon.
  • to indemnify firm for all expenses incurred by him.
  • to apply partnership property for exclusive purpose of partnership.
  • to act in emergency for Protecting firm from loss.
  • to present introduction of new partner without his consent.
  • right to retire by giving notice in case of partnership at will.

Thus, to receive remunerations for actual working in the firm is not a right of a partner. Thus, X, Z and W is the correct answer.

Question 141.
In which of the following cases, a partnership firm may be dissolved?
X. On the death of a partner
Y. On the insolvency of a partner
Z. On the retirement of a partner Correct option is:
(a) X and Y
(b) X and Z
(c) Y and Z
(d) X, Y and Z
Answer:
(d) Dissolution of partnership takes place in the following cases –

  • by expiry of fixed term for which the partnership was formed.
  • by completion of the adventure
  • by death of a partner.
  • by insolvency of a partner.
  • by retirement of a partner.

Thus, X, Y, Z is the correct answer.

Question 142.
Which type of partner is not personally liable?
(a) Active
(b) Nominal
(c) Dormant
(d) Minor
Answer:
(d) Minor can be in partnership only for profit but not liable for losses. Any Josses can be recovered from Minor’s estate. Minor is not personally liable. ‘

Question 143.
Person doing business solely is known as:
(a) Single person
(b) Sole proprietor
(c) Company
(d) Partner
Answer:
(b) Sole proprietor refers to the person doing business solely.

Question 144.
Minor may be admitted in the firm for:
(a) Sharing of profits
(b) Mutual benefit
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Minor cannot become a partner as he is not competent to contract. As per Section 30, he can however be admitted to the benefits of partnership with the mutual consent of all partners.

Thus, minor may be admitted in the firm only for sharing profits.

Question 145.
Voluntary registration is related with?
(a) HUF
(b) Partnership
(c) Sole – proprietorship
(d) Company
Answer:
(b) Partnership is as a result of an agreement between two or more persons, but this agreement is voluntary in nature.
Thus, voluntary registration is related with Partnership.

Question 146.
Agreement to share profits in a partnership firm ___________.
(a) Must be coupled with an agreement to share losses
(b) Is same as agreement to share losses
(c) Implies an agreement to share losses
(d) Does not necessarily mean an agreement to share losses.
Answer:
(c) The partners in a partnership firm share their profit and loss in any ratio as agreed in the partnership deed. In absence of an agreement, they share it equally.

Therefore, agreement to share profits in a partnership firm must be implied with an agreement to share losses.

Question 147.
B a partner in AB & Sons has transferred his interest in the firm to D. Is the transfer correct?
(a) No
(b) Yes
(c) D will decide
(d) Court will decide.
Answer:
(a) As per Sec. 29, No partner can assign or transfer his partnership interest to any other person, so as to make him a partner in the business. So, B as a partner cannot transfer his interest to D.

Question 148.
The court may not dissolve the firm in case of ___________.
(a) Insanity of a partner
(b) Permanent in capability of a partner
(c) Retirement of a partner
(d) Misconduct of a partner.
Answer:
(c) As per Sec. 44, the court may dissolve the firm in the case of:

  • When a partner becomes of unsound mind.
  • Permanent incapacity of a partner. .
  • Misconduct of a partner affecting the business.
  • Transfer of interest or share by a partner.
  • Business working at a loss.

So, the court may not dissolve the firm in case of retirement of a partner.

Question 149.
When a minor attains majority, he is liable for ___________.
(a) from the date of attaining majority
(b) all the liabilities
(c) only for liabilities which are dealt by him
(d) for all liabilities since the date of admission to the firm as a minor
Answer:
(d) When a minor attains majority. He will be personally liable for all the acts of the firm, done since he was first admitted to the benefits of the partnership.

Question 150.
True Test of existence of partnership is ___________.
(a) Mutual agency
(b) Sharing of profits
(c) Sharing of losses
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(a) Mutual Agency the True Test:
Mutual agency is the foundation of partner’s liability. Each partner is both an agent and principal for himself and others.

Question 151.
A partner who does not get actively involved in business is a ___________ partner.
(a) Active
(b) Sleeping or Dormant
(c) Nominal
(d) Sub partner.
Answer:
(b) Sleeping or Dormant partner does not involve in business actively, such partners has no duties to perform but is entitled to have access to books and accounts of the firm and he can have a copy of them.

Question 152.
The Court may not dissolve the firm in case of ___________.
(a) Permanent in capability of a partner
(b) Insanity of a partner
(c) Misconduct of a partner
(d) Retirement of a partner.
Answer:
(d) In the following cases the firm is dissolved by the court.

  • Partners become of unsound mind
  • Permanent in capability of a partner
  • Misconduct of a partner
  • Transfer of interest or share by a partner etc.

The court does not dissolves a firm in case a partner retires from the firm.

Question 153.
Which of the following conditions are true against an unregistered firm?
(a) Paying outside creditors
(b) Represent himself in continuing the business
(c) A suit or claim of set off, the value of which does not exceed one hundred rupees
(d) Equitable
Answer:
(c) Suits allowed by Act for unregistered firm

  • Dissolution of a firm
  • Rendering accounts of a dissolved firm
  • Realisation of property of a dissolved firm
  • Set off of values not exceeding ₹ 100
  • Proceeding arising incidentally of value not exceeding ₹ 100
  • Firm not having business place in territories to which Indian partnership extends.

Thus, only option (c) is correct.

Question 154.
The circumstances of dissolution of firm does not include:
(a) Dissolution on the happening of certain contingency
(b) Dissolution by agreement
(c) Losses in the firm
(d) Compulsory dissolution.
Answer:
(d) The circumstances of dissolution of firm does not include compulsory dissolution. It can be by mutual agreement, insolvency of all the partners, business becoming illegal or by notice of dissolution for closing up of the business.

Question 155.
Each of the partner in a partnership firm is:
(a) Only agent of the firm
(b) Principal as well as agent
(c) Only co-partner of the firm
(d) Only representative of the firm.
Answer:
(b) Each partner is both an agent and principal for himself and others that is the significance of the phrase “carried on by all or any one of them acting for all”. Each partner is an agent binding the other partners who are his principal and each partner is again a principal, who in turn is bound by the acts of the other partners.

Question 156.
In setting the accounts of a firm during dissolution:
(a) The goodwill must not be included in the assets.
(b) The goodwill should be distributed among all the partners.
(c) The goodwill must be included in the assets.
(d) The goodwill should be separated before settlement.
Answer:
(c) In setting the accounts of the firm during dissolution the goodwill must be included in the asset as it is a partnership asset and means the benefits arising from a firm’s business connections and reputation.

Question 157.
The essential element of a partnership at will is that:
(a) Each partner at his will can choose a business.
(b) The partnership deed does not specify the ratio in which profits would be shared
(c) No period has been fixed by the partners for its duration
(d) Each partner at his will can fix his remuneration.
Answer:
(c) When no provision is made by contract between the partners for the duration of their partnership or for the determination of partnership, the partnership is called partnership at will. In other words, when no duration is fixed by partners it is called partnership at will.

Question 158.
Which of the following is not included in the implied authority of a partner?
(a) To borrow money for the purposes of firm
(b) To engage a lawyer to defend actions against firm
(c) To buy or sell goods on account
(d) To enter into partnership on behalf of firm.
Answer:
(d) The Acts falling within the implied authority are:

  • Purchasing goods on behalf of the firm
  • Selling goods on behalf of the firm
  • Receiving payment of a debt due
  • Settling account with the person dealing with the firm
  • Engaging Servants for the partnership business
  • Borrowing money on the credit of the firm
  • Drawing, accepting and endorsing bills and other negotiable, instrument in the name of the firm.
  • Pledging the goods
  • Employ a solicitor to defend an action against the firm.

Question 159.
In case partnership deed is silent with regard to profit sharing ratio, profits would be shared:
(a) Equally
(b) Depends on the number of hours worked
(c) In ratio of capital contributions
(d) In ratio of business done by each partner.
Answer:
(a) If the partnership deed is silent:

  • profit would be shared equally
  • Interest on capital would not be given
  • Interest on drawing would not be charged
  • Salary will not be provided
  • Interest on loan is given @ 6%.

Question 160.
On dissolution of partnership firm the partner? remain liable unless:
(a) Partners dues are paid off
(b) The registrar strikes off the name
(c) Public notice is given of the dissolution
(d) Accounts are settled.
Answer:
(c) The partners continue to be liable to outsiders for any act done by any of them which would have been an act of the firm if done before the dissolution, unless a public notice is given of the dissolution.

Question 161.
The Court may not dissolve the firm in case of ___________.
(a) Misconduct of a partner
(b) Insanity of a partner
(c) Retirement of a partner
(d) Permanent incapability of a partner
Answer:
(c) The court may order dissolution of the firm in the below grounds:

  • Insanity of Partner
  • Incapacity of Partner
  • Misconduct of Partner
  • Constant breach of agreement by partner
  • Transfer of Interest
  • Continuous L.osses
  • Just and Equitable

Hence, the court will not dissolve the firm in the case of retirement of partner, as this can be a mode of dissolution of the partnership.

Question 162.
Who among the following can be a partner:
(a) A co-operative society ‘
(b) A business firm
(c) A sole proprietor
(d) A hindu undivided family
Answer:
(c) An individual, who is competent to ccntract, can become a partner in the partnership firm. If there are more than two partners in a firm, an individual can be a partner in his individual capacity as well as in a representative capacity as Karta of the Hindu Undivided Family. Hence, a sole proprietor can become a partner in the partnership firm apart from the Co-operative Society, HUF or business firm.

Question 163.
Every partner in a partnership firm has ___________.
(a) A right to inspect the books with the consent of the Registrar
(b) No right to inspect the books of the firm
(c) A right to inspect the books of the firm
(d) A right with the consent of other partners to inspect the books of the firm
Answer:
(c) Every partner in the partnership firm has right to inspect and to take out the copies of the books of accounts. The relation of the partners to one another arises through an agreement and if not then rights and duties are governed by the act. Thus, Option (c) is correct.

Question 164.
In case of Partnership, Registration of partnership is:
(a) Statutory
(b) Necessary
(c) Mandatory
(d) Voluntary but advisable
Answer:
(d) The registration of partnership is not compulsory under the Partnership Act. But it is advisable to do so because of various advantages available.

Question 165.
Who among the following can be a partner?
(a) A sole proprietor
(b) A Hindu Undivided Family
(c) A co-operative society
(d) A business firm.
Answer:
(a) A sole proprietor can be a partner in a firm as he is a person and any person can be a partner in a firm.

Question 166.
In partnership the liability of the partner is:
(a) Decided by other partners
(b) Unlimited
(c) Limited to share in partnership firm
(d) Decided by Court
Answer:
(b) One of the Disadvantages of the partnership is that its liability is unlimited. The partners are liable to full amount of liability jointly and severally.

Question 167.
In a partnership firm, if claim of interest on capital is made, it is payable only out of:
(a) Turnover
(b) Capital
(c) Assets
(d) Profit
Answer:
(d) Claim of interest on capital is made then it, paid only out of profit because it is an appropriation of profit, not a charge against profit.

Question 168.
A Person whose behaviour arouses misunderstanding that he is a partner in the firm but actually he is not, is called:
(a) Nominal Partner
(b) Dormant Partner
(c) Ostensible Partner
(d) Partner by Estoppel
Answer:
(d) When any person due to his behaviour shows to a third party that he is partner in the firm but he is not partner in real then such person is known as ‘Partner by Estoppel’ or ‘Partner by holding out’

Question 169.
Which one of the following cannot be claimed as a matter of right by a partner?
(a) To have access to books of Account
(b) To take part in the Conduct of the business
(c) To Share the Profits
(d) To receive remuneration
Answer:
(d) Partnership deed is a deed in which rights and duties and other contents are mentioned related to partners of firm. In absence of Partnership deed, Partner does not right to receive remuneration unless otherwise agreed.

Question 170.
According to Section 25 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, the liability of a Partner is:
(a) Joint
(b) Several
(c) Joint and Several
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) According to Section 25 of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, all partners are liable jointly and severally for all acts omissions binding on the firm including liabilities arising from contracts as well as torts.

Question 171.
The relationship of partnership arises out of:
(a) An Agreement
(b) Status
(c) Operation of law
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(d) Unlike Co-owners, the relationship of partnership arises out of an agreement and law (statute) only. It does not arise from status.

Question 172.
If the behaviour of a person shows that he is a partner in a firm. (When actually he is not). Such a person is known as:
(a) Nominal partner
(b) Sleeping partner
(c) Sub-partner
(d) Partner by estoppel
Answer:
(d) If the behaviour of a person arouses misunderstanding that he is a partner in a firm (when actually he is not) such a person is estoppel from later on denying the liabilities for the acts of the firm. Such a partner is called partner by estoppel and is liable to all third parties.

Question 173.
Which of the following are the rights of a partner in a partnership firm?
X. To take part in the conduct and management of the business
Y. To receive remuneration for active working in the firm
Z. To receive interest on the capital invested in the firm
W. To receive share in the profit Correct option is:
(a) X and Y
(b) X and Z
(c) X and W
(d) X, Z and W
Answer:
(d) A partner has the following rights:

  • to take part in the conduct and management of business.
  • to access all records, books and accounts of business.
  • to share in the profits of the firm.
  • to receive interest on capital at a rate agreed upon.
  • to indemnity firm for all expenses incurred by him.
  • to apply partnership property for exclusive purpose of partnership.
  • to act in emergency for protecting firm from loss.
  • to present introduction of a new partner without his consent
  • right to retire by giving notice in case of partnership at will.

Thus to receive remunerations for actual working in the firms is not a right of a partner. Hence X, Z and W is the correct answer.

Question 174.
In which of the following cases, a partnership firm may be dissolved?
X. On the death of a partner
Y. On the insolvency of a partner
Z. On the retirement of a partner Correct option is:
(a) X and Y
(b) X and Z
(c) Y and Z
(d) X, Y and Z.
Answer:
(d) Dissolution of partnership takes place in the following cases:

  • by expiry of fixed term for which the partnership was formed.
  • by completion of the adventure.
  • by death of the partner
  • by insolvency of a partner
  • by retirement of a partner:

Thus, X, Y, Z is the correct answer.

CS Foundation Business Environment and Law Notes

Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Introduction:

  1. It is the most important branch of the mercantile law or commercial law.
  2. It is not possible to carry on trade or commerce without contract.
  3. It deals with general principles relating to formation of contracts.
  4. It extends to whole of India, except the state of Jammu & Kashmir.
  5. It came into force w.e.f. 1/9/1872.
  6. It is not a complete law for all types of contracts.
  7. It determine the circumstances in which promise made by the parties to contract shall be legally binding on them.

Meaning of Contract:
1. “An agreement creating and defining obligation between the parties.”

2. “Every agreement and promise enforceable at law is a contract ”

3. Sec. 2(h) of Indian Contract Act defines contract as:
“ An agreement enforceable by law.”
Contract = Agreement + enforceability by law

4. Contract is made by acceptance of one party of an offer made to him by the other party, to do or abstain from doing some act.
Contract = Agreement + Obligation

Meaning of Agreement & Promise:
1. Sec. 2(e) of Indian Contract Act defines it as,
“Every’ promise or every set of promise, forming the consideration for each other.”

2. It has two characteristics:

  • Two or more persons are required to make an agreement.
  • Both parties must agree to same thing in same sense at the same time.
    (Consensus – ad- idem), (consent to the matter).

3. Sec. 2(b) of Indian Contract defines promise as, – “A proposal (offer) when accepted becomes a promise”.
Agreement = Promise
= Accepted Proposal
= Offer + Acceptance

Meaning of Obligation:
It refers to the legal duty to do or to abstain from doing something to obtain the assent what one has promised to do or abstain from doing.

Rights & Obligations:

  • They are created between the parties as a result of a binding contract.
  • They are correlative.

Agreements which are not contracts:

  • Agreements relating to social matters.
  • Domestic arrangements between husband and wife.
  • Agreements between family members.

Relevant Case Law:
Balfour v Balfour

Facts: Mr A promised to pay his wife ₹ 30 every month as house hold allowance. Later, the husband failed to pay the amount.

Decision: Held, the wife could not claim as there was no intention to create legal obligation and thus, it is not enforceable by law.

All contracts are necessarily agreements but all agreements need not necessarily be contracts.

Essential elements of a valid contract:
Sec. 10 of Indian Contract Act says, “All, agreements are contracts if they are made:

  • by free consent of parties , competent to contract,
  • for a lawful consideration,
  • with a lawful object, and .
  • not hereby expressly declared to be “void”.

It includes:

  • Offer and Acceptance
  • Intention to create legal relationship
  • Lawful consideration and object
  • Capacity to contractual
  • Free consent
  • Lawful object
  • Agreement not expressly declared void.
  • Consensus -ad-idem i.e. meeting of minds
  • Certainty of meaning
  • Possibility to perform
  • Legal formalities

1. Offer or Proposal:

  • It refers to a “proposal” by one party to another to enter into a legally binding agreement with him.
  • Sec. 2(a) of the Act defines it as – “When one person signifies to another his willingness to do or abstain from doing something, with a view to obtain the assent of that other to such act or abstinence, he is said to make a proposal.”
  • Offeror or Promisor: The party making an offer.
  • Offeree or Promisee: The party to whom offer is made.

Rules relating to offer:

  • It must be capable of creating legal relations
  • It must be certain, definite and not vague
  • It may be expressed or implied
  • It must be distinguished from an invitation to offer
  • It may be specific or general
  • It must be communicated to the offeree
  • It must be made with a view to obtain the consent of the offeree
  • It may be conditional
  • It should not contain such terms, the non compliance of which would’ amount to acceptance
  • Types of offer: General; Specific, Cross, Counter, Open etc.

General & Specific offer:

  • Offer made to public at large with or without any time limit is general offer.
  • Offer made to a particular and specified person/ persons and that can be accepted by that specific person/ persons only is specific offer.

Relevant Case Law:
Carlill V. Carbolic Smoke Ball Co.

Facts:

  • A co. advertised that it would give a reward of £100 to anyone who contracted influenza after using its smoke balls for a certain period according to printed directions.
  • Mrs Carlill purchased and used smoke balls as per the printed instructions, even then contracted influenza.
  • She claimed the reward of £100.
  • Co. resisted the claim on the ground that offer was not made to her and she had also not communicated her acceptance to the offer.

Decision: She could recover the reward as she had accepted the co’s offer by complying with terms.

Similar case Harbhajan Lai V Harcharan Lai

Cross offer:

  • It occurs when two persons make identical offers to each other, in ignorance of each other’s offer.
  • It leads to termination of the original offer.

Counter offer:

  • Upon receipt of an offer from an offeror, if the offeree instead of accepting it, straightaway modifies or varies the offer, he is said to make a counter offer.
  • It leads to rejection of original offer.

Standing/Continuing/Open Offer:

  • Offer which is made to public at large and kept open for public acceptance for a certain time period.
  • It refers to a tender to supply goods as and when required.
  • Each successive order given creates a separate contract.
  • It does not binds either party unless and until such orders are given.

Relevant Case Law:
Percival Ltd v. L.C.C.

  • Offer and Invitation to offer:
  • Offer is made to get the consent of other party.
  • Invitation to offer is made to initiate the offer according to the invitation.
  • Offer is made with an object to make a contract.
  • Invitation to offer does not results in any contract formation.
  • Example: of invitation to offer: (i) display of goods in a shop window with prices marked upon them, (ii) price catalogues, etc.
  • Offer is different from a mere statement of intention.
  • Example : announcement of a coming auction sales.

Relevant Case Law:
Harris V. Nickerson – When particular goods are advertised, for sale by auction, the auctioneer does not contract with anyone who attends the sale and is intending to purchase those goods when they are actually put up for sale. Offer is different from a mere communication of information in the course of negotiation. E.g. price statement considering negotiation.

Relevant Case Law:
Harvey V. Facey – Only a statement of lowest price at which the vendor would sell, contains no implied contract.to sell at that price to the person making the inquiry.

Acceptance:

  • It means giving consent to the offer.
  • Sec. 2(b) of the Contract Act , defines it as- “A proposal is said to be accepted, when the person to whom the proposal (offer) is made signifies his assent thereto.”

Essentials of a valid acceptance:

  • It must be absolute and unconditional.
  • It must be communicated to offeror.
  • It must be in the mode prescribed.
  • It must be given within reasonable time.
  • Mere silence is not acceptance, offeror can prescribe the mode of acceptance but not the mode of rejection.

Relevant Case Law:
Felthouse V Bindley

Facts-

  • F offered by letter to buy his nephew’s horse for £ 30 stating “If I hear no more about it, I shall consider it mine at £ 30.”
  • Nephew did not reply, but told the auctioneer not to sell it as he has already sold it to his uncle.
  • Auctioneer sold it by mistake.
  • F sued the auctioneer.

Decision: F could not succeed as his nephew has not communicated his. acceptance.

  • It must be given before the offer lapses or is revoked.
  • It must emanate from offer.
  • If the offer is one which is to be accepted by being acted upon, no communication of acceptance to the offeror is necessary, unless communication is stipulated for in the offer itself.

Relevant Case Law:
Lalnrtan Shukla V Gouri Dutt

Facts-

  • S sent his servant L, to trace his missing nephew.
  • Later, S offered a reward for finding out his nephew.
  • L traced him ignorant of the reward.
  • L claimed his reward later.

Decision – L was not entitled to the reward.

Communication of offer:

  • It is complete when it comes to the knowledge of the person to whom it is made.
  • It may be communicated either by words spoken or written or may be inferred from conduct of parties.
  • If made by post, it will be completed, when the letter containing offer reached the intended person.

Communication of acceptance:
1. It is complete –

  • As against the proposer: When it is put in the course of transmission to him so as to be out of power of the acceptor to withdraw the same.
  • As against the acceptor: When it comes to the knowledge of the proposer.

2. If sent by post, it is complete:
As against the proposer: when the letter of acceptance is posted. As against the acceptor: when the letter reaches the proposer.

Revocation of offer:

  • It means withdrawal or taking back of an offer.
  • It can be revoked anytime before its acceptance.

Revocation of acceptance:

  • It means withdrawal or taking back of acceptance by the acceptor.
  • It may be revoked at any time before its communication is completed as against the acceptor, but not afterwards.

Communication of revocation:
It is complete –
As against the person who makes it: When it is put into a course of transmission to the person to whom it is made so as to be out of power of the person who makes it.

By Post-

  • Communication of offer when complete: When offer comes into the knowledge of offeree.
  • Communication of acceptance when complete: When offeree or acceptor post the letter of acceptance and it becomes out of power of acceptor to withdraw it.

As against the person to whom it i$ made: When it comes to his knowledge.

Lapse of offer:

  • It means end of an offer.
  • Offer should be accepted before it lapses.

Offer may lapse in following ways:

  1. By Communication of notice of revocation
  2. By lapse of time
  3. By failure to accept condition precedent
  4. By death or insanity of the offeror
  5. By counter – offer by the offeree
  6. By not accepting the offer, according to prescribed mode
  7. By rejection of offer by the offeree
  8. By change in law or circumstances.

Note:
If a passenger receives a railway ticket with the words printed, “this ticket is issued subject to the notices, regulations and conditions contained in the current time tables of the railway.” He is bound to accept the terms and conditions whether he has read them or not.

Standing Offer:

  • It is an offer made to supply specific goods upto a stated quantity or any quantity be required at a certain rate, during a fixed period. E.g. Government Tenders.
  • It is a nature of continuing offer.

Modes of Contract:
Generally contracts are in written form agreed upon by the parties face to face. But when it is not possible for the parties to meet they can enter into the following.
1. Contracts By Post: When the parties are located in different cities or states and its not possible for them to meet then contract is made by sending the documents through post. This is called contract by post. It is subject to same rules as others along with certain exceptions as already stated.

2. Contracts over telephone:

  • There is a contract as soon as the offer is accepted by the offeree.
  • Offeree has to be sure that his acceptance has reached the offeror because phone lines may go dead or generate noise during conversations.
  • Thus, offeree should dial again and communicate his acceptance in such doubt.

Relevant case Law:
Kanhaiyalal V. Dineshwar Chandra

Intention to create legal relationship:

  • Both the parties must have an intention to go to court, if the other party does not fulfill his promise.
    Normally, in social and domestic agreements, there is no intention to go to the court.
  • In commercial agreements, this intention is always present.
  • The test of intention is objective i.e. it depends upon the facts of the case.
  • Court may also look into the conduct of parties, wherever necessary.

Lawful Consideration:

  • The consideration should be something that is lawful.
  • A mere promise is not enforceable at law.
  • It means “Quid Pro quo” i.e. “something in return”.

Relevant Case Law:
Currie V Misa

As per Section 2(d):
“When at the desire of the promisor, the promisee or any other person’

  • has done or abstained from doing, or
  • does or abstains from doing , or
  • promises to do or abstains from doing, such act or abstinence or promise is called as consideration for the promise.”

As per Section 2(e),

  • “Every promise and every set of promises, forming the consideration for each other, is an agreement.”
  • General rule is-
  • “No consideration, No contract.”
  • Consideration must be at the desire of the promisor.
  • Consideration may move from the promisee or any other person.
  • “As an act or forbearance of one party, or the promise thereof is the price for which the promise of the other is bought.”
  • Consideration may move at the desire of the promisor and not at the desire of the third party.
  • There may be stranger to consideration but not stranger to a contract
  • Under English Law, it must move from the promisee or any other person. Thus, stranger cannot sue on the contract.
  • Under Indian law, however a stranger to consideration can file a suit.

Relevant Case Law:
Chinnayya V. Ramayya

Facts-

  • A by a gift deed transferred certain property to her daughter, giving her the direction to pay annuity to A’s brother.
    On the same day, daughter executed a writing in favour of A’s brother, agreeing to pay annuity.
  • She declined afterwards stating that no consideration had moved from her uncle.

Decision: Court held that consideration may move from any person. Thus, A’s brother was entitled to file a suit.

Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 1

Rules of a valid consideration:

  • It must move at the desire of the promisor.
  • It may be done by promisee himself or by any other person.
  • It may be past, present or future.
  • It must be real and not vague.
  • It must be legal.
  • It need not be adequate. (But if not adequate then consent must be free)
  • It must be something more than the promisee is already bound to do for the promisor.
  • It may not be an illusory.

Relevant Case Law:
Stilk v Myrick

Kinds of Consideration:
1. Past Consideration: It refers to something wholly done, forgone or suffered before making of agreement.

  • Under English law, “Past consideration is no consideration.”
  • The consideration which is completed or performed at the time of contract is called present consideration.
  • But past consideration is a consideration as per the Indian Law.

2. Present or Executed Consideration: It moves simultaneously with promise. The consideration which is completed or performed at the time of contract is called present consideration.

3. Future or Executory Consideration: It is to be moved at a future date i.e promise is to be performed in future.

Exceptions to the rules, “No consideratign, no contract”:
An agreement made is valid if:

  • expressed in writing and registered under law,
  • made on account of natural love and affection,
  • between parties standing in a near relation to each other.

A promise is valid if-

  • It is a promise to compensate a person wholly or in part, a person who has already done something voluntarily for the promisor.
  • Something which the promisor was legally compellable to do.

A promise to pay, wholly or in part, a debt, which is barred by law of limitation can be enforced if:

  • it is in writing,
  • it is signed by the debtor or his authorised agent.

Note:
A debt barred by limitation cannot be recovered, a promise to pay such debt is without any consideration.

  • It does not applies to completed gifts i.e. gift given and accepted.
  • Consideration is not required to effect a valid bailment of goods i.e. gratuitous bailment.
  • Not required to create an agency.

Relevant Case Laws:
Poonam Bibi V. Fyaz Buksh

Facts: A husband, by a registered agreement promised to pay his earnings to his wife.

Decision: The agreement, though without consideration, was valid.
Raj Lakshmi V. Bhootnath

Facts: Where a husband by a registered document, after referring to quarrels and disagreements between himself and his wife, promised to pay his wife a sum of money for her maintenance and separate residence.

Decision: Promise was unenforceable as natural love and affection was missing.

If a person promised to contribute anything to a charity and on his faith, the promisee undertakes a liability to that extent, the contract shall be valid.

Relevant Case Law:
Kedarnath V Gorie Mohammad

Gratuitous Promise:

  • A gratuitous contract is a contract without any consideration.
  • A gratuitous promise cannot be enforced.
  • However, where a promisor makes a promise for which some other person will be benefitted, then the promisor will be liable to the promisee.
  • Example – If X gives a loan to Y and Z gives the guarantee to X on behalf of Y, then Z will be liable to X if Y does not repay the loan even though Z was not benefitted by giving the guarantee.

Doctrine of Privity of Contract:

  • It means that only those persons, who are parties to a contract, can sue and be sued upon the contract.
  • It refers to the relationship between parties who have entered into the contracts.
  • The third party cannot sue upon it, even though the contract may be for his benefit.
  • Thus, “a stranger to the contract” cannot bring a valid suit under the contract.
  • It is different from “stranger to consideration”.

Relevant Case Laws:
Dunlop Pneumatic Tyre Co.V. Selfridge Ltd.
Tweddle v Atkinson

Relevant Case Law:
Khwaja Muhammad v Hussaini Begum

Facts:

  • H sued her father in law K to recover ₹ 15,000 on account of arrears of allowance being payable to her by K.
  • This was under an agreement between K and H’s father consideration being H’s marriage to K”s son D.
  • Both H and D were minors at the time of marriage.

Decision- Promise can be made enforceable by H.

  • Marriage settlement, partition and other family arrangements, and other such agreements when they are reduced to writing.
  • Acknowledgment of liability or by past performance thereof.
  • Assignment of a contract.
  • Contracts entered into through an agent.
  • Covenants running with the land – The purchaser of immovable property is bound by several conditions created by an agreement affecting the land, even though he is not a party to the original agreement.
  • Where the promisor by his own conduct is estopped from denying his liability to perform the promise, the person who is not a party to the contract can sue upon to make the promisor liable.

Note : Nominee is not a assignee

Terms must be certain:

  • The meaning of an agreement must be certain and capable of being certain.
  • Terms must not be vague.
  • If it is not so, then the agreement will not be enforceable by law.
  • “A Contract to contract is not a contract”.

Relevant Case Law:
Loftus V Roberts.
Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 2

Difference between an Agreement and Contract:

Agreement Contract
(1) Its elements are offer and acceptance. Its element is an agreement and its enforceability.
(2) It may or may not create legal obligation. Creation of legal obligation is must in contracts.
(3) It may not be binding, hence may not be enforceable. It is binding on both the parties, hence enforceable.
(4) It may not result in a contract. It necessarily constitutes an agreement.

Legal Agreement: An agreement which can be enforced legally.

Illegal Agreements:

  • It goes beyond the basic public policy, thus are not enforceable by law.
  • It is not only void as between immediate parties but the collateral transactions also become illegal.

Its Consequences:

  • Entirely void
  • No action can be brought by or against any party.
  • Money paid or property transferred under it cannot be recovered
  • If its two parts legal and illegal are separable, only legal part can be enforced by the courts
  • Agreement collateral to it are also illegal.

Relevant Case Law:
Firm Pratapchand v Firm Kotri

  • As a Contract: It means any agreement enforceable by law.
  • Void Agreement:
  • Agreements not enforceable by law are void.
  • They are not always illegal and its collateral transactions are legal.
  • It cannot give rise to any legal consequence
  • It is void -ab- initio (i.e – void from very beginning)
  • Example – minor’s contract
  • No damages for non-performance
  • It does not exist in the eyes of law.

Difference between Void and Illegal Agreements

Void Agreements illegal Agreements
(i) All void agreements are not illegal. (i) All illegal agreements are void.
(ii) They are not punishable. (ii) They may be punishable with fine, imprisonment or both.
(iii) Collateral agreements are legal. (iii) Collateral agreements are void.
(iv) Valid contracts sometimes subsequently becomes void, example – agreement entered with a minor (iv) They are void from very beginning.
example – agreement to murder a person.

Classification of Contracts:

Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 3

Void Contracts:

  1. It is not a contract at all as it is without any legal effect.
  2. Section 2(j) of Indian Contract Act, 1872, defines it as:
  3. “A contract which ceases to be enforceable by law becomes void when it ceases to be enforceable.”

Voidable Contracts:

  1. It is an agreement which is binding and enforceable but due to lack of one or more of the essentials of a valid contract, it may be repudiated.
  2. Section 2(i) of the Indian Contract Act, 1872 defines it as:
  3. “All agreements which are enforceable by law at the option of any one of the parties, and other party has no such option, are known as voidable contracts.”

Difference between void and voidable contracts:

Void Contracts Voidable Contracts
1. Section 2 (j): Contract which ceases to be enforceable by law becomes void when it ceases to be enforceable. Section 2(i): It may be repudiated at the will of one or more parties but not at the will of other or others.
2. Not enforceable by any party. Enforceable at the desire of the effected party.
3. It is void from beginning to end. It is valid in the beginning but is subsequently declared void.
4. Agreement is void only if it is made with the person having no contractual capacity, without consideration etc. Agreement is voidable, when its consent is based on coercion , fraud etc.
5. Here the contract cannot be executed due to change in circumstances or in law the agreement is void. The contract can be executed if it is declared valid by the affected party.

Competency/Capacity of Parties to Contract

  1. It means that parties to the agreement must have capacity to enter into a valid contract.
  2. Person’s may be either natural or artificial.
  3. Natural persons means human beings.
  4. Artificial persons means corporations.

According to Section 11:

  1. “Every person is competent to contract, who, according to the law to which he is subject to:
  2. is of the age of majority,
  3. is of sound mind.
  4. is not disqualified by any other law to which he is subject to”

A person is disqualified to enter into contracts if he is-

  1. a minor
  2. a person of unsound mind
  3. otherwise disqualified by the law of land to enter into contracts
  4. an alien enemy
  5. an insolvent
  6. a convict undergoing imprisonment.
  7. In India the age of majority is regulated by the Indian Majority Act, 1875.
  8. According to it, every person domiciled in India attains Majority on the completion of 18 years of age.
  9. If any guardian has been appointed for the minors or minor is under guardianship of Court of wards, he attains majority on the completion of 21 years of age.

Relevant Case Law:
Mohiri Bibi v Dharmo Das Ghose

Facts:

  1. Dharmo das Ghose, a minor, entered into a contract for borrowing a sum of ₹ 20,000 out of which lender paid him ₹ 8,000.
  2. Minor executed mortgage of property in favour of lender.
  3. Minor sued for setting aside mortgage.
  4. Privacy Council had to ascertain the validity of mortgage.
  5. u/s 7 of Transfer of Property Act, every person competent to contract is competent to mortgage.

Decision : Any money advanced to a minor cannot be recovered as Sec. 10 and 11 makes the minor’s contract absolutely void.

As per the Transfer of Property Act, a minor cannot transfer a property but he can be a transferee.

Position of minor’s agreement:

  1. An agreement entered into by a minor is altogether void i.e. void ab initio
  2. Minor can be a promisee or a beneficiary
  3. Minor can always plead minority
  4. Minor’s agreement cannot be ratified by him
  5. Contract by guardian, is enforceable if-
  6. It is within his competence and authority,
  7. For the benefit of the minor.
  8. Minor’s property is liable for necessaries.
  9. Court can never direct specific performance of the contract.
  10. Minor cannot be a partner in partnership firm. He can however be admitted to benefits of partnership firm.
  11. Minor can act as an agent and bind his principal without incurring any personal liability.
  12. Minor can never be adjudicated as insolvent.

Relevant Case Laws:
Rose Ferenanaez v. Joseph Gonsalves
Raj Rani v. Prem Adib

Necessaries:
“Goods suitable to the condition in life of such an infant or other person, and to his actual requirement at the time of sale and delivery.”

It Includes:

  • Necessary goods
  • Services rendered
  • Loan incurred to obtain necessaries.

Lunatics Agreement:

  • As per Section 12 of the Indian Contract Act,
  • “A person is said to be of sound mind for the purpose of making a contract, if at the time when he makes it, he is capable of undertaking it and of forming a rational judgement as to its effects upon his interests.”
  • A person of unsound mind includes:
    (i) Lunatics (ii) idiots, (iii) drunkards
  • Such agreement is void.
  • Lunatics estate will be liable for any necessaries supplied to him or his family.
  • A person who is usually of unsound mind, but occasionally of sound mind, may make a contract when he is of sound mind and he will be bound by it.
  • A person who is usually of sound mind, but occasionally of unsound mind, may not make a contract when he is of unsound mind.

Relevant Case Law:
Jugal Kishore v Cheddu

Persons disqualified by law from entering into contract:
1. Alien Enemy: Alien enemy is a foreigner whose state is at peace with India.

  • Alien is a person who is not an Indian citizen.
  • He becomes alien enemy on declaration of war between India and his country.
  • He cannot enter into a contract with an Indian subject.

2. Foreign Sovereigns and Ambassadors:

  • They enjoy certain special privileges due to which they cannot be legally proceeded against in Indian courts.
  • if contracts are entered into through agents, then agents becomes personally responsible for the performance of the contracts.

3. Convicts:

  • Cannot enter into a valid contract while undergoing sentence, nor he can sue.

Note : All of the above points are known as flaws in capacity.

Free Consent:
1. As per the Indian Contract Act,
“ Two or more persons are said to consent when they agree upon the same thing in the same sense.” (Consensus-ad-idem)

2. Free consent means consent given by parties out of their free will, on their own, without any fear, without any force, without any compulsion or threat from the other party.
As per Section 14, consent is said to be free when it is not caused by:

  • Coercion
  • Under influence
  • Fraud
  • Misrepresentation
  • Mistake

3. In the absence of free consent, contract is usually voidable at the option of the party whose consent is not free.
(i) Coercion:
“It is the committing, or threatening to commit, any act forbidden by the Indian Penal code (IPC), or the unlawful detaining, or threatening to detain any property, to the prejudice of any person, whatever, with the intention of causing any person to enter into an agreement:”

Exceptions of coercion:

  • The following threats are not coercion-
  • Threat to file a sun,
  • Consent given on the basis of legal obligations,
  • Threat by workers,
  • Threat to detain property by mortgager.
  • It may proceed from any person and may be directed against any person or goods.

Relevant Case Law:
Ram Chandra v Bank of Kolhapur

(ii) Undue Influence
A contract is said to be induced by ‘undue influence’ where the relations subsisting between the parties are such that one of the parties is in a position to dominate the will of the other and uses that position to obtain an unfair advantage over the other.

It has following two elements:

  • a dominant position,
  • the use of it to obtain an unfair advantage.

A person is deemed to dominate the will of another if-

  • he holds a real or apparent authority over the other ,or
  • he stands in a fiduciary relation to the other; or
  • he makes a contract with a person whose mental capacity is temporarily or permanently affected by reason of age, illness or mental or bodily distress.

Relationships that are presumed to have undue influence includes:

  • Parent and Child
  • Guardian and ward
  • Religious/ Spiritual Guru and Discipline
  • Doctor and Patient
  • Solicitor and Client
  • Trustee and Beneficiary
  • Fiance and Fiancee

Relationship where dominant position is not presumed but has (iii) to be proved by the aggrieved party:

  • Creditor and Debtor
  • Landlord and Tenant
  • Husband and wife.

This presumption can be rebutted by showing that:

  • full disclosure of all material facts was made,
  • adequate consideration was there, and
  • weaker party was in receipt of independent legal advice.

Relevant Case Law:
Marim Bibi v. Cassim Abrahim

Differences between coercion and undue influence:

Coercion Undue Influence
1. It involves the physical force or threat. It involves moral or mental pressure.
2. It involves committing or threatening to commit any act forbidden by IPC. No such illegal act is committed or a threat is given.
3. Relationship between the parties is not necessary. Some sort of relationship between the parties is absolutely necessary.
4. It need not be proceeded from the promisor or directed against the promisor. It is always exercised between the parties.
5. If the contract is avoided, any benefit received has to be restored or refunded. If the contract is avoided, it is at the discretion of the court to direct the aggrieved party to restore or refund the benefit received.

(iii) Fraud [Innocent]:
1. Also known as wilful (innocent) misrepresentation.

2. Fraud means and includes any of the following acts committed by a party to a contract, or with his connivance or by his agent with intent to deceive another party thereto or his party, or to induce him to enter into the contract

  • The suggestion, as to fact, of that which is not true by one who does not believe it be true,
  • The active concealment of a fact by one having knowledge or belief of the fact,
  • A promise made without any intention of performing it,
  • Any other act fitted to deceive,
  • Any such act or omission as to law specially declared to be fraudulent.

3. Mere silence as to facts likely to affect the willingness of a person to enter into a contract is no fraud.

But silence amounts to fraud in following cases:

  • Where it is the duty of a person to speak
  • Where his silence is equivalent to speech
  • When a person discloses only the half truth

Following are certain contracts upon which law imposes a special duty to act with the utmost good faith. (Contracts of Uberrimae fidei):

  • Insurance contracts
  • Prospectus of a company
  • Contract for sale of land
  • Contracts of family arrangements

In all of the above stated contracts, a person has to disclose all the material information.

(iv) Misrepresentation:
1. Where a person asserts something which is not true, though he . believes it to be true, his assertion amounts to misrepresentation.

2. The aggrieved party can avoid the contract, but cannot sue for damages in normal circumstances.

3. Misrepresentation made by a person may be either –

  • innocent, or
  • without any reasonable ground.

4. Its damages can be obtained in following cases:

  • from a director or promoter making innocent misrepresentation in company’s prospectus.
  • from an agent committing breach of warranty of authority
  • from a person who has made a certain statement in the court , relying upon which a party has suffered damages, is stopped by the court from denying it.
  • negligent representation made by one person to another between whom there exits a confidential relationship.

Differences between fraud and misrepresentation:

Fraud Misrepresentation
1. It is made intentionally with a view to deceive. It is made innocently.
2. The person making the wrong statement does not believe it to be true. The person making the wrong statement believes it to be true.
3. The aggrieved party can rescind the contract and can also claim damages. The aggrieved party can rescind the contract but cannot claim damages.
4. Where the consent is caused by active fraud, the contract is voidable even though the party defrauded had the means of discovering the truth. The fact that the other party had the means of discovering the truth is a good plea.

When the consent is caused by coercion, undue influence, fraud and misrepresentation, though the agreement amounts to as contract such a contract is voidable at the option of the party whose consent was so obtained.

(v) Mistake:

  • It refers to miscalculation or judgmental error by both or either of the parties.
  • It must be a “vital operative mistake.”

Relevant Case Law:
Leaf v. International Galleries

  • When both the parties to an agreement are under a mistake to a matter of fact essential to the agreement, the agreement is altogether void.
  • Unilateral mistake means mistake on part of only one party.
  • Unilateral Mistake is not void.

Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 4

Cases when the contract is void if there is a unilateral mistake:

  • Where the mistake is done as regards the nature of the contract.
  • Where the mistake is done as regards the identity of the person contracted with.

It can be avoided, if it was either due to:

  • blindness, illiteracy, or senility of a person signing, or
  • a trick or fraudulent misrepresentation as to nature of document.

Relevant Case Law:
Foster V. MacKinnon

Facts – An old illiterate man was made to sign a bit! of exchange, by means of false representation that it was guarantee.

Decision – The contract was void.

Mistake as to identity of person operates if:

  • Identity is for material importance to the contracts, and
  • Mistake is known to the other person.

Relevant Case Law:
Candy V. Lindsays Co.

Facts:

  • One Blankarn placed an order with Lindsay & Co. by imitating signatures of Blenkiron, knowing that Blentiron & Co. was a reputed customers of Lindsay & Co.
  • Goods were there after sold to Candy (an innocent buyer)
  • Lindsay & Co. filed a suit against candy for recovery of goods.

Decision: Candy must return the goods or make the payment of those goods as there was no contract. Thus, candy did not got a good title.

Following conditions need to be fulfilled, for mistake to be void;

  • The fact is material to the agreement.
  • There is mistake of fact.
  • Both the parties are at mistake.

If mistake of Indian Law is caused due to inducement by the other party, it has the same effect as that of fraud and therefore, contract may be avoided, by the party who has induced to enter into the contract.

Mutual mistake may relate to the existence, identity, quantity or quality of the subject – matter:

  • Existence: At the time of making contract both parties believe that subject matter is in existence, but it is actually not.
  • Identity: There is no consensus ad idem.
  • Quantity: Parties were at mistake as to the quantity or extent o subject matter even if it was caused by negligence of third party.
  • Quality: It is void only if mistake was on pan of both the parties. It follows the general rule:
  • “A party to a contract does not owes any duty to disclose all the facts in his possession to other party during negotiations.”

Relevant Case Law:
Raffles V. Wichelhaus

Facts:

  • Contract was made for purchase of bales of cotton which were to arrive by a ship named Peerless’ from Bombay.
  • Two ships of same name had to sail from Bombay.
  • Buyer intended to buy cargo of one ship but seller intended to sell that of another.

Decision: Contract was held tc be void.

Relevant Case Law:
Henkel V. Pape
Facts:

  • P wrote a letter to H enquiring about price of rifles also stating that he might buy 50 rifles.
  • On receiving the reply, P telegraphed, “Send three rifles”
  • Message was send as “Send the rifles” due to telegraphic mistakes.
  • H send 50 rifles.

Decision: There was no contract but P could be held liable to pay for three rifles.

Transaction with pardanashin women:
1. It means complete seclusion.

2. Women fixing and collecting rents from tenants and communicating business matters with men other than own family members is not a pardanashin women.
Relevant Case Law:
Ismail Musafer V. Hafiz Boo

3. It is founded on equity and good conscience.

4. Person entering into a contract with pardanashin women has to prove that:

  • no undue influence was used
  • she had free and independent advice
  • she fully understood the contents of the contract.
  • she exercised her free will

5. She has been given a special cloak of protection by law
Relevant Case Law:
Kali Baksh V. Ram Gopal

Legality of objects:
1. As per Section 23, of the Indian Contract Act,

2. “An agreement whose object or consideration is unlawful is void.”

3. “Consideration or object is unlawful:

  • If it is forbidden by law, or
  • It would, if permitted defeat the provisions of any law or,
  • is fraudulent or
  • involves injury to the person or property of another, or
  • is immoral, or
  • opposed to public property.”

4. Circumstances which makes the consideration or object unlawful:
(i) Forbidden by Law : It includes the acts which are punishable under any statute as well as prohibited by regulation or orders made in the exercise of the authority conferred by the legislature.

(ii) Defeat of the provision of law:

  • Agreement defeating the provisions of any statutory law, is void
  • Law includes any legislative enactment or Rule of Hindu and Muslim law or any other rule for the time being in force in India.

(iii) Fraudulent : Agreement with an object to defraud others is void.

(iv) Injury to the person or the property of another : An agreement having such an object is void.

(v) Immoral:
1. Object of any agreement being immoral is illegal

2. It is also illegal if its consideration is an act of sexual immorality.
Relevant Case Law:
Pearce V. Brookes

3. It covers a wide range of topics.

4. It is a branch of common law and governed by the precedents.
Relevant Case law:
Gheru lal Parakh V. Mahadeodas Maiya

5. No new Lead can be invented and added by any Court.
Relevant Case Law:
Lord Hulsbury, Janson V. Driefontien Consolidated Mines

It includes the following type of agreement:

  • Restraint of parental duties
  • Restraint of marriage
  • Marriage brocage or brokerage agreements
  • Restraint of personal liberty
  • Restraint of trade.

Negative stipulation in service agreement: An agreement of service by which a person bind himself during the term of the agreement not to take services with else is not in restraint of lawful profession and it is valid.

Restraint of personal duties:

  • Parents are natural guardians
  • Any agreement against such right or which a party deprives himself of the custody of his child is void.

Restraint of Marriage : Any agreement restraining any person, other than minor not to marry at all or not to marry any particular person is void.

Marriage Brokerage or Brocage contract:

  • An agreement to negotiate marriage for reward is void.
  • If marriage is performed but the money is not paid, it cannot be recovered in the Court.

Restriction of personal liberty : Agreement unduly restricting the personal freedom of a person are void and illegal.

Restraint of Trade (Sec. 27):
1. Agreement restraining anyone from exercising a lawful profession, trade or business of any kind, is void.

2. Both total or partial restraint are covered.

3. Restraint must be reasonable
Relevant Case Law:
Nordenfelt V. Maxim Nordenfelt Guns Co.

4. Indian Courts are not consistent that whether the reasonable restraints are permitted or not.
Relevant Case Law:
Madhub Chunder V. Racoomer
Mackenzie V. Sitarmiah

5. In an agreement having two parts which can be separated, only those covenants which are in restraint of trade would be void.
Relevant Case Law:
Brahmputra Tea Co Ltd. V. Carth

6. Restriction imposed is reasonable depending upon the facts and circumstances of the case.
Relevant Case Law:
Superintendence Company of India Ltd. V. Krishna Nurgai

Following agreements are not in restraint of trade:
1. Service agreement by which an employee binds himself, during the term of his agreement, not to compete with his employer.
Relevant Case Law:
Niranjan Shanker Golikari V. The Century Spinning and Manufacturing Co. Ltd.

2. Agreement by a manufacturer to sell during a certain period his entire production to a wholesale merchant.

3. Agreement among the sellers of a particular commodity not to sell the commodity for less than a fixed price.
Relevant Case Law:
Fraster Co V. Laxmi Narain

This rule is subject to following exceptions:
1. If a person sells the goodwill of a business and agree with the buyer to refrain from carrying any similar business, within specific reasonable local limits, it is a valid agreement.

2. If an outgoing partner makes an agreement with the continuing partners for not to carry on any similar business within a specified period or within specific local limits, is a valid agreement provided reasonable restrictions are imposed.

3. Contracts between partners not requiring any partner to carry on any business other than that of the firm while he is a partner.
Trade – combinations: An agreement, the object of which is to regulate business and not to restrain it is valid. Thus, an agreement is the nature of business combination between trader or manufacturers like not to sell their goods below as certain price is perfectly valid.

Negative stipulations in service agreement: It refers to an agreement of service by which a person binds himself during the term of the agreement not to take service with anyone else such an agreement is valid.

Agreement Expressly Declared Void:
1. Certain agreements have been expressly declared as void by Contract Act.

2. They are void ab initio.

3. It includes:

  • Consideration unlawful in part
  • Agreement – meaning of which is uncertain
  • Wagering Agreement

(i) Consideration unlawful in part (Sec. 24)

  • “If any part of a single consideration for one or more objects, or any one or any part of any one of several considerations for a single object, is unlawful, the agreement is void.”
  • Where the legal part of an contract can be severed from the illegal part, the bad part may be rejected and the good one can be retained”
  • Where the illegal part cannot be severed, the contract is altogether void.

(ii) Agreement the meaning of which is uncertain (Sec. 29): An agreement, the meaning of which is not certain, is void but where the meaning thereof is capable of being made certain, the agreement is valid.

(iii) Wagering Agreement (Sec. 30):
1. Wager means ‘bet’.

2. They are ordinary betting agreements.

3. It refers to an agreement between two parties by which one promises to pay money or money’s worth on the happening of some uncertain event in consideration of the other party’s promise to pay if the event does not happen.
Relevant Case law:
Thacker V. Hardy

4. Such an agreement is void.

5. If one of the parties has control over the event, agreement is not a wager.

6. Though wagering contracts are void, transactions incidental to wagering transactions are not void.
Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 5

7. “Where delivery of the goods sold is intended to be given and taken, it is a valid contract but where only the differences are intended to be paid, it will be a wagering contract and unenforceable.”

Note : Lottery, being a game of chance, is a Wagering Agreement. It is void and illegal thus, collateral transactions are also tainted with illegality.

Speculative transactions: It appears to be similar to that of wagering agreement, but has essentially two main features:

  • Mutual intention of the contracting parties to acquire or deliver the commodities, and
  • Undertaking of risk arising from movement in prices.
  • They are generally valid.

Restitution (Sec. 65)

  • Under a void contract, if any party has received any benefit from the other party, he must restore it or make compensation for it to the other party.
  • There is no restitution where the parties are incompetent to contract example minor.

Relevant Case Law:
Mohiri Bibi V. Dharmodas Ghosh

Contingent Contract (Sec. 31)

  • It refers a contract to do or not to do something, if some event, collateral to such contract, does or does not happen.
  • Example : Contracts of insurance, indemnity and guarantee etc.

Rules regarding its enforcement:

Rules Enforcement
Happening of future uncertain event. Cannot be enforced by law unless and until that event happens. Contract becomes void if event becomes impossible.
Non – happening of an uncertain future event. Can be enforced when the happening of that event becomes impossible and not before.
Behaviour of a person at an unspecified time in future Event is considered impossible when that person does any thing, which renders it impossible that he should so act within any definite time or otherwise than under further contingencies.
Happening of a specified uncertain event within a fixed time. Becomes void if-
1. at the expiration of the time, such event has not happen, or
2. before the time fixed, such event becomes impossible.
Non- happening of a specified uncertain event within a fixed time. Can be enforced by law –
1. when the time fixed has expired and such event has not happened, or.
2. Before the time fixed has expired, it becomes certain that such event will not happen.
Impossible Event Are void, whether the impossibility of the event is known or not known to the parties at the time of making the agreement.

Differences between wagering agreements and contingent contracts

Wagering Agreements Contingent Contracts
It is void. It is valid and enforceable until becomes void.
It is a game of chance. It is not a game, but contingent upon the happening or non happening of uncertain future event.
Future event is the primary factor. Future event is only collateral.
Consists of reciprocal promises. Do not contain reciprocal promises.
Every wager is essentially contingent in nature. Every contingent contract is not necessarily a wager.

Quasi Contract

  • An obligation is imposed by law upon a person for the benefit of another even in the absence of a contract. They are known as quasi contracts.
  • They are based on principles of equity, justice and good conscience.
  • They are termed as certain relations resembling those created by contracts.
  • It is also known as Law of Restitution.

It has following features:

  • It does not arises from any agreement between the parties but is imposed by law.
  • It is a right only available against a particular person or persons and not against the entire world.

They are of following types:

  • Supply of necessaries
  • Reimbursement of money due
  • Obligation to pay for benefit out of non-gratuitous act
  • Responsibility of finder of goods
  • Persons receiving goods or money by mistake.
  • Quantum merit (as much as earned or reasonable remuneration)

Supply of necessaries (Sec. 68):
1. “If a person, incapable of entering into a contract, or anyone whom he is legally bound to support, is supplied by another person, with necessaries suited to his condition in life, the person who has furnished such supplies is entitled to be reimbursed from the property of such incapable person.”

2. If necessaries are supplied to a minor or person of unsound mind, the supplier is entitled to claim their price from the property of such a person.

3. If there is no property, nothing will be realizable.

Reimbursement of money due (Sec. 69):

  • “A person, who is interested in the payment of money and pays such money, which another is bound by law to pay, is entitled to be reimbursed by the other.”
  • A person who has paid a sum of money which another is obliged to pay, is entitled to be reimbursed by that other person provided the payment has been made by him protect this own interest.
  • Payment must be bonafide.

Obligation to pay for benefit out of non gratuitous act (Sec. 70):
“Where a person lawfully does something for another person or delivers anything to him; not intending to do so gratuitously and the other person accepts and enjoy the benefits thereof, then he is bound to make compensation to the other in respect of or to restore the thing so done or delivered.”

Responsibility of finder of goods (Sec. 71):
1. “A person who finds goods belonging to another and takes them into custody, is subject to the same responsibility as a bailee”.

2. He should act like a man of ordinary prudence i.e.

  • he shall take proper care of goods
  • he must take reasonable steps to trace the owner
  • he should sell the goods, that they are in deteriorating condition and remit the proceeds to the owner.

3. He is entitled for the reward that may have been, offered by the owner.

4. He is also entitled for the refund of any expenses he may have incurred in protecting and preserving the property.

Person receiving goods or money by mistake (Sec. 72):

  • “A person to whom money has been paid, or anything delivered by mistake or under coercion, must repay or return if –
  • Mistake need not be unintentional. It may be even intentional.

Performance of Contracts (Sec. 37):
1. It is one of the modes of discharging the contract. It is the completion or fulfilment of obligations by the respective parties to a contract.

2. As per Sec. 37 of the Indian Contract Act, the parties to the contract must either –

  • Perform their respective promises, or
  • Offer to perform the same unless such performance is dispensed with or excused under the provision of any other law.

Contracts to be performed by whom.
1. Promisor himself: Sec. 40 states that “if it appears from the nature of the case that it was the intention of the parties to a contract that any promise contained in it needs to be performed by the promisor himself, such promise must be performed by the promisor himself. “Contracts involving the exercise of personal skill or diiigencb, or which are founded on the personal confidence between the parties need to be performed by promisor himself.

2. Agent: If the contract is not found on the personal consideration, the promisor or his representative may employ a competent person to perform it.

3. Representatives: Contract involving the use of personal skill or found to be on personal consideration comes to an end on the promisor’s death. In other cases, the legal representatives of the deceased partner are bound to perform it unless the contrary intention appears from the contract; but their liability is limited to the value of the property they inherit from the deceased.

4. Third persons: As per Sec. 41, “if the promisee accepts the performance of the promise by a third person, he cannot afterwards enforce if against the promisor.”

5. Joint promisors: In case of joint promise, promisee may compel or one more of the joint promisors in the absence of contract to the contrary. If any of them dies, his legal representatives must perform the promise jointly with the surviving promisors.

6. Who Can Demand Performance?
Promisee: Only promisee can demand the performance of the promise irrespective of the fact that it is for the benefit the promisee or any other person.

7. Third party: In some cases, like trust, marriage settlements etc. third party can enforce the promise against the promisor even though he is not a party to the contract.

8. Representatives: In case of death of the promisee his representative may ask for the performance of the promise under a contract.

Types of Performance – It is of following two types:
Actual Performance:
The promisor makes all offer of the performance of the promise and the offer to perform is accepted by the promisee. Thus, when both the parties perform their respective obligations, the contract comes to an end.

Attempted Performance (Tender) (Sec. 38) – The promisor makes an offer of performance to the promisee, but the offer to perform is not accepted by the promisee.

Types of Tender:

  • Tender of goods: attempted performance of promise to do something.
  • Tender of money: attempted performance of promise to pay something.

Essentials of a Valid Tender:

  • Must be unconditional
  • Must be for the whole obligation
  • Must be given at a proper time
  • Must be given at a proper place
  • Must give a reasonable opportunity of inspection
  • Party giving tender must be willing to perform his obligation
  • Must be made to the proper person
  • Must be made for the exact amount of money

Effect of Refusal of party to perform promise (Sec. – 39):
The aggrieved party can –
(i) terminate the contract

(ii) indicate by words or by conduct that he is interested in its continuance. If promisee decides to continue the contract, he would not be entitled to put an end to the contract on this ground immediately. In both cases, promisee would be entitled to claim damages that he suffered as a result of breach.

Joint Promise – When, two or more person enter into a joint agreement with one or more persons, it is known as joint promise.

Joint Promisors – Joint Promisors are promisors where liabilities are joint or several.
Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 6

Hold ‘D’ they will jointly pay his liabilities.

  • “D” can compile any one.
  • If releases one, then other partners are required to pay whole amount.
  • If one pays – Contribution.
  • Loss among joint promisors: Even if A becomes insolvent, then B & C will have to pay whole amount of ₹ 30,000 to D.
  • In case of Death of joint promisors: Life, if A dies, then his legal representative will contribute the amount. If all the joint promisors dies then the legal representative of all the partners will become liable to pay the amount.

Rights of Joint Promisee:
Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 7
1. Clean rest with all.
2. On death his representative.
3. Death of all their representative.

Devolution:
It means to pass over from one.person to another – In case of joint promise, two problems arises:

  • who is liable to perform the promise,
  • who can demand such performance.

This problem is solved by devolution.

Liability of Joint Promisors:
Sec. 42: If two or more persons have made a joint promise, ordinarily all of them during their life time must jointly fulfil the promise. * After the death of any of them, his legal representative jointly with the survivor or survivors should do so.

Sec. 43:

  • All the joint promisor are jointly and severally liable. However, the contract between the joint promisor may provide otherwise.
  • A joint promisor may claim contribution from other joint promisors, if he is compelled to perform the whole promise.
  • A joint promisor may claim contribution from other joint promisors, if any other joint promisor makes a default in performance of his promise.

Sec. 44: Where one of .the joint promisors is released, other joint promisors shall continue to be liable.

Differences between Succession and Assignment:

Succession Assignment
Transfer of rights and liabilities of a deceased person to his legal representative is called succession. Transfer of rights by a person to another person is called assignment.
It takes place on death of a person. It takes places during the lifetime of a person.
It is not a voluntary act. It is a voluntary act
It may take place even without a written document. It requires execution of assignment deed.
All rights and liabilities of a person are transferred. Only rights of a person are transferred.
No notice is required to be given to any person. Notice must be given to the creditor.
No consideration is required. Consideration is required.

Contracts which need not to be performed
Sec. 62:
If the parties to the contract agrees to –

  • Substitute a new contract for it, or
  • rescind it, or
  • alter it.

Sec. 63:
If the promisee-

  • dispenses with or remits, wholly or in part the performance of the promise made to him.
  • extends the time for such performance
  • accepts any satisfaction for it.

Sec. 64: If the person at whose option it is voidable rescinds the contract.

Sec. 64: If the promisee neglects or refuses to afford the promisor reasonable facilities for the performance of the promise.

Discharge of Contracts – It means termination of contractual relations between the parties to a contract.

Modes of Discharge of Contract
1. By performance: It occurs when the parties to the contract fulfil their obligations arising under the contract within the time and in prescribed manner. It may be:

  • Actual performance
  • Attempted performance.

2. By Mutual Agreement: The parties may enter into a fresh agreement which provides for the extinguishment of their rights and liabilities of original contract. Important methods of discharge by a fresh contract:

  • Novation: It occurs when an existing contract is substituted by a new one, either between same parties or between the new ones.
  • Rescission: It occurs when only the old contract is cancelled and no new contract comes to exist in its place.
  • Alteration: It occurs when the terms of contract are so changed by mutual agreement that have the effect of substituting a new contract for the old one.
  • Remission: It refers to acceptance of lesser fulfillment of the terms of promise.
  • Waiver: It refers to the abandonment of the rights by the party who is entitled to claim performance of the contract.
  • Acceptance of any other satisfaction: it occurs when the party entitled to claim performance accepts any other satisfaction instead of the performance of the contract.

3. By Lapse of time: It occurs if a contract is not performed within a specified period as prescribed by the Limitation Act, 1963.

4. By operation of law – It occurs when the contract is discharged by operation of law which includes:

  • Material alteration: Where it is done without the knowledge and consent of the other, contract can be avoided by othe, party.
  • Insolvency: It can be done under certain particular circumstances.
  • Death of a promisor: Contracts involving personal skill or expertise of promisor. When promisor dies, it cannot be performed by anyone else and hence comes to an end.
  • Merger of rights: If an inferior right in a contract is merged into a superior right by the party.

5. (i) By Impossibility of performance / frustration (Sec. 53)
Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 8

Relevant Case Law:
Satyabarta Ghose v Mugmiram

(ii) Discharge by supervening impossibility is done in following ways –

  • Death or personal incapacity
  • Destruction of subject-matter
  • Non – existence or non- occurrence of certain essential things
  • Change of Law
  • Declaration of war

(iii) Discharge by supervening illegality – If after making the contract, its performance becomes impossible due to alteration of law or act of any person, it is discharged.

(iv) Cases not covered by subsequent impossibility

  • Partial impossibility
  • Commercial impossibility
  • Difficulty of performance
  • Default of a third party.
  • Strikes, lockouts, etc.

(v) It is also known as frustration under English law.

6. By Breach of contractlt may be –

  • Actual Breach: If one party defaults in performing his part of the contract on due date.
  • Anticipatory Breach: When a person repudiates the contract before the stipulated time for its performance has arrived.

Let us study breach of contract in detail

Breach of Contract:
1. It means failure of a party to perform his obligations.

2. Consequences of Breach

  • It discharges the aggrieved party from performing his obligations.
  • The aggrieved party is entitled to proceed against the party at fault.

3. Types of Breach
Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 9

Anticipatory Breach of Contract:
It occurs when the promisor refuses altogether to perform his promise and signifies his unwillingness even before the time for performance has arrived.

It may be by:

  • Express repudiation, or
  • Party disables himself.

The aggrieved party may exercise either of following two options:

  • May wait till the due date i.e. it may treat the contract as operative.
  • May decide not to wait till the due date, but may immediately rescind the contract and bring an action for damages.

Relevant Case Laws:
Hochester v. De La Tour
Avery V. Bowden

Facts:

  • B chartered A’s ship
  • B agreed to load it with a cargo in Odessa within 45 days.
  • B was unable to supply the cargo, but A continued to demand it
  • Meanwhile a war brokeout, rendering the performance impossible.

Decision: Contract was discharged and A cannot sue for damages.
Frost v. Knight

Facts –

  • Defendant promised to marry the plaintiff on the death of his father.
  • Defendant broke off the engagement during lifetime of his father. Decision: Plaintiff could bring an action for damages without waiting for death of defendant’s father.

Remedies available to aggrieved party:

  • Rescission of contract
  • Claim for specific performance of the contract
  • Claim for injunction
  • Claim for quantum meruit
  • Claim for damages.

(i) Rescission of contract: It means right available to aggrieved party to terminate the contract In this case, the aggrieved party is not required to perform his part of obligation and is entitled to claim compensation for any loss caused to him.

(ii) Claim for specific performances of the contract:
1. In certain cases, when the damages are not adequate remedy, the court may direct the party in breach for specific performance of the contract and the promise is carried out as per the terms of the contract.

2. Usually granted in contracts connected with land.

3. It cannot be granted where –

  • Monetary compensation is an adequate relief
  • Contract is of personal nature
  • It is not possible for court to supervise performance of contract
  • Contract is ultra virus.
  • One of the parties is a minor.

(iii) Claim for injunction: Injunction refers to an order passed by a competent court restraining a person from doing a particular act. Negative term of contract means doing something, which party has promised not to do or reasonable remuneration.

Thus, where a party to a contract is negativating the terms of a contract, the court may in its discretion issuing an order to the defendant restrain him from doing what he promised not to do.

Relevant Case Laws
Lumley V.Wagner

(iv) Claims for Quantum Meruit
Quantum Meruit” means “as much as is earned” or ‘according to the quantity of work done’ or reasonable remuneration.
1. Claim by party not at fault – In following cases, party not at fault may claim payment:

  • One party preventing the other from completion of contract.
  • Contract becoming void before its completion.
  • Agreement is discovered to be void.

2. Claim by party at fault: In following cases, party at fault may claim payment:

  • Divisible contract partly performed
  • Indivisible contract performed completely but badly

(v) Claim for damages:

  • Damages are a monetary compensation awarded, by the court to the injured party, for the loss or injury suffered by him.
  • As per Sec. 73, when a contract is broken, the party at loss or damage from the breach is entitled to receive from the party at fault, compensation for the loss suffered by him.

The loss or damage should have –

  • arose naturally in the usual course of things from such breach or
  • which the parties knew to be the likely result of such breach.

No compensation for any remote or indirect loss.

Relevant Case Law:
Hadley v. Barendale

Facts:

  • X’s mill was stopped due to break down of shaft.
  • He delivered the shaft to Y, a common carrier, to be taken to a manufacturer to copy it and make a new one.
  • X did not inform Y that delay would result in loss of profits.
  • Due to Y’s neglect, delivery was delayed beyond a reasonable time. Decision: Y was not liable for loss of profits during the delayed period.

Types of damages:
Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 10a

(i) General/ Ordinary Damages:

  • It helps putting the injured party in the position that he would have been if the contract was performed.
  • It refers to the estimated amount of loss actually incurred.
  • It applies only to proximate consequences of the breach of contract.

(ii) Special Damages:

  • It includes those damages other than that arising directly from breach
  • It must be known to parties at the time of entering into contract.

(iii) Exemplary / Punitive Damages:
1. These are awarded not to compensate the aggrieved party, but as a means of punishment to the defaulting party.

2. It is awarded in 2 cases:

  • Breach of contract to marry or promise to marry.
  • Wrong dishonour of a customers cheque by a banker.

(iv) Nominal Damages:
These are awarded where the plaintiff has proved that there has been a breach of contract but he has not suffered any loss or damage.

(v) Liquidated Damages & Penalty:
When parties to a contract, specify a certain sum in the contract which will becomes payable as a result of breach, such specified sum is known as liquidated damages or penalty.

Under the English law:

  • If the amount fixed is a genuine pre-estimate of the loss in case of breach – it is liquidated damages and is allowed.
  • If the amount is fixed without any regard to probable loss, but is only to frighten the party and prevent it from committing any breach, it is a penalty and is not allowed.

In Indian law, there is no difference between the two.

Relevant Case Law:
Union of India v. Raman Iron Foundry

Differences between ordinary and special damages:

Ordinary Damages Special Damages
Damage which was naturally in the usual course of things. Damages which result from the breach of contract under special circumstances.
Include damages which are due to natural and probable consequences. Includes damages which the aggrieved party suffers due to indirect loss.

Differences between liquidated damages and penalty

Liquidated Damages Penalty Damages
If the sum payable by the defaulting party represents a fair and genuine pre-estimate of damages such specified sum is known as liquidated damages, Thus, they are based on probable loss. If the sum payable by the defaulting party is not based on probable loss, but are disproportionate to the damages, such specified sum is known as penalty.
They are imposed by way of compensation to the aggrieved party. It is imposed by way of punishment, so as to prevent the aggrieved party from committing a breach.
In England, they are awarded in full. In England, no amount is awarded to any party.

Contracts of Indemnity:
1. As per Sec. 124, A contract by which one party promises to save the other from loss caused to him by the conduct of the promisor himself or the conduct of any person is called a contract of indemnity.

2. Contract of Indemnity are a part of general class of contingent contracts, thus are conditional.

3. Parties of Indemnity Contract

  • indemnifier: The person who promises to make good the loss.
  • Indemnified or indemnity Holder: The person whose loss is to be made good.

4. It does not includes events or accidents, which do not depend upon the conduct of any person.
Example : Contract of insurance etc. (except life insurance)

5. Modes

  • Expressed
  • Implied

6. Essential Elements of Contracts of Indemnity

  • Ail essential elements of a valid contract must be present.
  • A loss should be incurred or loss has become certain.
  • Its purpose is to protect the indemnity holder against any loss.
  • It must specify that the indemnity holder is protected from loss, caused due to;
  • action of the promisor himself
  • action of any other person
  • any act, event or accident which is not in the control of parties.

Rights of indemnity Holder (Sec. 125):

  • Right to recover damages
  • Right to recover costs
  • Right to recover sums paid

Contracts of Guarantee (Sec. 126):
1. It is a contract to perform the promise or discharge the liability incurred by a third person in case of his default.

2. Parties to the contract

  • Surety – The person who gives the guarantee.
  • Principle Debtor – The person in respect of whose default the guarantee is given.
  • Creditor – The person to whom the guarantee is given.

3. Essential Elements of Contracts of Guarantee.

  • Must have all essentials of a valid contract

Exceptions:
(a) Consideration received by the Principal Debtor is a sufficient consideration to the surety for giving the guarantee.

(b) Contract is valid even if the principal debtor is incompetent to contract.

  • The principal debtor is primarily liable.
  • Debt must be legally enforceable
  • Debt must not be a time barred debt.
  • Liability of surety is secondary and conditional
  • The creditor should disclose all the facts which are likely to affect the surety’s liability.
  • Contract may be either oral or written.

Nature and extent of Surety’s Liability (Sec. 128):

  • Liability of surety is same as that of principal debtor.
  • Where a debtor cannot be held liable on account of any defect in the document, the liability of the surety also ceases.
  • Surety liability continues even if the principal debtor has not been sued or committed to be sued. Thus surety’s liability is separate on the guarantee.

Relevant Case law:
Kashiba V. Shripat

Kinds of Guarantee:
Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 12
(i) Specific Guarantee

  • It is given for a single debt
  • It comes to an end when the debt guarantee has been paid.

(ii) Continuing Guarantee (Sec. 129)

  • It extends to a series of transactions.
  • Surety’s liability extends to all the transactions contemplated until the guarantee’s is revoked.

Differences between Specific and Continuing Guarantee:

Specific Guarantee Continuing Guarantee
It is given in relation to a specific transaction. It is provided in relation to a series of transactions.
It is limited upto a special transaction. It extends to a series of transaction.
It is abolished on the completion of special transaction. It is abolished only when all the transactions are completed.
It cannot be revoked by surety. It can be revoked by the surety in relation to future transaction.

Revocation of Continuing Guarantee:
(i) It may be revoked at any time by the surety as to the future transactions by giving notice to creditors (Sec. 130)
Relevant Case Law:
Offord v. Davies

(ii) Upon the death of surety, it is revoked for all the future transactions in the absence of the contract to the contrary. (Sec. 131)
Relevant Case Law:
Lloyds V. Harper

Rights of Surety – Against the principal debtor:
(a) Right of indemnity (Sec. 145): Surety is entitled to recover from principal debtor all payment properly made.

(b) Right of Subrogation (Sec. 140): It means substitution of one person for another. On payment of a debt, surety shall be entitled to all the rights which the creditor can claim against the principal debtor.
Relevant Case Law:
Mamta Ghose V. United Industrial Bank

Against the creditor
(a) Right to claim securities (Sec. 141): Surety is entitled to benefit of every security, which creditor has against the principal debtor, whether surety knows of it or not.
If creditor loses or parts with security without surety’s consent, surety is discharged to the extent of security’s value.

(b) Right to set off: Surety can ask the creditor to set off or adjust any claim which the debtor has against creditor.

(c) Right to share reduction: If the principal debtor becomes insolvent , surety may claim proportionate reduction in his liability.

Against Co-Sureties:
(a) Right to contribution (Sec. 146): All the co- sureties contribute equally except in following cases:

  • Co- sureties may fix limits on their respective liabilities.
  • Contract may provide co-sureties to contribute in some other proportion.

(b) Right to share benefit of securities – Discharge of a surety:

  • Sec. 130: By giving notice to creditor for future transactions in case ot continuing guarantee.
  • Sec. 131: In absence of any contract to the contrary , continuing guarantee is revoked on death cf surety.
  • Sec. 133: Whore there is any variance in the term of contract between the principal debtor and creditor without surety’s consent, it would discharge the surety in respect of all the transactions taking place subsequent to such variance
  • Sec. 134: The surety is discharged, if the principal debtor is discharged by – (i) a contract, (ii) any act or (iii) any omission, the result of which is the discharge of principal debtor.
  • Sec. 135: If the creditor makes an arrangement with the principal debtor for composition, for giving time or for not suing him without surety’s consent.
  • Sec. 139: If creditor does any act or omission , there by impairing sureties eventual remedy.
  • Sec. 141: If the creditor loses or parts with security without surety’s consent, surety is discharged to the extent of security’s value.

Difference between Contracts of Indemnity and Contracts of Guarantee:

Contract of indemnity Contract of Guarantee
There are two parties-indemnifier and indemnified There are 3 parties-creditor, principal debtor and surety.
Indemnifier’ liability is primary and independent Surety’s liability is secondary.
Indemnifier’ liability arises only on happening of a contingency. Liability of surety is already in existence but crystalizes when the principal debtor fails.
Indemnifier need not necessarily act at the request of indemnified. Surety must act by extending guarantee at the debtors request.
There is only one contract between the indemnified and Indemnifier. There are three contracts-
1. between principal debtor and creditor,
2. between creditor and surety,
3. between Surety and principal debtor.
Indemnifier cannot sue a third party for the loss in his own name as there is no privity of contract. Surety can proceed against the principal debtor in his own name.

Contracts of Bailment:

  • As per Sec. 148, Bailment is an act whereby the goods are delivered by one person to another for some purpose, on a contract, that the goods shall, when the purpose is accomplished be returned or otherwise disposed off according to the directions of the persons delivering them.
  • It is a voluntary delivery of goods for a temporary purpose.
  • Ownership of goods remains with the bailor.
  • Goods should be movable goods.

Parties

  • Bailor: The person delivering the goods.
  • Bailee: The person to whom the goods are delivered.

Essential Elements of Contracts of Bailment

  • There must be an expressed or implied contract between the parties.
  • It can be made of goods only.
  • There must be delivery of goods from one person to another.
  • Goods must be delivered for some purpose express or implied.
  • The delivery of goods must be conditional.
  • The return of the goods may be in the original form or i.e. in an improved form as agreed between the bailor and bailee.

Modes

  • Actual Delivery
  • Symbolic Delivery
  • Constructive Delivery.

Bailment may be gratuitous (without any remuneration or reward) or for reward, (for consideration)

Classification:
Duties of Bailor – Sec. 150: Bailor must disclose all known defects / faults in the goods bailed. He is responsible for defects in the gocds hired to bailee whether bailor was aware of such defects or not.

Sec. 158:
(a) Where the bailment is gratuitous, he must reimburse the bailee for any expenditure incurred in keeping the goods.

(b) He should reimburse any expense which bailee may incur by the way of loss in the process of returning the goods or complying with other directions for returning the goods.

(c) He must compensate the bailee for any loss or damage suffered by bailee in excess of benefit received.

(d) He is bound’to accept the goods after the purpose is accomplished.

Rights of Bailor:

  • Right to enforce the duties of the bailee.
  • Right to terminate the contract if bailee does any thing which is inconsistent with the conditions of bailment.
  • In gratuitous bailment, he has a right to demand back goods even before expiry of bailment period.
  • Right to claim the increase or profit from the goods bailed which may have occurred from value of goods.

Duties of Bailee:

  • Sec. 151: Duty to take reasonable care of goods.
  • Sec. 152: If he takes care of goods as a man of ordinary prudence, he will not be liable for any loss or damage of goods bailed.
  • Sec. 153: Duty not to make authorised use of goods.
  • Sec. 154: If he makes any unauthorized use of goods , he will be liable to make good the loss.

Sec. 155-157:
(a) Duty not to mix the goods bailed with his own goods without the bailor’s consent. If he does so, he has to make good the loss.
(b) Duty not to set up an adverse title

Sec. 160: Duty to return the goods on expiration of the bailment period. Sec. 161: If he fails to return, he will be responsible to the bailor for any loss, destruction or deterioration of goods there after.

Sec. 163:

  • Duty to return any extra profit occurring from goods bailed.
  • Duty not to do any thing inconsistent with the bailment conditions.

Rights of Bailee:

  • Right to claim compensation for any loss arising from non-disclosure of known/unknown defects in goods.
  • Right to claim indemnification for any loss or damage as a result of defective title.
  • Right to deliver back the goods to joint bailors as per the agreement.
  • Right to deliver goods back to bailor whether has the right to the goods.
  • Right to exercise his right of lien.
  • Right to take action against third parties.

Termination of Bailment:

Sec. 153: Where bailee makes unauthorized use of the goods bailment becomes voidable at bailors’ option.

Sec. 159: At bailor’s will –
(a) In non-gratuitous bailment, bailor has a right to take back the goods , after the purpose is over.

(b) In gratuitous bailment, he can take back the goods any time, provided in case of loss in excess of benefit, bailee must be compensated.

Sec. 160:
(a) When the period or purpose of bailment is over.

(b) Where the subject matter is destroyed or becomes illegal.

Sec. 162: A gratuitous bailment is terminated by the death of the bailor or bailee.
Lien It refers to right of one person to retain the possession of some goods, belonging to other person, until some debt or liability is discharged.

(a) Particular Lien:

  • It is available only against those goods in respect of which bailee has exercised skill and labour.
  • Bailees lien is a particular lien.
  • It is available to all.

Conditions for exercising Particular Lien:

  • If bailee has exercised his labour and skill on goods bailed.
  • When work has been completed on time.
  • If the payment is due.

(b) General Lien:

  • It refers to the right of one person to retain the possession of any goods, belonging to another person , until some debt or liability is discharged.
  • It is available to bankers, factors, warfingers, attorneys of High Court and policy brokers.

Differences between General Lien and Particular Lien:

General Lien Particular Lien
Right to detain / retain any goods of the bailor for balance of amount outstanding. It is exercisable only on such goods in respect of which charges are due.
It is recognized through an agreement. It is automatic.
It can be exercised against goods even without involvement of labour or skill. It comes into play only when some labour or skill is involved.

Finder of Goods:
1. Refers to a person who finds the goods belonging to another person i.e. the goods lost by the true owner – he enjoys all the rights and carries all the responsibilities of a bailee.

2. Though the finder has no right to sell the goods found in the normal course , he may sell the goods if the real owner cannot be found with reasonable efforts or if the owner refuses to pay the lawful changes subject to the following conditions –

  • article is in danger of perishing and losing the greater part of the value,
  • lawful charges of the finder amounts to two-third of the value of the article found.

Carrier as Bailee – Carrier undertakes to carry goods of all persons safely to its destination He undertakes to make good all losses unless caused by an act of God or public enemies.

Innkeepers:
Their liability is like that of a bailee with regard to the property of the guests.

Relevant Case Law:
Jan & Sar V. Caneron

Pledge/ Pawn
1. As per Sec. 172,
It refers “to the bailment of goods as security for payment of debt or performance of a promise.”

2. It refers to a contract where by an article is deposited with a money lender as a security for the loan repayment or for the performance of promise.

3. Parties
Pawnor: The person who pledges i.e. bailor incase of pledge
Pawnee: The bailee incase of pledge.

4. Essential Elements of Pledge

  • There must be expressed implied contract between the parties.
  • It can be of goods only
  • There must be delivery of goods from one person to another.
  • It must be for some purpose.

Duties of Pawner

  • Repay the loan or perform the promise
  • Pay expenses in cases of default
  • Pay the deficit on sale.
  • Pay extraordinary expenses incurred for preserving the goods.
  • Disclose faults in goods which are material for the use of goods or may put pawnee to extra-ordinary risks.
  • Indemnify pawnee if he suffers any loss due to defective title of the pawner.

Rights of Pawner

  • Sec. 177: Redeem the goods pledged.
  • Right to sue in the event of pawnee refusing to return the goods even after payment of debt etc.
  • Receive any increase in goods.
  • Receive notice of sale.

Duties of Pawnee:

  • Not to use the goods unless authorised by pawner
  • Return the goods to pawnor on payment of debt etc.
  • Take reasonable care of the goods
  • Not to mix the goods with his own goods
  • Return any increase in goods pledged with him
  • Return any surplus on sale.

Rights of Pawnee:
Sec. 173: Retain the goods pledged only for
(a) the performance of promise, (b) payment of debt, or (c) interest on debt.

Sec. 174: Right of particular lien.

Sec. 175: Seek reimbursement of extra ordinary expenses.

Sec. 176: Right to sue the pawner in the event of pawner failing to redeem the debt or perform the promise. He can sell the goods after giving a notice of sale.

Pledge by non- owners:
A valid pledge can be created by following non- owners:
(a) Pledge by Estoppel.

(b) Pledge by a mercantile agent. (Sec. 178)
Mercantile Agent means an agent of the seller who has been appointed to sell the goods belonging to the seller.

Conditions for pledging:

  • Goods came into his possession with the consent of seller/owner of goods.
  • Pledge is made by him in the ordinary course of business
  • Pawnee acts in good faith.

(c) Pledge by a person in possession under a voidable contract. (Sec. 178 A)

Conditions:

  • Person acquires goods under voidable contract
  • Person who acquires the goods pledges such goods
  • At the time of creation of pledge, voidable contract should not have rescinded
  • Pledge is made in good faith.

(d) Sec. 179: Pledge by a person having limited interest in the goods. If a person has a limited interest, he can make a valid pledge to the extent of that interest.

(e) Pledge by a co-owner in possession:
Consent of all joint owners is required, if the goods owned jointly are to be sold or pledged. Conditions for exception –

  • Goods are in the sole possession of one joint owners.
  • Goods came into his possession with consent of other joint owners.
  • Pledge is made in good faith.

(f) Pledge by a seller in possession of goods after their sale.

Conditions:

  • Ownership of goods has been passed to the buyer
  • Seller continues to be in their possession, even after their sale
  • Seller pledges the goods to some other person
  • Pledge is made in good faith without any notice of the prior sale
  • Pledge by a buyer who has obtained possession of goods under an agreement to sell.

Conditions:

  • Ownership has not been passed
  • Buyer has obtained possession with the seller’s consent
  • Buyer pledges the goods to some other person
  • Pledge is made in good faith.

Differences between Bailment and Pledge

Bailment Pledge
Goods are bailed for purpose other than those referred under pledge. Under it, goods are bailed as a security for loan or performance of promise.
Bailee generally cannot sell the goods. Pawnee enjoys the right to sell the goods on pawnor’s default.
He can either retain or sue. Bailee can use the goods only if the terms provide so. Pawnee has a right to use the goods.

Law of Agency
1. As per Sec. 182,
“ An agent is a person employed –

  • to do any act for another, or
  • to represent in dealing with third persons.”

2. Principal is a person for whom such act is done , or who is so represented.

3. Agent acts as a mere connecting link between the principal and third party.

4. It is based on two rules:

  • A person can do through an agent, whatever he can do himself.
  • The acts of the agent are the acts of the principal.

Essential elements:

  • Two parties are required
  • Agreement between parties is necessary.
  • No consideration is required.

True test of Agency:
If a person has the capacity to bind the principal for the acts done by him, then agency exists and such person is called an agent.

Modes of creation of Agency:
Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 14

Sec 187: Express Agency – It is created either by words spoken or in writing Eg- Power of Attorney (it may be general or special)

Implied Agency: Agency created by conduct of parties. It can be in the following terms:

(a) Sec 237: Agency by Estoppel
It a person by his conduct, words spoken or written leads another to believe that a certain person is acting as his agent, he is estopped later on from denying such facts.
Example : Wife as an agent, where a married women lives with her husband, there is a presumption that she has the authority to pledge his credit for necessaries.

This Presumption is not held where husband shows that –

  • he had expressly warned the tradesman not to supply goods to his wife on his credit,
  • he had expressly forbidden the wife to pledge his goods,
  • his wife was already supplied with sufficient articles,
  • she was supplied with sufficient allowance.

(b) Agency by Holding out

  • Under this the principal plays a positive role.
  • It occurs when any one holds himself out as an agent of another
  • It happens through a wilful conduct
  • Example : In case of partnerships.

Sec. 189:
Agency by necessity – In case of emergency, the agents can exceed their powers and can take all the steps to minimise his principal’s loss.

Agency by ratification
(a) The principal is not bound by the act of agent if the agent acts:

  • On behalf of another without his consent or knowledge
  • exceeding his authority.

(b) Principal can create it by subsequent ratification.

(c) Also known as ex post facto agency i.e. agency arising after the event.

(d) Principal becomes bound.

Agency by ratification is possible if following conditions are satisfied:

  • The act must have been done on behalf of the named or identifiable principal.
  • The principal must be in existence at the time of contract.
  • The principal must be competent to contract at the time of making the contract.
  • Principal must have full knowledge of the facts.
  • Contract can be ratified only as a whole.
  • It can be done of a lawful contract.
  • It must be done within a reasonable time.
  • It should not cause any damages to a third party.

Extent of Agent’s Authority It is governed by two principles:
Sec. 188: Agents authority in normal circumstances. Agent has the power and authority to do all the acts lawful and necessary in the normal circumstances in discharge of his functions.

Agent’s authority in emergency. Agent has the authority in an emergency to do all such acts as a man of ordinary prudence for protecting his principal from losses under similar circumstances. It includes:
(a) Actual / Real Authority.
(b) Ostensible / Apparent Authority.
Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 10

Note:
As per Sec. 190,
Sub – agent’s appointment is not lawful as the agent is a delegate and a delegatee cannot further delegate.

As per Sec. 191,
A sub – agent is a person –
(i) employed by, and
(ii) acting under the control of the original agent in the business of agency.

Relationship between principal, agent and sub – agent

  • Agent and Sub-Agent have the relation like that of agent and principal.
  • Sub- agent is not directly responsible to the principal.
  • Agent is responsible for the acts of sub- agent to the principal.
  • Principal is responsible to third party for acts of both agent and subagent

Substituted Agent
As per Sec. 194,
Where-
the principal appoints an agent, and if that agent identifies another person to carry out the acts ordered by the principal, then the second person is not to be treated as a sub- agent but only as an agent of the original principal.

Mercantile Agent
As per Sec. 2 (9) of the Sales of Goods Act, 1930 “Mercantile Agent is an agent having in the ordinary course of business as such an authority either –

  • to sell goods, or
  • consign goods for the purpose of sale, or
  • to buy goods ,or
  • to raise money on the security of goods.

It includes:

  • Factors
  • Brokers
  • Del credere agent
  • Auctioneers
  • Partners
  • Bankers

1. Factors:

  • Employed to sell goods placed in his possession.
  • Contract to buy goods for his principal.
  • Can sell and receive payment for the goods.
  • Has an insurable interest in the goods.
  • Have general lien in respect of any claim arising out of agency.

2. Brokers:

  • Contracts with other for the sale and purchase of goods and securities.
  • Goods and securities are not in his possession.
  • Gets commission in return called brokerage.
  • Acts in principal’s name.
  • Has no lien over the goods.

3. Del Credere Agent:

  • Gives guarantee to the principal that credit purchasers pay for the goods.
  • Gets an extra remuneration in return.
  • If third party fails to pay , he is bound to pay the principal , the balance amount.

4. Auctioneers

  • Sells goods by auction.
  • Cannot warrant his principal’s title to the goods.
  • Until sale he is an agent for seller.
  • After sale he is an agent for buyer.

5. Partners:
Agent of the firm and his co- partners.

6. Bankers.

  • Relationship of debtor and creditor with their customers.
  • Agent of customer when he buys or sell securities, collects bills etc on customer’s behalf.
  • Has general lien on all goods and securities in his possession.

Duties of Agent:

  • Sec. 211: To conduct principal’s business according to his directions.
  • Sec. 212: He must always act as a person with skill and diligence.
  • Sec. 213: He has to maintain and render proper accounts to the principal whenever demanded. .
  • Sec. 214: To communicate and obtain instructions in case of difficulty.
  • Sec. 215: He must not deal on his own account.
  • Sec. 216: Must not make any secret profit.
  • Sec. 217 & 218: To account for money received for the principal.

Not to use the information obtained in the course of agency against the principal. Agent cannot delegate his authority to sub agent generally. The general rule for this is. Delegates non-protest delegare-a delegate cannot further delegate.

Rights of an Agent:

  • Sec. 217: Rights of Retention.
  • Sec. 219: Right to receive agreed remuneration.
  • Sec. 221: Right of lien on principal’s property.
  • Sec. 222: Right of indemnification for lawful acts.
  • Sec. 223: Right of indemnification against acts done in good faith.

Note:
Sec. 224:
Agent cannot be indemnified for any loss caused by criminal act.

(f) Sec 225: Right to be compensated for any injury caused due to principal’s negligence.
Principle’s liability for agent’s act to Third Parties

There are 3 circumstances in which an agent may contract namely –
(i) The agent acts for named principal (disclosed principal)

(ii) The agent acts for an undisclosed principal

(iii) The agent acts for a concealed principal

  • Sec. 226: Acts within the scope of actual apparent authority., it bounds the principal.
  • Sec. 227: Acts in excess of agent’s authority is separable, it bounds the principal.
  • Sec. 228: Acts in excess of agent’s authority is not separable, principal is not bound by it.
  • Sec. 229: Principal is bound by notice given to the principal.
  • Sec 238: Principal is bound for any fraud or misrepresentation committed by agent: (i) During the business hours and (ii) Within his authority.
  • Admission made by agent, is deemed to be admission made by the principal.
  • Unnamed principal, principal becomes liable on being discovered.

Personal liability of the Agent:
(a) It is also known as Doctrine of implied warranty of authority.

(b) It happens under following circumstances:

  • where the agent signs the negotiable instrument without indicating that he is signing for the Principal.
  • where the contract expressly provides so.
  • where the agent works for foreign principal.
  • where the agent acts for a Principal who cannot be used.
  • where a Government servant enters into a contract on behalf of Union of India.
  • where according to usage in trade in certain kinds of business, agents are personally liable.
  • where the agency is coupled with interest
  • If the agent is working for undisclosed principal
  • If the amount is received or paid by agent under mistake or coercion.

Note: Agency coupled with interest (Sec. 202)
It occurs when the agent has an interest in the authority granted to him, or he has an interest in the subject, matter with which he has to deal. It cannot be terminated to the prejudice of interest in the absence of contract to the contrary.

It applies on fulfillment of following conditions:

  • agent’s interest should exist at the time of agency’s creation.
  • authority given to agent must be intended for protecting the agent’s interest.
  • agent’s interest must be substantial
  • agent’s interest should be over and above his remuneration.

Termination of Agency:
Indian Contract Act, 1872 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes 11

  • Agreement between principal and agent – Performance of contract
  • Revocation of authority by principal – Expiration of period
  • Revocation of authority by agent
  • Death/insanity of principal or agent
  • Insolvency of principal
  • Dissolution of company
  • Destruction of the subject-matter

When Termination of Agency Takes Effect:
(i) Sec 208: As regards agent, when it becomes known to him.

(ii) As regard third parties, when it comes to their knowledge

  • Sec. 210: Termination of, the agent’s authority terminates the sub- agents authority
  • Sec. 209: Agent has a duty to protect his principal’s interest where the principal dies or becomes of unsound mind.

Irrevocable Agency.
Revocation of agency is not possible in following cases:

  • Sec. 202: where agency is coupled with interest.
  • Sec. 204: where the authority has been partly exercised.
  • where the agency has incurred personal liability.

E-Contract:

  • Electronic contracts are not paper based but rather in electronic form are born out of the need for speed convenience and efficiency.
  • The conventional law relating to contract is not sufficient to address all the issues that arise in electronic contracts.
  • The Information Technology Act, 2000 solves some of the peculiar issues that arise in the formation and authentication of electronic contracts.

As in every other contract, an electronic contract also requires the following necessary ingredients:

  • An offer needs to be made
  • The offer needs to be accepted.
  • There has to be lawful consideration.
  • There has to be an intention to create legal relations.
  • The parties must be competent to contract.
  • There must be free and genuine consent.
  • The object of the contract must be lawful.
  • There must be certainty and possibility of performance.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Which one of the following is correct?
(a) Indian Contract Act, 1882
(b) Indian Contract Act, 1972
(c) Indian Contract Act, 1872
(d) Indian Contract Act, 1888.
Answer:
(c) Indian Contract Act, 1872

Question 2.
The Law of Contract is nothing but
(a) A Child of Commercial dealing
(b) A Child of Religion
(c) A Child of day to day Politics
(d) A Child of Economics.
Answer:
(a) A Child of Commercial dealing

Question 3.
The Indian Contract Act, 1872 extends to-
(a) Whole of India
(b) Whole of India excluding Jammu and Kashmir.
(c) North India Only.
(d) South India Only.
Answer:
(b) Whole of India excluding Jammu and Kashmir.

Question 4.
To form a valid contract, there should be atleast-
(a) Two parties
(b) Three parties
(c) Four parties
(d) Five parties.
Answer:
(a) Two parties

Question 5.
Contractual rights and duties are created by-
(a) State
(b) Statute
(c) Parties
(d) Custom or Usage.
Answer:
(c) Parties

Question 6.
Every Contract is an agreement but every agreement is not a contract. This statement is-
(a) Wrong
(b) Correct
(c) Correct Subject to certain exceptions
(d) Partially correct.
Answer:
(b) Correct

Question 7.
Agreement is defined in section of the Indian Contract Act, 1872.
(a) 2(c)
(b) 2(e)
(c) 2(g)
(d) 2(i)
Answer:
(b) 2(e)

Question 8.
As per section 2(e) of the Indian Contract Act, “Every Promise and every set of promise forming the consideration for each other is a/an
(a) Contract
(b) Agreement
(c) Offer
(d) Acceptance
Answer:
(b) Agreement

Question 9.
A promises to deliver his watch to B and, in return, B Promise to pay a sum of ₹ 2,000. There is said to be a an-
(a) Agreement
(b) Proposal
(c) Acceptance
(d) Offer
Answer:
(a) Agreement

Question 10.
An Agreement is
(a) Offer
(b) Offer+ Acceptance
(c) Offer+ Acceptance + Consideration
(d) Contract
Answer:
(b) Offer+ Acceptance

Question 11.
A Contract is-
(a) A promise to do something or abstain from doing something.
(b) A communication of intention to do something or abstain from doing something
(c) A set of promises.
(d) An agreement enforceable by law
Answer:
(d) An agreement enforceable by law

Question 12.
Contract is defined as an agreement enforceable by Law, vide section of the Indian Contract Act.
(a) 2(e)
(b) 2(f)
(c) 2(h)
(d) 2(i)
Answer:
(c) 2(h)

Question 13.
Which of the following is false? An offer to be Valid must:
(a) Contain a term the non- compliance of which would amount to acceptance.
(b) Intend to create legal relations.
(c) Have certain and unambiguous terms.
(d) Be communicated to the person to whom it is made.
Answer:
(a) Contain a term the non- compliance of which would amount to acceptance.

Question 14.
Over a cup of coffee in a restaurant, X Invites Y to dinner at his house
on a Sunday. Y hires a taxi and reaches X’s house at the appointed time, but x fails to perform his promise. Can Y recover any damages from X? .
(a) Yes, as y has suffered
(b) No, as the intention was not to create legal relation.
(c) Either (a) or (b)
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(b) No, as the intention was not to create legal relation.

Question 15.
Which one of the following is the best statement about the Indian Contract Act?
(a) It is an exhaustive code containing the entire law of contract.
(b) It is an Act to amend certain parts of the law relating to contracts.
(c) It is an Act to define certain parts of the law relating to contracts and contains only the general principles of contract.
(d) It is not an exhaustive code containing the entire law of contracts being an Act to define and amend certain parts of law relating to contract
Answer:
(c) It is an Act to define certain parts of the law relating to contracts and contains only the general principles of contract.

Question 16.
Which of following is a contract?
(a) A engages B for a certain work and promises to pay such remuneration as shall be fixed. B cjoes the work.
(b) A and B promise to marry each Other.
(c) A takes a Seat in a public vehicle
(d) A invites B to a card party. B accepts the invitation.
Answer:
(a) A engages B for a certain work and promises to pay such remuneration as shall be fixed. B cjoes the work.

Question 17.
For binding contract both the parties to the contract must:
(a) Agree upon the same thing in the same sense.
(b) Put the offer and counter offers.
(c) Stipulate their individual offer
(d) Agree with each other.
Answer:
(a) Agree upon the same thing in the same sense.

Question 18.
Which one of the following has the correct sequence.
(a) Offer, acceptance, consideration, offer.
(b) Offer, acceptance, consideration, contract
(c) Contract, acceptance, consideration, offer.
(d) Offer, consideration, acceptance, contract.
Answer:
(b) Offer, acceptance, consideration, contract

Question 19.
Goods displayed in a Shop window with a price label will amount to:
(a) Offer
(b) Acceptance of offer
(c) Invitation to offer
(d) Counteroffer
Answer:
(c) Invitation to offer

Question 20.
What can a catalogue of books, listing price of each book and specifying the place where the listed books are available be termed as?
(a) An offer
(b) An obligation
(c) An invitation to offer
(d) A promise to make available the books at the listed place.
Answer:
(c) An invitation to offer

Question 21.
Which one of the following statement about a valid acceptance of an offer is incorrect?
(a) Acceptance should be absolute and unqualified.
(b) Acceptance should be in the prescribed manner
(c) Acceptance should be made while the offer is subsisting
(d) Acceptance should be communicated
Answer:
(c) Acceptance should be made while the offer is subsisting

Question 22.
A Counter offer is:
(a) A rejection of the original offer
(b) An acceptance of the offer.
(c) A bargain
(d) An invitation to treat
Answer:
(a) A rejection of the original offer

Question 23.
A person making a proposal is called:
(a) Promisor
(b) Vendor
(c) Contractor
(d) Promise
Answer:
(a) Promisor

Question 24.
Which one of the following will constitute a valid acceptance?
(a) An enquiry as to fitness of the subject matter of contract.
(b) A provisional acceptance
(c) Addition of a superfluous term, while accepting an offer.
(d) A conditional acceptance.
Answer:
(a) An enquiry as to fitness of the subject matter of contract.

Question 25.
X Offers by a Letter to sell his car to Y for Rs. 95,000. Y at the some time, offers by a letter to buy X’s car for Rs. 15,000. The two letters cross each other in the post. Is there a concluded contract between X and Y ?
(a) Yes. there is a concluded contract between X and Y.
(b) No, only crossing of offers.
(c) Can’t say
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(b) No, only crossing of offers.

Question 26.
S offers to sell B his car for Rs 50,000. T, standing nearby, says,” I will take it if B does not take it. B is not interested in the car. What will be the position if T says to S“ Here is the money, I take the car.”
(a) There is a contract between S and T
(b) There is no contract between S and T
(c) S may or may not accept the offer.
(d) Both (b) and (c).
Answer:
(d) Both (b) and (c).

Question 27.
Which one of Ihe following statement is true?
(a) Offer and acceptance are revocable
(b) Offer and acceptance are irrevocable
(c) An offer can be revoked but acceptance cannot
(d) An offer cannot be revoked but acceptance can be revoked.
Answer:
(a) Offer and acceptance are revocable

Question 28.
P advertises in a daily newspaper that he will give a prize of Rs 1,000 to the first person to swim the English channel and back during the month of August. F, who has read the advertisement, sets off from Dower on 1st August and reaches the coast of France on 2nd August. On that day, a further advertisement appears in the same newspaper stating that the offer of the prize has been with drawn. On 3rd August F completes the return swim to England. Can F recover the prize?
(a) Yes, as the second advertisement is ineffective so far as F is concerned.
(b) No, as the offer was revocated.
(c) F can only claim for damages.
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) Yes, as the second advertisement is ineffective so far as F is concerned.

Question 29.
The Communication of acceptance through telephone is regarded as complete when:
(a) Acceptance is spoken on phone.
(b) Acceptance comes to the knowledge of party proposing.
(c) Acceptance is put in course of transmission.
(d) Acceptance has done whatever is required to be done by him.
Answer:
(b) Acceptance comes to the knowledge of party proposing.

Question 30.
An auctioneer advertised in a newspaper that a sale of office furniture would be held at Delhi. A broker of Bombay, reached Delhi on the appointed date and time.
But the auctioneer withdrew all the furniture from the auction sale. The broker sues him for his loss of time and expenses. Will he succeed?
(a) Yes, he will succeed.
(b) No, he will not succeed.
(c) Can’t say
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(b) No, he will not succeed.

Question 31.
Which one of the following falls into the category of offer?
(a) Newspaper advertisement regarding sale.
(b) Display of goods by a shopkeeper in his window with prices marked on them
(c) An advertisement for a concert.
(d) Announcement of reward to the public.
Answer:
(d) Announcement of reward to the public.

Question 32.
A sees an article marked “Price Rupees Twenty” in B’s shop .He offers. B Rs 20 for the article. B. refuses to sell saying the article is not for sale. Advise A.
(a) A cannot force B to sell the article at Rs 20
(b) A can force B to sell the article at Rs 20
(c) A can claim damages
(d) A can sue B in the Court.
Answer:
(a) A cannot force B to sell the article at Rs 20

Question 33.
Which one of the following statement is incorrect?
(a) Oral acceptance is a valid acceptance.
(b) Mere silence is not acceptance
(c) Acceptance must be communicated
(d) Acceptance may not be in the prescribed manner
Answer:
(d) Acceptance may not be in the prescribed manner

Question 34.
‘A’ Offered a reward of Rs 1,000. for recovery of some valuable missing article ‘B’ who did not know of this Offer, found the articles and gave the same to ‘A’.
(a) As there is no acceptance of an offer due to want of knowledge, B is not entitled to get the reward of Rs 1,000.
(b) Giving delivery of articles to ‘A’ amounts to an acceptance and hence ‘B’ is entitled to get the reward of Rs 1,000.
(c) Giving delivery of articles to ‘A’ amounts to performance of condition precedent to an offer and hence there is valid acceptances. ‘B’ must get the reward of Rs 1,000.
(d) In the absence of any Legal obligation on ‘A’ no claim for reward of Rs 1,000 is maintainable by ‘B’.
Answer:
(a) As there is no acceptance of an offer due to want of knowledge, B is not entitled to get the reward of Rs 1,000.

Question 35.
Consider the following statement:
1. There is no difference between the English Law and Indian Law with regard to acceptance through post.
2. Both Under the English Law and the Indian Law a contract is concluded when the letter of acceptance is posted.
3.Under the Indian Law when the Letter of acceptance is posted it is completed only as against the proposer.
Which of the above statement is/are correct?
(a) 1 and 2
(b) 2 alone
(c) 3 alone
(d) None
Answer:
(c) 3 alone

Question 36.
In Commercial and business agreements, the intention of the parties to create legal relationship is-
(a) Presumed to exist
(b) To be specifically expressed in writing
(c) Not relevant at all
(d) Not applicable.
Answer:
(a) Presumed to exist

Question 37.
An agreement is a Voidable Contract when it is-
(a) Enforceable
(b) Enforceable by Law at the option of the aggrieved party
(c) Enforceable by both the parties
(d) Not enforceable at all.
Answer:
(b) Enforceable by Law at the option of the aggrieved party

Question 38.
A Contract creates-
(a) Rights in personam
(b) Rights in rem
(c) Only rights and no obligations
(d) Only Obligations and no rights.
Answer:
(a) Rights in personam

Question 39.
An agreement not enforceable by Law is said to be void under section of the Indian Contract Act.
(a) 2(a)
(b) 2(b)
(c) 2(f)
(d) 2(g)
Answer:
(d) 2(g)

Question 40.
Agreements that do not give rise to contractual obligations are not contracts.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) True

Question 41.
Agreements of a social nature or domestic nature do not contemplate legal relationship and as such are not contracts, which can be enforced.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) True

Question 42.
When the contract is perfectly valid in its substance but cannot be enforced because of certain technical defects. This is called a/ an-
(a) Unilateral Contract
(b) Bilateral Contract
(c) Unenforceable Contract
(d) Void Contract
Answer:
(c) Unenforceable Contract

Question 43.
The term” Proposal or offer” has been defined in – of the Indian contract Act.
(a) Section 2(a)
(b) Section 2(b)
(c) Section 2(c)
(d) Section 2(d)
Answer:
(a) Section 2(a)

Question 44.
The term” Promise” has been defined in of the Indian Contract Act.
(a) Section 2(a)
(b) Section 2(b)
(c) Section 2(c)
(d) Section 2(d)
Answer:
(b) Section 2(b)

Question 45.
The person making the proposal is called
(a) Promisor
(b) Promisee
(c) Participator
(d) Principal
Answer:
(a) Promisor

Question 46.
Offer implied from conduct of parties or from circumstances of the case is called-
(a) Implied offer
(b) Express offer
(c) General offer
(d) Specific offer.
Answer:
(a) Implied offer

Question 47.
An offer made to a – (i) Specific person, or (ii) a group of persons is known as-
(a) Standing offer
(b) Specific offer
(c) Special offer
(d) Separate offer
Answer:
(b) Specific offer

Question 48.
Communication of proposal is complete when it comes to the knowledge of
(a) The person to whom it is made
(b) The proposer
(c) Either (a) or (b)
(d) The Court.
Answer:
(a) The person to whom it is made

Question 49.
Terms of an offer must be-
(a) Ambiguous
(b) Uncertain
(c) Definite
(d) Vague
Answer:
(c) Definite

Question 50.
Offer should not contain a term, the non- Compliance of which would amount to acceptance.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) True

Question 51.
When two persons make identical offers to each other, in ignorance of each other’s offer, it is called
(a) Cross offers
(b) Implied offers
(c) Direct offers
(d) Express offers.
Answer:
(a) Cross offers

Question 52.
When there is a Cross offer, the original offer terminates.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) True

Question 53.
An offer is revoked-
(a) By the death or insanity of the proposer
(b) By Lapse of time
(c) By Communication of notice of revocation
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 54.
A Change in law or Circumstance rendering the original offer unlawful or impossible, will lead to termination of the offer.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) True

Question 55.
Acceptance can precede an offer
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(c) False

Question 56.
Acceptance in ignorance of the offer is-
(a) Valid
(b) Invalid
(c) Void
(d) Voidable
Answer:
(b) Invalid

Question 57.
Acceptance should be given within-
(a) The time specified by the Offerer
(b) A reasonable time
(c) Such time as the offer lapses
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 58.
An acceptance on telephone should be-
(a) Heard by the offeror
(b) Audible to the offeror
(c) Understood by the offeror
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) All of the above.

Question 59.
Section of the Indian Contract Act defines “Consideration”.
(a) Section 2(a)
(b). Section 2(b)
(c) Section 2(c).
(d) Section 2(d)
Answer:
(d) Section 2(d)

Question 60.
Consideration must move at the desire of-
(a) The promisor
(b) The promisee
(c) The promisor or any third party
(d) Both the promisor and the promisee
Answer:
(a) The promisor

Question 61.
Consideration in a contract:
(a) May be past, present or future
(b) May be present or future only
(c) Must be present only
(d) Must be future only.
Answer:
(a) May be past, present or future

Question 62.
Past Consideration is valid in-
(a) England Only
(b) India Only
(c) Neither in England nor in India
(d) both in England and India
Answer:
(b) India Only

Question 63.
Agreement without consideration is valid, when made
(a) Out of love and affection due to near relationship
(b) To pay a time barred debt
(c) To compensate a person who has already done something voluntarily
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 64.
A debt barred by limitation cannot be recovered. Hence, a promise to pay such a debt is without any consideration and hence invalid.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) False

Question 65.
Inadequacy of consideration does not render a contract invalid.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) True

Question 66.
If only a part of the consideration or object is unlawful, the Contract is –
(a) ’Valid to the extent the same are lawful
(b) Void to the extent the same are unlawful
(c) Valid as a whole
(d) Void as a whole.
Answer:
(d) Void as a whole.

Question 67.
The expression “Privity of contract” means-
(a) A Contract is Contract between the parties only
(b) A Contract is a private document
(c) Only private documents can be contracts
(d) The contacts may be expressed in some usual and reasonable manner
Answer:
(a) A Contract is Contract between the parties only

Question 68.
Under the Indian Contract Act, a third person –
(a) Who is the beneficiary under the Contract can sue
(b) From whom the consideration has proceeded can sue
(c) Can not sue even if the consideration has proceeded from him.
(d) Can not sue at all for want of privity of contract.
Answer:
(a) Who is the beneficiary under the Contract can sue

Question 69.
In India, a person who is stranger to the Consideration.
(a) Can sue based on the Contract
(b) Can not sue based on the Contract
(c) Can sue depending on the Conditions
(d) Can sue if permitted by the court.
Answer:
(a) Can sue based on the Contract

Question 70.
The Beneficiary of a Trust or other interest in specific immovable property, can enforce it even if he is not a party named in the Trust Deed.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) True

Question 71.
Capacity to Contract has been defined in –
(a) Section 10
(b) Section 11
(c) Section 12
(d) Section 25.
Answer:
(b) Section 11

Question 72.
Competency to Contract means
(a) Age of the parties
(b) Soundness of mind of the parties
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Intelligence of the parties.
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 73.
Which of the following is not Competent to Contract?
(a) A minor
(b) A person of unsound mind
(c) A person who has been disqualified from contracting by some Law
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 74.
A minor’s agreement is void .This was held in the case of-
(a) Mohiri Bibee V. Dharmadas Ghosh
(b) Nihal Chand V. Jan Mohamed khan
(c) Suraj Narain V. Sukhu Aheer
(d) Chinnaiya V. Ramaiya.
Answer:
(a) Mohiri Bibee V. Dharmadas Ghosh

Question 75.
The age of majority for the purpose of the Indian Contract Act is –
(a) 16 years for girls & 18 years for boys
(b) 18 years for girls & 21 years for boys
(c) 18 years
(d) 21 years.
Answer:
(c) 18 years

Question 76.
A minor’s agreement can be ratified or attaining majority.
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) False

Question 77.
……………… are goods suitable to the condition in the life of the minor and to nis actual requirements at the time of sale and delivery.
(a) Necessaries
(b) Goods
(c) Life Style Products
(d) Luxuries.
Answer:
(a) Necessaries

Question 78.
“Consensus – ad – idem” means
(a) General Consensus Luxuries.
(b) Meeting of minds upon the same thing in the same sense
(c) Reaching an agreement
(d) Reaching of contract
Answer:
(b) Meeting of minds upon the same thing in the same sense

Question 79.
A Contract which is formed without the free consent of parties, is –
(a) Valid
(b) Illegal
(c) Voidable
(d) Void ab- initio
Answer:
(c) Voidable

Question 80.
Contracts under unilateral mjstake are if such mistake is caused by the fraud or misrepresentation of the other party.
(a) Valid
(b) Void
(c) Illegal
(d) Unenforceable
Answer:
(b) Void

Question 81.
Mistake as to foreign law is treated in the same manner as –
(a) Mistake of India Law
(b) Mistake of Fact
(c) Misrepresentation
(d) Fraud
Answer:
(b) Mistake of Fact

Question 82.
If an agreement suffers from any uncertainty. It is-
(a) Voidable
(b) Void
(c) Unenforceable
(d) Illegal.
Answer:
(b) Void

Question 83.
All illegal agreements are-
(a) Void- ab- initio
(b) Valid
(c) Contingent
(d) Enforceable
Answer:
(a) Void- ab- initio

Question 84.
A promise to give money or money’s worth upon the determination or ascertainment of an uncertain event is called-
(a) Wagering Agreement
(b) Unlawful Agreement
(c) Illegal Agreement
(d) Voidable Agreement
Answer:
(a) Wagering Agreement

Question 85.
In the States of Gujarat and Maharashtra, collateral transactions to a wagering agreement are-
(a) Voidable
(b) Illegal and Void
(c) Valid and Enforceable
(d) Contingent
Answer:
(b) Illegal and Void

Question 86.
A Contingent Contract is a contract to do, or not to do something if some event, collateral to such contract –
(a) happens
(b) does not happen
(c) Neither (a) nor (b)
(d) Either (a) or (b)
Answer:
(d) Either (a) or (b)

Question 87.
Which of these parties cannot demand performance of promise?
(a) Promisee ’
(b) Any of the Joint Promisees.
(c) On the death of a Promisee, his Legal Representative.
(d) Stranger to the Contract
Answer:
(d) Stranger to the Contract

Question 88.
If a new contract is substituted in place of an existing contract it is called-
(a) Alteration
(b) Rescission
(c) Novation
(d) Waiver.
Answer:
(c) Novation

Question 89.
The phrase “Quantum Meruit” literally means –
(a) As much as is earned
(b) The fact in itself
(c) A Contract for the sale
(d) As much as is gained.
Answer:
(a) As much as is earned

Question 90.
Damages awarded to compensate the injured party for the actual amount of loss suffered by him for breach of contract are called –
(a) General / Ordinary Damages
(b) Special Damages
(c) Vindictive Damages
(d) Nominal Damages
Answer:
(c) Vindictive Damages

Question 91.
A finder of lost goods is a-
(a) Bailor
(b) Bailee
(c) True Owner
(d) Thief.
Answer:
(b) Bailee

Question 92.
Which of the following is the essential ingredient of contract of indemnity:
(a) Contract to make good the loss
(b) Loss must be caused to the indemnity holder.
(c) Loss may be caused by promiser or any other person
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) All of the above.

Question 93.
When the goods are delivered by one to another by way of security for the money borrowed, then it is technically known as:
(a) Hire
(b) Pawnee
(c) Pledge
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(b) Pawnee

Question 94.
Which of the following is not a charge on the property:
(a) Pledge
(b) Bailment
(c) Mortgage
(d) Hypothecation.
Answer:
(b) Bailment

Question 95.
How agency is created:
(a) By Direct appointment
(b) By implication
(c) By necessity
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 96.
The Delivery of goods by one person to another as security, for the payment of a debt is called-
(a) Bailment
(b) Pledge
(c) Mortgage
(d) Hypothecation
Answer:
(b) Pledge

Question 97.
An agreement enforceable by law is a-
(a) Promise
(b) Contract
(c) Obligation
(d) Lawful Promise
Answer:
(b) Contract

Question 98.
A contract is a combination of two elements-
(a) An Agreement & An Promise
(b) An Agreement & An Obligation
(c) A Promise & An Obligation .
(d) An offer & An Acceptance
Answer:
(b) An Agreement & An Obligation

Question 99.
A proposal when accepted becomes a-
(a) Promise.
(b) Contract
(c) Acceptance
(d) Agreement
Answer:
(a) Promise.

Question 100.
A void agreement is one which is-
(a) Valid but not enforceable
(b) Enforceable
(c) Enforceable by one party
(d) Not enforceable in law
Answer:
(d) Not enforceable in law

Question 101.
Agreement which are not contracts-
(a) Mr. A purchases goods from Mr. B.
(b) Avanshu supplies goods to Mohit’s firm.
(c) An agreement for watching cinema.
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) An agreement for watching cinema.

Question 102.
Which one is correct-
(a) All contracts are agreements
(b) AH agreements are contracts
(c) All agreements are not contracts
(d) Both (a) & (c)
Answer:
(d) Both (a) & (c)

Question 103.
An agreement which is enforceable by law at the option of one party-
(a) Valid contract
(b) Void contract
(c) Voidable contract
(d) Illegal contract
Answer:
(c) Voidable contract

Question 104.
Which of the following is false? An offer-
(a) Must be clear, definite, final & complete
(b) Can be vague
(c) Must be communicated
(d) May be general or specific
Answer:
(b) Can be vague

Question 105.
An offer may lapse by-
(a) Revocation
(b) Counteroffer
(c) Rejection by offeree
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 106.
Which of the following is false? An acceptance-
(a) Must be communicated
(b) Must be absolute
(c) Must be unconditional
(d) May be presumed from silence of offeree
Answer:
(d) May be presumed from silence of offeree

Question 107.
In case of illegal agreements, the collateral agreements are-
(a) Valid
(b) Void
(c) Voidable
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Void

Question 108.
An offer by post may be accepted by-
(a) Post
(b) Over telephone’s
(c) Both (a) & (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Post

Question 109.
An offer is made only when-
(a) The letter is posted
(b) Letter reaches the offeree
(c) Offeree post his acceptance
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Letter reaches the offeree

Question 110.
Which of the following is true?
(a) Consideration must result in benefit to both party
(b) Past consideration is no consideration in India
(c) Consideration is adequate
(d) Consideration must be something, which a promisor is not bound to do
Answer:
(a) Consideration must result in benefit to both party

Question 111.
Which of the following statement is false? Consideration-
(a) Must move at desire of the promiser
(b) May move from any person
(c) Must be illusionary
(d) Must be of some value
Answer:
(c) Must be illusionary

Question 112.
Which of the following is true?
(a) There can be a stranger to a contract
(b) There can be a stranger to a consideration
(c) There can be a stranger to contract & consideration
(d) None of above
Answer:
(b) There can be a stranger to a consideration

Question 113.
Consideration in simple term means-
(a) Anything in Return
(b) Something in Return
(c) Everything in Return
(d) Nothing in Return
Answer:
(b) Something in Return

Question 114.
Which of the following statement is false-
(a) Generally, a stranger to a contract cannot sue
(b) A verbal promise to pay a time barred debt is valid
(c) Completed gifts need no consideration
(d) No consideration is necessary to create an agency.
Answer:
(b) A verbal promise to pay a time barred debt is valid

Question 115.
A Gratuitous Promise can-
(a) Be enforced
(b) Not be enforced
(c) Be enforced in court of law
(d) None of above
Answer:
(b) Not be enforced

Question 116.
Ordinarily, a minor’s agreement is-
(a) Void ab initio
(b) Voidable
(c) Valid
(d) Unlawful
Answer:
(a) Void ab initio

Question 117.
A minor’s liability for ‘necessaries’ supplied to him-
(a) Arises after he attains majority age
(b) Is against only minor’s property
(c) Does not arises at all
(d) Arises if a minor promises for it.
Answer:
(b) Is against only minor’s property

Question 118.
Which of the following statement is not true about minor’s position in a firm?
(a) He cannot become a partner
(b) He can become a partner
(c) He can be admitted only to the benefits
(d) He can become a partner after majority attaining
Answer:
(c) He can be admitted only to the benefits

Question 119.
Which of the following statement is true?
(a) A contract with a minor is voidable at option of minor
(b) An agreement with a minor can be ratified after he attains majority
(c) A person who is usually of unsound mind cannot enter into a contract when he is of sound mind
(d) A person who is usually of sound mind cannot enter into a contract when he is of unsound mind
Answer:
(d) A person who is usually of sound mind cannot enter into a contract when he is of unsound mind

Question 120.
When the consent of both the parties is given by mistake, the contract is-
(a) Void
(b) Valid
(c) Voidable
(d) Illegal
Answer:
(a) Void

Question 121.
The contract is void on account of bilateral mistake of fact, but if there is a mistake of only one party, then contract is-
(a) Void
(b) Valid
(c) Voidable
(d) Illegal
Answer:
(b) Valid

Question 122.
A contract made by mistake about Indian law is-
(a) Void
(b) Valid
(c) Voidable
(d) Illegal
Answer:
(b) Valid

Question 123.
A contract made by mistake about some foreign law, is-
(a) Void
(b) Valid
(c) Voidable
(d) Illegal
Answer:
(a) Void

Question 124.
A mistake as to law not in force in India has the effect as-
(a) Mistake of fact
(b) Mistake of Indian law
(c) Fraud
(d) Misrepresentation
Answer:
(a) Mistake of fact

Question 125.
In case of innocent misrepresentation-
(a) Contract become voidable and damages are payable
(b) Contract become voidable and damages are not payable
(c) Contract become valid and damages are payable
(d) Contract remains valid and damages are not payable.
Answer:
(b) Contract become voidable and damages are not payable

Question 126.
In case of willful misrepresentation or fraud-
(a) Contract becomes voidable & damages are payable
(b) Contract become voidable & damages are not payable
(c) Contract become void & damages are payable
(d) Contract become void & damages are not payable.
Answer:
(a) Contract becomes voidable & damages are payable

Question 127.
Consent is not said to be free when it is caused by
(a) Coercion
(b) Undue influence
(c) Fraud
(d) All of above
Answer:
(d) All of above

Question 128.
When the consent of a party is obtained by fraud, the contract is-
(a) Void
(b) Voidable
(c) Valid
(d) Illegal
Answer:
(b) Voidable

Question 129.
Moral pressure is involved in case of-
(a) Coercion
(b) Undue influence
(c) Misrepresentation
(d) Fraud
Answer:
(b) Undue influence

Question 130.
Which of the following statement is true?
(a) A threat to commit suicide does not amount to coercion
(b) Undue influence involves use of physical pressure
(c) Ignorance of law is no excuse
(d) Silence always amount to fraud
Answer:
(c) Ignorance of law is no excuse

Question 131.
An agreement is void if it is opposed to public policy. Which of the following is not covered under heads of public policy?
(a) Trading with enemy
(b) Trafficking in public offences
(c) Marriage brokerage contracts
(d) Contracts to do impossible acts
Answer:
(d) Contracts to do impossible acts

Question 132.
Wagering means
(a) Betting
(b) Bidding
(c) Both (a) & (b)
(d) None of above
Answer:
(a) Betting

Question 133.
An agreement in restraint of marriage, i.e. agreement preventing a person from marrying is-
(a) Valid
(b) Voidable
(c) Void
(d) Contingent
Answer:
(c) Void

Question 134.
An agreement in restraint of marriage is valid in case of following persons-
(a) Minors
(b) Educated
(c) Married
(d) None of above
Answer:
(a) Minors

Question 135.
In India, wagering agreements are void except in-
(a) Kanpur
(b) Mumbai
(c) Delhi
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Mumbai

Question 136.
If any party has received any benefit under a contract from the other party, he must restore it or make compensation to other party. It is the case of—
(a) Quantum meruit
(b) Restitution
(c) Consideration
(d) Quasi-contract
Answer:
(b) Restitution

Question 137.
The basis of quasi contractual relation is the-
(a) Existence of a valid contract between parties
(b) Prevention of unjust enrichment at expense of other
(c) Provision contained in section 10 of contract act
(d) Existence of a voidable contract between the parties
Answer:
(b) Prevention of unjust enrichment at expense of other

Question 138.
A contingent contract is
(a) Void
(b) Voidable
(c) Valid
(d) Illegal
Answer:
(c) Valid

Question 139.
A contract is said to be discharged or terminated-
(a) When the rights and obligation are completed
(b) When the contract becomes voidable
(c) Both (a) & (b)
(d) None of the above Answer:
Answer:
(a) When the rights and obligation are completed

Question 140.
Which is not the mode of discharge of contract-
(a) Performance of contract
(b) Lapse of time
(c) Breach of contract
(d) Injunction
Answer:
(d) Injunction

Question 141.
A person finds certain goods belonging to some other persons. In such a case, the finder-
(a) Becomes the owner of that good
(b) Is under a duty to trace the real owner
(c) Can sell that good if true owner is not found
(d) Both (b) & (c)
Answer:
(d) Both (b) & (c)

Question 142.
If in a contract, the time lapses and if the party fails to perform the contract within specified time the contract becomes-
(a) Voidable
(b) Void
(c) Illegal
(d), Enforceable in the court
Answer:
(a) Voidable

Question 143.
Change in one or more of the important terms in a contract, it is the case of-
(a) Novation
(b) Rescission
(c) Remission
(d) Alternation
Answer:
(d) Alternation

Question 144.
In both the cases, devolution of joint liabilities and devolution of joint rights, if a promisor dies, who will perform on behalf of him-
(a) Other promiser
(b) His legal representation
(c) Both (a) & (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Both (a) & (b)

Question 145.
A contract which is impossible to perform is-
(a) Voidable
(b) Void
(c) Illegal
(d) Enforceable
Answer:
(b) Void

Question 146.
A party entitled to rescind the contract, loses the remedy where-
(a) He has ratified the contract
(b) Third party has acquired right in good faith
(c) Contract is not separable
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 147.
The special damages i.e. the damages which arises due to some special or unusual circumstances—
(a) Are not recoverable altogether
(b) Are illegal being positive in nature
(c) Cannot be claimed as a matter of right
(d) Can be claimed as a matter of right
Answer:
(c) Cannot be claimed as a matter of right

Question 148.
Which of the following statement is/are correct-
(a) Ordinary damages afe recoverable
(b) Special damages are recoverable only if parties know about them
(c) Remote or indirect damages are not recoverable
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 149.
Exemplary damages are not awarded in such case
(a) Breach of promise to marry
(b) Wrongful dishonour & customers cheque by banker
(c) Breach of any business contract
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Breach of any business contract

Question 150.
Damages which the contracting parties fix at the time of contract in case of breach-
(a) Unliquidated Damages
(b) Liquidated Damages
(c) Nominal Damages
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Liquidated Damages

Question 151.
A order of court restraining a person from doing a particular act, it’s a case of—
(a) Specific performance
(b) Injuction
(c) Both (a) & (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Injuction

Question 152.
Under the Indian Contract Act, the contract of indemnity is restricted to such cases-
(a) Where the loss promise to be reimbursed is caused by the conduct of the promisor or any other person
(b) The loss caused by the any events or accident which does not depend upon conduct of any person
(c) Both (a) & (b)
(d) None
Answer:
(b) The loss caused by the any events or accident which does not depend upon conduct of any person

Question 153.
What is the ratio of parties in contract of indemnity and contract of guarantee-
(a) 2 : 3
(b) 3 : 2
(c) 1 : 3
(d) 2 : 1
Answer:
(a) 2 : 3

Question 154.
In contract of indemnity, what is the liability of indemnifier against the indemnified
(a) Primary
(b) Secondary
(c) No liability
(d) Both (a) & (b)
Answer:
(a) Primary

Question 155.
In case of contract of guarantee, what is the liability of the surety against the principal debtor
(a) Primary
(b) Secondary
(c) No liability
(d) Fully liable
Answer:
(b) Secondary

Question 156.
Which is not the case of discharge of surety
(a) By notice of revocation
(b) By death of surety
(c) If creditor releases the principal debtor
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(d) None of the above

Question 157.
What is the right of the bailee against the goods
(a) Owner
(b) Possessor
(c) Bailee can sell those goods
(d) Both (a) & (b)
Answer:
(b) Possessor

Question 158.
In case of Contract of guarantee, if the creditor loses or parts with any security which the debtor provides him at time of contract, the surety is discharged to the extent of
(a) The value of the security
(b) The surety can be fully discharged
(c) The surety can claim damages
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(a) The value of the security

Question 159.
Which one is not the duties of bailee
(a) The bailee must take care of goods as of his goods.
(b) The bailee cannot use bailor’s goods in an unauthorised manner.
(c) The bailee should return the goods without demand on the expiry of the time period.
(d) He can set up adverse title to the goods.
Answer:
(d) He can set up adverse title to the goods.

Question 160.
A lien which is available only against that property of which the skill and labour have been exercised—
(a) General Lien
(b) Particular Lien
(c) Ordinary Lien
(d) Both (a) & (b)
Answer:
(b) Particular Lien

Question 161.
Which is not the case of termination of bailment
(a) Where the bailee wrongfully uses or dispose of the goods bailed.
(b) When the period of bailment expires
(c) When the object of bailment has been achieved
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(d) None of the above

Question 162.
An agency may also arise by
(a) Estoppel
(b) Necessity
(c) Ratification
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 163.
A mercantile agent employed to sell goods which have been placed in his possession or contract to buy goods for his principal—
(a) Factors
(b) Brokers
(c) Del Credere Agent
(d) Auctioneers
Answer:
(a) Factors

Question 164.
The threat to commit suicide amounts to
(a) Coercion
(b) Undue influence
(c) Misrepresentation
(d) Fraud
Answer:
(a) Coercion

Question 165.
Consensus-ad-idem is an essential of
(a) Agreement
(b) Promise
(c) Both (a) & (b)
(d) Consideration
Answer:
(a) Agreement

Question 166.
Agreement which are not contracts
(a) Social Matters
(b) Relating to partnership
(c) Domestic Agreements
(d) Both (a) & (c)
Answer:
(b) Relating to partnership

Question 167.
Offeror is-
(a) Party making an offer
(b) Third party
(c) Party to whom offer is made
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Party making an offer

Question 168.
Which one is not a type of offer
(a) Specific
(b) General
(c) Open
(d) Temporary
Answer:
(d) Temporary

Question 169.
Cross offer is
(a) Termination of original offer
(b) Rejection of original offer
(c) Both (a) & (c)
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Termination of original offer

Question 170.
Offer can be revoked-
(a) Before its acceptance
(b) By withdrawal of acceptance
(e) Both (a) & (b)
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Before its acceptance

Question 171.
Which one is mode of contract-
(a) Contract by post
(b) By SMS
(c) By Internet
(d) By none of the above
Answer:
(a) Contract by post

Question 172.
Quid Pro Quo means-
(a) Meeting of Minds
(b) Something in return
(c) To do something
(d) Promise
Answer:
(b) Something in return

Question 173.
No consideration, no contract is-
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Can’t say
(d) Partly True
Answer:
(a) True

Question 174.
Under English law, consideration may move from-
(a) Promisor
(b) Stranger
(c) Both (a) & (d)
(d) Promisee
Answer:
(d) Promisee

Question 175.
Under doctrine of privity of contract, third party can-
(a) Sue
(b) Cannot Sue
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) Cannot Sue

Question 176.
Which one is odd-
(a) Agreement may not result in a contract
(b) Contract constitutes an agreement
(c) Contract creates legal relations
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 177.
According to performance, contract are:
(a) Unilateral
(b) Bilateral
(c) Multilateral
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(d) Both (a) and (b)

Question 178.
Voidable contracts is defined under section-
(a) 2(i)
(b) 2(f)
(c) 2(h)
(d) 2(a)
Answer:
(a) 2(i)

Question 179.
A menu card handed by a waiter in a hotel is an offer-
(a) True
(b) Partly True
(c) False
(d) Can’t Say
Answer:
(c) False

Question 180.
Consideration may be in the form of-
(a) A return promise
(b) Forbearance
(c) Doing an act
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 181.
If there is no consideration, there will be a-
(a) Void Contract
(b) Voidable Contract
(c) Illegal Contract
(d) No Contract
Answer:
(d) No Contract

Question 182.
Which of the following is a person of unsound mind-
(a) Lunatics
(b) Idiots
(c) Drunkard
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 183.
A wrong statement made is called-
(a) Misrepresentation
(b) Fraud
(c) Undue Influence
(d) Mistake
Answer:
(a) Misrepresentation

Question 184.
Agreements tending to create monopolies are void as being:-
(a) Immoral
(b) Fraudulent
(c) Forbidden by law
(d) Opposed to public policy.
Answer:
(d) Opposed to public policy.

Question 185.
An agreement for marriage brokerage is not opposed to public policy,
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly true
(d) Partly false
Answer:
(b) False

Question 186.
Which one is Contingent Contract-
(a) D promises to pay E Rs 20,000, if goods lying in E’s godown are destroyed by fire
(b) D promise to pay E, if he purchases his goods
(c) D promises to pay E, if he sells his car to him
(d) D promises to pay E to buy his scooter, if he is ready to sell it
Answer:
(a) D promises to pay E Rs 20,000, if goods lying in E’s godown are destroyed by fire

Question 187.
Finder of goods is the next best owner to real amount-
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) True

Question 188.
A valid ‘tender’ must be-
(a) Conditional
(b) Unconditional
(c) Made to a third party
(d) Made in a foreign currency
Answer:
(b) Unconditional

Question 189.
To be a valid ‘tender’, it must be-
(a) For the whole obligation
(b) For the necessary part of obligation
(c) For at least 75% of the obligation
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) For the whole obligation

Question 190.
Because of supervening impossibility, the contract becomes-
(a) Illegal
(b) Void
(c) Voidable
(d) Remains Valid
Answer:
(b) Void

Question 191.
Which of the following is a ground of supervening impossibility-
(a) Strikes
(b) Lock-Outs
(c) Riots
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(d) None of the above

Question 192.
The damages in their nature are-
(a) Restoring
(b) Compensatory
(c) Reimbursing
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) Compensatory

Question 193.
A contract of indemnity is a type of-
(a) Quasi Contract
(b) Wagering Contract
(c) Contingent Contract
(d) Voidable Contract
Answer:
(c) Contingent Contract

Question 194.
The person who gives a guarantee is called-
(a) Principal Debtor
(b) Surety
(c) Indemnifier
(d) Creditor
Answer:
(b) Surety

Question 195.
A guarantee given for loan taken by a minor is-
(a) Illegal
(b) Void
(c) Valid
(d) Voidable
Answer:
(c) Valid

Question 196.
The liability of surety is
(a) Co-extensive with that of principal debtor
(b) More than principal debtor
(c) Always less than the principal debtor
(d) Always decided by the Court
Answer:
(a) Co-extensive with that of principal debtor

Question 197.
A bailment cannot be made about-
(a) A Car
(b) Furniture
(c) Money
(d) Television
Answer:
(c) Money

Question 198.
In a bailment, there is a transfer of goods-
(a) Custody
(b) Ownership
(c) Possession
(d) Both (b) & (c)
Answer:
(c) Possession

Question 199.
General lien can be exercised by-
(a) Banker
(b) Mechanics
(c) Unpaid Seller
(d) Finder of goods
Answer:
(a) Banker

Question 200.
Which of the following is not an essential element of agency
(a) Principal
(b) Agent
(c) Consideration
(d) An agreement
Answer:
(c) Consideration

Question 201.
A pretended agent is appointed by the-
(a) Principal
(b) Agent
(c) Sub-Agent
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 202.
Which of the following is not a mercantile agent-
(a) Factor
(b) Broker
(c) Auctioneer
(d) Insurance agent
Answer:
(d) Insurance agent

Question 203.
A person appointed by an agent to act for the principal, is called-
(a) Agent
(b) Sub-agent
(c) Substituted agent
(d) Pretended agent
Answer:
(c) Substituted agent

Question 204.
The contracts of indemnity, guarantee, bailment, pledge and agency is covered by section-
(a) Section 1 -75
(b) Section 76-100
(c) Section 124-128
(d) Section 124-238
Answer:
(d) Section 124-238

Question 205.
A proposal when accepted becomes a-
(a) Contract
(b) Promise
(c) Agreement
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Promise

Question 206.
Consensus-ad-idem means
(a) Meeting of minds
(b) Meeting of opinion
(c) Equal rights
(d) Existing condition
Answer:
(a) Meeting of minds

Question 207.
Which of the following statements is NOT correct with reference to an agreement?
(a) All contracts are agreements
(b) All agreements are contracts
(c) The parties must intend to create a legal relationship
(d) Agreement gives birth to a contract
Answer:
(b) All agreements are contracts

Question 208.
If Mr. A offers to Mr. B to sell his car at Rs 5,00,000 and Mr. B agrees to buy it at Rs 4,50,000 and Mr. A refuses it. Later on B offers to buy the car for Rs 5,00,000 then
(a) A is bound to sell the car
(b) B can sue A for Breach of Contract
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) This will be considered as a fresh offer by B and A is not bound to sell his car
Answer:
(d) This will be considered as a fresh offer by B and A is not bound to sell his car

Question 209.
Which of the following statements is NOT correct?
(a) Acceptance can be expressed or implied
(b) Acceptance can be conditional
(c) Acceptance must be given before the offer lapses
(d) Acceptance must be made in the manner prescribed
Answer:
(b) Acceptance can be conditional

Question 210.
Privity of contract means-
(a) Privacy of the terms of contract
(b) Giving priority to one party
(c) A stranger to a contract cannot sue
(d) Interest of all parties
Answer:
(c) A stranger to a contract cannot sue

Question 211.
If A makes an offer to B on a particular day, then the offer can be revoked by A before-
(a) B accepts the offer
(b) A receives B’s acceptance
(c) B has posted the letter of acceptance
(d) Reasonable period of time
Answer:
(c) B has posted the letter of acceptance

Question 212.
If B accepts A’s offer by posting a letter of acceptance, and afterwards B wants to revoke the agreement, the acceptance can be revoked before —
(a) A has posted his confirmation
(b) If revocation letter reaches before letter the acceptance letter
(c) Reasonable period of time
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) If revocation letter reaches before letter the acceptance letter

Question 213.
Which one of the following is not a kind of consideration?
(a) Executory consideration
(b) Executed consideration
(c) Past consideration
(d) Conditional consideration
Answer:
(d) Conditional consideration

Question 214.
Which of the following is not a consequence of an illegal contract?
(a) It is voidable
(b) Void
(c) The collateral agreements are
(d) None of the above also illegal
Answer:
(a) It is voidable

Question 215.
The substitution of a new contract in place of an old contract thereby discharging the rights and liabilities of the old contract is called as-
(a) Substitution
(b) Novation
(c) Discharge
(d) Replacement
Answer:
(b) Novation

Question 216.
The two types of breach are-
(a) Actual breach and Deemed breach
(b) Actual breach and Conditional breach
(c) Actual breach and Anticipatory breach
(d) Actual breach and Remedial breach
Answer:
(c) Actual breach and Anticipatory breach

Question 217.
Where the amount of compensation claimed is left to be assessed by the court, then it is called as-
(a) Judicial damages
(b) Liquidated damages
(c) Unliquidated damages
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Unliquidated damages

Question 218.
Where the contracting parties agree in advance the amount payable in the event of breach, the sum payable is called as-
(a) Liquidated damages
(b) Unliquidated damages
(c) Judicial damages
(d) Preliminary damages
Answer:
(a) Liquidated damages

Question 219.
The damages intended to put the injured party in the same position he was before the contract are called-
(a) Unliquidated damages
(b) Special damages
(c) Exemplary damages
(d) Ordinary damages
Answer:
(d) Ordinary damages

Question 220.
A contract is always based upon-
(a) Consensus-ad-idem
(b) Consideration
(c) Intent to create legal obligation
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 221.
The law provides for certain remedies in case there is no real agreement. Which of the following remedy .cannot be claimed by the parties?
(a) The agreement to be considered as void
(b) The party at fault can be compelled to pay damages
(c) The contract becomes voidable at the option of the parties
(d) Right to sell the personal property of the other party
Answer:
(d) Right to sell the personal property of the other party

Question 222.
The damages which are accorded to establish the right of decree for breach of contract is called a-
(a) Nominal damages
(b) Liquidated damages
(c) Exemplary damages
(d) Special damages
Answer:
(a) Nominal damages

Question 223.
The damages awarded for breach of promise of marriage or wrongful dishonour of cheque is called as-
(a) Nominal damages
(b) Exemplary damages
(c) Liquidated damages
(d) Special damages
Answer:
(b) Exemplary damages

Question 224.
A contract by which one party promises to save the other by the loss caused by the conduct of the promisor is called as-
(a) Contract of indemnity
(b) Bailment
(c) Contract of guarantee
(d) Contract of warranty
Answer:
(a) Contract of indemnity

Question 225.
The rights of the indemnity holder is covered by-
(a) Sec. 125
(b) Sec. 101
(c) Sec. 224
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Sec. 125

Question 226.
Which of the following remedy is not available to the indemnity holder?
(a) Right to receive the damages paid by him from the promisor
(b) Right to receive from the promisor the cost incurred in any suit
(c) Receive from the promisor an appropriate sum for loss caused to his image
(d) Receive from the promisor, all sums of money paid by him in terms of compromise of the suit
Answer:
(c) Receive from the promisor an appropriate sum for loss caused to his image

Question 227.
A contract to perform a promise or discharge the liability of a third party is called-
(a) Contract of indemnity
(b) Contract of agency
(c) Contract of guarantee
(d) Contract of warranty
Answer:
(c) Contract of guarantee

Question 228.
How many parties are there in a contract of indemnity and guarantee respectively?
(a) 2 and 3
(b) 3 and 2
(c) 2 and 5
(d) 5 and 2
Answer:
(a) 2 and 3

Question 229.
Which of the following statement is true?
(a) There are three parties in a contract of a guarantee
(b) The liability of the surety is co- extensive with that of the principal debtor
(c) A creditor is not bound to proceed against the principle debtor
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 230.
An agent in NOT personally liable for-
(a) Contract entered with third parties on behalf of employer
(b) Signs the agreement in his own name
(c) Where the agent works for foreign principal
(d) Where the contract expressly provides for the personal liability
Answer:
(a) Contract entered with third parties on behalf of employer

Question 231.
Principal is NOT liable for the agents act if-
(a) Agent acts within the scope of his authority
(b) Agent exceeds his authority
(c) Fraud or misrepresentation committed for benefit of the principal
(d) Work done out of his authority but the principal accepts it
Answer:
(b) Agent exceeds his authority

Question 232.
An agency comes to an end:
(a) By performance of contract
(b) By agreement between the principal and the agent
(c) By renunciation of his authority by the agent
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 233.
An agency is irrecoverable:
(a) Where the authority of agency is one coupled with interest
(b) Where the agent has incurred personal liability
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 234.
The termination of an agents authority terminates the authority of the sub-agent appointed by the agent.
(a) True
(b) Partly true
(c) False
(d) Partly false
Answer:
(a) True

Question 235.
In case the contract of agency has been terminated and a third party enters into a contract with the agent without knowing this fact, then —
(a) The contract will be binding on the principal
(b) The contract will not be binding on the principle
(c) The contract will only be binding on the agent
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) The contract will be binding on the principal

Question 236.
The meeting of the mind is called:
(a) Jus in reum
(b) Consensus -ad-idem
(c) Jus in personam
(d) Void ab initio.
Answer:
(b) Consensus -ad-idem

Question 237.
A husband promised to pay his wife a household allow once Rs 2,500 every month. Later parties separated and the husband failed to pay the amount. This is
(a) Contract
(b) Not a contract
(c) Agreement enforceable by law
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(b) Not a contract

Question 238.
A general offer can be accepted by
(a) Any person to whom communication reaches
(b) Only by person to whom it is made
(c) A person who lives nearer to person making offers.
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(a) Any person to whom communication reaches

Question 239.
When offer is made to particular person it can be acceptor by
(a) Any person from public
(b) Any member of his family
(c) Him alone
(d) Any of the above.
Answer:
(c) Him alone

Question 240.
Acceptance must be given within
(a) One year from the date of receiving offer
(b) Prescribed time.
(c) If no time limit is prescribed, it must be given with in a reasonable time
(d) (b) & (c).
Answer:
(d) (b) & (c).

Question 241.
What is the age of attaining majority as per Indian Contract Act, 1872 when the minor is under the guardianship of the court of wards?
(a) 16 years
(b) 18 years
(c) 21 years
(d) 20 years.
Answer:
(c) In India, the age of majority is regulated by the Indian Majority Act, (Act ix of 1875). Every person domiciled in India attains majority on the completion of 18 years of age. But If any minor is under the guardianship of the court of words, he will attain majority on the completion of 21 years of age.

Question 242.
Display of goods in a shop window with prices marked upon them is:
(a) Agreement
(b) Promise
(c) Invitation to offer
(d) Contract.
Answer:
(c) An invitation to an offer is only a circulation of an offer, it is an attempt to induce offers and precedes a definite offer. Acceptance of an invitation to an offer does not result in contract and only an offer emerges in the process of negotiation. Thus, display of goods in a shop window with prices marked upon them is an invitation to offer.

Question 243.
A contract of agency may be created by:
(a) Express agreement
(b) Implied agreement
(c) Ratification
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) A contract of agency may be express or implied but consideration is not on essential element in this contract. Agency may also arise by estoppel, necessity or ratification. In contract of agency an agent is mere connecting link between the principal and a third party. During this period an agent is acting for his principal, he is clothed with the capacity of his principal. Thus, contract of agency can be formed by all the three methods.

Question 244.
A threat to commit suicide is deemed as:
(a) Fraud
(b) Undue Influence
(c) Misrepresentation
(d) Coercion.
Answer:
(d) In Section 15 of Indian Contract Act, 1872 coercion means “the committing or threatening to commit any act forbidden by the Indian Penal Code, or unlawful detaining or threatening to detain, any property to the prejudice of any person whatever with the intention of causing any person to enter into an agreement.”

Thus, a threat to commit suicide is an act of Coercion.

Question 245.
In a contract of indemnity, the liability of indemnifier is-:
(a) Secondary
(b) Conditional
(c) Primary
(d) Optional.
Answer:
(c) The person who promises to indemnify or make good the loss is called the indemnifier and in a contract of indemnity, the liability of the indemnifier is primary.

Question 246.
The expression “Quantum Meruit” literally means:
(a) As much as earned
(b) As per the claim of the aggrieved party
(c) As much as work done
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) The expression ‘Quantum Meruit’ literally means “as much as earned or reasonable remuneration:”
It is used where a person claims reasonable remuneration for the services rendered by him when there was no express promise to pay the definite remuneration.

Question 247.
What is the status of a contract when the consent of a party is caused by coercion?
(a) Void
(b) Voidable
(c) Valid
(d) Illegal
Answer:
(b) If the consent of a party is caused by coercion in ahy contract, that contract will be voidable because aggrieved party can avoid that contract as his consent was not free.

Question 248.
Which of the following statements is true about consideration?
(a) Past consideration is valid in India
(b) Consideration must result in benefit to both the parties.
(c) If there is no consideration, there is no contract
(d) Consideration must be adequate.
Answer:
(a) Consideration is the doing or not doing of something which the promisor desires to be done. Consideration may be past, present or future. Consideration need not be adequate, but should be real.

In some cases, without consideration, contract wilt be valid and enforceable.
Example: Natural Love and Affection, completed gift etc.

Question 249.
In which of the following situations original contract need not be performed:
(a) When parties substitute a new contract for the old one
(b) When the parties to a contract agree to rescind it .
(c) When the parties to a contract agree to alter it
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) The general rule is that contract must be performed but there are some situations when original contract need not be performed:

  • On novation of a contract.
  • On rescission of a contract.
  • On alteration of a contract.

Thus, the answer is all of the above.

Question 250.
According to section 2 (h) of the Indian Contract Act, ” is an agreement enforceable by law.”
(a) Consideration
(b) Agreement
(c) Promise
(d) Contract
Answer:
(d) According to Section 2 (h) of the Indian Contract Act, “Contract is an agreement enforceable by law”.

Question 261.
In a contract, when the object and consideration is unlawful it is deemed as:
(a) Void
(b) Voidable
(c) Valid
(d) Contingent
Answer:
(a) In a contract, when the object and consideration is unlawful, it is deemed as Void Contract. Because without any legal effect a contract cannot be enforced in a Court of Law.

Question 262.
Which one of the following damages is not recoverable under the Indian Contract Act, 1872?
(a) Ordinary damages
(b) Special damages
(c) Nominal damages
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(d) There are following damages which are recoverable under the Indian Contract Act, 1872:

  • General/Ordinary Damages.
  • Special Damages.
  • Exemplary/Punitive Damages.
  • Nominal Damages.
  • Liquidated Damages & Penalty.
  • No damage is recoverable for any remote or indirect loss.

Thus, rest all other damages are recoverable.

Question 263.
What is the legal status of an agreement with uncertain meaning?
(a) Valid
(b) Void
(c) Voidable
(d) Illegal
Answer:
(b) An uncertain agreement means an agreement the meaning of which is not certain or capable of being made certain. Such agreements are void.

Example: A agrees to sell B “my white horse for ? 5,000 or ? 10,000. There is nothing to show which of the two prices was to be given. The agreement is void.

Question 264.
A person who makes a promise is known as:
(a) Promisor
(b) Promisee
(c) Offerer
Answer:
(a) When the person to whom the proposal is made signifies his assent thereto, the proposal is said to be accepted. Proposal when accepted, becomes a promise and the person who makes a promise is known as promisor.

Question 265.
‘Vdidable’ contract means:
(a) Parties are incompetent to contract
(b) Free consent of the parties is missing
(c) Consideration is inadequate
(d) The .object of contract is expressly declared void by the act itself.
Answer:
(b) A voidable contract is one which a party can put to an end. He can exercise his option, if his consent was not free.

Note: The Contract will however be-binding if the option is not Exercised within a reasonable period of time.

Question 266.
An agreement in restraint of marriage:
(a) Is voidable at the option of the promisor
(b) Is voidable at the option of the promisee
(c) Is expressly declared as void
(d) Cannot be enforced as there is no privity of contract.
Answer:
(c) An agreement in restraint of marriage is expressly declared void as it is against public policy but is not illegal. An agreement not to marry at all or not to marry any particular person or class of persons is void as it is in restraint of marriage.

Question 267.
For acceptance to be considered as valid it must:
(a) Be absolute ,
(b) Be unqualified
(c) Be both absolute and unqualified
(d) Be conditional.
Answer:
(c) Acceptance must be unqualified and absolute i.e. unconditional and must correspond with all the terms of the offer. A qualified and conditional acceptance amounts to no acceptance at all and is treated as a counter offer due to which the original offer lapses.

Question 268.
The phrase quantum meruit literally means:
(a) As much as earned or reasonable remuneration
(b) The fact in itself
(c) A contract for sale
(d) As much as is gained.
Answer:
(a) The expression ‘Quantum Meruit’ literally means “as much as earned” or reasonable remuneration. It is used where a person claims reasonable remuneration for the services rendered by him when there was no express promise to pay the definite remuneration.

Question 269.
A contract is _________.
(a) A promise to do something or abstain from doing something
(b) A communication of intention to do something or abstain from doing something
(c) A set of promises
(d) An agreement enforceable by law
Answer:
(d) The Indian Contract Act has defined contract in Section 2(h) as “an agreement enforceable by law.”

Question 270.
If a new contract is substituted in place of an existing contract, it is called _________.
(a) Alteration
(b) Rescission
(c) Novation
(d) Waiver
Answer:
(c) A contract may be discharged by mutual agreement of parties. One of the methods to discharge is novation which occurs when an existing contract is substituted by a new one, either between same parties or between new ones.

Question 271.
A contract of indemnity is a _________.
(a) Contingent contract
(b) Wagering contract
(c) Quasi contract
(d) Void agreement.
Answer:
(a) Contingent contract refers to a contract to do or not to do something, if some event, collateral to such contract, does or does not happen. Example – contract of insurance, indemnity and guarantee etc.
Thus, contract of indemnity is a contingent contract.

Question 272.
When consent is obtained under undue influence, the contract is termed as _________.
(a) Valid contract
(b) Vdid contract
(c) Voidable contract
(d) Unilateral contract.
Answer:
(c) A contract is said to be induced by ‘undue influence’ where the relations subsisting between the parties are such that one of the parties is in a position to dominate the will of the other and uses that position to obtain an unfair advantage of the other. When the consent is caused by undue influence, though the agreement amounts to a contract, such a contract is voidable at the option of the party whose consent was so obtained.

Question 278.
A surety may be discharged from liability :
X. By notice of revocation of guarantee
Y. On the failure of payment by the main creditor.
Z. If the creditor does any act which is against the rights of the surety.
Correct option is _________
(a) X and Y
(b) Y and Z
(c) X and Z
(d) X; Y and Z.
Answer:
(c) A surety is discharged in the following ways –

  • By giving notice to creditor for future transactions in case of continuing guarantee.
  • In absence of any contract to the contrary, continuing guarantee is revoked on death of surety.
  • Where there is any variance in terms of contract between the principal debtor and creditor without surety’s consent.
  • If principal debtor is discharged by – a contract, any act, or any omission.
  • if creditors makes an arrangement with the principal debtor for composition, for giving time or not suing him without surety’s consent.
  • if creditor does any act or omission, thereby impairing sureties eventual remedy.
  • if creditor loses or parts with security

Question 279.
An agreement for rendering services entered into by a father on behalf of his minor daughter is _________.
(a) Void
(b) Voidable
(c) Valid
(d) Quasi.
Answer:
(a) An agreement by a parent or guardian entered into on behalf of the minor is binding on him provided it is for the benefit or is for legal necessity. However, it has been held that an agreement for service, entered into by a father on behalf of his minor daughter, is not enforceable at law and is therefore, void.

Question 280.
An agent who in consideration of extra commission gives guarantees to his principal that the purchaser of the goods on credit will pay for the goods is called _________.
(a) Sub-agent
(b) Mercantile agent
(c) Brokers
(d) Del credere agent.
Answer:
(d) A del credere agent is a mercantile agent, who in consideration of an extra remuneration guarantees to his principal that purchasers who buy on credit will pay for the goods they take. In the event of failing to pay, the del credere agent is bound to pay his principal the sum owned by third-party.

Question 281.
If the behaviour of a person shows that he is a partner in a firm (when actually he is not), such a person is known as _________.
(a) Nominal partner
(b) Sleeping partner
(c) Sub-partner
(d) Partner by estoppel.
Answer:
(d) If the behaviour of a person arises misunderstanding that he is a partner in a firm (when actually he is not), such a person is estoppel from later on denying the liabilities for acts of the firm. Such person is called partner by estoppel.

Question 282.
The meaning of legal maxim ‘mens rea’ is _________.
(a) A pending suit
(b) Immediate profits
(c) During litigation
(d) A guilty mind.
Answer:
(d) The legal maxim, “mens rea”means a guilty mind.

Question 283.
All contracts are agreements. This statement is _________.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(a) As per Indian Contract Act, a contract is an agreement enforceable by law. While agreements in which the idea of bargain is absent and there is no intention to create legal relations are not contract. Thus, it can be said all contracts are agreement, but all agreements are not contract.

Question 284.
All void agreements are illegal, this statement is _________.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(b) An agreement not enforceable by law are void. They are not always illegal and its collateral transactions are legal.
Hence, the above statement in false.

Question 285.
Which of the following is not a chief flaw in a contract?
(a) Mistake
(b) Fraud
(c) Coercion Fraud
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) According to Contract Act, 1872, chief flaws in contract are as follows:

  • Incapacity
  • Mistake
  • Misrepresentation
  • Fraud t
  • Undue Influence
  • Coercion
  • Illegality
  • Impossibility

Thus option (d) is correct.

Question 286.
Coercion is _________.
(a) Void
(b) Illegal
(c) Voidable
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) “Coercion” is committing or threatening to commit any act forbidden by the Indian Penal Code or the unlawful detaining or threatening to detain any property to the prejudice of any person whatever, with the intention of causing any person to: enter into an agreement. Thus, an agreement which is included by coercion is voidable at the’option of party coerced.

Question 287.
Which of the following is not an essential element of a valid contract?
(a) Offer
(b) Legality of object
(c) Lawful consideration
(d) Impossibility of performance
Answer:
(d) According to Sec. 10, of Indian Contract Act, 1872, essential elements of a valid Contract are as follows:

  • Proper offer and proper acceptance with intention to create legal relationship.
  • Lawful Consideration
  • Capacity
  • Free Consent
  • Lawful agreement

Thus, Impossibility of performance is not essential element of a valid Contract.

Question 288.
Wagering agreements are illegal in _________.
(a) Mumbai
(b) Delhi
(c) Chennai
(d) Kolkata
Answer:
(a) In India except Mumbai, wagering agreements are void. In Mumbai, wagering agreements have been declared illegal by the Avoiding Wagers Act, 1865.

Question 289.
Bonafide means _________.
(a) Said by the way
(b) In good faith
(c) From the beginning
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Bonafide means in good faith.

Question 290.
Offer + Acceptance = _________.
(a) Consideration
(b) Promise
(c) Obligation
(d) Agreement
Answer:
(b) As per Section 2 (b) of Indian Contract Act defines promise as, “A proposal when accepted becomes a promise.”
Thus, Offer + Acceptance = Promise

Question 291.
A contract which becomes impossible to perform is known as _________ contract.
(a) Voidable
(b) Void
(c) Valid
(d) Illegal
Answer:
(b) As per Section 2 (j) of Indian Contract Act, “A contract which ceases to be enforceable by law becomes void when it ceases to be enforceable.”
Thus, a Contract which becomes impossible to perform is known as void contract.

Question 292.
The expression ‘Quantum Meruit’ means _________.
(a) As much as earned
(b) Equal consideration
(c) On the basis of merit
(d) Meeting of minds
Answer:
(a) The expression “quantum Meruit” means ‘as much as earned’ or reasonable remuneration. It is used where a person claims reasonable remuneration for the services rendered by him when there is no express promise to pay the definite remuneration.

Question 293.
Which amongst the following are the types of lien?
(a) Particular lien
(b) General lien
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Neither (a) nor (b)
Answer:
(c) Lien refers to the right of one person to retain the possession of some goods, belonging to another person until some debt or liability is discharged.
There are two types of lien:

  • Particular Lien
  • General Lien

Therefore, answer is option(c).

Question 294.
Which of the following is an invitation to offer;
(a) Application for loan
(b) Participation in an auction sale
(c) Tender for supply of goods in time
(d) List for sale of goods.
Answer:
(b) An invitation to offer is only a circulation of an offer, it is an attempt induce offers and precedes a definite offer. Acceptance of invitation does not result in contract.
Thus Participation in an auction sale is a type of an invitation to offer. In this auctioneers request for bids (which are offered by the bidders)

Question 295.
A person who finds goods belonging to another and takes them into his custody:
(a) Is subject to the same responsibilities as a bailee
(b) Becomes the owner of those goods thereafter
(c) Is allowed to sell them and retain the money realised from such sale
(d) Has no obligation to return those goods.
Answer:
(a) The liability of a finder of goods belonging to someone else is that ‘ of a bailee. This mean that he must take as much care of the goods as a man of ordinary prudence would take of his own goods of the same kind. Therefore, a person who finds belonging to another and takes them into his custody is subject to-the same responsibilities as a bailee.

Question 296.
An agreement the object of which is unlawful is:
(a) Valid
(b) Void
(c) Voidable
(d) Optional.
Answer:
(b) Under section 23, any agreement of which the consideration or object is unlawful is a void agreement.

Question 297.
The person giving guarantee is called:
(a) Sub-debtor
(b) Principal debtor
(c) Surety
(d) Creditor.
Answer:
(c) The person giving guarantee is called surety because he is the person who undertakes an obligation to pay a sum of money or to perform some duty or promise for another in the event that person fails to act.

Question 298.
Voluntary transfer of possession by one person to another is known as _________.
(a) Bailment
(b) Delivery
(c) Possession
(d) Transfer.
Answer:
(a) Bailment is a voluntary delivery of goods for a temporary purpose on the understanding that they are to be returned in specie in the same or altered form. The ownership of the goods remains with the bailor, the bailee getting only the possession.

Question 299.
X contracted with Y for supplying of high quality 1000 Quintals of oii. V supplied the desired quantity but of low quality. The contract is _________.
(a) Void
(b) Voidable
(c) Void ab initio
(d) None
Answer:
(b) X contracted with Y for supplying of high quality 1000 Quintals of oil Y supplied the desired quantity but of low quality the contracts is voidable. The buyer can accept the goods or treat the contract as repudiated.

Question 300.
A person who provides guarantee in a contract is called _________.
(a) Debtor
(b) Principal debtor
(c) Surety
(d) Creditor
Answer:
(c) contract of guarantee is a contract to perform the promise, as discharge the liability of a third person in case of his default. The person who gives the guarantee is called the surety.

Question 301.
A minor child was provided treatment in hospital by a doctor. The doctor can recover his reasonable expenses from _________.
(a) Can’t recover as there was no contract
(b) Can recover from minor personally
(c) Can recover from guardian’s of minor
(d) Can recover from estate of minor as it was a necessary of life supplied to him.
Answer:
(d) According to Section 68 of the Indian Contract Act, a minors estate is liable to pay a reasonable price for necessaries supplied to him or to any other whom minor is bound to support.

Question 302.
When the consent of a party is obtained by fraud, the contract is:
(a) Valid
(b) Voidable
(c) Illegal
(d) Void
Answer:
(b) An agreement is deemed as voidable if it is effected by these flaws:

  • Misrepresentation
  • Fraud
  • Undue influence
  • Coercion

Question 303.
Which of the following statement is true?
(a) Silence always amounts to fraud
(b) A threat to commit suicide does not amounts to coercion
(c) Undue influence involves use of physical pressure
(d) ignorance of law is no excuse.
Answer:
(d) If there is a mistake of law of the land, the contract is binding because every one is deemed to have knowledge of law of the land and ignorance of law is no excuse, (ignarantia juris non excusat).

Question 304.
There was a woman who took a loan from another person at the rate of 100% p.a. interest. This is the case of:
(a) Fraud
(b) Misrepresentation
(c) Undue-influence
(d) Coercion
Answer:
(c) Where the relations subsisting between the parties are such that one of the parties is in a position to dominate the will of the other and uses that position to obtain an unfair advantage over the other. In the given case the other person is in a dominating position and use it to obtain an unfair advantage. So this is the case of ‘undue influence’.

Question 305.
The following will make a contract voidable:
(a) Fraud
(b) Undue influence
(c) Coercion
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) In the following circumstances contract will be voidable:

  • Coercion
  • Undue influence
  • Fraud
  • Mistake
  • Misrepresentation

Thus, option (d) is correct.

Question 306.
If a contract required by statue to be wholly in writing is not in writing, it is:
(a) Voidable
(b) Void
(c) Valid
(d) Unforceable
Answer:
(b) If statute defined that the contract must be in writing then the parties should compulsorily create the contract in writing. If parties does not create the contract in writing, it is a void contract.

Question 307.
Agreement in restraint of marriage is:
(a) Void
(b) Illegal
(c) Valid
(d) Voidable
Answer:
(a) An agreement in restrain of marriage is expressly declared void as it is against public policy but is not illegal. An agreement not to marry at all or not to marry any particular person or class of person is void as it is in restrain of marriage.

Question 308.
Agreement in restraint of trade is if the restraint imposed is reasonable.
(a) Void
(b) Illegal
(c) Valid
(d) Voidable
Answer:
(c) An agreement by which any person is restrained from exercising a lawful profession, trade or business of any kind, is to the extent void, but this rule is subject to the some exceptions i.e. where a person sells the goodwill of a business and agrees with the buyer to restrain from carrying on a similar business, within specified local limits, so long as the buyer or his successor in interest carries on a like business therein, such an agreement is valid.

Question 309.
A contract made by mistake of the Indian law is:
(a) Void
(b) Enforceable
(c) Illegal
(d) Voidable.
Answer:
(b) Contract made by mistake of Indian law is enforceable and contract is binding because everyone is deemed to have knowledge of law and ignorance of law is no excuse.

Question 310.
An acceptance must be _________.
(a) Conditional
(b) Absolute and unqualified
(c) Optional
(d) Futuristic.
Answer:
(b) An acceptance must be unqualified and absoluu. It must correspond with all the terms of the offer.

Question 311.
A contract dependant on the happening of future uncertain event is a:
(a) Void Contract
(b) Voidable Contract
(c) Uncertain Contract
(d) Contingent Contract.
Answer:
(d) The contract dependent on the happening of future uncertain event is the contingent contract. Contract of insurance and contract of indemnity and guarantee are popular instances.

Question 312.
An agreement enforceable by law is a:
(a) Offer
(b) Obligation
(c) Contract
(d) Promise
Answer:
(c) According to Sec. 2(b) of the Indian Contract Act. “A contract is a agreement enforceable by law”.

Question 313.
Consequences of coercion, fraud, misrepresentation is that the contract is:
(a) Still enforceable
(b) Void
(c) Voidable
(d) Illegal
Answer:
(c) Consent is said to be free when it is not caused by:

  • Coercion
  • Undue Influence
  • Fraud
  • Misrepresentation
  • Mistakes.

When a free consent is absent, the contract is said to be voidable.

Question 314.
A contract dependent on the happening of future uncertain event is a:
(a) Uncertain contract
(b) Void contract
(c) Voidable contract
(d) Contingent contract
Answer:
(d) Contingent contract is a contract that is dependant upon happening or non happening of a future uncertain event.

Question 315.
Which is not true in case of a finder of goods?
(a) If the owner is found, but the owner refuses to pay lawful charges, then he can retain the goods until payment is received.
(b) He can sell the goods if the goods are of perishable nature.
(c) He can retain the goods till the owner is found.
(d) He cannot sell the goods in any condition.
Answer:
(d) Since the position of the finder of the goods is that of a bailee, he is supposed to take the same amount of care with regard to the goods as is expected of a bailee under Section 151. He is also subject to all the duties of a bailee, including a duty to return the goods after the true owner is found. If he refuses to return, he could be made liable for conversion’ He can even sell the goods if the goods are of perishable nature. Hence option D would be the answer.

Question 316.
The mercantile agents include:
(a) Promoters.
(b) Bidder.
(c) Factor.
(d) Manufacturer
Answer:
(c) Mercantile Agent include factors among the other options as he is employed to sell the goods in his possession, contract to buy goods for his principal, can sell and receive payment, has an insurable interest and have a general lien in respect of any claim.

Question 317.
Which of the following statement is false regarding acceptance?
(a) Acceptance must be communicated
(b) Acceptance must be accepted by a perspn having authority to accept
(c) Acceptance must be absolute and unconditional
(d) Acceptance may be presumed from silence of offeree
Answer:
(d) The general rule is that silence does not constitute acceptance. In order for silence to be considered acceptance, there usually are some prior dealings between the two parties and that it is customary for the two parties to treat silence as an acceptance. Another way j that silence may be considered acceptance is where both parties J have agreed that silence can be treated as acceptance.

Question 318.
If a creditor does not file a suit against the buyer for recovery of the price within three years, the debts becomes:
(a) Not time -barred
(b) Time barred and hence irrecoverable
(c) Renewed
(d) Time barred but recoverable.
Answer:
(b) A debt barred by limitation cannot be recovered and a promise to pay such debt without any consideration. Thus, if a creditor does not ; file a suit against a buyer for recovery of price within a specified time j then the debt will be said to be called as time barred debt and hence irrecoverable.

Question 319.
Which is the example of wagering agreement?
(a) To purchase a lottery ticket ”
(b) Speculative trading in stock exchange
(c) Speculative trading in commodity exchange
(d) Trading on future goods
Answer:
(a) Lottery being a game of chance is a wagering agreement. It is void and illegal, thus option (a) is correct.

Question 320.
The person giving guarantee is called:
(a) Sub Debtor
(b) Surety
(c) Principal Debtor
(d) Creditor
Answer:
(b) In a contract of guarantee, the person who gives guarantee is called Surety.

Question 321.
Express contract means:
(a) Contract which is made by words either spoken or written
(b) Contract which is made by both words and deeds
(c) Contract which is made by promises
(d) Contract which is made by deeds
Answer:
(a) Express contract mean any contract which is made with the words either written or oral.

Question 322.
An agreement whereby one of the parties agrees to close his business for a consideration of certain sum of money being paid by another party is:
(a) Void
(b) Valid
(c) Enforceable
(d) Voidable
Answer:
(a) Any agreement in restraint of trade is void (Sec. 7).

Question 323.
The buyer will get a good tittle if he buys in good faith, from a mercantile agent who is in possession of good with the consent of the _________.
(a) Seller
(b) Principal
(c) Buyer
(d) Owners
Answer:
(c) If any person buys in good faith from mercantile agent who is possession of goods with the consent of seller can also convey good tittle.

Question 324.
‘Voidable’ contract means:
(a) Parties are incompetent to contract
(b) Free consent of the parties is missing
(c) Consideration is inadequate
(d) The object of contract is expressly
Answer:
(b) Voidable contract means when the consent of party is not free or in other words, it is contract in which parties does not give their consent wilfully. Consent obtained from ‘coercion’ ‘Undue Influence’ ‘Mistake’, ‘Misrepresentation’. ‘Fraud’ is not free so, contract without free consent is not valid contract but it is voidable contract. Aggrieved party can claim damages or rescind contract within reasonable time otherwise it is valid contract.

Question 325.
An agreement in restraint of marriage:
(a) Is voidable at the option of the promisor
(b) Is voidable at the option of the promisee
(c) Is expressly declared as void
(d) Cannot be enforced an there is no privity of contract.
Answer:
(c) An agreement in restraint of marriage is opposed to public policy and hence, it is declared to be void.

Question 326.
For acceptance to be considered as valid, it must:
(a) Be absolute
(b) Be unqualified
(c) Be both absolute and unqualified
(d) Be conditional
Answer:
(c) Acceptance must be absolute and unqualified. If acceptance is not absolute and unqualified then it s not a valid acceptance.

Question 327.
Who is not a Mercantile Agent:
(a) Factor
(b) Bidder
(c) Broker
(d) Auctioneers
Answer:
(b) A Mercantile Agent works as :

  • Factor
  • Commission Agent
  • Del-Credere Agent
  • Broker
  • Auctioneers etc.

Thus, option (b) is correct.

Question 328.
Crime against Society is _________.
(a) Stalking
(b) Forgery
(c) Trafficking
(d) (b) and (c) both
Answer:
(d) Trafficking, forgery, murder etc. at any offence committed against social welfare is a crime against society.

Question 329.
A Contract is:
(a) A promise to do something or abstain tram doing something
(b) A communication of intention to do something or abstain from doing something
(c) A set of promises
(d) An agreement enforceable by law
Answer:
(d) The Indian Contract Act has defined contract in Section 2(h) as “an agreement enforceable by law”.

Question 330.
If a new contract is substitute in place of an existing contract, it is called:
(a) Alteration
(b) Rescission
(c) Novation
(d) Waiver
Answer:
(c) Novation occurs when an existing contract is substituted by new one either between same parties or between the new ones. Therefore if a new contract is substituted in place of existing contract it is called Novation.

Question 331.
A contract of indemnity is a:
(a) Contingent contract
(b) Wagering contract
(c) Quasi contract
(d) Void agreement
Answer:
(a) Contingent contract refers to a contract to do or not to do something if some event, collateral to such contract, does or does not happen.

Example : contract of insurance indemnity and guarantee, etc. Thus, contract of indemnity is a contingent contract.

Question 332.
When consent is obtained under undue influence, the contract is termed as:
(a) Valid Contract
(b) Void Contract
(c) Voidable Contract
(d) Unilateral Contract
Answer:
(c) A contract is said to be induced by undue influence where the relations subsisting between the parties are such that one of the parties is in a position to dominate the will of the other and uses that position to obtain an unfair advantage of the other. When the consent is caused by undue influence, though the i agreement amounts to a contract, such a contract is voidable at the ; option of the party whose consent was so obtained.

Question 333.
A surety may be discharged from liability:
X. By notice of revocation of guarantee
Y. On the failure of payment by the main creditor
Z. If the creditor does any act which is against the rights of the surety
(a) X and Y
(b) Y and Z
(c) X and Z
(d) X, Y and Z
Answer:
(c) A surety is discharged in the following ways:
(i) By giving notice to creditors for future transactions in case of continuing guarantee.

(ii) In absence of any contract to the contrary, continuing guarantee is revoked on death of surety.

(iii) Where there is any variance in terms of contract between the principal debtor and creditor without surety’s consent.

(iv) If principal debtor is discharged by:

  • a contract
  • any act or
  • any omission

(v) If creditors makes an arrangement with the principal debtor for composition, for giving time or not suing him without surety’s consent.

(vi) If creditor does any act or omission, there by impairing sureties eventual remidy.

(vii) If creditor losses or parts with security without surety’s consent. Thus, the answer is X and Z.

Question 334.
An agreement for rendering services entered into by a father an behalf of his minor daughter is:
(a) Void
(b) Voidable
(c) Valid
(d) Quasi
Answer:
(a) An agreement by a parent or guardian entered into on behalf of the minor is binding on him provided it is for the benefit or is for legal necessity. However, it has been held that an agreement for service, entered into by a father on behalf of his minor daughter is not enforceable at law and is therefore void.

Question 335.
An agent who in consideration of extra commission gives guarantees to his principal that the purchaser of the goods on credit will pay for the goods is called:
(a) Sub-agent
(b) Mercantile agent
(c) Brokers
(d) Del credere agent
Answer:
(d) A del credere agent is a mercantile agent, who in consideration of an extra remuneration guarantees to his principal that purchasers who buy oh credit will pay for the goods they take. In the event of failing to pay. the del credere agent is bound to pay his principal the sum owned by third-party.

Question 336.
Agreement is a:
(a) Promise
(b) Contract
(c) Enforcable by law
(d) None of above.
Answer:
(d) As per Section 2 (e) of Indian Contract Act, “every promise and every set of promise forming the consideration for each other, is an agreement”. It is evident from the definition given above that an agreement is based on a promise and an agreement gives birth to contract.

Question 337.
Quasi contract emerge froms _________.
(a) Contingency
(b) Existence of valid contract
(c) Prevention of on just enrichment on cost of other
(d) Existence of voidable contract between parties
Answer:
(c) “Certain relations resembling those created by contact” are known as quasi contract. Sometimes obligations are imposed by parties by law on the basis of principal of equity which states “no one can enrich himself on the cost of other”. It is an obligation which is created in absence of any agreement.

Question 338.
An illegal contract is _________.
(a) Void ab initio
(b) Voidable
(c) Valid
(d) None of Above.
Answer:
(a) An agreement with an unlawful object and consideration is known as illegal agreement. It has no legal effects as between immediate parties and transactions collateral to it also become tainted with illegality and are therefore void-ab-initio. Parties to an unlawful agreement cannot get any help from court.

Question 339.
Agreement with minor for beneficiary is:
(a) Illegal
(b) Valid
(c) Void
(d) Can’t say
Answer:
(b) According to indian Contract Act, 1872, agreement with minor is a void agreement as a minor is incompetent to enter into a contract. But when agreement by a parent or guardian entered into on behalf of minor is binding on him provided it is for his benefit or is for legal necessity.

Question 340.
Best class of example for contingent contract:
(a) Indemnity
(b) Guarantee
(c) Both A and B
(d) Wagering Agreements
Answer:
(c) A contingent contract is one where the promisor performs the obligation only when certain condition are met. The contract of insurance, indemnity and guarantee are considered to be the best examples of contingent contract.

CS Foundation Business Environment and Law Notes

Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Introduction:

  • Businessmen have a common practice of making use of certain ddcuments for making payments.
    Such documents are known as negotiable instruments.
  • The law relating to negotiable instruments is contained in the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881.
  • Accepting payments through them is risky as it involves deferred payments.
  • It is the law of commercial world.
  • It was enacted to facilitate the activities in trade and commerce.
  • Its main purpose was to present an orderly and authoritative statement of the leading rules of law relating to negotiable instrument.
  • It refers to an act to define and amend the law relating to promissory notes, bills of exchange and cheques.
  • Act applies to whole of India and all persons resident in India.
  • Its provisions are not applicable to Hundis and other native instruments.

The Act recognizes only three types of instruments:

  • Promissory notes
  • Bills of exchange
  • Cheques

Negotiable Instruments:

  • It is an “instrument which is transferable, by delivery, like cash, and is also capable of being sued upon by the person holding for time being.
  • As per the Section 13(1) of the Act,
  • “A negotiable instrument means a promissory note, bills of exchange, or cheque payable either to order or to bearer.”

Conditions of Negotiability:

  • It should be freely transferable.
  • Defective title of transferor does affects the title of person taking it for value and in good faith.
    Transferee can sue-upon the instrument in his own name.

Negotiability Involves two Elements:

  • Transferability free from equities.
  • Transferability by delivery or endorsement.

Effects of Negotiability:

  • General principal of law says: “Nemo Dat Quad Non-Habet” i.e. no one can pass a better title than he himself has.
  • Negotiable instrument is an exception to above rule.
  • Thus, a bonafide transferee of negotiable instrument without notice of any defect of title acquires a better title than that of transfer.

Characteristics:

  • Holder is presumed to be the owner of the property contained therein.
  • It is a written document.
  • It should be signed.
  • Payable to bearer or order.
  • It is unconditional.
  • It may be transferred by endorsement and delivery.
  • Transferee obtains a good title.

These are freely transferable but can be transferred only till maturity and in case of cheque till it becomes stale‘(i.e. six months from the date of issue)

Classification:

  • Bearer
  • Order
  • Inland
  • Foreign
  • Demand
  • Time
  • Ambiguous
  • Inchoate/Incomplete.

Bearer Instruments

  • An instrument is payable to bearer which is expressed to be so payable.
  • Wards “Pay to bearer are expressed on it.”
  • It is also payable to bearer when the last endorsement on it is “an endorsement in blank.”

Order Instruments
An instrument is payable to order –

  1. When it is payable to the order of a specified person,
  2. When it is payable to specified person or his order,
  3. When it is payable to a specified person without the addition of words “or his order,”

And does not contain words prohibiting transfer or indicating an intention that it should not be transferable.

Inland Instruments (Sec. 11)

  • An instrument which is drawn or made in India and made payable in or drawn upon any person resident in India.
  • Its protest for dishonour is optional.

Foreign Instruments

  • Instruments which are not inland.
  • It must be protested for dishonour if the place where these are drawn prescribes for such protest.

Demand Instruments (Sec. 19)

  • It means “immediately payable.”
  • It may be presented for payment at any time at the holder’s option but it must be presented within a reasonable time.
  • These instruments do not specify any time for payment.

Time Instruments
it means, a promissory note after presentment for sight and a bill of exchange, after acceptance, noting for non-acceptance or protest for non-acceptance.

Ambiguous Instrument (Sec. 17)

  • Instrument which can be construed either as a promissory note or as a bill of exchange.
  • Such instrument’s language is not clear.
  • It may give rise to multiple interpretations.
  • Once an instrument is treated as a bill or note, it cannot be treated differently thereafter.

Inchoate / Incomplete Instrument (Sec.20)
1. Such instrument is signed but is incomplete in other aspects.

2. Holder thus, gets a prima facie authority to make it complete for any amount specified therein, not exceeding the amount covered by stamp.

3. Person signing and delivering it is liable to both holder and HDC.
Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 – CS Foundation Business Environment Notes 1

Promissory Note
1. As per Sec.4 of the Act,
Promissory note is, – “an instrument in writing containing an unconditional undertaking, signed by the maker to pay a certain sum of money only to, or to the order of, a certain person, or to the bearer of the instrument”.

2. Parties:

  • Maker – person making or executing it.
  • Payee – person to whom note is payable.
  • Holder – person to whom it is endorsed or the payee.
  • Endorser.
  • Endorsee.

3. Essentials:

  • It must be in writing.
  • The promise to pay must be unconditional.
  • The amount promised must be certain and a definite sum of money.
  • The instrument must be signed by the maker.
  • The person to whom promise is made must be a definite person.
  • It must contain an express promise or a clear undertaking to pay.
  • Payment must be in the legal money of the country.
  • It must be properly stamped as per the provisions of Indian Stamp Act.
  • Name of place, number and date on which it is made must be contained in it.
  • Should contain the sum payable which is certain and must not be capable of contingent additions or deletions.

Note:
It cannot be made payable to bearer whether payable on demand or after certain time period.

Bill of Exchange –
1. As per Sec. 5 of the Act,
Bill of exchange is, – “an instrument in writing containing an unconditional order, signed by a maker, directing a certain person to pay a certain sum of money only to
dr to the order of, certain person or to the bearer of the instrument.”

2. Parties:

  • Drawer: The party who draws a bill.
  • Drawee: The party on whom such bill is drawn.
  • Acceptor: The drawee of the bill who has signified his assent to the drawer’s order.
  • Payee: The party to whom or to whose order, the amount of bill is payable.
  • Endorser: The party who endorses the bill.
  • Endorsee: The party to whom it is endorsed.
  • Holder: Person entitled in his own name to the possession of bill and to receive or recover the amount due thereon from the parties.
  • Drawee in Case of need: When in the bill, the.person whose name is entered, in addition to the drawee, to be resorted to in case of need.
  • Acceptor for Honour: Person who offers better security for safeguarding the honour of drawer or any endorser, accepts the bill.

Essentials:

  • It must be in writing.
  • There must be an order to pay.
  • The order must be unconditional.
  • The drawee must sign the instrument.
  • The drawer, drawee and payee must be specified in the instrument.
  • The sum must be certain.
  • The medium of payment must be money and money only.

Differences between Promissory Note and Bill of Exchange :

Promissory Note Bill of Exchange
1. It contains a promise to pay. It contains an order to pay.
2. Makers liability is primary and absolute. Drawers liability is secondary and conditional.
3. It consists of 2 parties. It consists of 3 parties.
4. It cannot be made payable to bearer. It can be made payable to bearer.
5. Position of issuer is like a debtor. Position of issuer is like a creditor.
6. Cannot be made payable to maken himself. Drawer and payee or drawee and payee may be the same person.
7. No formalities of acceptance required. It must be formally accepted to be a valid instrument.
8. No notice of dishonour is required to be given. Drawer must get notice of dishonour.

Types of bills:

  • Inland bills: Bills drawn in India for any person in India.
  • Foreign bills: Bills which are not inland bills. Foreign Bill is drawn in sets of three copies.
  • Trade bills: Bills issued for trade settlements.
  • Accommodation bills: Also known as kite bills, these are used for mutual help. An accommodation bill is a bill which is drawn, accepted or endorsed without any consideration.

Cheque:
1. As per Sec. 6 of Act, – “Cheque is a special type of bills of exchange which is always –

  • Drawn upon a specified bank and
  • Payable on demand.

It also includes electronic image of truncated cheque or cheque in an electronic form.”

2. “A Cheque in the Electronic form” means a cheque which contains the exact mirror image of a paper cheque, and is generated, written and signed in a secure system ensuring the minimum safety standards with the use of digital signatures and asymmetric crypto system.

3. “A Truncated Cheque” means a cheque which is truncated during the course of clearing cycle, either by clearing house or by bank, preventing the further physical movement of cheque.

4. “Clearing House” refers to the clearing house managed or recognised by RBI.

5. It is a kind of bill of exchange, thus must satisfy all requirements of a bill.

Note: No bill of exchange or hundi except cheque can be made payable to bearer on demand.

Parties :
All are same as that of B/E, except drawee who is a banker.

Essentials:

  • It is always paid on demand.
  • It is drawn on a specified banker.
  • It does not requires acceptance.
  • It may be payable to drawer himself or to bearer on demand.
  • It is usually valid for 6 months.
  • It can be drawn on a bank where drawer has an account.
  • No stamp is required.
  • Banker is only liable to drawer.

Differences between Cheque and Bill of Exchange:

Bill of Exchange Cheque
1. Any person can become a drawee. Only bank can be a drawee.
2. Three days of grace are allowed. No days of grace are allowed.
3. Notice of dishonour is usually required. No notice of dishonour is required.
4. It can never be made payable to bearer on demand. It can be drawn to bearer and made payable on demand.
5. It sometimes require presentment for acceptance. It is not necessary to present it for acceptance.
6. It must be adequately stamped. It is never required to be stamped.
7. It cannot be crossed. It can be crossed.
8. It cannot be countermanded. It can be countermanded anytime.

Banker:

  • Person doing the banking work.
  • As per Sec.5(b) of the Banking Regulation Act, 1949.

Banking refers to, – “Accepting for the purpose of lending or investment, of deposits of money from the public, repayable on demand or otherwise and withdrawable by cheque, draft or otherwise.”

Customer – Person who has an account with the bank or who utilises the bank services.

Rights and Obligations of Banker:

  • Honour customer’s cheques.
  • Collect cheques and drafts on customer’s behalf.
  • Keep proper record of transactions with customers.
  • Not to disclose customer’s account status with anyone, etc.
  • Give reasonable notice to the customer before closing his account.
  • Right to claim incidental charges as per the rules of bank.
  • Obligation to comply with the express standing instructions of the customer.
  • Right of set off and right of appropriation.

Liabilities of Banker:

  • Liable to the customer to the extent of amount of the account opened.
  • Liable to honour customer’s cheques to the extent of amount in his account.
  • Liable to compensate the drawer for any loss or damage suffered if he fails to honour cheques without justification.
  • Liable to maintain proper and accurate accounts of credits and debits.
  • Liable to honour cheque presented in due course.

Cases when Banker must refuse Payment:

  • Banker receives notice of customer’s insolvency or lunacy.
  • When customer countermands payment.
  • If legal order from the court attaching or otherwise dealing with money in banker’s hand is served on banker.
  • Banker receives notice of customer’s death.
  • Customer gives notice to the banker to close the account.
  • Customer gives notice of assignment of his credit balance.
  • When the holder’s title is defective and the banker comes to know of it.

Cases when the Banker may refuse Payment:

  • Cheque is post-dated.
  • It is stale i.e. not presented for payment within a reasonable period.
  • It is inchoate or not free from reasonable doubt.
  • It is post dated and presented before its ostensible period.
  • If customer’s fund in banker’s hand are not properly applicable to the payment of cheque drawn by former.
  • Where the cheque is presented at a branch other than the one where the customer has the account.
  • It is not duly presented.
  • It is mutilated.
  • It is irregular or materially altered.
  • Customer’s signature does not agree with his specimen signatures.

Marking of Cheque:
1. The cheque need not be presented for acceptance, thus the drawee of cheque i.e. banker is liable to his customer (drawer), if he wrongly refuses to honour the cheque. In such cases, action can be taken by the customer against the banker for the loss of his reputation.

2. However if the cheque is marked or certified, “Good for Payment” by banker, it protects the person to whom it is issued against the cheque being refused for payment.
This concept is not prevalent in India.

3. Crossing of Cheque – Cheque is either open or crossed:

  • Open Cheque – Can be presented by payee to the paying banker and is paid over the counter.
  • Crossed Cheque – It is not paid over the counter but has to be collected through a banker.

4. When two parallel lines are drawn on the upper left corner of cheque, it is known as crossing of cheque.

5. It is a direction to the paying banker that the cheque should be paid only to a banker or a specified banker.

6. It is done as a measure of safety.

Modes of Crossing:

  • General Crossing
  • Restrictive Crossing
  • Special Crossing
  • Not – negotiable Crossing.

General Crossing:

  • When two parallel lines are drawn and nothing is specified in between them.
  • Amount will be directly credited to account of payee.
  • Payee cannot get money over the counter.
  • It prevents the money from going in wrong hands.

Restrictive Crossing:

  • When the words ‘A/c Payee’ are specified within the crossing.
  • Cheque canhot be further negotiated.
  • Collecting banker will be guilty of negligence if he credits the proceeds to account other that of A/c payee.
  • It does not affects the paying banker.

Special Crossing:

  • When the name of a particular bank is specified between the crossed lines.
  • Amount can be collected only by the bank whose name is specified.

Not – Negotiable Crossing

  • When the words ‘not – negotiable’ is specified between the crossed lines.
  • It enhances the safety as it ensures protection from any misappropriation.
  • As per Sec.130,
  • “A person taking a cheque crossed generally or specially bearing in either case, with the words ‘not – negotiable’ shall not have and shall not be capable of giving, a better title to the cheque than that which the person from whom he took it had.”
  • It does not mean non – transferable.
  • It provides protection to the drawer or holder of a cheque who wants to transfer it against dishonesty or actual miscarriage in the course of transit.

Protection of Paying Banker (Sec.85):

  • When a cheque payable to order, purports to be endorsed by or on behalf of the payee, the banker is discharged by payment in due course.
  • Banker is authorised to debit his customer’s account with the amount so paid, even though the endorsement of payee turns out to be forged subsequently, or even if the endorsement may have been made by payee’s agent without his authority.
  • Reason: Banker is only bound to know the signature of his own customers.
  • If the drawer’s signature is forged, a banker remains liable to the drawer even if payment is made in due course and cannot debit the drawer’s account.
  • In case of crossed cheques, banker can debit the drawer’s account so paid, even though the amount of cheque does not reaches the true owner.

Note: In case of both the crossed and uncrossed cheques, protection can be availed of if protection is made in due course.

Payment in due Course
1. It means that payment is made:

  • In accordance with the apparent tenor of the instrument.
  • In good faith.
  • Without negligence.
  • To any person in possession thereof.
  • In money and money only.

2. Banker making payment in due course is presumed to have made payment to the true owner of the cheque, though the amount may have ’ not reached the true owner.

Opening of Crossing – A cheque once crossed need not remain forever. The drawer has a right to cancel the crossing by writing the words ‘Pay Cash’ and putting his full signature.

Collecting Banker:

  • He is the one collecting the proceeds of a cheque for a customer.
  • If banker collects the proceeds of a cheque for a customer, to which he ; has no title, true owner may sue the collecting banker for conversion.
  • However, as per Sec.131 of the Act,
  • “A banker who has in good faith and without negligence received payment for a customer of a crossed cheque generally or specially to himself shall not, in case the title to the cheque proves defective, incur any liability to the true owner of the cheque by reason of only having received such payment.”
  • The banker’s protection is lost if he becomes the holder for value.

Overdue/Stale/Out-of date cheques:

  • Cheques becomes barred by statute after 3 years from its due date.
  • It means that the holder cannot sue on that cheque after 3 years.
  • It has to be presented within a reasonable time.
  • In India, it is 6 months.

Endorser’s Liability:
It arises only if cheque is presented within a reasonable time of its delivery by that endorser.

Rights of Hosier Against the Banker – Holder can enforce payment only in 2 cases :

  • If holder does not presents the cheque within reasonable time after issue, thus the drawer suffers damage.
  • If banker makes payment of crossed cheque over the counter.

Holder (Sec.8):

  • Person must be named in the instrument.
  • It implies ‘de jure’ i.e. holder in. law and not ‘de facto’ i.e. holder in fact.

Holder in Due Course (HDC) (Sec. 9):
1. It means any person who obtains the instrument –

  • Before maturity.
  • For some consideration.
  • In good faith.

Privileges of HDC:

  • An inchoate instrument, if properly stamped, is valid, if it subsequently comes in hands of HDC.
  • In case of inchoate instrument, HDC has a right to recover that much amount which is sufficiently covered by stamp.
  • The acceptor of a bill of exchange cannot plead against a HDC that the bill is drawn in fictitious name.
  • The person liable on an instrument cannot plead against HDC that the instrument has been lost or was obtained by means of fraud or unlawful means.
  • No one can deny the original validity of the instrument.
  • No one can deny against a HDC, the capacity of the payee to endorse.
  • HDC can recover from all prior parties.
  • No effect of conditional delivery.
  • Once an instrument passes through hands of HDC, all its defects are removed.

Differences between Holder and HDC :

Holder Holder in Due Course
1. Acquires instrument without consideration. Acquires instrument for consideration.
2. Does not acquire a goods title. Acquires a goods title.
3. May acquire the instrument even after it has become due for payment. Must acquires the instrument before the amount thereon becomes payable.
4. He can enforce it against the person who has signed it and the transferor from whom he has obtained it. He can sue all the prior parties until the instrument is duly satisfied.

Bank Draft:
1. It is an order drawn by an office of a bank upon another office of same bank.

2. It is different from cheque in following 3 ways:

  • It cannot be easily counter mended.
  • It cannot be made p
  • It can be drawn only by one branch of bank upon another branch.

Material Alteration (Sec. 87):

  • Any alteration made in the instrument which causes it to speak a different language from what it originally intended or which changes the legal identity of the instrument in its terms or in relation or parties there to is a material alteration.
  • It alters the parties liabilities.
  • It renders the instrument void.
  • Persons taking the altered instrument after its alteration have no right to complain.
  • However, as per Sec.88, an acceptor or endorser remains bound by his acceptance or endorsement.
  • Example : Sum payable, interest rate, date of payment etc.

Following cases do not result in material alteration:

  • Alteration made with consent of parties before issue.
  • Crossing of cheque.
  • Adding words “on demand”.
  • Correction of any mistake.
  • Carrying out common intention of parties.

Conditions for Protection to a Person Paying an Altered instrument:

  • No apparent alteration.
  • Payment must be made in due course.
  • Payment must be made by a person or banker liable to pay.

Bouncing of Cheques: It means dishonour of cheques due to insufficiency of funds.

Capacities of Parties:

  • It is co-extensive with capacity to contract.
  • As per Sec.26,
  • “Every person capable of contracting according to law to which he is subject, may bind himself and be bound by making, drawing, acceptance, endorsement, delivery and negotiation of a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque.”
  • Minors, lunatics, drunken person, idiots and other persons do not incur any liability as a party to negotiable instrument.
  • However, liability of other competent parties continue.

Liability of Drawer (Sec. 30):

  • Drawer’s liability is conditional i.e. it arises only in the event of a dishonour by the drawee or acceptor.
  • Pre-condition of the drawer’s liability is that the notice of dishonour should have been received by him.
  • On dishonour by non – acceptance, followed by the notice, the drawer becomes liable immediately for the full amount of the bill. He cannot ask the holder to wait till the maturity.
  • If holder chooses to wait till maturity before he sues the drawer, he does not require a fresh cause of action by reason of its non – payment on the due date.

Liability of Drawee (Sec. 31):

  • Drawee in case of cheque is always a banker.
  • It is his duty to pay the cheque, provided (i) he has in his hands sufficient funds of the drawer, and (ii) funds are properly applicable to such payment.
  • If he refuses payment without showing sufficient cause, he has to compensate the drawer for any loss caused by such refusal.
  • Amount of compensation is measured by the loss of credit suffered by the drawer.

Principle is : “Lesser the value of cheque dishonoured, greater the damage to the credit of the drawer.”

Liability of Maker of Note and Acceptor of Bill (Sec. 32):

  • His liability arises only when he accepts the bill.
  • In absence of contract to contrary, he is bound to pay the amount at maturity as per the apparent tenor of this bill.
  • If the bill is accepted after maturity, he is bound for the amount to the holder on demand.
  • In default of such payment, he is bound to compensate any party to the bill for any loss or damage caused to him by such default.

Liability of Endorser (Sec. 35):

  • By accepting and delivering it before maturity, he undertakes the responsibility that on the presentment it shall be accepted and paid.
  • If it is dishonour by drawee, acceptor or maker, he will identify the holder or subsequent endorser who is compelled to pay, provided due notice of dishonour is received by him.
  • However, he may make his liability conditional.

Liability of Prior Parties (Sec. 36):

  • Every prior party is liable to HDC until the instrument is satisfied.
  • This liability is joint and several.

Liability of Acceptor of Forged Endorsement (Sec. 41) : Such acceptor is not relieved from his liability if he had the knowledge of such forged endorsement.

Liability inter se : Various parties to a negotiable instrument who are liable thereon stand on a different footing with the respect to the nature of liability of each of them.

Acceptor’s Liability on a Bill Drawn in a Fictitious Name : He remains liable to HDC.

Negotiation (Sec.14):
When a negotiable instrument is transferred to a person, so as to make the person the holder of the instrument, the instrument is said to be negotiated. It may be by –

  • Mere Delivery.
  • Endorsement and Delivery.

Assignment:
It is a mode of transferring the instrument which requires a written document. Under this, the instrument is transferred like goods, by deed that is under a contract.

Differences between Negotiation and Assignment :

Negotiation Assignment
Transferee acquires all the rights of a HDC. Assignee does not acquires the rights of a HDC.
Notice of transfer is not needed. Notice of assignment must be served by assignee on his debtor.
Consideration is presumed. Consideration must be proved.
Requires payment of stamp duty. Does not requires payment of stamp duty.
Requires delivery only in case of bearer instrument or endorsement & delivery in case of order instrument. Requires a document to be reduced into writing and signed by the transferor.

Mere Delivery:

  • As per Sec.46,
  • “Making acceptance or endorsement of instrument is not complete until delivery, actual or constructive, of the instrument.”
  • It must be made voluntarily with the intention of passing property in the instrument to the person.
  • Bill or cheque payable to bearer is negotiated by mere delivery.
  • These do not require transferor’s signature.
  • Bearer is not liable to any party if the instrument is dishonoured.
  • He is only liable to his immediate transferee.
  • Bearer cheque always remain bearer.

Endorsement and Delivery:

  • It is required in instruments payable to a specified person or to the order of a specified person.
  • Transferee does not become the holder, unless the holder signs it, thus transferee does not get any right against HDC.

Endorsement (Sec. 15):

  • It refers to “signing ones name on the negotiable instrument for the purpose of transferring it to another person.”
  • If there is no space on the instrument, it may be made on a slip of paper attached to it known as “Allonge.”
  • Endorsee is the person to whom the instrument is endorsed.
  • Endorsement therefore means writing of something on the back of an instrument for the purpose of transferring the rights, title and interest to some other person.

Kinds of Endorsement:

  • Blank/General
  • Special/Full
  • Restrictive
  • Partial
  • Conditional/Qualified.

Blank/General Endorsement:

  • An endorsement without specifying the name of endorsee.
  • It becomes payable to bearer.
  • Its holders may convert it into an endorsement in full by writing above endorsers signature, a direction to pay it to another person or his order.

Speciai/Full Endorsement:
An endorsement which specifies the name of the endorsee along with the endorser’s signature.

Restrictive:
It has the effect of restricting further negotiation and transfer.

Partial:
Only a part of the amount payable on the instrument is transferable to the endorsee.

Conditional/Qualified:

  • It combines an order to pay with condition.
  • It limits or negatives the liability of the endorser.
  • An endorser may limit his liability in any of the following ways:

1. Sans Recourse:

  • It means “without liability.”
  • Endorser declines to accept the liability on the endorsement of any subsequent party.

2. Sans Frais:

  • It means “without expense.”
  • It implies that-the holder of the instrument is not liable to pay any legal cost incurred by him.

3. Facultative:

  • These words are added when it is desired to waive certain rights.
  • Example : right to receive notice of dishonour.

Negotiation Back:

  • An instrument is said to have, negotiated back to him and he is said to have taken up or taken back the negotiable instrument when a person who has been a party to negotiable instrument takes it again.
  • In such case, holder cannot recover the amount from intermediate parties i.e. parties between endorsee and holder but can recover only from immediate prior parties i.e. all parties prior to endorsee.
  • This leads to circuity of action negotiation of lost instrument or that detained by unlawful means.
    Possessor or endorsee is not entitled to receive any amount due thereon from maker, acceptor or holder unless he is a HDC.

Forged instrument – In case of endorsement in full:

  • Forgery conveys no title.
  • Endorsee acquires no title even though he is a purchaser for value arid in good faith.
  • Endorsement is a nullity.

In case of bearer instrument : Holder can claim the amount from any of the parties to the instrument.

Acceptance of Bill of Exchange:

  • It may be defined as the indication by the drawee of his assent to the drawer that he will pay the amount of bill on due date.
  • Drawee has to write the words “accepted” on the face of the bill and sign his name underneath.
  • Drawee becomes acceptor.
  • Acceptor is primary liable on the bill.

Essentials of a Valid Acceptance:

  • It must be written.
  • It must be signed by the drawee.
  • It must be on the bill (either face or back of the bill).
  • It must be completed by delivery or by notice of acceptance to holder or any person on his behalf.
  • It must be presented for acceptance within reasonable time, if no time is specified.
  • It must be presented for acceptance at the drawee’s place of business if nothing is specified or at place mentioned.
  • If a bill is drawn in sets, acceptance should be put on one part only.
  • It may be absolute or conditional.

Kinds of Acceptance:

  • General/Absolute.
  • Conditional/Qualified.

General/Absolute Acceptance:
It is given without any condition regarding payment.

Conditional/Qualified Acceptance:

  • When the drawee does not accept it according to the apparent tenor of the bill but attaches some condition which have the effect of either reducing his liability or acceptance of liability subject to certain conditions.
  • If holder refuses to take it, he can treat the bill as dishonoured by non-acceptance.
  • Holder may also sue the drawer.

Acceptance for Honour:

  • When any instrument gets dishonoured due to non – acceptance the holder normally sues the drawer for the dishonour of the instrument by non – acceptance.
  • If these legal proceedings are to be avoided, then a third party would accept the instrument which had been dishonoured by non – acceptance and keep the instrument valid.
  • The person who makes such acceptance is known as acceptor for honour and process is known as acceptance for honour.
  • Supra protest means that the bill is protested for non payment after it is duly accepted.
  • In above case, any person can intervene and pay for honour of any party liable to pay.
  • Thus, bill ceases to be negotiable thereafter.
  • Person paying for honour get all the rights of holder for whom he pays.

Conditions for Valid Acceptance for Honour:

  • Bill has been noted or protested for non – acceptance or better security.
  • Such an acceptance has been made with the consent of holder.
  • Acceptor for honour is not already liable on the bill.
  • Acceptance is for the honour of any party already liable on the bill.
  • Acceptance is by writing on the bill.

Presentment for Acceptance:
1. Only following bills of exchange require presentment:

  • Bill payable after sight
  • Bill in which there is express stipulation that it has to be presented for acceptance before it is presented for payment.

2. AsperSec.15,
“Presentment has to be made to drawee or his authorised agent.”

3. It can be presented to following persons:

  • Drawee or his authorised agent.
  • In case of more than one drawee – to all of them.
  • If drawee is dead – to his legal representatives.
  • If drawee is declared insolvent-to his official receiver or assignee.
  • If drawee refuses to accept – to drawee in case of need.
  • Acceptor for honour.

4. It must be made:

  • before maturity
  • within a reasonable time
  • on a business day
  • during the business hours
  • at the business place or drawee’s residence.

5. If it is not presented in case of compulsory presentment, drawer and endorser are discharged from their liability.

Cases where Presentment for Acceptance is Excused:

  • Drawee could not be found after reasonable search.
  • Drawee is a fictitious person.
  • Drawee is a person incapable of contracting.
  • On some other ground.

Presentment for Payment (Sec. 64):

  • it means an exhibition to drawee or acceptor by holder with a request for payment in accordance with its apparent tenor.
  • It must be made during normal banking hours.
  • It must be made immediately on due date.
  • If payments are to made in installments, three days of grace are to be added in each date of installment.
  • Instruments can be presented at any of following places –
    (a) If place is specified, it must be made at such place.
    (b) If place is not specified, it can be made on business place.
    (c) If there is no business place, it can made at residence.
    (d) If residence is unknown, it can be made at any other reasonable place.
  • In case of cheque, it must be presented, at any time before relation between bank and drawer alters.
  • If instrument is payable on demand, it must be made within a reasonable time.
  • If any agent is appointed for making payments, it can be made to such agent.

Cases Where Presentment for Payment is Excused:

  • If drawee is intentionally prevented from presentment.
  • If the respective place is closed.
  • If person liable to pay cannot be found after reasonable search.
  • If it is a fictitious instrument.
  • If instrument is dishonoured by non – acceptance.
  • If there is an express waiver regarding presentment for payment.
  • If there is a promise to pay not withstanding non – presentment for payment.
  • Presentment for payment becomes impossible.
  • No person is present to make the payment at the place specified.
  • Drawer is a fictitious person or incompetent to contract.
  • Drawer could not have suffered any damage by non – presentment.
  • Drawer and drawee are same person.
  • On some other ground.

Dishonour of Negotiable Instrument:
1. When a party to an instrument, liable to accept or pay, refuses to accept or pay the instrument when duly presented, the instrument is said to be dishonoured.

2. Dishonour may be by –

  • Non – acceptance,
  • Non – payment.

3. Dishonour by Non – Acceptance (Sec. 91):

  • Drawee or one of the several drawees makes default in payment.
  • Presentment is excused.
  • Acceptance is qualified.
  • Drawee is incompetent to contract.
  • Drawee could not be found after a reasonable search.

Dishonour by Non – Payment (Sec. 92):

  • When maker acceptor or drawee makes default in payment.
  • When presentment is excused and it is left unpaid, after maturity.

Effect of Dishonour:
It renders the drawee and endorsers liable to the holder. This liability can be invoked only if the holder gives them notice of such dishpnour.

Notice of Dishonour (Sec. 91 – 98 & Sec.105 -107):

  • It is a notice which informs the party liable to pay or accept about their liability which accrues as a result of dishonour of the instrument.
  • Its objective is just to notify the party of its liability. ,
  • Its omission discharges all the parties other than maker or acceptor, even in respectof original consideration.

Rules of Notice of Dishonour:

  • It is to be given by the holder.
  • It is given to the drawer and all other parties to whom the holder seeks to make liable.
  • If a notice is not send to any prior party who is entitled to such notice within a reasonable time, he is discharged from liability.
  • Notice may be in any form but it should expressly inform the other party about the dishonour.
  • It is to be given within a reasonable time:
  • If both giver and receiver of the notice reside at the same place, notice should reach on the day of dishonour.
  • If they reside at a different place, notice should be dispatched by next post or on the next day of dishonour.
  • Party receiving the notice should communicate it to prior parties to whom he intends to hold liable within a reasonable time.

Cases where Notice of Dishonour is Not Required:

  • When it is dispensed with by party entitled thereto.
  • In order to charge the drawer.
  • When party charged could not suffer damage for want of notice.
  • Where the party entitled to notice could not be found after due search.
  • To charge the drawer, when acceptor is also a drawer.
  • In case of promissory note, which is not negotiable.
  • Drawer has countermanded payment.
  • Omission to give notice is caused by unavoidable circumstances.
  • Party entitled to notice promises to pay unconditionally.

Noting (Sec. 99)
1. It is a process in which Notary Public enters all the information regarding dishonour in his records.

2. It specifies the following:

  • Fact of dishonour
  • Date of dishonour
  • Reason of dishonour
  • Charges of Notary public

Protest:

  • It is the formal certificate of dishonour issued by the Notary Public to the holder of promissory note or B/E.
  • It is issued after noting the fact of dishonour.
  • It provides an authentic evidence of dishonour to drawer and endorsee.
  • Foreign promissory notes need not be protested.
  • Foreign bills must be protested if required by the law of place.
  • If credit or an acceptor of bill is shaken by insolvency or otherwise before the date of maturity of bill, holder may cause such a fact to be noted and certified. It is called protest for better security.

Note : Neither noting or protest is compulsory in case of inland bills.

Notice of Protest:
When a promissory note or a bill of exchange is required by law to be protested, notice of such protest in lieu of notice of dishonour must be given in the same manner as the notice of dishonour.

Discharge of Instrument:
1. It is said to be discharged when it becomes completely useless and cannot be negotiated further.
2. An instrument can be discharged by

  • Discharge of the instrument
  • Discharge of parties to the instrument from liability

3. Consequence:

  • Right of all parties comes to an end.
  • No party can claim the amount payable from any party.

4. It is Discharged:

  • On payment
  • On cancellation of the instrument
  • On insolvency of party liable
  • In case of bill, on negotiation to the acceptor
  • When principal debtor becomes the holder
  • By renunciation.
  • By an act that would discharge simple contract.

Discharge of Party:
1. A party is said to be discharged from its liabilities when their liability on the instrument comes to an end.

2. Party is Discharged:

  • By cancellation
  • By release
  • By payment
  • By allowing the drawee more than 48 hours to accept
  • By not giving notice of dishonour
  • By taking qualified acceptance
  • By non presentment for acceptance of a bill
  • By delay in presenting cheque
  • Discharge of secondary parties
  • By operation of law
  • By material alteration.

Retirement of Bill Under Rebate :

  • When acceptor makes the payment before maturity.
  • It must be cancelled only by the acceptor when it comes into his hands.
  • Acceptor makes allowance of interest for the remainder time which the bill has to run. The interest allowance is known as rebate.

Material Alteration [Section 87]:

  • An alteration is material if it alters the
  • operation of the instrument, or
  • liabilities of parties.
  • It makes the instrument void.

Material alteration means altering the –

  • date of instrument
  • sum payable
  • time of payment
  • place of payment
  • tearing the instrument
  • adding new parties
  • rate of interest

However there will be no material alteration in the following cases

  • If the alteration is corrected
  • Common intention of parties
  • Crossing a cheque
  • If alteration is made before issue with the consent of the parties.
  • Addition of the words “on demand” in an instrument where no time of payment is stated.

Protection of person who pays an altered bill or cheque:
A person who pays an altered bill will be protected only if he satisfies the following conditions: .

  • The alteration should not be apparent.
  • The payment must be made in due course.
  • The payment is made by a person/banker liable to pay.

Hundis:

  • It is an instrument drawn in an oriental language i.e. local language.
  • Known as native bill of exchange.
  • They were also called ‘Teep’

Types of Hundis:

  • Shah Jog Hundi
  • Jokhmi Hundi
  • Jawabee Hundi
  • Nam Jog Hundi
  • Darshani Hundi
  • Miadi Hundi
  • Dhani Jog Hundi
  • Firman Jog Hundi

Shah Jog Hundi:

  • Shah means ‘a financial of repute’.
  • It is only payable to Shah.
  • He presents the hundi when it comes to him for payment to the drawee on behalf of the holder.

Jokhmi Hundi:

  • It refers to a documentary bill drawn by consignor or consignee in respect of goods shipped by the consignor.
  • Consignee is not required to pay unless the goods reach their destination.
  • Consignor has to suffer the loss, if the ship is sunk.

Jawabee Hundi:

  • It is an instrument for remitting money.
  • It is in form of an ordinary letter advising the party to collect money from the banker.
    Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 – CS Foundation Business Environment Notes 2

Nam Jog Hundi:

  • It is payable to the party named therein or to his order.
  • It can be negotiated like bill of exchange.
  • Altering it into Shah Jog hundi is a material alteration, thus making it void.

Darshani Hundi:

  • It is payable at sight.
  • Freely negotiable.
  • Payable on demand.
  • Must be presented for payment within a reasonable time.

Miadi Hundi:

  • Also known as Muddati Hundi.
  • Payable after specified time period.
  • Shroffs advance money against them after deducting some amount.

Dhani Jog Hundi:

  • Dhani means owner.
  • Payable to owner i.e. person who purchased it.

Firman Jog Hundi:

  • Payable to order.
  • Can be negotiated by endorsement and delivery.

Presumption of Law (Sec.118 & 119):

  • Every instrument is made for some consideration.
  • Every instrument is made on the date mentioned in it.
  • Every instrument was accepted before maturity within a reasonable time.
  • Instruments are endorsed in the order in which they appear.
  • Every instrument was transferred before its maturity.
  • Holder of the instrument is a holder in due course.
  • Lost or destroyed instrument was duly signed and stamped.
  • In case of dishonoured instrument, court presumes the fact of dishonour or proof of protest.

Payment of Interest In Case of Dishonour:
1. It is 18% p.a. on the instrument in which no interest rate is specified, ft is generally between 6% to 18% p.a.

2. Penalties in Case of Dishonour of Cheques – Drawer will be punishable with:

  • Imprisonment for a term upto 2 years, or
  • Fine upto twice the amount of cheque, or
  • With both (i) and (ii) above, without prejudice to other, provisions of the Act.

3. Liability of government nominated directors is excluded.

4. Every offence punishable is compoundable.

National Electronics Funds Transfer System (NEFT) and Real Time Gross Settlement (RTGS):
1. National Electronic Funds Transfer (NEFT) is a nation-wide payment system facilitating one-to-one funds transfer. Under this Scheme, individuals, firms and corporates can electronically transfer funds from any bank branch to any individual, firm or corporate having an account with any other bank branch in the country participating in the Scheme.

2. NEFT is an electronic fund transfer system that operates on a Deferred Net Settlement (DNS) basis which settles transactions in batches.

3. In DNS, the settlement takes place with all transactions received till the particular cut-off time.

4. These transactions are netted (payable and receivables) in NEFT whereas in RTGS the transactions are settled individually.

5. The acronym ‘RTGS’ stands for Real Time Gross Settlement, which can be defined as the continuous (real-time) settlement of funds transfers individually on an order by order basis (without netting).

6. Real Time means the processing of instructions at the time they are received rather than at some later time, ‘Gross Settlement’ means the settlement of funds transfer instructions occurs individually (on an instruction by instruction basis).

7. Considering that the funds settlement takes place in the books of the Reserve Bank of India, the payments are final and irrevocable.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
The Negotiable Instruments Act makes specific mention of three instruments, namely cheque, bill of exchange and ________.
(a) Promissory note
(b) Hundi
(c) Bank draft
(d) Customary Note.
Answer:
(a) Promissory note

Question 2.
In legal terms, a person who receives a negotiable instrument in good faith and for valuable consideration is known as ________.
(a) Holder
(b) Holder for value
(c) Holder in due course
(d) Holder in rights.
Answer:
(c) Holder in due course

Question 3.
A negotiable instrument in which no time for payment is specified is payable.
(a) After acceptance
(b) After sight
(c) After one month
(d) On demand.
Answer:
(d) On demand.

Question 4.
A bill of exchange payable to bearer on demand is ________.
(a) Valid
(b) Voidable
(c) Invalid
(d) Conditional.
Answer:
(c) Invalid

Question 5.
A person who is directed to pay the amount of bill of exchange is known as ________.
(a) Drawer
(b) Drawee
(c) Payee
(d) Creditor.
Answer:
(b) Drawee

Question 6.
A person can become an acceptor for. honour of a bill of exchange only if his name is mentioned in the bill.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False.
Answer:
(b) False

Question 7.
A negotiable instrument drawn in favour of a minor is ________.
(a) Void
(b) Voidable
(c) Valid
(d) Invalid.
Answer:
(c) Valid

Question 8.
All cheques are bills of exchange, but all bills of exchange are not cheques.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False.
Answer:
(a) True

Question 9.
A person becomes a ‘holder in due course’ of a negotiable instrument if he receives it:
(a) In good faith
(b) For value
(c) Before maturity
(d) All of’the above.
Answer:
(d) All of’the above.

Question 10.
A negotiable instrument payable to order can be transferred by:
(a) Simple delivery
(b) Endorsement
(c) Endorsement and delivery
(d) Registered post.
Answer:
(c) Endorsement and delivery

Question 11.
An endorsement made by an endorser by signing his name and also by writing the name of the endorsee, is known as.
(a) General endorsement
(b) Special endorsement
(c) Restrictive endorsement
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(b) Special endorsement

Question 12.
When during the course of negotiation, the negotiable instrument comes back to the original endorser it is known as ________.
(a) Negotiation back
(b) Reserve endorsement
(c) Facultative endorsement
(d) Back recourse endorsement
Answer:
(a) Negotiation back

Question 13.
On the acceptance of the bill of exchange by the drawee, the liability of the drawer becomes:
(a) Primary
(b) Secondary
(c) Extinct
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) Secondary

Question 14.
On the dishonour of a cheque due to insufficient funds, the criminal liability of the drawer is the fine only which may extend to double the amount of cheque, and there is no imprisonment.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(b) False

Question 15.
The presentment for acceptance is required’in case of a ________.
(a) Bill of exchange
(b) Promissory note
(c) Cheque
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(a) Bill of exchange

Question 16.
A failure to present a negotiable instrument for payment as per the rules, discharges ________.
(a) All parties to the instrument
(b) All parties except those secondarily liable
(c) All parties except those primary liable
(d) None of the parties to the instrument.
Answer:
(c) All parties except those primary liable

Question 17.
A bill of’exchange is treated as dishonoured due to non – acceptance, where the drawee.
(a) Does not accept within 48 hours of presentment
(b) Is incompetent to contract
(c) Gives a conditional acceptance
(d) In all the above cases
Answer:
(d) In all the above cases

Question 18.
In case of dishonour of a cheque, the holder’s remedy is against the ________
(a) Drawee of cheque
(b) Drawer of cheque
(c) Endorsee of cheque
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(b) Drawer of cheque

Question 19.
In case of dishonour of a bill of exchange or a cheque, the ‘noting’ is compulsory to recover the amount from the liable parties.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(b) False

Question 20.
In which of the following cases of forgery a banker is discharged from liability by making a payment in due course.
(a) Payee’s endorsement
(b) Drawer’s signatures
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Payee’s endorsement

Question 21.
Material alteration of a negotiable instrument without the consent of the parties, discharge the parties who have become liable ________.
(a) After such alteration
(b) Prior to such alteration
(c) Because of alteration
(d) Without such alteration
Answer:
(b) Prior to such alteration

Question 22.
Which of the following is not a material alteration?
(a) Alteration of date
(b) Alteration of amount
(c) Alteration of time of payment
(d) Alteration correcting clerical mistake
Answer:
(d) Alteration correcting clerical mistake

Question 23.
A cheque is said to contain a general crossing when two parallel Hnes are drawn across the face of the cheque.
(a) Without any words
(b) With words‘& Co.’
(c) With words ‘not negotiable’
(d) In all the above cases
Answer:
(d) In all the above cases

Question 24.
The payment of a crossed cheque can be obtained ________
(a) At the counter
(b) By depositing in account
(c) By the payee only
(d) Both (a) and (c)
Answer:
(b) By depositing in account

Question 25.
In case of dishonour of a cheque due to insufficient funds in drawer’s account, the drawer is liable to imprisonment which may extend upto ________.
(a) Three months
(b) Six months
(c) One year
(d) Two year
Answer:
(d) Two year

Question 26.
A hundi which is payable to the holder or bearer is known as ________.
(a) Nam Jog Hundi
(b) Firman Hundi
(c) Jawabi Hundi ,
(d) Dhani Jog Hundi
Answer:
(d) Dhani Jog Hundi

Question 27.
Which of the following is NOT a condition of negotiability?
(a) It should be freely transferable
(b) Transferee can sue upon the instrument
(c) It should be made for a valid consideration
(d) The person taking it in good faith is not effected by the defect in title of the transferor
Answer:
(c) It should be made for a valid consideration

Question 28.
A promissory note or bill of exchange in which no time for repayment is specified is called as ________.
(a) Nominal instrument
(b) Time instrument
(c) Demand instrument
(d) Accommodation bill
Answer:
(c) Demand instrument

Question 29.
An instrument which can either be treated as bill or a note by the holder is called as ________.
(a) Ambiguous instrument
(b) Demand instrument
(c) Optional instrument
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Ambiguous instrument

Question 30.
A duly stamped instrument which is left blank or partially incomplete giving an authority to the holder to complete it, is called ________.
(a) Inchoate instrument
(b) Blank instrument
(c) Ambiguous instrument
(d) Demand instrument
Answer:
(a) Inchoate instrument

Question 31.
A bill which is drawn, accepted or endorsed without consideration is called ________.
(a) Accommodation Bill
(b) Gratious Bill
(c) Inchoate Bill
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Accommodation Bill

Question 32.
The new definition of a cheque is provided by ________
(a) Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881
(b) Negotiable Instruments (Amendment and Miscellaneous provisions) Act, 2002
(c) Negotiable Instruments (updation)
(d) None of the above Act, 2002
Answer:
(b) Negotiable Instruments (Amendment and Miscellaneous provisions) Act, 2002

Question 33.
As per the RBI Act, which of the following negotiable instruments can be payable to the bearer on demand?
(a) Cheque
(b) Hundi
(c) Bank Draft
(d) Promissory Note
Answer:
(a) Cheque

Question 34.
In case, a banker without any justification fails to honour a cheque then, who has the right to take an action against it?
(a) The drawer for any loss or damage suffered by him
(b) The drawee for the inconvenience caused to him
(c) Neither (a) nor (b)
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(a) The drawer for any loss or damage suffered by him

Question 35.
As per the Negotiable Instruments Act, a cheque becomes time barred after ________.
(a) Five years from the date of issue :
(b) Three years from the date of issue
(c) One year from the date of issue
(d) Nine months from the date of issue
Answer:
(b) Three years from the date of issue

Question 36.
Which of the following is NOT a mode of crossing a cheque?
(a) General crossing
(b) Restrictive crossing
(c) Special crossing
(d) Conditional crossing
Answer:
(d) Conditional crossing

Question 37.
The day on which a cheque falls due for payment is called ________.
(a) Payment date
(b) Expiry date
(c) Maturity date
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Maturity date

Question 38.
The normal grace period allowed for a negotiable instrument is of ________.
(a) One week
(b) One month
(c) One day
(d) Three days
Answer:
(d) Three days

Question 39.
A negotiable instrument dated 31st August is made payable three months after date, then the date of maturity will be ________.
(a) 3rd December
(b) 30th November
(c) 1st December
(d) 2nd December
Answer:
(a) 3rd December

Question 40.
Which of the following statement is NOT true in respect of the holder in due course?
(a) A holder in due course is mostly in a privileged position’
(b) Any person holding the instrument can recover the amount from all the previous parties
(c) The negotiable instrument can be obtained even after the maturity
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(c) The negotiable instrument can be obtained even after the maturity

Question 41.
Which of the following statement is NOT true?
(a) The liability of the drawer is secondary
(b) The prior parties to the negotiable instrument are not liable to the holder in due course
(c) Various parties to a negotiable instrument who are liable stand on a different footing
(d) None of the above 1
Answer:
(b) The prior parties to the negotiable instrument are not liable to the holder in due course

Question 42.
An endorsement where the endorser merely writes his signature on the book of the instrument and the instrument becomes payable to the bearer is called —
(a) General endorsement
(b) Full endorsement
(c) Qualified endorsement
(d) Partial endorsement
Answer:
(a) General endorsement

Question 43.
An endorsement in which the endorser limits his liability is called ________.
(a) Conditional Endorsement
(b) Justified Endorsement
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Neither (a) nor (b)
Answer:
(b) Justified Endorsement

Question 44.
An Endorsement in which the endorser gives a direction to pay is called ________.
(a) Special Endorsement
(b) Directive Endorsement
(c) Conditional Endorsement
(d) Justified Endorsement
Answer:
(a) Special Endorsement

Question 45.
In case of a bearer instrument or an instrument endorsed in blank, the holder can claim the amount from the parties even if it is a forged endorsement. ‘
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partially True
(d) Partially False
Answer:
(a) True

Question 46.
Which one of the following is NOT true in respect of notice of dishonour?
(a) Notice must be in writing
(b) Notice can be oral or in writing
(c) Notice must be formal
(d) Notice must be given within a reasonable time period
Answer:
(a) Notice must be in writing

Question 47.
In which of the following cases a notice of dishonour is not required?
(a) When the drawer has countermanded payment
(b) When the party to whom the notice is to be given cannot be searched
(c) When the party promises to pay unconditionally
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 48.
Discharge in relation to a negotiable instrument can be done by ________.
(a) Discharge of the instrument
(b) Discharge of parties liability
(c) Neither (a) nor (b)
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(d) Both (a) and (b)

Question 49.
The liability of the maker of a promissory note is ________.
(a) Primary and absolute
(b) Secondary and conditional
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Primary and absolute

Question 50.
The liability of the drawer of a bill is ________.
(a) Primary and absolute
(b) Secondary and conditional
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Secondary and conditional

Question 51.
The essential condition of an Inland bill is ________.
(a) The instrument is drawn or made in India
(b) The instrument must be payable in India or the drawee must be in India
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Neither (a) nor (b)
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 52.
The person on whom the bill is drawn is known as ________
(a) Drawer
(b) Drawee
(c) Payee
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(a) Drawer

Question 53.
Which of the following statement is true?
(a) Notice of the dishonour of a bill is necessary
(b) Notice of dishonour of cheque is NOT necessary
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 54.
The mode of crossing by which the holder of the cheque cannot get the payment over the counter but through any of the bank only is called ________.
(a) General crossing
(b) Special crossing
(c) Account payee crossing
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) General crossing

Question 55.
The mode of crossing by which the holder of the cheque can get the payment only through a specified bank is called ________.
(a) General crossing
(b) Special crossing
(c) Account payee crossing
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Special crossing

Question 56.
The mode of crossing in which the proceeds are to be credited only to the account of the payee or the party named or his agent is called ________.
(a) General crossing
(b) Special crossing
(c) Account payee crossing
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(c) Account payee crossing

Question 57.
RTGS stands for ________.
(a) Real Time Gross Settlement
(b) Real Type General scheme
(c) Real Type gross settlement system
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Real Time Gross Settlement

Question 58.
Real time gross settlement system means a payment system in which ________.
(a) Both processing and final settlement of funds transfer instructions can take place continuously
(b) Final transaction takes place at the end of the day
(c) Final payment is physically effected within 24 hrs.
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Both processing and final settlement of funds transfer instructions can take place continuously

Question 59.
Reserve Bank of India, in regard to RTGS, has decided that ________.
(a) There would be accessible to all retail customers.
(b) There would be no floor ceiling for routing transactions through
(c) Settlement of transactions of the clearing corporations of India and the stock market would be conducted through RTGS.
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 60.
NEFT Stands for ________.
(a) National Electronic funds transfer
(b) Nation Electro Foreign transmission .
(c) National Elect funding transaction
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) National Electronic funds transfer

Question 61.
According to Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881, a negotiable instrument does not include ________.
(a) Promissory note
(b) Bill of exchange
(c) Cheque
(d) Share certificate
Answer:
(d) The term”negotiable instrument” means a document transferable from one person to another. However the Act has not defined the term. It merely says that “A negotiable instrument” means a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque payable either to order or to bearer.

A share certificate is not ‘negotiable instrument’ because a share certificate is a document showing title but not a document of title. It merely shows that the person named in the share certificate is entitled to the share represented by it, but it does not allow that person to transfer the share mentioned therein.

Question 62.
Crossing of a Negotiable Instrument is permissible in case of:
(a) Promissory Note
(b) Bill of Exchange
(c) Cheque
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(c) Crossing of a negotiable instrument is permissible in case of Cheque. The object of crossing is to secure payment TO a banker so that it could be traced to the person receiving the amount of the cheque.

Question 63.
Which one of the following is not a feature of a bill of exchange?
(a) It must be in writing
(b) Its parties must be certain
(c) It must be crossed
(d) The sum payable must be certain.
Answer:
(c) Features of a Bill of Exchange is as follows:

  • It must be in writing.
  • It must contain an unconditional order to pay money only and not merely a request.
  • It must be signed by the drawer.
  • The parties must be certain.
  • The sum payable must also be certain.
  • It must comply with other formalities example : stamps, date etc.

Thus, bill of exchange need not be crossed.

Question 64.
A bearer negotiable instrument is payable to:
(a) Banker
(b) Receiver
(c) Holder
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(c) A bearer negotiable instrument is payable to holder because in case of bearer negotiable instrument the banker may ignore any endorsement on the instrument.

Question 65.
A crossed cheque is payable to:
(a) Holder
(b) Holder in due course
(c) Banker of the customer
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) In case of crossed cheque the holder or payee cannot get the payment over the counter of the bank but through a bank only. Other words, a crossed cheque is payable to Banker of the customer.

Question 66.
Which one of the following is not a party to the promissory note?
(a) Maker
(b) Holder
(c) Acceptor
(d) Endorser
Answer:
(c) Parties of a Promissory Note are as follows:

  • The Maker
  • The Payee
  • The Holder
  • The Endorser
  • The Endorsee

Thus, Acceptor is not a party of promissory note.

Question 67.
A bill of exchange contains a/an:
(a) Unconditional undertaking
(b) Unconditional order
(c) Conditional undertaking
(d) Conditional order.
Answer:
(b) According to Section 5, a “bill of exchange” is an instrument in writing containing an unconditional order, signed by maker, directing a certain person to pay a certain sum of money only to or to the order of, a certain person or to the bearer of the instrument.

Question 68.
Which one.of the following is not an example of material alteration as per section 87 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 ?
(a) Alteration of the date of instrument
(b) Alteration of the sum payable
(c) Alteration in the time of payment
(d) Crossing of instrument.
Answer:
(d) According to Section 87 of Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, an alteration is material which in any way alters the operation of the instrument and the liabilities of the parties thereto. A material alteration renders the instrument void.

Examples of material alteration are:

  • alteration of date of instrument
  • alteration of sum payable
  • alteration in time of payment

There is no material alteration in following cases:

  • Crossing of instrument
  • Correction of a mistake

Question 69.
A cheque is a:
(a) Promissory note
(b) Bill of exchange
(c) Hundi
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(b) Section 6 of Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 provides that “cheque is a bill of exchange drawn on a specified banker and not expressed to be payable otherwise than on demand and it includes the electronic image of truncated cheque and a cheque in the electronic form.”

Question 70.
Who among the following is not a party to a cheque?
(a) The drawer
(b) The acceptor
(c) The drawee
(d) The payee.
Answer:
(b) The following are the parties to a cheque:

  • The drawer: The pefeon who draws the cheque.
  • The drawee: The banker of the drawer, on whom the cheque is drawn.
  • The payee, holder, endorser and endorsee.

A cheque being a species of bill of exchange, must satisfy, all requirements of a bill, it does not however, requires acceptance. So there is no acceptor.

Question 71.
Which of the following is a valid promissory note
(a) I owe A ₹ 500
(b) I promise to pay ₹ 1,000 ten days after the death of B .
(c) I promise to pay the bearer ₹ 1,000
(d) I promise to pay ₹ 1,000 after the marriage of B.
Answer:
A Promissory note to be- valid must possess the following essentials-

  • It must be in writing.
  • Promise to pay must be unconditional.
  • Amount promised must be certain and definite sum of money.
  • Must be signed by maker.
  • Person to whom promise is made must be a definite person.
  • Must contain an express promise.
  • Should contain the sum payable which is certain.

“I promise to pay the bearer ₹ 1,000″ contains all the above essential elements.

Question 72.
Which of the following is an example of immaterial alteration in a negotiable instrument ?
(a) Changing the date
(b) Changing the sum payable
(c) Crossing the instrument
(d) Changing the place of payment.
Answer:
(c) Material alteration of a negotiable instrument means altering the –

  • date of instrument
  • sum payable
  • time of payment
  • place of payment
  • tearing the instrument
  • adding new parties
  • other methods.

However, there will be no material alterations in the following cases –

  • Correcting the alteration
  • Common intention of parties
  • Crossing a cheque

Thus, crossing the instrument is an immaterial alteration.

Question 73.
Which of the following negotiable instrument is drawn, accepted or endorsed without consideration?
(a) Inland bill of exchange
(b) Foreign bill of exchange
(c) Accommodation bill
(d) Promissory note.
Answer:
(c) Accommodation bills also known as bite bills are used for mutual help. It is a bill which is drawn, accepted or endorsed without any consideration.

Question 74.
When a cheque is dishonoured in India it is called ________.
(a) Stale cheque
(b) Overdue cheque
(c) Dishonoured cheque
(d) Expired cheque
Answer:
(c) When a cheque is dishonoured in India, It is called dishonoured Cheque.

Question 75.
A bill is dishonoured if it is not accepted within ________.
(a) 12 hours
(b) 48 hours
(c) 3 hours
(d) 1 hour
Answer:
(b) A bill is dishonoured if it is not accepted within 48 hours.

Question 76.
An instrument is transferred from Gita to Rita and then further to Meena so as to make the last named person the holder for value. Such a process is called:
(a) Transferability
(b) Endorsing
(c) Transacting
(d) Negotiation.
Answer:
(b) An instrument is transferred from Gita to Rita and then further to Meena so as to make the iast named person the holder for value. Such a process is called Endorsing. In Endorsement there are two parties, when the holder endorses the bill to anyone else he becomes the endorser and the person to whom the bill is endorsed, (is called as endorsee) for the purpose of transferring the right, title and interest therein to some other person.

Question 77.
In case of dishonour of a bill, the drawee’s liability is activated:
(a) Always
(b) In case of non-payment only
(c) In case of non-acceptance
(d) Never
Answer:
(b) If the bill is dishonoured either by non-acceptance or by non payment, the drawer and all the endorsers of the bill are liable to the holder, provided he gives notice of such dishonour. The drawee is liable only when there is dishonour by non-payment.

Question 78.
Drawer’s liability for discharging the amount written on the face of the cheque arises when:
(a) Cheque is presented for payment after date of maturity
(b) Cheque is not presented for payment
(c) Cheque is lost
(d) Cheque is dishonoured by drawee or acceptor
Answer:
(d) The liability of a drawer of a bill of exchange is secondary and arises only on default of the drawee, who is primarily liable to make payment of the negotiable instrument. The drawer of a bill of exchange or cheque is bound, in case of dishonour by the drawee or acceptor thereof, to compensate the holder, provided due notice of dishonour has been given to or received byjhe drawer.

Question 79.
In case of dishonour of a cheque, the Court will take action when ________.
(a) a complaint has been made in writing
(b) complaint is made within one month or the date on which the cause of action arises
(c) Court should not be inferior to that of a Metropolitan Magistrate or a Judicial Magistrate of the first class.
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) When a negotiable instrument is dishonoured either by non acceptance or by non-payment, the holder or some party liable thereon must give notice of dishonour within a reasonable time.

Question 80.
Material alteration of an instrument means:
(a) Alteration causing crossing of a cheque
(b) Alteration which changes legal character of an instrument
(c) Alteration which corrects a mistake
(d) All changes made in the instrument are material.
Answer:
(b) An alteration is material which in any way alters the operation of the instrument and the liabilities of the parties thereto. Therefore, any change in an instrument which causes it to speak a different language in legal effect from that which it originally spoke, or which changes legal character of the instrument is material alteration.

Question 81.
Bill gates is considered which of the type of entrepreneur:
(a) Visionary
(b) Superstar
(c) Sustainer
(d) Idealist
Answer:
(a) Starting and growing one’s own business requires many skills to be successful, one could be a visionarydike Bill Gates or a superstar like Peter Sematimba.

Question 82.
If there is material alteration in a Cheque, it will be considered as:
(a) Voidable
(b) Void
(c) Valid
(d) None
Answer:
(b) A material alteration renders the instrument void, but it affects only those persons who have already become parties at the date of the alteration.

Question 83.
Which of the negotiable instrument can be payable to the bearer on demand?
(a) Promissory note
(b) Hundi
(c) Cheque
(d) Bank draft
Answer:
(c) By virtue of Section 31 of the Reserve Bank of India Act, no bill of exchange or hundi can be made payable to bearer on demand and no promissory note or a bank draft can be made payable to bearer at all, whether on demand or after a specified time. Only a cheque can be payable to bearer on demand.

Question 84.
________ is not used as negotiable instrument.
(a) Bill of exchange
(b) Draft
(c) Cheque
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(d) The term negotiable instrument means a document transferable from one person to another. However, the Act has not defined the term. It merely says that ‘A Negotiable instrument’ means a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque payable either to order or to bearer. Thus, option(d) is the answer.

Question 85.
What is the Cheque known as?
(a) Bill of exchange
(b) Promissory note
(c) None of the above
(d) All are applicable
Answer:
(a) A cheque is a bill of exchange drawn on a specified banker and always payable on demand. A cheque is always drawn on a particular banker and is always payable on demand. Consequently, all cheque are bills of exchange but all bills are not cheques.

Question 86.
Which one is not the discharge of Negotiable Instrument?
(a) Cancellation
(b) Death of partner
(c) Renunciation
(d) Payment in due-course
Answer:
(b) A negotiable instrument is discharged:

  • By payment in due course
  • When the principal debtor becomes the holder
  • By renunciation
  • By an act, that would discharge simple contract
  • By cancellation

Thus, death of a partner is not discharge of contract.

Question 87.
Accommodation bill is:
(a) Trade bill
(b) Foreign bill
(c) Inland bill
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(d) There are various types of bills, like inland bill, foreign bill, Trade bill, Accommodation bill.

  • Inland bill : A bill of exchange is an inland bill if it is drawn and made payable in India.
  • Foreign bill : A bill which are not inland are deemed to be foreign bill.
  • Trade bill : A bill drawn and accepted for a genuine trade transaction is termed as trade bill.
  • Accommodation bill : A accommodation bill is a bill in which a person lends or gives his name to oblige a friend or some person whom he knows or otherwise.

Thus, Accommodation bill is not trade bill, foreign bill or Inland bill. Thus, The answer is none of the above.

Question 88.
Mr. A promise to pay on behalf of B to payment. What is that?
(a) Accommodation Bills
(b) Trade Bills
(c) Foreign Bills
(d) Inland Bills
Answer:
(a) An accommodation bill is a bill in which a person lends or gives his name to oblige a friend or some person whom he knows or otherwise. So, in this case Mr. A promise to pay on behalf of B, this is the case of Accommodation bill.

Question 89.
A bank can refuse payment against a cheque in ali -of the following conditions except:
(a) Post dated cheques
(b) Presentation of cheque in a branch other than one where the customer has an account
(c) insufficiency of funds in customers account
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(d) As per Negotiable Instruments Act, a bank can refuse payment against a cheque in all the above mentioned conditions i.e., insufficiency of funds, post dated cheques and presentation of cheque at a different branch. Hence, answer is None of the above.

Question 90.
A draws a promissory note in Chennai which is payable to ‘B’ in Bombay. The promissory note is called:
(a) Ambiguous instrument
(b) Place instrument
(c) Inland instrument
(d) Order-instrument.
Answer:
(c) A promissory note is called inland instrument which is drawn or made in India and made payable; or -drawn upon any person, resident in India shall be deemed to be an inland instrument.

Question 91.
A bank instrument forged by “B” was endorsed to “D”. “D” can ________.
(a) Claim of payment depends on court order
(b) Claim half paymentonly
(c) Claim payment
(d) Not claim payment.
Answer:
(c) A bank instrument forged by ‘B’ was endorsed to ‘D’. D can claim payment from the parties to the instrument inspite of the intervening forged endorsement.

Question 92.
The instrument always drawn on bankers and payable on demand is called:
(a) Promissory note, Hundi, Bill of Exchange
(b) Bill of Exchange
(c) Cheque
(d) Both Cheque and Bill of Exchange
Answer:
(c) According to Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, “A cheque is a bill of exchange drawn on a specified banker and not expressed to be payable otherwise than on demand and it includes the electronic, image of truncated cheque or a cheque in electronic form.

Question 93.
A negotiable instrument can be negotiated after maturity, if:
(a) Courts permit such negotiation
(b) Drawer so wishes
(c) It has not been paid or satisfied
(d) Endorsee so accepts
Answer:
(c) A Negotiable instrument may be negotiated after maturity if the payment has not been made.

Question 94.
Forgery of a negotiable instrument conveys ________ title.
(a) Adequate
(b) No
(c) Full
(d) Good
Answer:
(b) If an instrument be negotiated by means of forged endorsement. The endorsee acquire no title even though he acquires it in good faith and in consideration. In simple words, forgery conveys no title.

Question 95.
Negotiable instruments are defined in the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 to include:
(a) Promissory note, Hundi, Bill of Exchange
(b) Promissory note, Bill of Exchange, Cheque
(c) Promissory note, Bill of Exchange
(d) Bill of Exchange, Cheque, Hundi
Answer:
(b) As per Section 13(1) of the Negotiable Instruments Act,1881, a negotiable instrument Includes promissory note, bills of exchange or cheque payable either to order or to bearer. It is an instrument which is transferable by delivery like cash and also capable of being sued upon by the person holding for time being.

Question 96.
A negotiable instrument can be negotiated after maturity, if:
(a) Endorsee so accepts
(b) it has not been paid or satisfied
(c) Drawer so wishes
(d) Courts permit such negotiations
Answer:
(c) When the negotiable instrument is transferred to a person so as to make the person the holder of the instrument, the instrument is said to be negotiated. And if the drawer so wishes it can even be negotiated after maturity.

Question 97.
A bill is said to be dishonoured by:
(a) Non payment only
(b) Non acceptance and non payment
(c) Non acceptance or non payment
(d) Non acceptance only
Answer:
(c) When the party to an instrument liable to accept or pay, refuses to accept or pay the instrument when duly presented, the instrument is said to be dishonoured. It may be by non acceptance or non payment. Thus, option (c) is correct.

Question 98.
A bill is said to be dishonoured by:
(a) Non acceptance or nor payment
(b) Non payment only
(c) Non acceptance and non payment
(d) Non acceptance only
Answer:
(a) A Bill can be dishonoured by both either by Non Acceptance or Nor Payment:

  • Sec. 91 explains dishonour by Non Acceptance
  • Sec. 92 explains dishonour by Non Payment.

Question 99.
In case of non negotiable cheque, Payment can be made:
(a) To the presenter of cheque across the counter
(b) Either through bank or across counter
(c) To bank onfy
(d) To account payee only
Answer:
(c) Non Negotiable Instrument, payment can be made to bank only.

Question 100.
‘A’ draws a promissory note in Chennai which is payable to ‘B’ Bombay. The promissory note is called:
(a) Inland instrument
(b) Order instrument
(c) Place instrument
(d) Ambiguous instrument
Answer:
(a) A promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque drawn or made in India, and made payable or drawn upon any person resident in India shall be deemed to be an inland instrument.

Question 101.
A bill of exchange contains a/an:
(a) Unconditional undertaking
(b) Unconditional order
(c) Conditional undertaking
(d) Conditional order.
Answer:
(b) A Promissory note contains an unconditional undertaking while Bills of Exchange contains an unconditional order and it is drawn by drawer (seller) or drawee (buyer).

Question 102.
Which of the following is not an example of material Alteration as per Section 98 of the Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881?
(a) Alteration of the date of Instrument
(b) Alteration of the sam payable
(c) Alteration in the time of payment
(d) Crossing of Instrument
Answer:
(d) Crossing of Instrument is not an example of material alteration as per Section 98 of Negotiable Instrument Act. 1881.

Question 103.
A Cheque is a:
(a) Promissory note
(b) Bill of exchange
(c) Hundi
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Under Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881, A cheque is a Bill of Exchange and it can be crossed also Cheque is a printed slip in which one person orders his specified banker to pay a certain sum of money to pay a specified person or a particular date at a particular time.

Question 104.
Who among the following is not a party to a Cheque?
(a) The drawer
(b) The Acceptor
(c) The drawee
(d) The Payee
Answer:
(b) Acceptor is not a party to a cheque.

Question 105.
Which of the following is an example of immaterial alteration in a negotiable instrument?
(a) Changing the date
(b) Changing the sum payable
(c) Crossing the instrument
(d) Changing the place of payment
Answer:
(c) Material alteration of a negotiable instrument means altering the –

  • Date of instrument
  • Sum payable
  • Time of payment
  • Place of payment
  • Tearing the instrument
  • Adding new parties

However, there will be no material alterations in the following cases:

  • Correcting the alteration
  • Common intention of parties
  • Crossing a cheque.

Thus, Crossing the instrument is an immaterial alteration.

Question 106.
Which of the following negotiable instrument is drawn, accepted or endorsed without consideration?
(a) Inland bill of exchange
(b) Foreign bill of exchange
(c) Accommodation bill
(d) Promissory note
Answer:
(c) Accomodation bills also known as bite bills are used for mutual help. It is a bill which is drawn, accepted or endorsed, without any consideration.

Question 107.
Inland Instrument ________.
(a) Instrument must have been drawn/made in India
(b) Instrument must have been payable in India
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Inland bills are the bill drawn in India for any person in India. Thus It can be concluded that Instrument must be drawn/made in India and must be payable in India. Thus, the correct answer is option (c).

Question 108.
Holder in due course:
(a) Acquires good title
(b) Must acquire Instrument before the dale of payment
(c) Acquire instrument for consideration
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) Holder in due course must comply following conditions

  • He must be the holder of instrument
  • He Should have obtained the instrument for value or consideration
  • He must have obtained negotiable instrument before maturity
  • The instrument should be complete and regular on the face of
  • The holder should take the instrument in good faith.

Thus option (d) is the correct answer.

Question 109.
Negotiable Instrument is provided as discharged by?
(a) Cancellation
(b) Renunciation
(c) Death of drawer
(d) All of Above.
Answer:
(d) The Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881 provides the following methods or ways to discharge the contract:

  • by payment in due course.
  • when the pincipal debtor becomes holders
  • by an act that would discharge simple contract.
  • by renunciation
  • by cancellation

CS Foundation Business Environment and Law Notes

Cyber Laws – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Cyber Laws – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Introduction to Cyberspace :

  • Technology has proved to a great leveller. It has helped in creating ‘machine – clones’ in the form of computers a high speed data processing device performing arithmetic, logical and memory functions by manipulating optical, magnetic and electrical impulses.
  • The power of one ‘machine-clone’ is power of all connected ‘machine- clones’, which may be termed as network-of-network or Internet.
  • This dynamic virtual space created by the networks of ‘machine-clones’ has been termed as cyber space.
  • The word Cyberspace first appeared in ‘William Gibson’s’ in his science fiction Necromancer published in 1984.
  • Gibson portrayed cyberspace as a three dimensional virtual landscape created by network computers.
  • The New Oxford Dictionary of English defines ‘Cyberspace’ as the notional environment in which communication over computer networks occur.
  • Cyber space is a virtual medium.
  • It has no boundaries, no geographical mass or gravity.
  • It exists in a form of bits and bytes.

Cyber Space Vs. Physical World :

Cyber Space Physical World
1. It is a digital medium. 1. It is a physical world
2. It is static, well defined and incremental. 2. Cyber space is dynamic, undefined and exponential.
3. The contours of cyber space is as vast as human imagination and thus cannot be given a fixed shape. 3. The contours of physical world are fixed.
4. Cyber space represents network of millions of computers creating specter of digital life. 4. It does not represent any network.

1. Cyberspace is an interactive world and cannot be referred to as a xerox expression of geographic space.
2. Cyberspace can also be treated as a natural extension of physical world into infinite world.

CYBER LAWS:

  1. Cyber laws being technology incentive advocate the use and not misuse of technology.
  2. Any act, which violates the right of a person in digital medium (cyber space), would be treated as cyber space violations.
  3. The border less space, anonymity of user online, dynamic e-commerce and rapid digital transmission pose a real challenge to the application of traditional laws in cyberspace.
  4. Cyber laws are made to lesson the legal issues in the future.
  5. The aim of cyber related law worldwide is to harmonise the existing laws.
  6. There are several disturbing things that happens in cyberspace ranging from identify theft and terrorism to money laundering.
  7. Various criminals like hackers and crackers have been able to pave their way to interfere with the internet accounts through – Domain Name Server (DNS), internet Provider’s address (IP), spooling, phishing, internet phishing etc., to access unauthorised access to user’s computer system and steal data to make profits.
  8. Cyber law is a term that encapsulates the legal issues related to the use of communication, transactional and distributive aspects of networked information devices and technologies.
  9. Cyber law encompasses the legal, statutory and constitutional provisions that affect computer and computer networks.

It concerns – individuals, corporate bodies and institution which:

  • Are instrumental for the entry into cyberspace.
  • Provide access to cyberspace.
  • Create hardware and software which enable people to access cyberspace and
  • Use their own computers to go “online” and enter cyberspace.
  • Two main statutes, which govern criminal liability
  • The Indian Penal Code, 1860
  • Information Technology (IT) Act, 2000.
  • The main objective of the Act is to regulate and control the affairs of cyber world in an effective manner.
  • Chapter IX and XI of the Information Technology Act, 2000, deal with various cyber crimes.

Information Technology Act, 2000:

  • Indian is 12th nation in enactment of cyber law with the passage of Information Technology Act, 2000.
    The United Nations Commission of International Law (UNCITRAL) : adopted the model law on electronic commerce in 1966 in order to bring uniformity in the law of different countries.
  • The General Assembly of United Nations recommended that all states should give favourable considerations to this Model Law when they enacted Or revised their laws.
  • The first draft of legislation was created by Ministry of Commerce Government of India as E-commerce Act, 1998.
  • A redraft of legislation was prepared as “Information Technology Bill 1999″. Which was placed before the parliament in December 1999 and passed in May 2000.

Aim and Objectives of the Act:
The following are the objectives of the Act:

  • To grant legal recognition for transactions carried out by means of electronic data interchange and other means of electronic communication known as e-commerce.
  • To give legal recognition to digital signature for authentication of any information or matter which requires authentication under any law.
  • To facilitates electronic filling of documents with Government Departments.
  • To facilitate Electronic storage of data.
  • To facilitate and give legal sanction to electronic fund transfer between bank and financial institution.

To give legal recognition for keeping books of accounts by bankers in electronic form under:

  1. The Evidence Act, 1891 and
  2. The Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934.

IT Act 2000 has amended the following:

  • Indian Penal Code (IPC), 1860.
  • The Indian Evidence Act, 1872
  • The Bankers’ Books Evidence Act, 1891 &
  • The Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934.

Features of the Act:

  1. Electronic contracts have been made legally valid if made through secure electronic communication.
    Legal recognition has been granted to digital signatures.
  2. Security procedures for electronic records and digital signature have been laid down.
  3. A procedure for appointment of adjudicating officers for holding inquiries under the Act has been laid down.
  4. A provision has been made for the establishment of cyber Regulatory Appellant Tribunal under the Act.
    An appeal against the order of the controller or adjudicating officer can be made to Cyber Appellant Tribunal and not to any civil court.
  5. Appeal against order of the Cyber Appellant Tribunal are to be made in the High Court.
  6. Digital signature are to be affected by use of asymmetric crypto system and harsh function.
  7. A provision has been made for appointment of Controller of Certifying Authorities (CCA) to license of regulate the working of certifying Authorities.
  8. The controller is to act as repository of all digital signature certificates.
  9. The Act is to apply to offences or contraventions committed outside India.
  10. The senior police officers have been given power to enter any public and search and arrest without warrant.
  11. Provisions have been made for the constitution of regulations Advisory Committee to advise the Central Government and the Controller.

Applicability and Non-Applicability of the Act :

Applicability Non-applicability
Section 1(2) provides that the Act extends to the whole India, including Jammu and Kashmir.

The act does not take citizenship into account. It provides an extraterritorial Jurisdiction.

Section 1(4), the provisions of the Information Technology Act, 2000 shall not apply to the following:

1. Execution of Negotiable Instrument under Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881 except cheque.

2. Execution of a power of attorney under the Power of Attorney Act, 1882.

3. Creation of Trust under Indian Trust Act, 1882.

4. Execution of a Will under the Indian Succession Act, 1925 including any other testamentary disposition by whatever name called.

5. Entering into a contract for the sale of conveyance of immovable property or any interest in such property.

6. Any such class of documents or transactions as may be notified by Central Government in the Gazette.

Digital Signature:

  • Digital signatures, like written signature are used to provide authentication of the associated input, usually called as “message”.
  • Message may be anything form electronic mail to a contract in electronic form, or even a message sent using cryptographic protocol.
  • Digital signature can be used to authenticate the source of such messages.

The IT Act deals with digital signature under section 2, 3 and 15. These sections are reproduced as follows.

Section 2(1) (p):
Defines digital signature, “means authentication of any electronic record by a subscriber by means of an electronic method or procedure in accordance with the provisions of Section 3″.
(a) Authentication: It is a process used to confirm the identity of a person or to prove the integrity of information.

(b) Message Authentication : It involves determining the source and verifying that it has not been modified or replaced in transit. Section 3 provides certain provisions in respect of authentication of electronic records which are:

  • Subject to the provisions of this section any subscriber may authenticate an electronic record by affixing his digital signature.
  • The Authentication of the electronic record shall be effected by the use of a symmetric crypto system and hash function which envelop and transform the intial electronic record into another electronic record.
  • Any person by the use of a public key of the subscriber can verify the electronic record.
    The private key and public key are unique to the subscriber and constitute a functioning key pair.

Secure Digital Signature (Section 15):
If, by application of a security procedure agreed to by the parties concerned, it can be verified that a digital signature, at the time affixed was:
1. Unique to the subscriber affixing it.

2. Capable of identifying such subscriber.

3. Created in a manner or using a means under the exclusive control of the subscriber and is linked to the electronic record to which it relates in such a manner that if the electronic record was altered the digital signature would be invalidated, the such digital signature shall be deemed to be a secure digital signature.
Cyber Laws – CS Foundation Business Environment Notes IMG 1

Against Individual Against individual Property Against Organisation Against Society
1. Harassment via e-mail 1. Computer vandalism 1. Possession of unauthorised information 1. Polluting the youth though indecent exposure
2. Cyber- Stalking 2. Transmitting virus 2. Cyber terrorism against the government organisation 2. Trafficking
3. Dissemination of obscene material 3. Netrespass 3. Distribution of printed software 3. Financial crimes
4. Defamation 4. Intellectual property crimes 4. Sale of illegal articles
5. Unauthorised control/access over computer system 5. Internet time thefts 5. Online gambling
6. Indecent exposure 6. Forgery
7. Email spoofing
8. Cheating & fraud

Electronic record and E-governance:
1. World Bank defined the use of information and communication technologies by government agencies to transform relations with citizens, business and other arms of the government.

2. The promotion of electronic governance is one of the prime objectives of IT Act, 2000.

3. Special provisions have been made under Chapter 111 of the Act for granting legal recognition to electronic records, electronic signature and to encourage their use by government and its agencies.

  • The Information Technology Act provides for the following provisions in context of electronic governance.
  • Legal recognition of Electronic Records (Section 4)
  • Legal recognition of digital signatures (Section 5)
  • Use of electronic.records and digital signatures in Government and its agencies (Section 6)
  • Retention of electronic records (Section 7)
  • Publication of rules, regulations, etc., in Electronic Gazette (Section 8)
  • Section 6, 7 and 8 not to confer right to insist document should be accepted in Electronic form (Section 9)
  • Power to make rules by Central Government in respect of digital signature (Section 10)

Data Protection:
1. As per Section 43A of the Information Technology Act, 2000,if a body corporate is possessing any sensitive personal data in computer it control and is negligent in implementing reasonable security and thereby causes wrongful loss or wrongful gain to a person then he will liable to pay the compensation, not exceeding five crore rupees, to a person so affected.

2. Section 43A deals with the rules regarding sensitive personal data or information and body corporate or any person located within India.

Scope of Cyber Laws – Some areas of concern for cyber law are listed:

  • E-commerce
  • Online contracts
  • Business software patenting
  • E-taxation
  • E-governance
  • Cyber crimes

1. E-Commerce Law:

  • It defined simply, is the commercial transaction of services in an electronic format.
  • The US Census Bureau measures e-commerce by looking at “the value of goods and services sold online whether over open networks such as internet, or over proprietary networks running system such as EDI.

2. Online Contracts:
(i) The Indian Contract Act, 1872 lays down that for a contract to happen there has to be proposal, assent to the proposal, which transforms into a promise.
Promise + Consideration + Enforceable by law = Contract

(ii) Online contract represent the formation of series of contractual obligations in an online environment.

(iii) Electronic contract comprises of Successive events:

  • e-offer
  • e-acceptance
  • consideration.

3. Business Software Patenting:

  • Patent protects a process, while copyright protects expression.
  • Big- e-commerce retailers, like amazon, price line and E-bay are going for patenting the backend software technologies of their front end operations.

4. E-Taxation:

  • As E-commerce increased commercial transactions across national borders, the taxation issue has become of the most debated topics.

5. E-Governance:

  • E-governance involves information technology enabled initiatives that are used for improving.
  • The interaction between government and citizens or government and business – e-services.
  • The internal government operations-e-administration and
  • External interactions-e-society.

6. Cyber Crimes:

  • Intentional use of Information technology by cyber terrorist for producing destructive and harmful effects to tangible and intangible property of others is called cyber crime.

Few definition related to the cyber crime are as follows:
1. Marc M Goodman says that a computer crime can be classified into three categories.

  • As crime where computer is target
  • Crimes where computer is the tool of the crime.
  • Crimes where computer is instrumental.

2. Nandan Kamat says that since the internet is composed of computers, crimes occurring on the internet are computer crimes.

3. Suresh T Vishwanathan defines computer crime as:

  • any illegal action in which a computer is a tool.
  • Any incident associated with computer technology in which a perpetrator by intention made or could have made a gain.
  • Computer abuse is considered as any illegal, unethical or unanthorised behaviors relating to the automatic processing and transmission of data.

Appeal to High Court (Section 62):
Any person aggrieved by any decision or order of the Cyber Appellate Tribunal may file an appeal to the High Court within sixty days from the date of communication of the decision or order of the Cyber Appellate Tribunal to him on any question of fact or law arising out of such order.

Provided that the High Court may, if it is satisfied that the Appellate was prevented by sufficient cause from filing the appeal within the said period, allow it to be filed within a further period not exceeding sixty days.

Confiscation:
Confiscation of computers or any accessories thereto (Section 76) provided fpr confiscation of any computer, computer system, floppies, compact disks, tape drives or any other accessories related thereto, in respect of which any provisions of this Act, rules, orders or regulations made thereunder has been or is being contravened.

However, where it is established to the satisfaction of the court adjudicating the confiscation that the person in whose possession, power or control of any such computer, computer system, floppies, compact disks, tape drives or any other accessories relating thereto is found to be not responsible for the contravention of the provisions of this Act, rules, order or regulations made thereunder, the court may, instead of making an order for confiscation of such computer, computer system, floppies, compact disks, tape drives or any other accessories related thereto, make such other order authorized by this Act against the person contravening the provisions of this Act, rules, orders or regulations made thereunder as it may think fit.

Regulation of Certifying Authorities:
The Act has established a Certifying Authority to regulate the transactions related to electronic matters and these are explained below:

(a) Appointment of Controller and other officers (Section 17)
1. The Central Government may, by notification in the Official Gazette,
appoint a Controller of Certifying Authorities for the purpose of this Act and may also by the same or subsequent notification appoint such number of Deputy Controllers and Assistant Controllers s it deems fit.

2. The Controller shall discharge his functions under this Act subject to the general control and directions of the Central Government.

3. The Deputy Controllers and Assistant Controllers shall perform the functions assigned to them by the Controller under the general superintendence and control of the Controller.

4. The qualifications, experience and terms and conditions of service jf Controller, Deputy Controllers and Assistant Controllers shall be such as may be prescribed by the Central Government.

5. There shall be a seal of the Office of the Controller.

(b) Functions of Controller (Section 18) – The Controller may perform all or any of the following functions, namely :

  • Exercising supervision over the activities of the Certifying Authorities;
  • Certifying public keys of the Certifying Authorities;
  • Laying down the standards to be maintained by the Certifying Authorities;
  • Specifying the qualifications and experience which employees of the Certifying Authorities should possess;
  • Specifying the conditions subject to which the Certifying Authorities shall conduct their business.

Adjudication:
(a) By adjudicating Officer:
Power to adjudicate (Section 46)
For the purpose of adjudging under this chapter whether any person has committed a contravention of any of the provisions of this Act or any rule, regulation, direction or order made thereunder the Central Government shall, subject to the provisions of sub-section (3), appoint any officer not below the rank of a Director to the Government of India or an equivalent Officer not below the rank of a Director to the Government of India or an equivalent officer of a State Government to be an adjudicating officer for holding an inquiry in the manner prescribed by the Central Government.

(b) Cyber Appellant Tribunal:
The Act provides for the establishment of the Cyber Appellate Tribunal. Its establishment, composition, Jurisdiction, powers, procedures is as follows:

Establishment of Cyber Appellate Tribunal (Section 48)
1. The Central Government shall, by notification, establish one or more appellate tribunals to be known as the Cyber Regulations Appellate Tribunal.

2. The Central Government shall also specify, in the notification referred to in sub-section (!), the matters and places in relation to which the Cyber Appellate Tribunal may exercise jurisdiction.

Composition of Cyber Appellant Tribunal (Section 49):
A Cyber Appellate Tribunal shall consist of one person only (hereinafter referred to as the Residing Officer ol the Cyber Appellate Tribunal) to be ” appointed, by notification, by the Central Government.

Qualifications for appointment as Presiding Officer of the Cyber Appellate Tribunal (Section 50) : A person shall not be qualified for appointment as the presiding Officer of a Cyber Appellate Tribunal unless he –

  • Is, or. has been or is qualified to be, a Judge of a High Court.
  • Is or has been a member of the Indian Legal Service and is holding or has held a post in Grade I of that service for at least three years.

Term of Office (Section 51)
The Presiding Officer of a Cyber Appellate Tribunal shall hold office for a term of five years from the date on which he enters upon his office or until he attains the age of sixty-five years, whichever is earlier.

Appeal to Cyber Appellate Tribunal (Section 57)
1. Save as provided in sub-section (2), any person aggrieved by an order made by Controller or an adjudicating officer under this Act may prefer an appeal to a Cyber Appellate Tribunal having jurisdiction in the matter.

2. No appeal shall lie to the Cyber Appellate Tribunal from an order made by an adjudicating officer with the consent of the parties.

3. Every appeal under sub-section (1) shall be filed-within a period of twenty five days from the date on which a copy of the order made by the Controller or the adjudicating officer is received by the person aggrieved and it shall be in such form and be accompanied by such fee as may be prescribed.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Technology has helped in creating :
(a) Machine – clone
(b) Machinery
(b) Gadgets
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Machine – clone

Question 2.
William Gibson’s Neuromancer was published in ________.
(a) 1990
(b) 1920
(c) 1984
(d) 2000
Answer:
(c) 1984

Question 3.
The word Cyberspace was first appeared in ________
(a) Window XP
(b) Neuromancer
(c) Electronic device
(c) Internet
Answer:
(b) Neuromancer

Question 4.
‘Cyberspace’ as the notional environment in which communication over computer networks occurs; is defined in ________.
(a) New English Dictionary
(b) Dictionary
(c) Modern English
(d) The New Oxford Dictionary
Answer:
(d) The New Oxford Dictionary

Question 5.
Cyber space is a ________ medium.
(a) Virtual
(b) Basic
(c) Wireless
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Virtual

Question 6.
Full form of DNS is:
(a) Domain Name Server
(b) Decent Name Server
(c) Domain Naming Server
(d) Domain Name Service
Answer:
(a) Domain Name Server

Question 7.
Full form of IP is:
(a) Internet Portal address
(b) Internet Provider access
(c) Internet Portal access
(d) Internet Provider’s address
Answer:
(d) Internet Provider’s address

Question 8.
India is the 12th nation In enactment of cyber law with _______
(a) Time
(b) Information technology Act, 2000
(c) IP
(d) DNS
Answer:
(b) Information technology Act, 2000

Question 9.
Digital signature, like written signature, used to provide authentication of the associated input, usually called as _______.
(a) Epistol
(b) Letter
(c) Message
(d) SMS
Answer:
(c) Message

Question 10.
The _______ and _______ are unique to the subscriber and constitute a function key pair.
(a) Public and Internet
(b) IP and DNS
(c) Private and government
(d) Private Key & Public key
Answer:
(d) Private Key & Public key

Question 11.
Statutes which govern online criminal liability include:
(a) Information Technology Act, Indian Contract Act, Law of Torts
(b) Indian Penal Code
(c) Information Technology Act & Indian Penal Code
(d) Information Technology.
Answer:
(c) Information Technology Act & Indian Penal Code

Question 12.
An appeal for the order of Cyber Appellate can be filled in:
(a) Supreme Court
(b) Court with the jurisdiction
(c) High Court
(d) Both High Court & Supreme Court
Answer:
(d) Both High Court & Supreme Court

Question 13.
There are _______ no. of member Cyber Appellate Tribunal.
(a) One Member
(b) Two Members
(c) One or more members
(d) Composition decided by central government
Answer:
(a) One Member

Question 14.
It is a notional environment in which communication over computer networks occur.
(a) Cyber Crime
(b) Cyber Law
(c) Cyber Space
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Cyber Space

Question 15.
Cyber crime is generally used to describe _______ in which computer or/and network is a tool, a target, or a place of criminal activity.
(a) Criminal Activity
(b) Cyber Crime
(c) Crime
(d) (a) & (b)
Answer:
(a) Criminal Activity

Question 16.
This is not the crime under individual property _______.
(a) Computer vandalism
(b) Transmitting virus
(c) Netrespass
(d) Distribution of pirated software
Answer:
(d) Distribution of pirated software

Question 17.
The crime against society is :
(a) Harassment via e-mail
(b) Cyber – stalking
(c) Trafficking
(d) E-mail spoofing
Answer:
(c) Trafficking

Question 18.
The scope and relevance of cyber law touches those areas which have a _______.
(a) Technological bend
(b) Energy
(c) Crime
(d) Cyberspace
Answer:
(a) Technological bend

Question 19.
The full form of (UNCITRAL) is :
(a) United Nations Commission on International Trade Law
(b) United National Commission on International Trade Law
(c) Union Nation Commission on International Trade Law
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) United Nations Commission on International Trade Law

Question 20.
Legal Recognition of digital structure comes under:
(a) Section 1
(b) Section 5
(c) Section 4
(d) Section 2
Answer:
(b) Section 5

Question 21.
Penalty for hacking of computer system includes _______.
(a) Punishment for imprisonment up to three years or with a fine which may extend up to two lakh or both
(b) Punishment for imprisonment of three years or with a fine which may extend up to two lakh or both
(c) Punishment for imprisonment of five years or,with a fine which may extend of two lakh or both
(d) Punishment for imprisonment up to three years and with a fine which may extend up to two lakh
Answer:
(a) Punishment for imprisonment up to three years or with a fine which may extend up to two lakh or both

Question 22.
Cyber Appellate Tribunal consist of ________.
(a) One member
(b) Two members
(c) One or more members
(d) Composition decided by the central government
Answer:
(a) One member

Question 23.
The Presiding officer of Cyber Appellate Tribunal holds office for _______.
(a) A period of six years or until he attains the age of sixty five whichever is earlier
(b) A period of five years or until he attains the age of sixty six whichever is earlier
(c) A period of four years or until he attains the age of sixty five whichever is earlier
(d) A period of five years or until he attains the age of sixty five whichever is earlier
Answer:
(d) A period of five years or until he attains the age of sixty five whichever is earlier

Question 24.
The presiding officer can me removed on the ground of _______.
(a) Misappropriation of assets
(b) Proved misbehaviour or incapacity
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Either fa) or (b)
Answer:
(b) Proved misbehaviour or incapacity

Question 25.
An appeal for the order of Cyber Appellate Tribunal can be filed in _______.
(a) Supreme Court
(b) High Court
(c) Court with the jurisdiction
(d) Both High Court and Supreme Court Answer:
Answer:
(b) High Court

Question 26.
Cyber space is a ________ medium.
(a) Physical
(b) Virtual
(c) Digital
(d) Virtual & Digital
Answer:
(b) Cyber Space Virtual medium. It has no boundaries, no geographical mass or gravity.

Question 27.
Which of the following is associated with Cyber law?
(a) David J. Hickton
(b) Alfred Marshall
(c) Adam Smith
(d) David Ricardo
Answer:
(a) David J. Hickton contribute a lot to cyber law.

Question 28.
Cyber Space is:
(a) Inter connected digital Technology,
(b) Space between two internets
(c) Telecome Network
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Cyber space is meant to the inter connected digital technology.

Question 29.
Cyber Crime not include:
(a) Physical force/attack
(b) Intellectual Property Rights
(c) Hacking and disclosed privacy
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Cyber crime include backing and disclose privacy, Intellectual property rights, privacy infringement etc. Thus, option (a) is correct.

Question 30.
Matter related to cyber crimes can heard at ________.
(a) District Court
(b) High Court
(c) Supreme Court
(d) All of these
Answer:
(c) Cases related to cyber crime are heard by Supreme Court.

Question 31.
Who act a repository of all Digital Signature Certificates (DSC) issue under. It Act, 2000.
(a) Controller
(b) Adjudicating Officer
(c) Cyber Appellate Tribunal
(d) Any of these
Answer:
(a) The controller acts as a repository (a storehouse, i.e. who will maintain and authenticate and complete information) of all digital signature certificates.

Question 32.
Cyber Space _______.
(a) It is a physical world
(b) It is a massive space
(c) it is a digital medium. It has no fixed shape
(d) Any of these
Answer:
(c) Cyber space is a virtual / digital medium having no boundaries, no geographical mass hence no fixed shape.

Question 33.
What is the penalty for publishing Digital Signature Certificate false in certain particulars:
(a) Imprisonment of 2 years or with fine of 1 lakh or both
(b) Imprisonment of 3 years or with fine of 1 lakh or both
(c) Imprisonment of 2 years and with fine of 1 lakh
(d) Imprisonment of 4 years or with a fine of 3 years or both
Answer:
(a) Section 73 (2) provides that any person who contravenes the provisions of sub-section (1) shall be punished within imprisonment for a term which may extend to two years, or with fine which may extend to one lakh rupees, or with both.

Question 34.
Match the following:

(a) Computer Vandalism (i) Against Society
(b) Trafficking (ii) Against individual
(c) Staking (iii) Against organisation
(d) Distribution of Pirated Software (iv) Against individual property

Answer:

(a) Computer Vandalism (iv) Against individual property
(b) Trafficking (i) Against society
(c) Staking (ii) Against individual
(d) Distribution of Pirated Software (iii) Against organisation

Here, the cyber crimes are classified as on the basis of
(a) subject of crime
(b) against whom crime is committed.

Question 35.
Digital Signature is issued to:
(a) Subscriber
(b) Certifying Authority
(c) Government
(d) Controlle
Answer:
(a) The digital signature certificate is a secure digital key that is issued by the certifying authorities to the subscribers [Section 2(1) (Zh)] for the purpose of validating and certifying the identity of person holding this certificate. It makes use of asymmetric crypto system to create signatures.

Question 36.
When one is not satisfied with decision of Adjudicating Officer he can apply to whom?
(a) CAT
(b) High Court
(c) Supreme Court
(d) Controller
Answer:
Every appeal under Section 57(1) shall be filed within a period of 25 days from the date on which a copy of the order made by controller or adjudicating officer is received by person aggrieved at’t shall be in such form and be accompanied by such fee as may be prescribed by Cyber Appellate Tribunal.

Question 37.
Cyber-law environment is ________.
(a) Notional
(b) Physical
(c) Ethical
(d) None of above.
Answer:
(a) Cyber Law is a notional or a virtual environment while dealing with some serious problems of internet, there is need of cyber law to govern the new virtual world. They are made to lesser the legal issues for the future. The cyber law also referred as “law of internet”.

Question 38.
Key to create a Digital Signature _______.
(a) Public key
(b) Private key
(c) Government key
(d) I.N.S key
Answer:
(b) The key which is used to create the digital signature is private key. [Section 2(1)(ZC)]. Private key is a part of secure key pair i.e. Asymmetric crypto system in which private key is used to create and public key is used to verify digital signature created.

Question 39.
Qualifications of CS in Cyber Law Appellate Tribunal?
(a) 15 years
(b) 5 years
(c) 10 years
(d) 30 years
Answer:
(a) A Company Secretary in practice is eligible to become a Technical member of National Company Law Tribunal if he is practising for at least 15 years, according to Qualifications of Tribunal (Section 409).

Question 40.
Act extend to whole of India including Jammu and Kashmir is given in:
(a) Article 253 of Cyber Law
(b) Article 151 of Contract Act
(c) Article 141 of Contract Act
(d) None of these.
(a) According to Section 1 (2) provides that Cyber Law Act extends to whole of India, including Jammu and Kashmir. To extend the provisions of Act to Jammu and Kashmir, Article 253 of the constitution is used.

CS Foundation Business Environment and Law Notes

Role Of Company Secretary – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Role Of Company Secretary – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Introduction:

  • The ICSI (Institute of Company Secretaries of India) is a premier national professional body established under an Act of Parliament namely the Company Secretaries Act, 1980.
  • Functions under the administrative control of the Ministry of Corporate Affairs, Government of India.
  • Has been set up to develop and regulate the profession of company secretaries.
  • It has headquarters in New Delhi and 4 regional Councils at Chennai, Kolkata, Mumbai, and New Delhi, and 68 Chapters spread all over India.
  • Has set up Centre for Corporate Governance, Research and Training (ICSI-CCGRT) at Navi Mumbai.
  • Conducts examination at 85 centers across the country and one overseas center in Dubai.
  • Company Secretaries are knowledgeable professionals who guide, advise the strategy maker of entities.
  • CS as a professional certifies and verifies the trustworthiness of the affairs of a corporation.
  • The skills and attributes of a good Company Secretary may include humanity humility, high intelligence, and understanding of agendas, negotiation, and resilience.
  • The professionals are required to demonstrate not only Intelligence Quotient (IQ) but also Emotional Quotient (EQ).

Role Company Secretary under Companies Act, 2013 Key Managerial Personnel:

  • Along with the Chief Executive Officer/Managing Director/Whole-time Director and Chief Financial Officer, “Company Secretary” has also been brought within the ambit of KMP giving them the long-deserved recognition of KMP of the company.

Companies Mandatorily Required to Appoint Key Managerial Personnel:

  • As per Section 203 of the Companies Act, 2013, read with the Companies (Appointment and Remuneration of Managerial Personnel) Rules 2014, the following class of companies namely;
  • Every listed company.
  • Every other public company having a paid-up share capital of ₹ 10 crores or more.
  • Further, as per recently notified Rule 8A of the Companies Rule 2014, a company other than a company covered under rule 8 that has a paid-up( share capital of 5 crore rupees or more shall have a whole-time company secretary.

Functions of Company Secretary (Section 205):

  • to report to the Board about compliance with the provisions of this Act,
  • to ensure that the company complies with the applicable secretarial standards; and
  • to discharge such other duties as may be prescribed.

Duties of Company Secretaries

  • Act as a vital link between the company and its Board of Directors, Shareholders and Stakeholders, and Regulatory authorities.
  • Plays a key role in ensuring the Board procedures are followed by regularly revised.
  • Provides the board with guidance as to its duties responsibilities and power under various laws, rules, and regulations.
  • Act as a compliance officer.
  • Is an important member of the corporate management team and acts as conscience seeker of the company. The signing of Annual Return (Section 92):
  • The annual return is filled by CS and the director. In the case where no company secretary is appointed by the company, then by CS in practice. (OPC is an exception to it)
  • In the case of a listed company and other prescribed companies, even if the annual return is signed by Companies Secretary in Employment, it is further required to be certified by CS in Whole-Time Practice.

Role Of Company Secretary – CS Foundation Business Law Notes chapter 13 Img 1

  • This prescribed claim is under the Companies (Management and Administration) Rule, 2014.

Company Secretary in Practice
1. Secretarial Audit:

  • Every listed company and a company belonging to another class of companies are required to give a secretarial audit report, by a company secretary in practice.
  • As per the Companies (Appointment and Remuneration of Managerial Personnel) Rule, 2014, the other class of companies shall be as under:
  • Every public company having a paid-up share capital of 50 crore rupees or more.
  • Every public company having a turnover of two hundred fifty crore rupees or more.

Act as Scrutinizer in E-voting:

  • Every company having not less than one thousand members shall provide to its member’s facility to exercise their right to vote on a resolution proposed to be considered at a general meeting by electronic means.
  1. Appointment as Administrator (Section 259)
  2. Company liquidators (Section 275)
  3. Professional assistance to company liquidator (Section 291)
  4. Qualification of Tribunal (Section 409)

Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code 2016:
Recognition of Company Secretary in practice to act as insolvency practitioner under the code.

Securities Laws:

  • Appearance before Securities Appellate Tribunal: Practicing Company Secretary has been authorized to appear as authorized representative before the Securities Appellate Tribunal (SAT) under SEBI Act, 1992 and Depositories Act, 1996.
  • Reconciliation of Share Capital Audit
  • Audit of Capital Market Intermediaries:
  • It is in this direction that SEBI has authorized practicing company secretaries to undertake internal audits of various capital market intermediaries.

Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008:

  • The annual return of LLP having a turnover of more than 5 crore rupees.
  • Contribution of more than 50 lakh rupees shall be accompanied by a certificate from a Company Secretary in Practice. Rule 25(2) of LLP

Rules, 2009. Special Economic Zones Act & Rules, 2006

  • Company Secretary in Practice has been authorized to appear as authorized representative before the board. Rule 16 of SEZ Rule, 2006.

Telecom Regulatory Authority of India Act, 1997

  • Company Secretary in Practice has been authorized to appear as authorized representative before the Telecom Disputes Settlement and. & Appellate Tribunal.

Competition Act, 2002

  • Company Secretaries in Practice act as authorized representatives before the Competition Commission of India and Competition Appellate Tribunal.

Real Estate (Regulation and Development) Act, 2016

  • “Practising Companies Secretary” act as authorized representative before the Appellate Tribunal or the Regulatory Authority or the adjudicating officer.

Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999

  • “Practising Companies Secretary” authorized to issue No objection tax clearance certificate regarding the transfer of capital contribution/profit shares of an limited liability partnership from resident to non¬resident/non-resident to the resident.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Companies Secretary is defined under:
(a) clause (c) of sub-section (2) of Section 1 of the Company Secretaries Act, 1980.
(b) clause (c) of sub-section (1) of Section 2 of the Company Secretaries Act, 1980.
(c) clause (d) subsection (1) of Section 3 of the Company Act, 2013.
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(b) clause (c) of sub-section (1) of Section 2 of the Company Secretaries Act, 1980.

Question 2.
The ICSI is a premier national professional body established under
(a) Act of Parliament
(b) Act of Central Government
(c) Companies Act, 2013
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(a) Act of Parliament

Question 3.
Company Secretary is not the Key Managerial Personnel of the Company.
(a) False
(b) True
(c) Partly True
(d) Can’t Say
Answer:
(a) False

Question 4.
The ICSI functions under the administrative jurisdiction of
(a) Ministry of State Affair
(b) Central Government
(c) Ministry of Corporate Affair
(d) Both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(c) Ministry of Corporate Affair

Question 5.
The role of Company Secretary is :
(a) Arbitrator
(b) Lawyer
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Can’t say
Answer:
(a) Arbitrator

Question 6.
Secretarial Audit is defined under:
(a) Section (204)
(b) Section 2 (31)
(c) Section (205)
(d) Section (208)
Answer:
(a) Section (204)

Question 7.
The secretarial Audit report should be prepared by
(a) Every listed company
(b) Every Public Company having a paid-up share capital of 50 crore rupees or more
(c) Every Public Company having a turnover of 250 crores or more
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 8.
The Role of Scrutinizer is played by
(a) Charted Accountant
(b) Companies Secretary in practice
(c) Advocate
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) All of the above.

Question 9.
A Company Secretary in practice is not eligible to become a Technical Member of NCLT.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(b) False

Question 10.
A practicing company secretary can be a member of NCLT if he is practicing for at least:
(a) 10 years
(b) 5 years
(c) 15 years
(d) 20 years.
Answer:
(c) 15 years

Question 11.
Company Secretary has been recognized to represent before various Regulators, and Authorities under which Act?
(a) SEBI Act, 1992
(b) LLP Act, 2008
(c) Telecom Regulatory Authority of Indian Act, 1997
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 12.
Power/duties of Auditors apply ______________ to Company Secretary in practice conducting secretarial audit.
(a) Matadis Mutandis
(b) Mutatis Mutandis
(c) Mutatis Mutants
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(b) Mutatis Mutandis

Question 13.
Full form of SEBI:
(a) Securities and Exchange Board of India
(b) Shares and Exchange Board of India
(c) Securities and Employment Board of India
(d) Both (a) and (c)
Answer:
(a) Securities and Exchange Board of India

Question 14.
The vision of Institute of Company Secretaries Board of India is :
(a) To be a global leader in promoting good corporate governance
(b) To develop high caliber professionals facilitating good corporate governance.
(c) Speak the truth abide by the law.
(d) To lead the world.
Answer:
(a) To be a global leader in promoting good corporate governance

Question 15.
Companies Secretary is a :
(a) Solution Provider
(b) Business Manager
(c) Strategist
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) All of the above.

Question 16.
Work of a Practicing Company Secretary is of:
(a) Secretarial Audit
(b) Pre-certification of e-form
(c) Duty to report fraud
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) All of the above.

Question 17.
Stock exchange and every company shall provide the facility to its members to exercise right to vote if it has:
(a) not less than one thousand members
(b) not less than ten thousand members
(c) not more than one thousand members
(d) not more than ten thousand members.
Answer:
(a) not less than one thousand members

Question 18.
Function of Company Secretary is defined under:
(a) Section 205
(b) Section 2 sub-section (1) clause (c) of Companies Secretary Act, 1980.
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(a) Section 205

Question 19.
The Abbreviation ‘BIFR’ with reference to Sick Companies in India means:
(a) Board for Indian Financial Reserves
(b) Board for Industrial and Financial Resources
(c) Board for Industrial and Financial Reconstruction
(d) Board for International Fund Reserve
Answer:
(c) The Abbreviation ‘BIFR’ which is related to Sick Companies in India means -Board for Industrial and Financial Reconstruction.

Question 20.
Functions of a Company Secretary to is defined under:
(a) Section 208
(b) Section 227
(c) Section 205
(d) Section 116
Answer:
(c) Functions of a company secretary are defined under Section 205 of the Companies Act, 2013.

Question 21.
Legal works of a company is done by:
(a) CS in practice
(b) CS in employment
(c) Advocate
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) In the functioning of business, which may relate to compliance of the law, ethical code of conduct sensitivity to the environment, etc. Company Secretary in practice, in employment, and advocate play, is a very important role in legal works.

Question 22. ____________ has authorised Practicising Company Secretary to undertake internal audit of various capital market intermediaries.
(a) SEBI
(b) Central Government
(c) Audit Committee
(d) Comptroller and Auditor General of India
Answer:
(a) SEBI (Stock Exchange Board of India) has authorized the Practicing Company Secretary to undertake internal audits of various capital market intermediaries.

Question 23.
Which act as a repository of all Digital Signature Certificate (DSC):
(a) MCA (Ministry of Corporate Affairs)
(b) Government
(c) Both ‘A’ and ‘B’
(d) Controller
Answer:
(d) Controller Act as a repository of all Digital Signature Certificate (DSC) as per Section 20 of Information Technology Act, 2000.

CS Foundation Business Environment and Law Notes

Elements of Company Law – I – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Elements of Company Law – I – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Introduction:

  1. Word “company” is derived from Latin word “Com Panis” meaning Com i.e. with/together and Panis i.e. bread.
  2. It is originally referred to an association of persons who took their meals together.
  3. The word “company” denotes a joint stock enterprise in which the capital is contributed by a large number of people.
  4. In Smith V. Anderson, it was observed that company in broad sense may mean an association of individuals formed for some purpose.
  5. Company can be an incorporated (profit making) or unincorporated (non profit making like a club or a society) body.
  6. An incorporated company refers to a separate person distinct from the individuals constituting it.
  7. An unincorporated company such as partnership refers to only a collection of individuals.
  8. It is called a body corporate because the persons comprising it are made into one body by incorporating it according to law and clothing it with legal personality and so turn it into a corporation.
  9. Word “Corporation” is derived from Latin word “corpus” which means “body”.
  10. It is a legal person created by process other than natural birth, thus called artificial person.
  11. A Company have a personality, distinct and separate from its members.

The Incorporated company is formed either:

  1. under Special Act of Parliament:
  2. Example : LIC, Damodar Valley Corporations etc. or
  3. under Companies Act, 2013 or under any previous Company law.
  4. Example : Hindustan Lever Ltd., Tata Steel Ltd., etc.

As per Section 2(20) of the Companies Act, 2013. “Company” means a company incorporated under Companies Act, 2013 or under any previous company law. Section should be exactly as per law. The unincorporated Company formed not for profit purpose falls within the meaning of a company licenced U/S 8 of the Companies Act, 2013.

Characteristics:
(1) Corporate Personality

  • Company is a separate legal entity distinct from individuals who are its members. (It is also known as separate legal entity)
  • It is known by its own name.
  • It has its own seal. (Common seal i.e. official signature of a company) [Amendment of Sec. 9 – “the word common seal” has been omitted]
  • Its members are its owners but they can be its creditors simultaneously.
  • It is capable of owning property, incurring debts, borrowing money, having a bank account, employing people, entering into contracts and suing or being sued in the same manner as an individual.
  • A shareholder cannot be held liable for the company’s act even if he holds virtually the company’s entire share capital.
  • Shareholders are not the company’s agent and so they cannot bind it by their acts.
  • This was brought forward in the case of Salomon V. Salomon and Co. Ltd., (1897)
  • The company does not hold its property as an agent or trustee for its members and they cannot sue to enforce its rights, nor can they be sued in respect of its liabilities.

Respective Case Law:
(1) Salomon V. Salomon and Co. Ltd –

  • Mr. Salomon was carrying on the business of leather merchant and boot manufacturing as a sole proprietor.
  • He formed a limited company for taking over his business.
  • The Company’s nominal capital was £ 40,000 in £1 shares.
  • Payment of total purchase consideration of £ 38,782 was in the following form:
  • Fully paid shares of E, each issued to Salomon £ 20,000
  • Secured debentures issued to Salomon £10,000
  • Cash Paid £ 8,782
  • Other 6 members of his family were issued 1 share each.
  • Salomon held virtually the entire share capital of the company. Hence, the company was called as ‘one man company’
  • Due to trade depression, company went into liquidation.
  • Company’s liabilities was £ 10,000 secured by debentures and its assets realised £ 6,050.
  • Unsecured creditors owing £ 8,000 claimed that Salomon was carrying on business in the name of the company. Thus, company was a mere agent of Salomon.
  • They claimed that one man cannot owe money to himself.

Court held that:

  • Salomon & Co. was a real company fulfilling all the legal requirements.
  • It had an identity separate from its members.
  • Thus, secured debentures even though held by Salomon, were to be paid in priority to unsecured creditors.

This case established the legality of “one-man company” and principle of limited liability.

Lee V. Lee’s Air farming Ltd.
Alternative Case Study : Corporate personality: Salomon v/s Salomon & Co. Ltd. (1897)

(2) Limited Liability –

  • Members of a company cannot be held liable for its debts.
  • In case of limited company, the liability of members is limited to the extent of unpaid value of shares held by them.
  • In case of company limited by guarantee, members are liable to the extent of amount guaranteed by them.
  • Guaranteed amount can be called only at the time of company’s, liquidation winding up.

(3) Transferability of Shares –

  • Shares are movable property which are transferable subject to certain conditions.
  • In public company, shares are freely transferable.
  • However, there are certain restrictions on the transfer of shares in a private company.
  • Any absolute restriction on the right to transfer shares is void.
  • Shares in a public company can be transferred without any restriction but shares in private company can not be transferred.

(4) Common Seal –

  • It is the official signature of the company.
  • Company’s name is engraved on it.
  • A document not bearing common seal of the company is not authentic and has no legal force behind it.
  • A rubber stamp does not serve, the purpose.
  • Amendment made by Companies (Amendment) Act, 2015.

Amendment of Section 9:
In Section 9 of the Principal Act, the words “and a common seal” shall be omitted.

Amendment of Section 22:
In Section 22 of the Principal Act,
(i) In Sub-Section(2) –
(a) for the words “under its common seal”, the words “under its common seal if any”, shall be submitted

(b) the following proviso shall be inserted, namely:
“Provided that in case a company does not have a common seal, the authorisation under this sub-section shall be made by two directors or by a director and the Company Secretary, wherever the company has appointed a Company Secretary”.

(ii) In sub-section (3), the words “and have the effect as if it were made under its common seal” shall be omitted.

Amendment of Section 46:
In Section 46 of the Principal Act, in sub-section (1), for the words “issued under the common seal of the company”, the words “issued under the common seal, if any, of the company or signed by two directors or by a director and the Company Secretary, wherever the company has appointed a Company Secretary” shall be substituted.

(5) Perpetual Succession

  • Death, insolvency, insanity etc. of any member does not affects continuity legal existence and identity of the company.
  • “Members may come and go, but the company goes on forever.”
  • It can be dissolved only under law through winding up procedure.

(6) Separate Property

  • No member can claim to be the owner or co-owner of company’s property. Member cannot get insurance of the property belonging to the company.
  • Company can own and hold property in its own name.

(7) Capacity to sue and be sued in its own name:

  • A company is a legal person, thus it can sue others and can be sued by others in its own name.
  • In an unincorporated association, an action may have to be brought in name of members either individually/collectively.

Relevant to Lifting of Corporate Veil

  • Due to law’s fiction, company is seen as an entity distinct from its members, but actually company is an association of persons who are the beneficial owners of company’s property.
  • No member can be held, liable for the company’s act even if he holds virtually the entire share capital of the company.
  • Lifting of corporate veil means ignoring the company’s separate legal identity. It involves disregarding of the corporate personality and looking behind the corporate entity, at the controlling persons and make them liable for debts and obligations of the company.
  • It is permissible only when it is permitted by the statute.

It is permitted in the following cases:
(i) If the company is formed for commission of.

  • fraud and improper conduct.
  • to defraud creditors
  • to avoid legal obligations.

Relevant Case Law:

  • Gilford Motor Co. V. Home
  • Jones V Lipman

(ii) To determine whether company Is an enemy company or not.
Relevant Case Law:
Daimler Co. Ltd. V. Continental Tyre and Rubber Co.

(iii) To prevent evasion of taxes and duties.
Relevant Case Law:

  • CIT V Maeriakshi Mills Ltd.
  • Sir Dinshaw Manakjee Petit.

(iv) If purpose of company’s formation is to avoid a welfare legislation e.g. reducing its liability of bonus payable under Bonus Act.
Relevant Case Law:
1. The workers employed in Associated Rubber Industries Ltd. Bhavnagar V. The Associated Rubber Industries Ltd. Bhavnagar and other, A.I.R. 1986 SCI

(v) For the purpose of protecting the public policy and thus, preventing the transaction contrary to public policy.
Relevant Case Law:
1. Connors Bros V. Connors

(vi) If the holding company has incorporated the subsidiary company for the sole purpose of using it as an agent.
Relevant Case Law:
1. Re, R.G Films Ltd.

Various Statutory Provisions for lifting the corporate veil are as follows:

  • Reduction in Membership
  • Misdescription of name.
  • Presentation of group accounts of holding and subsidiary companies.
  • Fraudulent Trading.
  • Payment of Arrears of tax.
  • Ultra-vires acts.
  • Misrepresentation in prospectus.

Elements of Company Law – I – CS Foundation Business Law Notes IMG 1

Difference Between Company and Partnership:

Company Partnership
  • Complex formation due to various legal formalities.
  • Compulsory registration is required.
  • Governed by Companies Act, 2013.
  • Separate legal entity of company from its members.
  • Management is in the hands of B.O.D. appointed by shareholders.
  • Property of the Co. is not the property of individuals.
  • Members of the Co. are not its agents.
  • Members can contract with the company.
  • Shares are freely transferable.
  • Liability of a shareholder is limited by shares or a guarantee.
  • Death or insolvency of a shareholder does not effect the life of the company.
  • A Co. is legally required to have it’s accounts audited annually by a Chartered Accountant.
  • Easy formation due to comparatively less legal formalities.
  • Registration is not compulsory.
  • Governed by Partnership Act, 1932.
  • No separate legal entity.
  • Its affairs, are managed by all or any of them acting for all.
  • Property of the firm, is the property of individuals.
  • Partners are the agents of the firm.
  • Partners cannot contract with the firm.
  • Shares are transferable with the consent of the other partners.
  • Liability of a partner is unlimited.
  • Death or insolvency of a partner dissolves the firm.
  • The accounts of the firm are audited at the discretion of the partners.

Differences between Company and LLP:

Basis Company LLP
Regulation It is regulated by statute i.e. Companies Act, 2013. It is regulated by, a contractual agreement or in absence of it, under Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008.
Owners and Managers In case of a company there is a clear distinction between owners and managers of a company. In LLP, partners hold ownership and also hold power’s to manage the LLP.
Compliance of Formalities A company would have to file annual return of audited financial statement with MCA each year. LLP does not have to file audited financial statements if its annual turnover is less the 40 lakhs and capital contribution is less than 25 lakhs.
Fine and Penalties A company enjoys few advantage relating fine and penalties from MCA. LLP could incur larger comparatively a company for non-compliance or late filing with MCA example ₹ 100 per day.
Stability A company has been in existence for longer than LLP’s in India as it is older and more familiar. LLP is a recently introduced entity in India therefore, some of the rules, regulations and procedures are continuing to evolve thus, a company has been in existence for longer than LLP.
Investment Benefits A company prevail better access to funding from banks and foreign direct investments than that of LLP. LLP enjoys less funding benefits than that a company because of its better image.
Flexibility Less flexible than LLP. More flexible than a company.

LLP is a separate legal entity, liable to the full extent of its assets but liability of the partners is limited to their agreed contribution in the LLP. No partner is liable on account of the independent or un-authorized actions of other partners.

LLP is not relieved of the liability for its other obligations as a separate entity. As LLP consists elements of both ‘a corporate structure’ as well as ‘a partnership firm’, it is called a hybrid between a company and a partnership.

Difference Between Company and HUF:

Company HUF
1. It consists of heterogeneous members.
2. No karta and coparceners system.
3. Person becomes member on fulfilment of certain requirements.
4. Its registration is compulsory.
1. It consists of homogeneous members.
2. Karta has the sole authority to contract, debts for the purpose of the business. While coparceners do not have such authority.
3. Person becomes member by birth.
4. Its registration is not compulsory.

Difference Between Company and Club:

Company Club
  • It is a trading association.
  • Its registration is compulsory.
  • It is a non-trading association.
  • Its registration is not compulsory

Difference Between Company and Corporation:

  • Corporation refers to an association of persons incorporated as per the relevant law and covered with a legal personality separate from the persons constituting it.
  • It is wider than the word ‘company’
  • It is also known as ‘body corporate’

Difference Between Company v/s Body Corporate:

Basis Company Corporation
Meaning A company which is created and registered under the Indian Companies Act, 2013 or any other previous act. A company is a voluntary association of two or more than two persons. The term corporation is defined in Section 2(11) of the Companies Act, 2013. This includes a private company, public company, OPC, small company, LLP, foreign company etc.
Formation A company must formed in India (under Companies Act, 2013). A corporation includes a company incorporate inside or outside the country. (Exclude co-operative society, any other corporation formed by Central Government).
Scope Comparatively Less. wide.

It includes:

  • a company incorporated outside India.

it does not include:

  • a co-operative society registered under any law relating to societies, co-operative.
  • any other body corporate (not being a company as defined in this act), which the CG may by notification specify in this behalf.

Society whether a body corporate or not?
Any society registered under Societies Registration Act does not come under body corporate.
Relevant Case Law:
(i) Board of Trustees V State of Delhi, A.I.R. 1962 S.C. 458

Advantages of an incorporated Company –

  • Corporate Personality : It has a legal personality which is completely separate from its members.
  • Limited liability : Liability of the members is limited by Shares or guarantee.
  • Perpetual Succession : Death or insolvency of members does not affect the existence or continuity of the company. Even death of a member does not affect its existence.
  • Transferability of Shares : Members are allowed to transfer their shares freely, thus having liquidity of their investment. Share of Private Co. are not freely transferable.
  • Separate Property : Being an artificial legal person, company can own funds and assets in its own name. Company’s property is not its member’s property.
  • Capacity to Sue : Company can sue and be sued by others in its own name.

Flexibility and autonomy : Company can form and amend its own policy with much independence subject to the principles of law, equity and good conscience and in accordance with provisions of Companies Act, 2013 MOA and AOA. Key Managerial Personnel (KMP) has been defined in Companies Act, 2013 to mean:

  • the Chief Executive officer or the managing director or the manager;
  • the company secretary;
  • the whole-time director;
  • the Chief Financial officer; and
  • such other officer as may be prescribed.

As per the Amendment made by Companies (Amendment) Act, 2017 Revised Section 2(51) – “Key Managerial Personnel” in relation to a company, means :

  • the Chief Executive Officer or the Managing Director or the Manager;
  • the Company Secretary;
  • the Whole-time Director;
  • the Chief Financial Officer;
  • such other officer, not more than one level below the directors who is in whole-time employment, designated as key managerial personnel by the Board; and
  • such other officer as may be prescribed;”

Disadvantages of an Incorporated Company:
1. Several legal formalities: Incorporation of a company involves adherence to several legal formalities which requires lot of time and money. Failure to perform any formality or provision attracts penal consequence.

2. Separation of Ownership-and Management: Members have no direct control over the affairs of company which makes their ownership position more passive.

3. Greater Tax Burden: It is liable to pay income tax at a flat rate without any minimum taxable limit.

4. Corporate Disclosures: Members have comparatively restricted assessibility to company’s internal management and day to day working.

5. Greater Social Responsibility: The enormous powers used by companies have an impact on society, thus are subject to greater control and regulation.

6. Lengthy winding up procedure: Even at the time of its winding up, detailed procedure is to be followed which is expensive and time consuming.
Elements of Company Law – I – CS Foundation Business Law Notes IMG 3

Private Company [Section 2(68)]:
1. A company which has the following features is a private company.

  • restricts the right to transfer its shares.
  • except in case of ‘one person company’ a private company should have minimum 2 members and cannot have more than 200 members (excluding employee and ex-employee members).
  • prohibits any invitation to the public to subscribe for any securities of the company.
  • has a minimum paid up capital of one lakh rupees or such higher paid-up capital as prescribed.

2. The company can only accept deposit from its members, directors or their relatives.

3. Joint shareholders are counted as one member.

4. It must add the words ‘Private Limited’ at the end of its name.

5. They are granted certain privilege and exemptions under Companies Act, 2013 because not much public interests is involved in private companies.

6. Company is required to file it’s financial statement and annual returns to ROC (Registrar of Company) which can be accessed by any person by paying fees.

Note:
According to Companies (Amendment Act, 2015):
Provides that in Clause (68), the words “of one lakh rupees or higher paid up capital” shall be omitted.

Certain privileges granted to private company:

  • Only 2 members are required for its incorporation. (One in case of OPC)
  • Minimum 2 directors are required to be appointed.
  • Does not requires commencement of business certificate.
  • Provisions of managerial remuneration does not apply.
  • No limit on borrowings, etc.

Public Company [Section 2(71)]:
1. Public Company means a company which:

  • is not a private company
  • has a minimum paid-up share capital of five lakh rupees or such higher paid-up capital as may be prescribed.
  • is a subsidiary of a company, not being a private company, shall be deemed to be public company for the purpose of this act. Subsidiary of public co. is also treated to be public company.
  • should have minimum seven members and have no limit for maximum members.

2. It requires minimum 7 members for its formation.

3. Any member of public can acquire its shares/debentures.

4. Its shares are capable of being dealt in stock exchange.

5. According to Companies (Amendment) Act, 2015:
Provides that in Clause (71), the words “of ₹ 5 lakhs or higher paid up share capital” shall be omitted.

Differences Between Public and Private Company:

Basis of Differentiation Private Company Public Company
Minimum number of member Two (one incase of OPC) Seven
Maximum number of member 200 Unlimited
Transferability of shares Restricted Freely transferable
Raising Capital from public Not allowed Allowed
Number of Directors Minimum-two maximum -15 Minimum – 3 Maximum -15
Name of company Name must end with the words ‘Private Ltd.’ Name must end with the word ‘limited’
Exemption from several legal restriction Not required to observe several legal restrictions Too many legal formalities and restriction to be adhered to
Minimum paid-up capital One lakh as per the Amendment made by Companies (Amendment Act, 2015), provides that in clause (68) the words of one lakh rupees or higher paid up capital shall be omitted. Five lakh.
as per the Amendment made by Companies (Amendment Act, 2015), provides that in clause (71) the words of ₹ Five lakh or higher paid up capital shall be omitted.

Company limited by Shares:

  • It is a registered company whether public or private company.
  • Liability of members is limited to the unpaid amount on the shares held by them.
  • This should be stated in the MOA of such company.
  • It arises when a valid call is made by the company.

Company limited by Guarantee:

  • It is a registered company whether public or private company.
  • Liability of members is limited to the amount that he has guaranteed to pay to the company.
  • Liability arises only in the event of winding up of company.
  • Its MOA should state the amount of guarantee given by members.
  • Example – clubs, trade associations etc.

Unlimited Company:

  • Its memorandum does not in any way limits the liability of its members.
  • Every member is liable to contribute to’the company’s assets until all its debts are paid in full.
  • Not common in India
  • Members are not however, liable directly to the company’s creditors.
  • Liquidator asks the members to contribute in the event of company’s winding up.
  • It may be subsequently converted into a limited company, subject to certain conditions.
  • The liability is extended to the personal property of the members.

Company with Charitable Objects Non-Profit Companies / Licenced Companies [Section 8]:

  • Licence may be granted by CG if the following conditions are satisfied:
  • Company’s object is to promote art, commerce, science, religion, charity or any other useful object.
  • Company applies its income in promoting its object.
  • Company prohibits payment of any dividend to its members.
  • It is not required to use the words ‘Limited’ or ‘Private Limited’ at the end of its name even though it is a Limited Company.
  • It shall enjoy all privileges and be subject to all the obligations of limited company.
  • A firm may become its member.
  • Company can alter its object clause in MOA or AOA only by obtaining previous approval of CG in writing.
  • It can convert itself into company of any kind only after complying with the prescribed conditions.

Conditions for revoking licence by CG:

  • Company contravenes any of the requirements or any of the conditions subject to which a licence was issued,
  • Its affairs are conducted fraudulently
  • Its affairs are conducted in manner violative of company’s objects, or
  • Prejudicial to public interest.

On revocation CG may also direct the company:

  • to wound up, or
  • amalgamate with another company registered under section 8, if it is in public interest.

On revocation of licence by CG:

  • ‘Words limited’ or ‘Private limited’ shall be inserted at the end of company’s name.
  • Company shall cease to enjoy exemptions granted by CG Under Section 8

Before revocation, CG shall give an opportunity of being heard to the company.

Government Company [Section 2(45)]:
1. It is a company –
(i) In which not less than 51% of the paid up share capital is held by:

  • CG (Central Government)
  • SG (State Government)
  • Partially by CG and partially by SG

(ii) Which is a subsidiary of a Government Company.

2. Its auditor is appointed by the Comptroller and Auditor General of India (C & AG).

3. C & AG:

  • Directs the manner in which the accounts are to be audited.
  • Gives instructions to auditor regarding the performance of his functions.
  • Conducts supplementary test audit by persons authorised by him.
  • Comments upon or supplements the audit report submitted to him by the auditor.

4. If CG holds shares in the company, it is required to place before both houses of Parliament an annual report of its working within 3 months of its AGM along with a copy of audit report and any comments or supplements to it by Comptroller and Auditor General of India.

5. If SG holds shares in the company, its annual report is to be placed in the same manner before the house or both the houses State Legislature.

6. If CG does not holds shares in the company, every SG who holds shares in the Co. or where only one SG holds shares in the co. shall cause its annual report to be placed in the same manner before the house or both the houses of state legislature.

7. CG by notification in the Official Gazette can grant them certain exemptions from some provisions of Companies Act.

Foreign Company [Section 2(42)]:
Foreign Company means any company or body corporate incorporated outside India which:

  • has a place of business in India, whether by itself or through agent, physically or through electronic mode
  • conducts any business activity in India in any other manner. Thus, the companies doing business through electronic mode are also termed as foreign company and need to comply with the specified provisions.

Under foreign company:
If not less than 50% of the paid-up capital is held by:

  • one or more citizens of India, or
  • one or more companies or body corporate incorporated in India, or
  • partly by above two,

Whether singly or in aggregate, it has comply with:

  • provisions of chapter XXIII dealing with company incorporated outside India, and
  • other prescribed provisions of Companies Act, 2013 as if it were a company incorporated in India.

The following documents are required to be submitted by a foreign company with the Roc of New Delhi and with ROC of the State in which such place of business is situated within 30 days of the establishment.

  • Certified copy of the Constitution of the company
  • Full address of the principle or registered office
  • Particulars of the directors and secretary of the company
  • Name and address of the authorised person in India
  • Full address of the principle place of business in India.

Holding and Subsidiary Company [Section 2(46) and 2(87)]:
1. When a company:
(a) controls the composition of board of directors, or

(b) exercises or controls more than one half of the total share capita! either at its own or together with one or more of its subsidiary companies then, it is known as the holding company and the other company is the subsidiary company.

Total share capital for this purpose means the aggregate of:

  • Paid-up equity shares capital and
  • Convertible preference share capital.

2. Holding Company shall not have layers of subsidiaries beyond prescribed limit.
The expression “Company” includes any body corporate.

3. The word control includes;

  • The right to appoint majority of the directors or
  • to control the management or
  • the policy decisions exercisable by a person or persons acting individually or in concert, directly or indirectly including by virtue of their share holding or
  • management rights or shareholders agreements or voting agreements or in any other manner.
  • As per the Amendment made by Companies (Amendment) Act, 2017 For the purposes of this clause, the expression “company” includes anybody corporate;

Holding Company:
Elements of Company Law – I – CS Foundation Business Law Notes IMG 2

One Person Company (OPC) [Section 2(62)]:
1. It means a company which has only one person as a member.

2. The MOA of such a company is required to indicate, the name of the other person, with his prior consent in the prescribed form, who shall, in the event of the subscriber’s death’ or his incapacity to contract become the member of the company and the written consent of such person shall be filed with ROC at the time of its incorporation along with MOA and AO A.

3. Only a natural person who is an Indian citizen and resident in India is eligible to incorporate OPC and be its nominee.

4. “Resident in India” means a person who has stayed in India for a period of not less than 182 days during immediately preceding one calender year.

5. It is considered as a private company.

6. It has been granted many relaxations in compliance and procedural aspects.

7. No person shall be eligible to incorporate more than one OPC or become nominee in more than one OPC.

8. No minor shall become member or nominee of OPC or hold share with beneficial interest.

9. It cannot be incorporated or converted into Section 8 company.

10. It cannot carry out Non-Banking Financial Investment Activities including investment in securities of any Body corporates.

11. It cannot convert voluntarily into private company unless two years have expired from date of its incorporation, except if its paid-up capital is increased beyond 50 lakh rupees or its average annual turnover exceeds two crore rupees.

Small Company [Section 2(85)] – Such classification is based on size i.e. paid up capital & turnover:
1. It means a company other than a public company whose:

  • paid-up capital does not exceeds ₹ 50 lakh or such higher amount as may be prescribed which shall not be more than ₹ 5 crore.
  • turnover as per last profit and loss account does not exceeds ₹ 2 crore or such higher amount as may be prescribed, which shall not be more than ₹ 20 crore.

2. These are small sized private companies

3. However, nothing applies to:

  • holding company or subsidiary company,
  • company registered under Section 8
  • company or body corporate governed by any Special Act.

As per the Amendment made by Companies (Amendment) Act, 2017 – “Small Company means a company, other than a public company:
(i) paid-up share capital of which does not exceed fifty lakh rupees or such higher amount as may be prescribed which shall not be more than ten crore rupees; and

(ii) turnover of which as per profit and loss account for the immediately preceding financial year does not exceed two crore – rupees or such higher amount as may be
prescribed which shall not be more than one hundred crore rupees.”

Producer Company:

  • A company registered under part chapter IX A.
  • If the company is engaged in activities which is not described under Section 581 B, ROC can cancel the registration exclusively engaged in the activities specified by Section 581 B.
  • The membership of producer companies is to open such people who themselves are primary producers, which is an activity by some agricultural products is produced by such primary producer.
  • Any existed company can not convert itself in to producer and
  • Producer can not convert itself in to any other company.

Promotion and Incorporation of a Company:
1. Company should be formed for lawful purpose i.e. it, should not be in contravention of general law of the country.

2. Registrar of Companies (ROC) is a body which –

  • registers the company.
  • receives documents and forms from the company and registers them.
  • maintains company’s record.
  • makes these records available for public inspection.
  • ensures that company comply with provisions of Companies Act, 2013.

Company formation involves 3 steps:

  • Promotion
  • Incorporation by Registration, and.
  • Commencement of Business.

Promotion:

  • Is the process of conceiving an idea and developing it into a concrete proposition or project to be accomplished by the incorporation and floatation of a company.
  • The person who takes necessary steps to accomplish these objectives is known as promoter.

Promoter [Section 2(69)] means a person:

  • who has been named as such in a prospectus or is identified by the company in the annual return referred to in Section 92; or
  • who has control over the affairs of the company, directly or indirectly whether as a shareholder, director or otherwise; or
  • in accordance with whose advice, directions or instructions the Board of Directors of the company is accustomed to act.

Provided that sub-clause (c) shall not apply to a person who is acting merely in a professional capacity.
1. A director/officer/employee who has control over the affairs of the company, directly or indirectly whether as a share holder, director or otherwise is considered as a promoter.

2. However, a director/officer/employee of the issuer or a person, if acting as such merely in his professional capacity, shall not be treated as a promoter.

Functions of promoters include:

  • Decides the company’s name and ensures its acceptance by ROC.
  • Decides the company’s detail about MOA, AOA, director’s nomination, solicitors, bankers, auditors, secretary etc.
  • Identifies the registered office of the company.
  • Arranges for printing of MOA, AOA, registration, issue of prospectus etc.

3. He is responsible for bringing the co. in the existence for the object which he has in mind.

4. Company cannot ratify the contract made by promoter before its incorporation.
Relevant case law:
1. Kelner V. Baxter

5. A promoter is neither an agent nor a trustee of the company, as the company has not come into existence.

6. A promoter stands in a fiduciary capacity towards the company.
Duties of promoter includes:

  • Not to make any secret profit.
  • Full and fair disclosure of interests.

Relevant case law:
1. Gliuckstein V. Barnes.

Remedies available to company are:

  • Recession of contract
  • Recovery of secret profit made by the promoter
  • Company may sue the promoter for breach of trust

Procedure for Incorporation or Registration – Certain legal requirements to be fulfilled:

  • There must be an association of persons.
  • Minimum 2 persons are required in case of private company (One in case of OPC) and 7 persons in case of pubic company.
  • Company must have a common object.
  • Company must be a formed for lawful object.
  • MOA and AOA must be subscribed.
  • Formalities of incorporation must be complied with.

Availability of Name:
1. Company must have a name of its own to establish its separate identity.

2. Name is a symbol of its independent corporate existence.

3. Company may adopt any suitable name provided it is not undesirable.

4. As per Section 4(2), name shall not be.

  • identical with or resemble too nearly to name of an existing company registered under this Act
  • such that its use by company: will constitute an offence under any law for the time being in force, or is undesirable in opinion of CG.

5. Section 4(3) states that company, shall not be registered with a name which contains any word or expression:

  • giving an expression that it is in any way connected or having a patronage of CG, any SG, local authority, or corporation etc., or
  • prescribed, unless approved by CG.

6. As per Section 4(4) person has to make an application in e-form no. INC1 alongwith fee to ROC for reservation of

  • proposed name, or
  • name to which it proposes to change.

7. ROC with reserve the name for 60 days from date of application.

8. The main object is to prevent the use of name likely to mislead the public.
Vetting of MOA and AOA, Printing, Stamping and Signing : Promoters have to approach ROC for the required help. ROC do not charges any fees. A written request is to be made by the promoters. ROC helps and assists them and after vetting of MOA and AOA, he gets them printed. They have to be stamped as per the Stamp Act of the state in which the registered office is situated. They are to be signed by the subscribers or an agent on their behalf.

9. MOA and AOA shall be signed in following manner as per Rule 13 of Companies Rules, 2014:

  • They shall be signed by each subscriber to MOA in presence of atleast one witness who shall attest the signature.
  • Both the subscriber and witness shall add his name, address, description and occupation.
  • If subscriber is illiterate, he shall affix his thumb impression or mark.
  • Person writing on his behalf shall describe the mark, place name of subscriber against it and authenticate it by his own signature, and write no. of shares taken by him.
  • Such person shall read and explain contents of MOA and AOA to subscriber.
  • If subscriber is a body corporate, then it shall be signed by director, officer, or employee of body corporate authorized by resolution passed by BOD.
  • If such person is a LLP, then it shall be signed by a partner of LLP, duly authorized by resolution passed by all the partners.
  • Provided that in either case, the person so authorized shall not, at the same time, be a subscriber to MOA & AOA.

Where the subscriber to the memorandum is a foreign national residing outside India.

(a)
Country in any part of common wealth

(b)
Country which is party to the Hague Apostille Convention 1961

(c)
Country outside the common wealth and not party to the Hague Apostille Convention 1961

Signatures and address on MOA and AOA and proof of identity Notarized by a Notary (Public) in that part of the common wealth Notarized by a Notary (Public) of the country of his origin and duly certified by Hague convention. Notarized by a Notary (Public) of such country and certified by a diplomatic or consular officer empowered in this behalf.

(d) Visited in India and he is not a person of Indian origin or overseas citizen of India and intended to incorporate a company, in such a case the incorporation shall be allowed if he/she is having a valid business visa.

Power of Attorney:
Promoters may appoint an attorney for carrying out instructions and requirements by registrar. Power of attorney is to be executed on a non judicial stamp paper for this purpose.

Documents required to be filed with ROC Compulsory:

S. No. Form No. Title Particulars
1. f. INC. 33 under SPICE Form No. Memorandum of Association Constitution of company
2. f. INC. 34 under SPICE Articles of Association Regulations relating to internal management of company.
3. INC.8 Declaration from Professional Section 7(1)(b) requires filing of a declaration in the prescribed form by an advocate, a Chartered Accountant, Cost Accountant or Company Secretary in practice, who is engaged in the formation of the company and by person name in AOA as Director, manager or secretary of the company.
4. INC.9 Declaration from subscribers to MOA. Section 7(1)(c) requires filing of Self declaration from subscribers of MOA and from persons named as first directors.

1. These are to be filed within 30/180 days of incorporation respectively, but before the commencement of business.

S. No. Form No. Title Particulars
1. INC.22 Notice of registered address Location of the company’s registered office
2. DIR.12 Particulars of directors/ Consent to act as a director As per Section 7(1) (f) & (g) if company appoints any person as its director, manager or secretary by virtue of its AOA, its particulars must be filed and also the particulars of their interests in other firms or body corporate along with their consent, to act as directors.
3. _ Particulars of subscribers Section 7(1 )(e) requires filing of particulars of name, residential address, nationality and other particulars of every subscriber to MOA along with the proof of identity.

2. The prescribed fees for the registration of the company depending upon the company’s nominal capital is required to be paid to the ROC.

3. ROC will register all the documents filed with him and there after register the company by issuing a certificate of incorporation, if he is satisfied that:

  • All requirements aforesaid have been complied with.
  • Company is authorised to be registered under the Act.

4. Incorporation has the following effects [Section 9]:

  • Company becomes a body corporate
  • It acquires a legal recognition
  • It gets a name in which it will carry on business.
  • Its object are laid down.
  • Subscribers become the members of the company.

Incorporation certificate issued by ROC shall be a conclusive evidence that [Section 7]:

  • all requirements of Companies Act have been complied with in respect of registration and matters precedent and incidental thereto,
  • association is a company authorised to be registered,
  • association has been duly registered under the Companies Act.

A significant step is taken by MCA by introducing e-forms INC – 32 under SPICE scheme vide MCA’s notification dated 01/10/2016 notifying companies (Incorporation) fourth Amendment Rules, 2016. SPICE means simplified performa for Incorporating Companies Electronically.

The SPICE form is also introduced with a function to prepare e-MOA & e- AOA (electronic MOA/AOA) via this attribute there is no opportunity to prepare the manual MOA/AOA & no option to physically sign the MOA/AOA by subscribers and witness. Form INC. 32 under SPICE scheme is a single window form which can be used for the following purposes:

  • Application of DIN
  • Application for availability of name
  • No need to file separate form for first director (DIR. 12)
  • Address of Regd. Office (INC. 22) j
  • No need to file separate form for PAN/TAN. Form INC. 33 is meant for e-MOA (electronic MOA) & form
  • INC. 34 is meant for e-AOA (electronic AOA).

Relevant Case Law:
(i) Jubilee Cotton Mills Ltd. v. Lewis

(ii) Moosa v. Ebrahim:
Even if MOA was signed by 2 adults and 5 others, who were minors, due to which certificate issued was void, however certificate is conclusive for all purpose and it prevents anyone from alleging that the company does not exist.

(iii) Performing Right Society Ltd. v. London Theatre of varieties. Where the object of a company is unlawful, it has been held that the certificate of registration is not conclusive for this purpose.

Allotment of Corporate Identity Number (CIN):

  1. As per Section 7(3), ROC shall allot CIN to the company from the date mentioned in the incorporation certificate.
  2. This shall be a distinct identity for the company.

Memorandum of Association (MOA):

  1. It contains the constitution of the company
  2. It is the first step in company’s formation
  3. As per Section 2(56), “memorandum” means the memorandum of association of a company as originally framed and altered from time to time in pursuance of any previous company law or this Act.
  4. It not only shows the objects of formation but also determines the scope of its operations beyond which its actions cannot go.
  5. According to Palmer, “MOA is a document of great importance in relation to the proposed company.”
  6. It is the charter of a company
  7. It is the premise on which the whole foundation of the company stands
  8. It contains 6 clauses which are known as the ‘conditions of memorandum’.

Name Clause:

  1. Contains the name of the proposed company
  2. Name should not be undesirable
  3. It should not be identical with the name of another company
  4. It should not be prohibited one
  5. It should end with Words Limited or Private Limited.
  6. It must be approved by ROC

Situation Clause / Registered Office Clause:

  1. It contain only the name of the state in which the registered office is situated
  2. It does not contains the complete address of the registered office.

Object Clause:

  1. It contains the objects to be pursued by the proposed company.
  2. It is sub divided into:
    (a) Main objects, and other incidental and ancillary objects.
    (b) Other objects.

Liability Clause:

  1. It is required by the limited company only
  2. It contains whether the liability of members is limited by shares, guarantee or both.

Capital Clause:
(i) It is mandatory for every company

(ii) It states:

  • The number of shares
  • The nominal value of each share, and
  • The total capital with which the company is to be registered.

Subscription Clause:

  • MOA must be subscribed by atleast 7 persons in case of public company and atleast 2 persons in case of private company. (1 in case of OPC)
  • Every subscriber shall take atleast one share in case of company limited by shares. The MOA should be signed by each subscriber also stating his address description and occupation.
  • Particulars of every subscriber shall be witnessed.

In case of OPC, name of person who is in the event of death of subscriber, shall become the member of company.

Articles of Association:

  • As per section 2(5) “AOA” means the articles of association of company as originally framed or as altered from time to time or applied in pursuance of any previous Company Law or Act.
  • It contains the regulations relating to the internal management of the company.
  • These rules and regulations are framed by the company for its own governance.
  • It is also called as regulations or bye laws of the company.
  • It is subordinate to and is controlled by the memorandum of association
  • In case of contradiction with AOA, MOA prevails.
  • Public company limited by shares need not have its own articles. It can adopt Table F of Schedule I.
  • Private company must register its own articles.
  • Some of the important clauses of articles are as follows:
  • Share capital and variation of rights, lien on shares, forfeiture of shares, directors, their appointment, accounts and audit, GM, share certificates, etc.
  • The Articles plays a part that is subsidiary to the memorandum of association.
  • The Articles govern the ways in which the object of the company are to be carried out and can be framed and altered by the members.
  • It must be within the limits marked out by the memorandum and the ‘ Companies Act.
  • It must be printed, divided into paragraphs, numbered consecutively, stamped adequately, signed by each subscriber to the memorandum and duly witnessed and filed along with the memorandum.

Forms of Articles include:

  • Table F – Articles of company limited by shares.
  • Table H – Articles of company limited by guarantee not having share capital.
  • Table G – Articles of company limited by guarantee having share capital.
  • Table I – Articles of an unlimited company having share capital.
  • Table J – Articles of an unlimited company not having share capital.

Content of Articles:
The articles should contain generally the following matters:

  1. Exclusion wholly or in part of Table F
  2. Adoption of preliminary contracts
  3. Number and value of shares
  4. Issue of preference shares
  5. Allotment of shares
  6. Calls on share
  7. Lien on shares
  8. Transfer and transmission of shares.
  9. Nomination
  10. Forfeiture of shares
  11. Alteration of capital
  12. Buy Back
  13. Share certificates
  14. Dematerialisation
  15. Conversion of shares into stock
  16. Voting rights and proxies
  17. Meetings and rules regarding committees
  18. Directors, their appointment and delegation of powers
  19. Nominee directors
  20. Issue of Debentures and stocks
  21. Audit committee
  22. Managing Director, whole time Director, Manager, Secretary
  23. Additional Director
  24. Seal
  25. Remuneration of Directors
  26. General meetings
  27. Directors meetings
  28. Borrowing powers
  29. Dividends and Reserves
  30. Accounts and Audit
  31. Winding up
  32. Indemnity
  33. Capitalisation of Reserves

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Which of the following statements is not true?
(a) A company is an artificial person created by law.
(b) A company can do every act like a natural person except the acts which are pureiy of personal nature.
(c) A company can be held liable for violation of the statutory provisions of the Companies Act.
(d) A company can be imprisoned for violation of such provision which attract penalty by way of imprisonment only.
Answer:
(d) A company can be imprisoned for violation of such provision which attract penalty by way of imprisonment only.

Question 2.
Which of the following is not the characteristic of a public company?
(a) It has a separate legal entity.
(b) It has a perpetual succession.
(c) It has a common seal and separate property
(d) Its shares are non-transferable.
Answer:
(d) Its shares are non-transferable.

Question 3.
A and B were the only members of a company who died in a road accent. In this case, the company comes to end on the death of A and B.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(b) False

Question 4.
A company being a legal person is also a citizen under the Constitution of India ________.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(b) False

Question 5.
A statutory company or corporation is one which is incorporated ________.
(a) By an Act of Parliament
(b) By an Act of State Legislature
(c) Under the Companies Act, 2013
(d) By either (a) or (b)
Answer:
(d) By either (a) or (b)

Question 6.
In case of a company limited by guarantee, the liability of the members can be enforced ________.
(a) At any time when the company so decides
(b) Only at the time of winding up of the company
(c) Only by an order of court
(d) Only by an order of Registrar of Companies
Answer:
(b) Only at the time of winding up of the company

Question 7.
A Government Company is one in which 51% or more of the paid up share capital is held by ________.
(a) Central Government alone
(b) State Government alone
(c) Central and State Government jointly
(d) Any of the above
Answer:
(d) Any of the above

Question 8.
At the time of registration the filing of Articles of Association with the Registrar of Companies is compulsory for ________.
(a) Private companies, unlimited companies and companies limited by guarantee
(b) Unlimited companies only
(c) Companies limited by shares only
(d) All types of companies
Answer:
(a) Private companies, unlimited companies and companies limited by guarantee

Question 9.
If at the time of registration, a company limited by shares does not file Articles of Association with the Registrar, then ________.
(a) The company cannot be registered without this document
(b) The company is deemed to be adopted “Table F”
(c) The company is deemed to have become a company with unlimited liability
(d) The directors become liable to be punished with fine at the rale of ₹ 50 for each day during which the default continues
Answer:
(b) The company is deemed to be adopted “Table F”

Question 10.
On 14th July, the Registrar of Companies issued a Certificate of Incorporation, but it was dated 10th July instead of 14th July. From which date the company will legally come into existence?
(a) 10th July
(b) 14th July
(c) 31st July
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) 10th July

Question 11.
A company comes into existence when ________.
(a) the ‘memorandum of association’ is signed by the required number of members.
(b) the ‘memorandum of association’ is submitted for registration to the Registrar of Companies.
(c) It is registered under the Companies Act, 2013.
(d) It establishes its registered office and starts functioning there form.
Answer:
(c) It is registered under the Companies Act, 2013.

Question 12.
A company formed for the promotion of commerce, art, science, religion, charity etc. may not use the word limited’ at the end of its name, even if it is a limited company.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(a) True

Question 13.
The Registered office clause of Memorandum of Association contains ________.
(a) The name of the state in which the registered office of the company is to be situated.
(b) The name of the city/town only and not that of the state.
(c) The name of Registrar of companies.
(d) The complete postal address.
Answer:
(a) The name of the state in which the registered office of the company is to be situated.

Question 14.
The Object clause of Memorandum of Association must be divided into two Sub- Clauses, namely (i) main objects clause, and (ii) object in furtherance of main object clause.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(a) True

Question 15.
Which of the following statements is correct?
(a) In limited companies, the liability of members holding fully paid-up shares is Nil.
(b) In companies limited by guarantee, the liability of members is limited to the amount which they have agreed to pay.
(c) Both (a) and (b) are correct.
(d) None of these is correct.
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b) are correct.

Question 16.
For which of the following companies it is not obligatory to have Articles of Association?
(a) Public Companies Limited by Shares
(b) Public Companies Limited by Guarantee
(c) Private Limited Companies
(d) Unlimited Companies
Answer:
(a) Public Companies Limited by Shares

Question 17.
Which of the following statements is correct?
(a) The ‘memorandum’ and ‘articles’ are binding on the members in their relation to the company.
(b) The ‘memorandum’ and ‘articles’ are binding on the company in their relation to the members.
(c) None of these is true
(d) Both of these are true
Answer:
(d) Both of these are true

Question 18.
Company’s ‘memorandum’ and ‘articles’ are public documents.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(a) True

Question 19.
In case ‘memorandum’ and ‘articles’ are inconsistent, then which shall * prevail over the others?
(a) Memorandum of Association
(b) Articles of Association
(c) The one approved by Registrar
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Memorandum of Association

Question 20.
A public company having a share capital can start its business on obtaining ________.
(a) Certificate of incorporation and approval of Company Law Board.
(b) ‘Certificate to commence business’ and approval of Company Law Board.
(c) ‘Certificate of Incorporation’
(d) Approval of High Court.
Answer:
(c) ‘Certificate of Incorporation’

Question 21.
Company has succession.
(a) Longer
(b) Continued
(c) Perpetual
(d) Limited
Answer:
(c) Perpetual

Question 22.
If company do not follow the principle of separate legal entity can be done.
(a) Lifting of corporate veil
(b) Principle of equity
(c) Principle of natural justice
(d) All of above
Answer:
(a) Lifting of corporate veil

Question 23.
Total managerial remuneration in a public company cannot be of net profit.
(a) 10%
(b) 11%
(c) 18%
(d) 11.5%
Answer:
(b) 11%

Question 24.
Audit of Government Company is done by C & AG. This statement is ________.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(a) True

Question 25.
Any Corporate Body/Association of Firm can be appointed as director of the company. This statement is:
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(b) False

Question 26.
How many members should sign the MOA in case of public company?
(a) 1
(b) 5
(c) 3
(d) 7
Answer:
(d) 7

Question 27.
conceives the idea of the business.
(a) Promoters
(b) Auditors
(c) Directors
(d) Shareholders
Answer:
(a) Promoters

Question 28.
Shares of company are freely transferable.
(a) Private company
(b) Public company
(c) Both (a) & (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Public company

Question 29.
Life Insurance Corporation Ltd. is formed under:
(a) Companies Act, 2013
(b) Special Act of Parliament
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Special Act of Parliament

Question 30.
Company’s corporate personality was brought forward in the case of:
(a) Macaura V. Northern Assurance Co. Ltd.
(b) Jons V. Lipman.
(c) CIT V. Meenakshi Mills Ltd.
(d) Salomon V Salomon and Co. Ltd.
Answer:
(d) Salomon V Salomon and Co. Ltd.

Question 31.
Which of the following is a non-trading association?
(a) Company
(b) Partnership firm
(c) Club
(d) HUF
Answer:
(c) Club

Question 32.
Promoter is both an agent and trustee of the proposed company.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(b) False

Question 33.
Liability clause in MOA is required by:
(a) Company limited by shares
(b) Company limited by guarantee
(c) Company limited by both shares and guarantee
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 34.
Articles of unlimited company having share capital is included in:
(a) Table I
(b) Table G
(c) Table H
(d) Table F
Answer:
(a) Table I

Question 35.
Which one of the following is not a main clause of memorandum of association?
(a) Name clause
(b) Capital clause
(c) Object clause
(d) Profit clause
Answer:
(d) Profit clause

Question 36.
________ is to be executed on a non judicial stamp paper.
(a) Share warrant
(b) Power of attorney
(c) Incorporation certificate
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Power of attorney

Question 37.
The word company is derived from word “Com Panis”.
(a) French
(b) Latin
(c) German
(d) Indian
Answer:
(b) Latin

Question 38.
Which of the following are the characteristics of a company?
(a) Corporate Personality
(b) Limited Liability
(c) Perpetual Succession
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 39.
The company has a capacity to sue and be ________.
(a) Incorporated
(b) Sued
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Sued

Question 40.
A company may be an ________.
(a) Incorporated company
(b) Unincorporated company
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Incorporated company

Question 41.
A word corporation is derived from latin term “corpus” which means ________.
(a) Body
(b) Legal Person
(c) Artificial Person
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Body

Question 42.
The liability of the member of the company is limited to the extent of the of the shares held by them.
(a) Unpaid value
(b) Paid value
(c) Nominal value
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(c) Nominal value

Question 43.
Which of the following statement is correct?
(a) Partners are the agents of the firm but member of company are not its agents
(b) Partner cannot contract with his firm but a member of a company can
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of these is correct
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 44.
In public company, the members of the company is not less than ________.
(a) Two
(b) Seven
(c) Ten
(d) Twenty
Answer:
(b) Seven

Question 45.
In Private Company, member of the company is not less than ________.
(a) Seven
(b) Ten
(c) Two
(d) Eight
Answer:
(c) Two

Question 46.
A company is a on the other hand a club is a ________.
(a) Trading association, non trading association.
(b) Mon trading association, trading association.
(c) Trading association, trading association.
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(a) Trading association, non trading association.

Question 47.
Which of the following are not the advantages of incorporation?
(a) Separate property
(b) Unlimited liability
(c) Capacity to sue
(d) Flexibility & autonomy
Answer:
(b) Unlimited liability

Question 48.
Which of the following are not the disadvantage of incorporation?
(a) Formalities and expenses
(b) Corporate disclosure
(c) Limited liability
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(c) Limited liability

Question 49.
Which of the following are kinds of companies?
(a) Private companies
(b) Producer companies
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 50.
Provisions related to accounts, winding up, calls on shares, forfeiture, etc. are contained in ________.
(a) Articles of Association
(b) Memorandum of Association
(c) Prospectus
(d) Statement in.lieu of prospectus
Answer:
(a) Articles of Association

Question 51.
What are the limits of number of members in a Private Company?
(a) Fifty
(b) Seven
(c) Twenty
(d) Two hundred
Answer:
(d) Two hundred

Question 52.
If XYZ is the holding company of P&R Ltd. then, which of the following statement is not true in this regard.
(a) XYZ Ltd. controls the composition of Board of P&R
(b) XYZ Ltd. holds more than 50% of the nominal value of the equity shares
(c) Both (a) & (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(d) None of the above

Question 53.
Which of the following is not a stage of the development of company?
(a) Promotion
(b) Production
(c) Incorporation
(d) Commencement of Business
Answer:
(b) Production

Question 54.
Which of the following company/companies are registered by the Companies Act, 2013?
(a) Government Company
(b) Private Company
(c) Public Company
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 55.
A public company must have atleast directors whereas a private company must have atleast directors.
(a) 3 ; 2
(b) 2 ; 3
(c) 2 ; 5
(d) 8; 10
Answer:
(a) 3 ; 2

Question 56.
A subsidiary of a government company is also treated as a ________.
(a) Government Company
(b) Public Company
(c) Private Company
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(a) Government Company

Question 57.
The ________ of a government company is appointed or reappointed by the Comptroller and Auditor General of India.
(a) Auditor
(b) Company Secretary
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Auditor

Question 58.
Which of the following company is incorporated in a country outside India?
(a) Private Company
(b) Foreign Companies
(c) Government Company
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Foreign Companies

Question 59.
Wnich of the following statement is false?
(a) No legal formality is required to form a company.
(b) The shareholders of a company have limited liability.
(c) A company can own property in its own name.
(d) A company is managed by the elected representatives of shareholders.
Answer:
(a) No legal formality is required to form a company.

Question 60.
A ________ is one who performs the preliminary duties necessary to bring a company into being and float it.
(a) Auditor
(b) Promoter
(c) Director
(d) Financer
Answer:
(b) Promoter

Question 61.
The registered office clause of memorandum of association contains ________.
(a) The name of the state in which the registered office of the company is to be situated.
(b) The name of the city/town only and not that of the state.
(c) The name of registrar of companies
(d) The complete postal address.
Answer:
(a) The name of the state in which the registered office of the company is to be situated.

Question 62.
“One who undertakes to form a company with reference to a given object and set it going and who takes the necessary steps to accomplish that purpose”
(a) Promoter
(b) Directors
(c) C.E.O.
(d) Board of Directors
Answer:
(a) Promoter

Question 63.
Which of the following are the functions of a promoter?
(a) Decides name of a company
(b) Nomination of directors
(c) Settles the details of memorandum and articles
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 64.
A ________ is neither an agent, nor a trustee of a company.
(a) Directors
(b) Company Secretary
(c) Employees
(d) Promoters
Answer:
(d) Promoters

Question 65.
Which documents contains the constitution of a company?
(a) Memorandum of Association
(b) Articles of Association
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Memorandum of Association

Question 66.
Which documents contains the regulations relating to the internal management of a company?
(a) Memorandum of Association
(b) Articles of Association
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None
Answer:
(b) Articles of Association

Question 67.
For vetting the MOA and AOA, as per SPiCE eMOA and eAOA is required.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) True

Question 68.
The companies are regulated-under ________.
(a) Companies Act, 1596
(b) Companies Act, 1957
(c) Indian Partnership Act,1932
(d) Companies Act, 2013
Answer:
(d) Companies Act, 2013

Question 69.
The certificate of incorporation is that the company is entitled to commence business.
(a) Exclusive
(b) Conclusive
(c) Supportive
(d) Either (a) or (b)
Answer:
(d) Either (a) or (b)

Question 70.
The whole process of the company formation may be divided into three direct stages, the sequence is ________.
(a) Promotion, incorporation by registration, commencement of business.
(b) Incorporation by registration, commencement of business, promotion.
(c) Commencement of business, promotion, incorporation by registration.
(d) Commencement of business, incorporation by registration, promotion.
Answer:
(a) Promotion, incorporation by registration, commencement of business.

Question 71.
Company is managed by ________.
(a) Shareholders
(b) Board of Directors
(c) Karta
(d) Both (a) & (b)
Answer:
(b) Board of Directors

Question 72.
H.U.F. consists of which type of members ________.
(a) Both (b) & (c)
(b) Heterogeneous
(c) Homogeneous
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Homogeneous

Question 73.
Partnership is governed by Partnership Act ‘
(a) 1956
(b) 1948
(c) 1932
(d) 1982
Answer:
(c) 1932

Question 74.
Which is not a case of lifting of corporate veil ________.
(a) Connors Bros. v. Connors
(b) Jones v. Lipren
(c) Pearce v. Brookes
(d) CIT v. Meenakshi Mills Ltd.
Answer:
(c) Pearce v. Brookes

Question 75.
Word ‘Corporation’ is ________ than company
(a) Narrow
(b) Wider
(c) (a) or (b)
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(b) Wider

Question 76.
Advantage of incorporated company is ________.
(a) Corporate disclosures
(b) Common seal
(c) Capacity to sue
(d) Winding up procedure
Answer:
(c) Capacity to sue

Question 77.
Find the odd one out:
(a) Private Company
(b) Public Company
(c) Consumer Company
(d) Producer Company
Answer:
(c) Consumer Company

Question 78.
Joint shareholders are counted as ________.
(a) Two
(b) No limit
(c) 50
(d) One
Answer:
(d) One

Question 79.
Example of company limited by guarantee ________.
(a) Clubs
(b) Both (a) & (c)
(c) Societies
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Both (a) & (c)

Question 80.
Which is not a registered company ________.
(a) Company limited by share
(b) Company limited by guarantee
(c) Both (a) & (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(d) None of the above

Question 81.
Public company shares are dealt in ________.
(a) Stock exchange
(b) Public
(c) Market
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(a) Stock exchange

Question 82.
Is there any limit on borrowings to a Private Company ________.
(a) Limit up to ₹ 50,000
(b) Limit up to 1 lakh
(c) No limit
(d) None
Answer:
(c) No limit

Question 83.
Unlimited company may be subsequently converted into limited company ________.
(a) True
(b) Partly true
(c) False
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) True

Question 84.
Non-Profit companies are also called ________.
(a) Holding companies
(b) Licensed companies
(c) Subsidiary companies
(d) Government companies
Answer:
(b) Licensed companies

Question 85.
Government company comes under section ________.
(a) 2(46)
(b) 2(44)
(c) 2(43)
(d) 2(45)
Answer:
(d) 2(45)

Question 86.
Foreign company must issue prospectus ________.
(a) True
(b) Partly true
(c) False
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) True

Question 87.
Company’s memorandum & articles are public documents ________.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(a) True

Question 88.
For Incorporation or registration ________.
(a) MOA must be subscribed
(b) AOA must be subscribed
(c) Only MOA
(d) Both (a) & (b)
Answer:
(d) Both (a) & (b)

Question 89.
MOA contains ________.
(a) Constitutions
(b) Regulations
(c) Declaration
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Constitutions

Question 90.
MOA has ________.
(a) 9
(b) 7
(c) 6
(d) 10
Answer:
(c) 6

Question 91.
AOA is also called as ________ of the company.
(a) Regulations
(b) Bye-Laws
(c) Provisions
(d) Both (a) or (b)
Answer:
(d) Both (a) or (b)

Question 92.
Tables I includes articles of ________.
(a) Unlimited company having share capital
(b) Company limited by guarantee
(c) Company limited by shares
(d) Public company
Answer:
(a) Unlimited company having share capital

Question 93.
Which amongst the following documents is not required to be filed by a foreign company with the Registrar?
(a) Address of the registered office of the company
(b) Address of the principles place of business in India
(c) Declaration of Solvency
(d) Articles of Association
Answer:
(c) Declaration of Solvency

Question 94.
Lifting of corporate veil is permitted ________.
(a) By statue
(b) Voluntary
(c) Any time
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) By statue

Question 95.
Which one of the following is NOT an essential feature of a company?
(a) Perpetual Succession
(b) Unlimited Liability
(c) Separate Property
(d) Transferability of shares
Answer:
(b) Unlimited Liability

Question 96.
Which one of the following statement is not true regarding a company?
(a) The shares of a company can be transferred
(b) It is very simple and easy to form a company
(c) It is a separate legal entity
(d) it has independence to form its policies
Answer:
(b) It is very simple and easy to form a company

Question 97.
Which one of the following is NOT a disadvantage of a company?
(a) It does not has a capacity to sue
(b) it has more social responsibility
(c) Greater tax burden
(d) More disclosures
Answer:
(a) It does not has a capacity to sue

Question 98.
Which of the following statement is NOT true regarding a private company?
(a) It cannot invite public to subscribe to shares or debentures
(b) Restricts the right to transfer its share
(c) At least five members are required to form a company
(d) It should have at least two directors
Answer:
(c) At least five members are required to form a company

Question 99.
The auditor of a Government company is appointed by ________.
(a) Central Government
(b) Comptroller and Auditor General of India
(c) Directors of the Company
(d) Shareholders of the Company
Answer:
(b) Comptroller and Auditor General of India

Question 100.
The maximum managerial remuneration which can be paid by a private company is ________.
(a) 11 % of net profit
(b) 11 % of turnover
(c) 5% of share capital
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(d) None of the above

Question 101.
In case of a company limited by shares, the members are liable to the extent of ________.
(a) Nominal value of share
(b) Called up value of shares
(c) They are personally liable
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Nominal value of share

Question 102.
Which one of the following is not true with reference to an unlimited company?
(a) The liability is extended to their personal property
(b) The members are not liable directly to the creditors of the company
(c) It cannot convert itself into a public company
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(c) It cannot convert itself into a public company

Question 103.
A “not for profit” company is permitted as per which section of the Companies’ Act, 2013?
(a) Sec. 3 (i) (iv)
(b) Sec. 5
(c) Sec. 8
(d) Sec. 12.
Answer:
(c) Sec. 8

Question 104.
The licence to form a company “not for profit” is granted by ________.
(a) State Government
(b) Registrar
(c) High Court
(d) Central Government
Answer:
(d) Central Government

Question 105.
Government company is defined under which section of the Companies Act, 2013?
(a) Sec. 2(45)
(b) Sec. 2(44)
(c) Sec. 2(43)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Sec. 2(45)

Question 106.
In a Government Company, the minimum share of Centre and State Government is:
(a) 51 % or more of the paid up share capital
(b) 5% or more of the issued share capital
(c) 51 % or more of the authorised share capital
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) 51 % or more of the paid up share capital

Question 107.
As per the Companies Act, 2013, what is the minimum paid up share capital required for a public? company?
(a) ₹ 1 Lakh
(b) ₹ 5 Lakh
(c) ₹ 1 Crore
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(d) According to Companies (Amendment) Act, 2015: Provides that in Clause (71), the words “of ₹ 5 lakhs or higher paid up share capital” shall be omitted.”

Question 108.
Which one of the following is known as owners of a company?
(a) Debentureholders
(b) Board of Directors
(c) Shareholders
(d) Partners
Answer:
(c) Shareholders are known as owners of company because they provide funds to company. A person who holds shares in the capital of company is known as a shareholder.

Question 109.
A company can change its name by passing:
(a) Ordinary resolution
(b) Special resolution
(c) Board resolution
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(b) A company can change its name by passing Special Resolution (SR). Company shall alter his Memorandum of Association and sent a copy of SR and altered MOA to ROC. The Registrar as shall issue a fresh certificate of Incorporation to the company containing a new name.

Question 110.
The minimum number of directors in a public company is:
(a) 3
(b) 5
(c) 2
(d) 7
Answer:
(a) The minimum directors required to run a public limited company is 3 directors. The maximum directors on the other hand would be 15′ directors and if more directors need to be appointed than they can be appointed by the special resolution.

Question 111.
What is the meaning of maxim ultra vires?
(a) An accomplished act
(b) Within the powers
(c) Beyond the powers
(d) With the guilty mind
Answer:
(c) Maxim ‘ultra vires’ means beyond the power of the company i.e. beyond the objects clause of memorandum of association or beyond the companies Act itself. Acts which are ultra vires are void ab initio and whole body of Shareholders acting unanimously cannot ratify the ultra vires acts.

Question 112.
In a company who conceives the idea of the business?
(a) Promoters
(b) Auditors
(c) Directors
(d) Shareholders.
Answer:
“Promotion” is the process of conceiving an idea and developing it into a concrete proposition or project to be accomplished by the incorporation and flotation of a company. The person who conceives the idea of business is termed as “Promoter”.

Question 113.
Which of the following are the characteristics of a private company?
X. Limited liability of members
Y. Perpetual succession
Z. Free transferability of shares
Correct option is –
(a) X and Y
(b) Y and Z
(c) X and Z
(d) X, Y and Z.
Answer:
(a) A company form of organisation possess various characteristics such as –

  • Corporate personality
  • Limited liability
  • Perpetual succession
  • Transferability of shares
  • Separate property
  • Capacity to sue and be sued

However, two forms of company i.e. public and private company differs from each other on the basis of transferability of shares. Private company restricts the right of member to transfer their shares freely. However, public company allows free transfer of shares to its members. Therefore, free transferability of shares is not a feature of private company and so the answer is X and Y.

Question 114.
The maximum number of directors in a private limited company is ________.
(a) 3
(b) 10
(c) 5
(d) 15
Answer:
(d) The Company Act, 2013 prescribes the minimum number of directors i.e. 2 to form a private limited company and one in case on OPC (One Person Company). However, there is maximum number of directors in a private limited Company is 15.
Hence, option (d) is correct.

Question 115.
Which company give its members a right to transfer his shares:
(a) Public
(b) Private
(c) Government
(d) None
Answer:
(a) In public company, the members can freely transfer their shares while private company districts the right to transfer its shares while private company districts the right to transfer its shares.

Question 116.
Maximum number of members in public company are:
(a) 50
(b) 10
(c) No limit
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Public company can have any number of members. Thus, there is no limit on the maximum number of members in public company.

Question 117.
Which of the following cases clearly established that a company has a separate legal entity:
(a) Salomon v Salomon and Co. Ltd.
(b) Sultan and Co. Ltd. v Sultan
(c) Connors Bros v Connors
(d) Foss v Harbottle.
Answer:
(a) Salomon Vs Salomon and Co. Ltd. clearly established that a company has a separate legal entity.

Under this case, the court held that:
Salomon & Co. was a real company fulfilling all the legal requirement and it had an identity separate from its members.

Question 118.
A company that owns substantial shares in another company to control management and operations by influencing its Board of Directors is known as:
(a) Holding Company
(b) Foreign Company
(c) Public Company
(d) Private Company.
Answer:
(a) As per Sec. 2 (46) of the Companies Act, 2013, Holding Company is a company:

  • Controls the composition of Board of Directors or
  • Exercises or controls more than one half of the total share capital either at its own or together with one or more of its, subsidiary companies then it is known as holding company and the other company is the subsidiary company.

Question 119.
Articles of Association of a Company contains the name of ________.
(a) First Directors ”
(b) Subsequent Directors
(c) Shareholders
(d) Managers
Answer:
(a) Section 7(1 )(g) of the Companies Act, 2013 states that the particulars of the interests of the persons mentioned in the Article of Association as the first Directors of the company in other firm or bodies corporate along with their consent to act as directors of the company in such form and manner as may be prescribed.

Question 120.
An OPC must have minimum number of directors ________.
(a) One
(b) Three
(c) Five
(d) None
Answer:
(a) Section 149(1) of Companies Act, 2013 requires that every company shall have a minimum number of 3 directors in case of public company, 2 in case of private-company and one in case of one person company.

Question 121.
A company dies with the death of its shareholders:
(a) Partly true
(b) True
(c) False
(d) Can’t say
Answer:
(c) Members may come and members may go but the company goes on forever. A company has perpetual succession, i.e. death or insolvency of a shareholder or all of them does not affect the life of company.

Question 122.
Transfer and transmission of shares are dealt under:
(a) Certificate of incorporation
(b) Article of Association
(c) Confidential agreement
(d) Memorandum of association.
Answer:
(b) Transfer and transmission of shares are dealt under article of association. It is one of the content of Articles framed by the company for its own working. Every member owing fully paid up shares is at liberty to dispose off according to his choice but subject to Articles of Company.

Question 123.
The word is added at the end of its name by a private limited company.
(a) Public Company Limited
(b) Limited
(c) Private Limited
(d) Public Limited.
Answer:
(c) By virtue of Section 2(68) of Companies Act, 2013. It is clearly prescribed that the word “private limited” must be added at the end of its name by a private limited company.

Question 124.
Firm is a separate entity in the eyes of law. This statement is:
(a) True in case of Limited liability Partnership
(b) Not true for Indian firms
(c) Depends on agreement between partners
(d) True in all cases.
Answer:
(d) True in all cases.

Question 125.
An application seeking extension of time to hold annual general meeting of a company should be made to;
(a) Company Secretary
(b) The Registrar of Companies
(c) Company Law Tribunal
(d) Court.
Answer:
(b) In case, it is not possible for a company to hold an annual general meeting within the prescribed time, the Registrar may, for any special reason, extend the time within which any AGM shall be held.

Question 126.
Those who provide financing in exchange of ownership are called:
(a) Lenders
(b) Analysts
(c) Equity Investors
(d) Debt financing
Answer:
(c) Those who provide financing in exchange, of ownership are called equity investors or shareholders.

Question 127.
Under section 12 of the Companies Act, a company shall, on and from the ________ of its incorporation, have a registered office capable of receiving and acknowledging all communications and notices as may be addressed to it.
(a) 45th day
(b) 2 months
(c) 15th Day
(d) 30th Day
Answer:
(c) Under Companies Act, 2013. Section 12, a company shall, Within 30,h Days of its incorporation have a registered office capable of receiving and acknowledging all communication and notice as may be addressed to it.

Note:

  • In Section 12 of the Principal Act, –
  • In sub-section (1), for the words “on and from the fifteenth day of its incorporation”, the words ” within thirty days of its incorporation” shall be substituted;
  • In sub-section (4), for the words “within fifteen days”, the words “within thirty days” shall be substituted. ‘

Question 128.
A company limited by shares, which does not have Articles of Association can adopt ________ as its Articles.
(a) Table J of Schedule II
(b) Table G of Schedule I
(c) Table H of Schedule II
(d) Table F of Schedule I
Answer:
(d) Companies are required to have its own MOA & AOA registered where public company limited by shares, need not have its own articles. It can adopt table F of Schedule.

Question 129.
Those who provide financing in exchange of ownership are called:
(a) Debt financing
(b) Analysts
(c) Lenders
(d) Equity investors
Answer:
(d) Equity investors are people who invest money into a company in exchange for a share of ownership in the company, typically, equity investors ^iave no guarantee of a return on their investment and may lose their money should the company go out of business.

Question 130.
________ is the company in which at least 51 % shares are held by Central or State Government or partly by both.
(a) Public company
(b) Government company
(c) Foreign company
(d) HoSdina
Answer:
(b) A “Government Company” is defined under Section 2(45) of the Companies Act, 2013 as “any company in which not less than 51% of the paid-up share capital is held by the Central Government, or by t any State Government or Governments, or partly by the Central Government and partly by one or more State Governments, and includes a company which is a subsidiary company of such a Government Company”.

Thus, the cardinal feature of a Government . Company is not less than 51% ownership – by Central/State Government, either individually or jointly. Hence, option (b) is , correct.

Question 131.
A Public Corporation has:
(a) Public ownership
(b) Public accountability .
(c) Business management for public end
(d) All are applicable
Answer:
(d) A public corporation has –

  • Public ownership: They are owned and controlled by public.
  • Public accountability: They are accountable to public because public money is involved.
  • Business management for public end: Management is appointed by public.

Question 132.
The basic document of company generally are:
(a) Annual Accounts’
(b) Prospectus
(c) Minutes of meetings
(d) Memorandum and Articles of Association
Answer:
(d) Memorandum and Articles of the association are the basic document of the company. They are the charter or constitution of company.

Question 133.
In case of loss to a limited company, the liability of the shareholders is:
(a) Unlimited
(b) Limited to the amounts as they have declared
(c) Limited to the amount of capital to which they have subscribed
(d) Limited up to it’s secured debts
Answer:
(c) The liability of shareholder is limited to the amount of capital to Which they have subscribed and not paid.

Question 134.
In a company who conceives the idea of the business?
(a) Promoters
(b) Auditors
(c) Directors
(d) Shareholders
Answer:
(a) Promoters are the persons who take into their mind the idea of formation of company. They play most important role in the formation of company as they are persons who conceives idea of formation and without them, there can not be any company formation is done.

Question 135.
Every company public or private has to be registered with
(a) Central Bank of India
(b) RBI
(c) State Bank of India
(d) Registrar of Companies (ROC)
Answer:
(d) Every public or private company has to e registered with Registrar of Company (ROC).

Question 136.
Which of the following are the characteristics of a private company?
X. Limited liability of members
Y. Perpetual succession
Z. Free transferability of shares Correct option is:
(a) X and Y
(b) Y and Z
(c) X and Z
(d) X, Y and Z
Answer:
(a) A company form of organisation posses various characteristics such as:

  • Corporate personality
  • Limited Liability
  • Transferability of Shares
  • Perpetual Succession
  • Separate property
  • Capacity to sue and be sued.

However, two forms of company i.e. public and private company differs from each other on the basis of transferability of shares. Private company restricts the right of member to transfer their shares freely. However, public company allows free of shares to its members. Therefore, freely transferability of share is not a feature of private company, hence option (a) is correct.

Question 137.
A public corporation has ________.
(a) Public ownership
(b) Public accountability
(c) Business management for public
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) A public corporation has

  • Public ownership i.e. they are owned and controlled by public
  • Public accountability i.e. they are accountable to public because public money is involved,
  • Business management for public end i.e. management is appointed by public.

Thus the right answer is option (d).

Question 138.
Board of Trustee v/s State of Delhi AIR, 1962?
(a) Separate Property
(b) Fraud
(c) Distinction of between company and corporation
(d) Exception of privity to contract
Answer:
(c) In the content of Distinction between a company and a corporation, the term corporation does not include a Co-operative Society registered under any law relating to Co-operative Societies. A society registered under Societies Registration Act has been held by Supreme Court in Board of Trustees v/s State of Delhi, AIR 1962
S.C. 458 not to corrie within the term ‘body corporate’ under Companies Act.

Question 139.
Who can’t use the terms ‘limited’ and ‘Private Limited’?
(a) OPC (one person company)
(b) Section‘8’CO
(c) LLP (Limited Liability Partnership
(d) Both‘A’and‘C’
Answer:
(b) The ‘Section 8’ company which are registered under Companies Act for the purpose of promotion of commerce, art, science, sports, education, religion, etc. are issued a licence by Central Government in such prescribed manner and conditions as it deem fit to be a limited company, without addition to its name of words ‘limited’ or ‘private limited’ as the case may be.

CS Foundation Business Environment and Law Notes

Introduction to Law – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Introduction to Law – CS Foundation Business Law Notes

Introduction:
1. Law is an instrument to regulate human behaviour – be it social life or business life.

2. There is lack of unanimity on true nature and meaning of iaw as it has been viewed by different jurists from different view points.

3. Various definitions can be grouped into 5 heads:

  • Natural
  • Positivistic
  • Historical
  • Sociological
  • Realistic

Natural School:

  1. “The art or science of what is equitable and good”
  2. “The highest reason implanted in nature”
  3. “The standard of what is just and unjust”
  4. As per Romans ‘justice’ is the main and guiding element of law.
  5. As per Hindu view, law is a part of “Dharma.”
  6. “The body of principles recognised and applied by the state in the administration of justice”
  7. “A set of rules imposed and enforced by society with regard to the attribution and exercise of power over persons and things”

Positivistic Definition of Law:

  1. “Law is the aggregate of rules set by man as politically superior or sovereign, to men as political subject”.
  2. “In other words, law is the “command of the sovereign”.
  3. 3 elements of law includes: command, duty and sanction.
  4. “Law is a normative science”.
  5. Grund Norm is the ultimate norm from which ail other norms derive their power.

Historical Definition of Law:
1. Savigny’s gave following point.

  • Law is a matter of unconscious and organic growth
  • It is not universal in native
  • It must be as per the popular custom
  • Legislation is last stage of law making

2. Law has close association with following two notions:

  • Notion of order
  • Notion of force

Sociological Definition of Law:

  1. “Essentially and exclusively as social fact”.
  2. “The form of the guarantee of the conditions of life of society, assured by State’s power of constraint”.
  3. Law is a social institution to satisfy social wants.

Realist Definition of Law:

  1. “Law is a statement of the circumstances in which public force will be brought to bear upon through courts.”
  2. “A principle or rule of conduct so established as to justify a prediction with reasonable certainty that it will be enforced by the courts if its authority is challenged, is a principle or rule of law”.

Characteristics of Law:
1. Law pre supposes a state which makes, authorizes to make, recognises or sanctions rules called as law. These rules are made to serve some purpose.

2. Law is made effective by:

  • Requiring damages to be paid for an a jury due to disobedience.
  • Requiring one to complete an obligation that he has failed to perform.
  • Preventing disobedience.
  • Administering some form of punishment.

3. Meaning of Law – It refers to the rule of conduct to be followed by people, formulated by the state in order to maintain peace and order in the society.

Significance of Law:

  • It provides hope of security for future.
  • It provides socio-economic justice
  • It removes the existing imbalances in the socio-economic structure.
  • It helps in achieving socio-economic goals contained in our constitution.
  • It serves as a vehicle of social change.
  • Law needs to be constantly changed in order to bring it in conformity with the general statements and customs.

Sources of Law:

  • Source means origin
  • Law originates from the sovereign.
  • It originate from Volkgeist – general consciousness of the people
  • Roscoe pound analysed the term “law” in the 20th century.
  • Law originates from God.
  • Vedas is primary source of Hindu law
  • Quran is primary source of Mohammedan law.
    Introduction to Law – CS Foundation Business Law Notes IMG 1

Principle Sources of Indian Law:

It includes the following:
(1) Customs / Customary Law –

  • Most ancient of all sources.
  • When same thing was done again and again in a particular way, it became a custom.
  • Smritis and Commentaries are based on customs.
  • It has a inferior place in Mohammedan law.
  • Sunnis have interpreted law of divorce and inheritance based on custom.

Customs are divided into:
(i) Customs without sanction/Positive morality are non-obligatory and are just observed due to pressure of public opinion.

(ii) Customs having sanction are enforced by the state.
Introduction to Law – CS Foundation Business Law Notes IMG 2

Legal Customs:

  • are enforced by courts
  • have become a part of law of land
  • operate as a binding rule of law

(a) Local Customs:

  • prevails in some definite locality
  • source of law for that particular place only
  • they are of 2 types:
  • Geographical local customs
  • Personal local customs

(b) General Customs:

  • prevail throughout the country
  • one of the sources of law of land

Conventional Customs:

  • also known as “usages”
  • are binding due to an agreement between the parties.

Following conditions to be satisfied, before it is adopted:

  • Clearly established and known to the contracting parties.
  • Cannot alter the general law of the land.
  • Must be reasonable.

Custom to be valid requires the following conditions to be fulfilled:
(a) Immemorial or Antiquity: It must be ancient English law placing limit to legal memory does not apply to Indian law.

According to Blackstone, “A custom, in order that it may be legal and binding must have been used so long that the memory of man runs not to the contrary, so that, if any one can show the beginning of it, it is no good custom.”

(b) Reasonableness: It must be useful to the society and must not be opposed o principles of equity, justice and good conscience.

(c) Conformity with law and public morality: It must not be opposed to any public policy or statute.

(d) Certainty: It must be definite and certain, rather than being vague and ambiguous.

(e) Compulsory observance: It must have been continuously and compulsory observed without interruption from long time.

(f) Unanimity of opinion: It must be universal in nature.

(g) Consistency: One custom must not conflict with other established customs.

(h) Peaceful enjoyment: It must be observed peacefully in all law courts without any conflicts.

(2) Judicial Decisions / Precedents: (Past decisions)

  • ‘Precedent’ refers to some pattern set for guiding the future conduct.
  • Decisions laying down some new rule or principle are called Judicial Precedents.
  • The principles of law that are expressed for the first time in court decisions becomes precedent which are to be followed as law in future while deciding identical problems and cases.
  • This rule of a court decision becoming precedent to be followed in future cases is known as doctrine of stare decisis.
  • This creates confidence in the minds of litigants.
  • Justice administration becomes fair and equitable.

General Principles:

  • Lower Court is bound by decisions of Higher Court.
  • Higher Courts are bound by their own decisions.

High Court’s Principles in Particular:

  • High Court’s decisions are binding on all subordinate courts and tribunals within its jurisdiction.
  • High Court’s decision have a persuasive value in a court which comes under jurisdiction of another court.
  • The rule that a court decision becomes precedent to be followed for similar cases.
  • In case of any conflict, decision of High Court within whose jurisdiction that court comes, will prevail.
  • In case of any conflict between decisions of two co-equal benches, later decision is followed.
  • Smallest Bench is formed by a single judge.
  • Division Bench means bench of two judges.
  • Full Bench means bench of three or more judges.
  • Decision of Full Bench is binding on Smaller bench.
  • Even a wrong decision of Division Bench is binding on Smaller Bench.
  • High Courts are courts of co-ordinate jurisdiction.
  • Pre-constitution privity council decisions are binding on the High Courts unless overruled by the Supreme Court.

Supreme Court’s Principles in Particular:

  • Supreme Court is the highest court.
  • Its decisions are binding on all courts within the territory of India and other judicial tribunals of the country.
  • Only the statement of ratio of the judgement have the binding force.
  • It is not bound by its own decisions.
  • Earlier decisions can be departed from only if found erroneous and is detrimental to the general public welfare.
  • English decisions have persuasive value in India.
  • It is not bound by the decisions of Privity Council or Federal Court.

Precedents are of following kinds:
1. Declaratory: It is an application of an already exiting law. According to Salmond, “A declaratory precedent is one which is merely the application of an already existing rule of law. ”

2. Original: It creates and applies a new rule of law. It creates law for future. It develops law of the country.

3. Persuasive: It does not creates any obligation on the judge to follow but deserves to be attached great weight. It is a historical source of law rather than a legal source.
These are not compulsory to be followed but are considered by the judges to give their decision.

4. Absolutely Authoritative: It creates a binding force on the judge and he is bound to follow it whether he approves it or not. It is a legal source of law. These are compulsorily required to be followed.

5. Conditionally Authoritative: Though binding on the judge, it can be disregarded if it is considered wrong or contrary to law. (The rule is that a court decision becomes precedent to be followed for similarly cases)

Doctrine of Stare Decisis:

  • It refers to adhere to the decision and not unsettle thing which are established.
  • Law already settled by a series of decisions becomes binding on the courts and have to be followed in
  • similar cases.
  • Like cases are decided alike.
  • It is not universally applicable.
  • It should not be applied at the cost of justice.

Ratio Decidendi.
The court while giving the decision give the importance to those certain points which leads into giving the decision. Such points are known as ratio decidendi:

  • It is a decision based on the material facts of a case (Prof. Goodhart)
  • It is binding between the contracting parties.
  • It is equally applicable to other cases of similar nature.

Obiter Dicta:

  • The Judges are not bound to follow them although they can take advantage of them.
  • They sometimes help the cause of the reform of law.
  • It means “said by the way”.
  • It is a persuasive precedent.
  • These are the statements that are not necessary for a particular decision’s case but occur in the course of delivering a judgement.
  • Judges can take advantage of it.
  • It can also be a deliberate expression of opinion.
  • The word “law declared” includes an obiter dictum provided it is upon a point raised and agreed.

(3) Statutes / Legislation:

  • Also referred as Jus Scriptum meaning written law, or Jus non-Scriptum meaning unwritten law, Salmond prefers to call it as “enacted law”.
  • It is consisted in the declaration of legal rules by an authority duly empowered by the constitution in this behalf.
  • Various statutory laws are created by legislation.
  • Legislation can be Supreme, or and Subordinate.
  • Supreme legislation directly derives its power from the constitution. Thus, cannot be repealed, annulled or controlled by any other legislative authority.
  • Subordinate legislation proceeds from any authority other than sovereign power.
  • Parliament possesses power of Supreme Legislation.
  • The power given to the executive to make rules in some cases is known as executive or delegated legislation.
  • Rules made by executive have to be placed on the table of both the houses of Parliament for a specified time. After being approved by legislature, it becomes a part of legislation.
  • Supreme Legislation includes acts of parliament and the ordinances, other laws made by President and Governor.
  • Subordinate legislation includes legislation made by various authorities like corporation, municipalities etc.

(4) Personal Law:
It is applied where any point of the issue in not covered by any statutory law or custom.

Hindu’s law is found in:

  • The Shruti which includes 4 Vedas
  • The Smritis which are of 3 types – the codes of Manu, Yajnavalkya and Narada.

Mohammedan’s law is found in:

  • The Holy Kuran
  • Hadis : actions, percepts and sayings of Prophet Mohammed.
  • Ijmas : concurrence of opinion of the companions of Prophet and his disciples.
  • Kiyas : analogical deductions from Quran, Hadis and Ijmas.
  • Digests and Commentaries : which includes Hedaya (the most important and famous one) and Fatawa Alamgiri (complied by Aurangzeb Alamgiri)

Secondary Sources of Indian Law – It includes the following :
(1) Justice, Equity and Good Consciences

(2) Sources of English Law –

  • Common Law
  • Law Merchant
  • Principle of Equity
  • Statute Law

(1) Justice, Equity and Good Conscience :

  • Introduced by Impey’s Regulations of 1781
  • It applies in absence of any rule of a statutory law, custom or personal law.
  • It owes its origin to the beginning of British administration of justice in India.
  • They have been modified to suit the Indian conditions and circumstances.
  • It must not be inconsistent with any doctrine or theory of Hindu law.

(2) English Law – Main body of rules and principles of India law have been adopted from English law which in turn have been taken from following sources:
(i) Common Law:

  • Unwritten law of England which is common to the whole of the realm
  • Principles-evolved by judges while making decisions on cases brought before them.
  • It denotes body of legal rules which have several primary sources.

(ii) Law Merchant:

  • Important source of Mercantile law.
  • It refers to the customs and usages which are binding on traders in their dealings with each other.

(iii) Principle of Equity:

  • It refers to a body of rules whose primary source is neither any custom nor a written law.
  • In cases where anyone is not satisfied with the decision of common law, can file a writ or mercy petition
  • with the king (fountain head of justice). Chancellor to whom the petitions are referred by the king dispose it off as per his commonsense, natural justice and good conscience.
  • Law administered by chancellor is known as Equity and such courts are known as Equity courts.

(iv) Statute Law:

  • It refers to the law derived from the legislation or enactment of Parliament or the subordinate and delegated legislative bodies.
  • It is now a very important source of Mercantile law
  • It overrides an unwritten law
  • Example : Bankruptcy Act, 1914.
  • English Sale of Goods Act, 1893; etc.

Mercantile or Commercial Law:

  • It grew up from customs and usages of merchants or traders in England
  • Eventually become a part of common law of England
  • It relates to the commercial activities of people of the society
  • It is concerned with trade and commerce

Branches of Law:
They are:

  • Constitutional law (Highest and supreme law of country)
  • Administrative law
  • Criminal law
  • Civil law
  • Mercantile or commercial law Sources of Mercantile Law

Its sources are:

  • Law Merchant
  • Statute law
  • Common law
  • Principles of Equity

Mercantile Law in India :
Sources of Indian Mercantile Law:

  • English Mercantile Law
  • Statute Law
  • Judicial Decision
  • Custom and Trade Usages

Indian Contract Act, 1872 was enacted as an attempt to codify and establish uniform principles of Mercantile law in India.

Following are the sources of India Mercantile law:
(i) English Mercantile Law – Certain modifications have been made in English law to make it suitable to the Indian needs.

(ii) Statute Law

  • It includes the various acts enacted by India legislature.
  • Example – The Indian Contract Act, 1872;
  • The Sales of Goods Act, 1930; etc.

(iii) Judicial Decisions

  • In cases where law is silent, judge takes a decision based on justice, equity and good conscience.
  • On basis of such decisions, other cases of similar nature are decided.

(iv) Customs and Trade Usages – Various provisions of Indian statute give effect to the rules laid down in a particular Act which are subject to special custom or trade usage.

Legal Terminology and Maxims:
Legal Maxim refers to an established principle or proposition.

Term/Phrase Meaning
ab initio From the beginning.
ad hoc Not intended to be able to be adapted to other purposes.
ad idem To the same thing.
ad infinitum To infinity
ad valorem According to value.
alter ego A second identity living within a person.
arhicus curiae Friend of the court.
a udi alteram partem Hear the other side.
bona fide In good faith.
de facto in fact.
de jure In law.
de novo A new.
dehors Outside of.
ex gratia As a matter of grace or favour.
ex officio By virtue of an office.
ex parte Expression used to signify something done or said by one person not in the presence of his opponent.
fait accompli An accomplished act.
ictus reus Guilty act.
in personam Against the person.
in rem An act/proceeding done or directed with reference to no specific person or with reference to all whom it might concern.
Inter alia Amongst other things.
inter vivos Between living persons.
intestate A person is deemed to die intestate in respect of property of which he or she has not made a testamentary disposition (“will”) capable of taking effect.
intra vires Within the powers.
ipso facto By the mere fact.
ipso jure By the law itself.
lis pendens A pending suit.
locus standi Signifies a right to be heard.
mens rea A guilty mind.
mesne profits Intermediate profits, the profits which a person in wrongful possession of the property actually received or might with ordinary diligence have received therefrom together with interest on such profits excluding the profits due to improvement made by the person in wrongful possession.
modus operandi Mode of operating; the way in which a thing, cause etc. operates.
mutatis mutandis With the necessary changes in points of detail, with such change as may be necessary.
obiter dictum An opinion of law not necessary to the decision. An expression of opinion (formed) by a judge on a question immaterial to the ratio decidendi, and unnecessary for the decision of the particular case. It is no way binding on any court, but may receive attention as being an opinion of high authority.
pendente Iite During litigation.
quid pro quo The giving of one thing of value for another thing of value; one for the other; thing given as compensation.
ratio decidendi Reasons for deciding, the grounds of decision.
res integra An untouched matter; a point without a precedent; a case of novel impression.
res judicata A case or suit already decided.
rule nisi A rule to show cause why a party should not do a certain act, or why the object of the rule should not be enforced.
sine die Without day.
sine qua non An indispensable requisite.
stare decisis To stand by things decided; to abide by precedents where the same points come again in litigation.
status quo Existing condition.
sub judice Before a judge or court, pending decision of a competent count.
ultra vires Beyond one’s powers.

Understanding Case Citation:
1. Case Name:

  • Represented in Italics followed by a comma.
  • First name tells the person bringing the court action.
  • Second name is the person against whom the action is brought.
  • Criminal law case is always brought by the state against a person.
  • Defendant may not always remain same.

2. Name of Reporter
(i) It refers to a multi-volume publication where court decisions are found.

(ii) Eg. – AIR – All India Report:
ITR – Income Tax Report etc.

Full Name Official Abbreviation Type of Case Reported
All India Reports AIR Decision from SC and HC
Supreme Court Cases SCC Indian Supreme Court
Company Law Journal CLJ Decision Relating to Company Law matters
Income Tax Report ITR Decision Relating to Income Tax matters
Labour Reports LR Decision Relating to Labour Law matters

3. Beginning and Ending Page – It is important to provide the specific pages on which a quote is found if a direct quote from any case is being used.

4. Year of Decision – It refers to the year in which the court deliver the decision.
Example : Furman V. Georgia, 408 U.S. 238,240 (1972).

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Which of the following is not a definition of law:
(a) Physiological
(b) Realistic
(c) Sociological
(d) Historical
Answer:
(a) Physiological

Question 2.
As per. Romans, ________ is the main guiding force.
(a) Law
(b) Equity
(c) Justice
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Justice

Question 3.
law is a normative science. This definition was given by:
(a) Ulpine
(b) Austin
(c) Kelson
(d) Cicero
Answer:
(c) Kelson

Question 4.
Elements of law include:
(a) Command
(b) Duty
(c) Sanction
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 5.
As per Historical definition of law, it is not universal in nature.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(a) True

Question 6.
________ is a primary source of Hindu law.
(a) Vedas
(b) Holy Kuran
(c) Smritis
(d) Bible
Answer:
(a) Vedas

Question 7.
________ is the most ancient source of Indian law.
(a) Judicial Decisions
(b) Personal Law
(c) Statutes
(d) Customs
Answer:
(d) Customs

Question 8.
________ custom prevails in-a particular locality.
(a) Legal
(b) General
(c) Conventional
(d) Local
Answer:
(d) Local

Question 9.
Custom to be valid must not be:
(a) Immemorial
(b) Uncertain
(c) Reasonable
(d) In confirmation with law and public morality.
Answer:
(b) Uncertain

Question 10.
Rule of Court decision to be followed in future cases is known as ________.
(a) Doctrine of Indoor Management
(b) Doctrine of Stare Decisis
(c) Doctrine of Court Decisis
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(b) Doctrine of Stare Decisis

Question 11.
In case of any conflict between decisions of co-equal benches ________ decision prevails.
(a) Later
(b) Previous
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None
Answer:
(a) Later

Question 12.
Bench of two judges is known as ________.
(a) Smallest Bench
(b) Full Bench
(c) Division Bench
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Division Bench

Question 13.
Supreme Court is bound by its own decisions.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly True
(d) Partly False
Answer:
(b) False

Question 14.
________ precedents creates law for the whole country.
(a) Declaratory
(b) Pervasive
(c) Absolutely Authoritative
(d) Original
Answer:
(d) Original

Question 15.
Legislation can be:
(a) Supreme
(b) Subordinate
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 16.
Shruti includes ________ number of Vedas.
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(d) 4

Question 17.
________ is an unwritten law of England.
(a) Common law
(b) Law Merchant
(c) Equity
(d) Statute
Answer:
(a) Common law

Question 18.
Latin maxim “bonafide” means:
(a) From the beginning
(b) In good faith
(c) Guilty act
(d) In bad faith
Answer:
(b) In good faith

Question 19.
Latin Maxim “in personam” means:
(a) Against specific person
(b) Against no specific person
(c) Amongst other things
(d) Within the powers
Answer:
(a) Against specific person

Question 20.
Hindu and Muhammedan law is ________.
(a) Personal Law
(b) Principle Law
(c) Historical Law
(d) Cus omary Law
Answer:
(a) Personal Law

Question 21.
“A declaratory precedent js one which is merely the application of already existing rule of law.” This was said by:
(a) Ulpine
(b) Cicero
(c) Salmond
(d) None
Answer:
(c) Salmond

Question 22.
Which of the following is the definition of law ________.
(a) Natural
(b) Realistic
(c) Historical
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 23.
Who said that “law is the highest reason implanted in nature”
(a) Ulpine
(b) Cicero
(c) Justinian Digest
(d) Salmond
Answer:
(b) Cicero

Question 24.
Who was the prominent modern natural writer who defined law as “the body of principles recognised and applied by the state in the administration justice.”
(a) Salmond
(b) Ulpine
(c) Cicero
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Salmond

Question 25.
Which of the following are the main source/sources of mercantile law.
(a) Principles of equity
(b) Common law
(c) Law merchant
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 26.
________ is the last stage of law making and therefore, the lawyer or the jurist is most important than legislature.
(a) Custom
(b) Social control
(c) Legislation
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Legislation

Question 27.
________ is one of the essential of sociological definition of law
(a) Coercive
(b) Legislations
(c) Judicial Process
(d) All of these
Answer:
(a) Coercive

Question 28.
________ refers to some pattern set for guiding the future conduct
(a) Doctrine of Stare Decisis
(b) Precedent
(c) Judicial Precedent
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(c) Judicial Precedent

Question 29.
General meaning of source is:-
(a) Origin
(b) Established
(c) Uses
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(a) Origin

Question 30.
All norms derives their power from the ultimate norms known as ________.
(a) Normative relation
(b) Ground norms
(c) Legal norms
(d) Physical norms
Answer:
(b) Ground norms

Question 31.
Law administrated by chancellor is known as ________.
(a) Statued law
(b) Equity
(c) Equity courts
(d) All of these
Answer:
(b) Equity

Question 32.
These customs which are non-obligatory and are observed due to the pressure of public opinion is known as ________.
(a) Custom having sanction
(b) Positive Morality
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) Positive Morality

Question 33.
Customs that are enforced by state are known as ________.
(a) Customs having sanction
(b) Local customs
(c) General customs
(d) All of these
Answer:
(a) Customs having sanction

Question 34.
This is an essential condition for making a valid custom:
(a) Compulsory observations
(b) Peaceable enjoyment
(c) Certainty
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 35.
The term precedent means ________.
(a) Observation
(b) Set pattern for guiding the future conduct
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 36.
Article makes clear that the law declared by the government
shall be binding on all the courts within the territory of India.
(a) Article .171 of the constitution
(b) Article 141 of the constitution
(c) Article 187 of the constitution
(d) All of these
Answer:
(b) Article 141 of the constitution

Question 37.
The underlying principle of judicial decision which is only authoritative is ________.
(a) Doctrine of stare decisis
(b) Ratio decidendi
(c) Obiter dicta
(d) All of these
Answer:
(b) Ratio decidendi

Question 38.
Ratio decidendi is nothing more than decision based on the material facts of the cases defined by ________.
(a) Ulpine
(b) Salmond
(c) Prof. Goodhart
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Prof. Goodhart

Question 39.
Which proceeds from the sovereign power in the state or which derives the power directly from the constitution.
(a) Supreme Legislation
(b) Obiter Dicta
(c) Judiciary
(d) All of these
Answer:
(a) Supreme Legislation

Question 40.
Which of the following is not the branch of law ________.
(a) Civil Law
(b) Administrative Law
(c) Commercial Law
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 41.
The Latin Maxim “ab initio” means ________.
(a) Frorrr the beginning
(b) To infinity
(c) A new
(d) In law
Answer:
(a) Frorrr the beginning

Question 42.
The Latin Maxim “ad hoc” means ________.
(a) To the same thing
(b) Friend of court
(c) Not intended to be adopted to other purposes
(d) In fact
Answer:
(c) Not intended to be adopted to other purposes

Question 43.
The Latin Maxim “In personam” means ________.
(a) Within the powers
(b) During Litigation
(c) Without day
(d) Against the person
Answer:
(d) Against the person

Question 44.
The Latin Maxim “Mutatis Mutandis” means ________.
(a) With necessary changes
(b) A guilty mind
(c) During litigation
(d) Beyond One’s Power
Answer:
(a) With necessary changes

Question 45.
The Latin Maxim “Ultra Vires” means ________.
(a) Beyond one’s powers
(b) Existing conditions
(c) Without day
(d) Guilty Act
Answer:
(a) Beyond one’s powers

Question 46.
If a case is written as ________.
ONGC Vs HTC, 512 CR 230 (2004)
Then in this case. “512″ refers to
(a) Volume Number
(b) Beginning page
(c) Name of victim
(d) Name of the Reporter
Answer:
(a) Volume Number

Question 47.
If a case citation is stated as Choman Lai V/s Andrew, 511 The “U.S” refers to ________.
(a) Name of the Country
(b) Name of Judge
(c) Name of Victim
(d) Name of the Reporter
Answer:
(d) Name of the Reporter

Question 48.
In a case citation, the term ‘CLJ’ would mean ________.
(a) Company Law Journal
(b) Competent Learned Judge
(c) Corporate Law Jurisdiction
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Company Law Journal

Question 49.
Which one of the following is NOT a major source of Indian Mercantile law?
(a) Judicial Decisions
(b) English Mercantile Law
(c) Customs and Trade Usages
(d) The U.S Federal Forum
Answer:
(d) The U.S Federal Forum

Question 50.
The first attempt to codify and establish uniform principles of mercantile law was done in the year ________.
(a) 1841
(b) 1857
(c) 1932
(d) 1872
Answer:
(d) 1872

Question 51.
The underlying principle of a judicial decision which is only authoritative is termed as ________.
(a) Obiter Dicta
(b) Stare Decisis
(c) Ratio Decidendi
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Ratio Decidendi

Question 52.
The literal meaning of the Latin Expression “Obiter Dicta” is ________.
(a) To the same thing
(b) Hear the other side
(c) Outside of
(d) Said by the way
Answer:
(d) Said by the way

Question 53.
Which of the following statement is not correct in context to the Supreme Court?
(a) It is bound by its own decisions
(b) It’s decisions are binding on all courts in India
(c) It is not bound by the decision of Federal Court
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) It is bound by its own decisions

Question 54.
‘Sir Henry Marine and Savigy’ have given the ________.
(a) Realist Definition of law
(b) Historical definition of law
(c) Sociological Definition of law
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(b) Historical definition of law

Question 55.
‘Holmes and Cardozo’ have given the ________.
(a) Realist Definition of law
(b) Sociological Definition of law
(c) Historical Definition of law
(d) Customary Definition of law
Answer:
(a) Realist Definition of law

Question 56.
Which of the following is NOT a requisite for a valid custom?
(a) Antiquity
(b) Certainty
(c) Consistency
(d) Voluntary Observance
Answer:
(d) Voluntary Observance

Question 57.
Which of the followinq is NOT correct in context to the Hiqh Court in India?
(a) It is the court of Co-ordinate Jurisdiction
(b) Privity council decisions are not
(c) Its decisions are binding on all tribunals within its jurisdiction
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(b) Privity council decisions are not

Question 58.
A Bench of three Judges in a High Court is called as ________.
(a) Smallest Bench
(b) Division Bench
(c) Triangular Bench
(d) Full Bench
Answer:
(d) Full Bench

Question 59.
The Smallest Bench in a High Court consists of how many Judges?
(a) Five
(b) Two
(c) One
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) One

Question 60.
A Bench of two judges in High Court is called as ________.
(a) Smallest Bench
(b) Division Bench
(c) Full Bench
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Division Bench

Question 61.
The Hindu Personal law is basically found in ________.
(a) Shruti
(b) Smriti
(c) Both (a) & (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Both (a) & (b)

Question 62.
Which of the following is not a Smriti?
(a) Manu
(b) Yajnavalkya
(c) Narada
(d) Shruti
Answer:
(d) Shruti

Question 63.
Which of the following is NOT a type of precedent?
(a) Persuasive Precedents
(b) Original Precedent
(c) Conditional Authority Precedent
(d) Passive Precedent
Answer:
(d) Passive Precedent

Question 64.
‘The Courts are required to apply the personal law of the parties where the point at issue is not covered by a statutory law or custom”
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Partly False
(d) Partly True
Answer:
(a) True

Question 65.
The guidance or authority of the past decisions of the court are called ________.
(a) Judicial Precedents
(b) Original Precedents
(c) Persuasive Precedents
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Judicial Precedents

Question 66.
Legal customs and conventional customs are a part of ________.
(a) Customs without Sanction
(b) Customs having Sanction
(c) Judicial Customs
(d) Voluntary Customs
Answer:
(b) Customs having Sanction

Question 67.
Which of the following is source of Indian mercantile law?
(a) English Mercantile law
(b) Judicial decisions
(c) Customs and trade usages
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) The main source of Indian Mercantile Law are:

  • English Mercantile Law
  • Statute Law
  • Judicial Decision
  • Customs and Trade Usages

Thus, option (d) is correct answer.

Question 68.
Which kind of precedent from the following creates and applies a new rule of law?
(a) Declaratory
(b) Persuasive
(c) Absolutely authoritative
(d) Original.
Answer:
(d) An original precedent is one which creates and applies a new rule of law. It is a law for the future because it is now applied. Number of original precedents is small but their importance is very great. They alone develop the law of the country and serve as a good evidence of law for the future.

Question 69.
________ means “adhere to the decision and do not unsettle things which are established”.
(a) Stare decisis
(b) Ratio decidendi
(c) Obiter dicta
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) Doctrine of stare decisis refers to the policy of courts to abide by or adhere to principles established by decisions in earlier cases : Thus, stare decisis means “adhere to the decision and do not unsettle things which are established.”

Question 70.
Which of the following is not a source of Indian law?
(a) English mercantile law
(b) Judicial law
(c) Civil law
(d) Customs and trade usage
Answer:
(c) The principal sources of Indian law are:

  • Customs or Customary Law.
  • Judicial decisions or precedents
  • Statutes or legislation.
  • Personal Law e.g. Hindu & Mohammedan Law.

Hence, Civil Law is not a source of Indian Law.

Question 71.
Which of the following is not a branch of merchant law?
(a) Criminal law
(b) Civil law
(c) Administrative law
(d) English law
Answer:
(d) Branches of Mercantile Law are :

  • Constitution Law
  • Administrative Law
  • Criminal Law
  • Civil Law
  • Mercantile / Commercial Law

Thus, option (d) English Law is correct answer.

Question 72.
Law is “essentially & exclusively a social fact” is given under _______
(a) Historical
(b) Sociological
(c) Realist
(d) Positivistic
Answer:
(b) Duguit under Sociological definition of law, defines law as “essentially and exclusively as social fact”.

Question 73.
“Justice is the main guiding ePernent of law” is defined under which school?
(a) Natural
(b) Sociological
(c) Positivistic
(d) Historical
Answer:
(a) Under Natural School of law as per Romans, ‘Justice’ is the main guiding force / element of law.

Question 74.
Decision of one High Court have only a _______ value in a court within the jurisdiction of another High Court.
(a) Voluntary
(b) Mandatory
(c) Persuasive
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(c) High Court’s decisions are binding on all subordinate courts and tribunals within its jurisdiction. Where as, High Court’s decision have a persuasive value in a court which comes under jurisdiction of another court.

Question 75.
The decisions given by Supreme Court are recorded in _______.
(a) AIR
(b) SCC
(c) AIR and SCC
(d) ITR
Answer:
(c) Those decisions which are given by Supreme Court are recorded in SCC (Supreme Court Cases) and AIR (All India Report).

Question 76.
Meaning of intra vires _______.
(a) Within the power
(b) Amongst the other
(c) Beyond the power
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) The legal Maxim, “intra vires” means within the powers.

Question 77.
Which law is related to the commercial activities of the people of the society?
(a) Constitutional law
(b) Administrative law
(c) Civil law
(d) Mercantile law
Answer:
(d) Mercantile Law or Commercial Law is related to the Commercial activities of people of the society. It is concerned with trade and commerce.

Question 78.
Past decision of the courts for future cases is known as:
(a) Customs
(b) Previous work
(c) Precedents
(d) Historical record
Answer:
(c) The guidance or authority of past decisions of the courts for future cases or only such decisions which lay down some new rule or principle are called judicial precedent.

Question 79.
‘Fait accompli’ means:
(a) Accomplished Act
(b) Accomplished person
(c) Vision to be accomplished
(d) Person accompanying in crime
Answer:
(a) The “fait accompli” is a Latin word which means an accomplished act.

Question 80.
In case of Hindu and Muslim family business, which laws prevail to divide their family properties?
(a) Government law
(b) Their Own laws
(c) Legal laws
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) Hindus and Mohammedans are governed by their personal law as modified by statute law and custom in all matters relating to inheritance, succession, marriage partition of joint family property pious obligations religions and charitable endowments.

Question 81.
In case name, the first name usually identifies:
(a) The person who is defending the case
(b) The person against whom the action is brought
(c) The person who is bringing the court action
(d) The person who is accused
Answer:
(c) Case Name: There are typically two names for a case. Usually the first name identifies who is bringing the court action and the second name is the person against whom action is being brought.

Question 82.
Custom as a source has a very inferior place in the _______.
(a) Hindu law
(b) Judicial decision
(c) Criminal law
(d) Mohammedan law
Answer:
(d) Customs as a source of law has a very inferior place in Mohammedan law. However, customs which were not expressly disapproved by the prophet were good laws.

Question 83.
What is meant by ‘ab initio’?
(a) From the beginning
(b) From the origin
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Legal maxim ‘ab initio’ means, from the beginning and from the origin. So, the option (c), i.e. both (a) & (b) is correct.

Question 84.
_______ is the primary source of Hindu law?
(a) Vedas
(b) Holy Quran
(c) Smriti
(d) Both (a) and (c)
Answer:
(d) In the case of Hindus, their personal law is to be found in:

  • The shruti which includes four vedas.
  • The ‘Smrities’ which are recollections handed down by the Rishi’s or ancient teachings.

Thus, option (d) is correct.

Question 85.
A is one which is merely the application of an already existing rules of law _______.
(a) Conditionally authoritative precedents
(b) Declaratory precedents
(c) Persuasive precedents
(d) Absolutely Authoritative Precedent.
Answer:
(b) A declaratory precedent is one which is merely the application of an already existing rule of law. It do not create or applies a new rule of law. It is as good a source of law as an original precedent.

Question 86.
“Fait accompli” means:
(a) Accomplished person
(b) Person accompanying in crime
(c) Vision to be accomplished
(d) Accomplished act.
Answer:
(d) “Fait Accompli” means an accomplished act or a thing accomplished and presumably irreversible. This legal maxim is an established principle or proposition.

Question 87.
‘Fait accompli’ means:
(a) Accomplished act
(b) Person accompanying in crime
(c) Accomplished person
(d) Vision to be accomplished
Answer:
(a) Fait accompli means “An Accomplished Act”.

Question 88.
“Law is essentially and exclusively a social fact”, this is the definition of which class of law?
(a) Historical
(b) Sociological
(c) Natural
(d) Positive
Answer:
(b) Duguit under the sociological definition of law defines it as “Essentially and exclusively as social fact”.

Question 89.
Customs are considered as of law _______.
(a) Rules
(b) Source
(c) Principle
(d) Decision
Answer:
(b) Sources means origin. It is divided into 2 parts i.e principal sources and secondary sources. Custom falls under the category of principal sources. It is most ancient of all sources. Smiritis and commentaries are based on customs.

Question 90.
‘De facto’ means:
(a) in fact
(b) a new
(c) old
(d) in law
Answer:
(a) There are numbers of legal maxims which refers to an established principle. Under this the maxim De facto means in fact.

Question 91.
“Law is a part of Dharma”, this is the concept of which school of law?
(a) Positive
(b) Sociological
(c) Natural
(d) Historical.
Answer:
(c) Ancient Hindu view was that law is the common of God and even the ruler is bound to obey it. Thus, law is a part of Dharma. Ancient Hindu view was a part of Natural view.

Question 92.
‘Status quo’ means:
(a) Update the status
(b) Maintains existing status
(c) Change the status
(d) Improve the status
Answer:
(b) ‘Status quo’ means ‘maintaining the existing status’.

Question 93.
What is the meaning of Maxim Ultra Vires?
(a) An accomplished act
(b) Within the powers
(c) Beyond, the power
(d) With the guilty mind.
Answer:
(c) ‘Maxim Ultra Vires’ is Latin phrase which means ‘Beyond the power’.

Question 94.
Which kind of precedent from the following creates and Applies a new rule of law?
(a) Declaratory
(b) Persuasive
(c) Absolutely authoritative
(d) Original
Answer:
(d) Original kind of precedent creates new rule and applies new rule.

Question 95.
According to value is meaning of legal Maxim:
(a) ad hoc
(b) ad idem
(c) ad valorem
(d) de facto
Answer:
(c) Ad valorem means According to value.

Question 96.
Source of Indian Mercantile law?
(a) English Mercantile Law
(b) Customs’and Usage
(c) Judiciary decision
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) Source of Indian Mercantile Law

  • English Mercantile Law
  • Judiciary Decision
  • Custom and usage
  • Acts enacted by Indian legislature; option (d) is correct.

Question 97.
The decision of Supreme Court is recorded as (abbreviation);
(a) AIR, SCC
(b) AIR only
(c) CLJ
(d) LR
Answer:
(a) Abbreviation used to Record;

  • AIR : All India Reports: Important decisions of Supreme Court
  • SCC : Supreme Court Cases: Record Indian Supreme Court.

Question 98.
What does the mean of Legal Maxim “Inter AM’ _______.
(a) Among your area
(b) A guilty mind
(c) Among other things
(d) Signifies a right to be heard
Answer:
(c) Inter Alia: Among other things

Question 99.
_______ means “adhere to the decision and do not unsettle things which are established”.
(a) Stare decisis
(b) Ratio Decidendi
(c) Obiter dicta
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Doctrine of stare dicisis refers to the policy of courts to abide by or adhere to principles established by decisions in earlier cases. Thus, stare decisis means adhere to the decision and do not unsettle things which are established.

Question 100.
The meaning of legal maxim ‘Mens rea’ is ________
(a) A pending suit
(b) Immediate profits
(c) During litigation
(d) A guilty mind
Answer:
(d) The meaning of legal maxim, ‘mens rea’ is ‘a guilty mind’.

Question 101.
Highest Court of India ________.
(a) Supreme Court
(b) High Court
(c) Civil Court
(d) District Court
Answer:
(a) Supreme Court is the highest Court of India. Its decisions are binding on all courts within the Territory of India and other Judicial tribunals of the country.

Question 102.
Bonafide means:
(a) A guilty mind
(b) In a good faith
(c) Beyond Once power
(d) Among other things
Answer:
(b) Bonafide means “in good faith”.

Question 103.
________ is the Court whose decisions are binding on all courts and other judicial tribunals
(a) High Court
(b) Supreme Court
(c) Indian Penal Court
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(a) Article 141 of the Constitution makes it clear that the law declared by Supreme Court shall be binding on all the courts with in the territory of India. The Supreme Court being the highest court binds all judicial tribunals and courts by its decisions.

Question 104.
Hindu and Mohammedan law is ________.
(a) Personal Law
(b) Customary Law
(c) Precedents
(d) Statutes
Answer:
(a) The courts are required to apply personal law of the parties where the point at issue is not covered by any statutory law or custom. Hindus are governed by their personal law in matters relating to inheritance, succession, marriage, etc. and Mohammedans are governed by their personal law in matters relating to wills, succession, legacies, etc.

Question 105.
‘Mens rea’ meaning?
(a) A Guilty Act
(b) A Guilty mind
(c) Important person
(d) Pending suit
Answer:
(b) The meaning of ‘mens rea’ is ‘Guilty mind’.

Question 106.
Law is a Part of “Dharma” ________.
(a) National school
(b) Realistic school
(c) Historical school
(d) All of Above.
Answer:
(a) According to Natural School of law, ancient Hindus view was that ‘law’ is the command of God and not of any political sovereign. Everybody including the ruler, is bound to obey it. Thus, law is a part of ‘Dharma’.

Question 107.
Find the odd one out:
(a) Manu
(b) Yojnavalkya
(c) Shruti
(d) Narada
Answer:
(c) According to the personal law, in case of Hindus, their personal law is found to be in:

  • The Shruti which includes four Vedas.
  • The ‘Smritis’ which are recollections handed down by Rishi’s or ancient teachings and percepts of God.
  • There are three main Smritis:

Codes of Manu, Yojnavalkya and Narada.

Question 108.
Who is the Supreme Commander of Indian Armed forces:
(a) Major
(b) President
(c) Lieutenant
(d) Both ‘A’ and ‘C’
Answer:
(b) The President of India is the Head of State and Supreme Commander of Indian Armed forces while the people elected Prime Minister act as a Chief Executive and is responsible for running the government.

CS Foundation Business Environment and Law Notes